Konica Minolta ineo 223 - Guides - Manuels Utilisateur

Konica Minolta ineo 223 - Guides - Manuels Utilisateur - Konica Minolta

Konica Minolta ineo 223 - Guides - Manuels Utilisateur - Konica Minolta Revenir à l'accueil Voir une liste d'imprimantes Vous souhaitez un imprimante ou un photocopieur Konica, contactez nous

Search Results: 1 - 24 of 24

Sub Category	Language	Title	Version	Release Date	Link
User`s Guide	English	ineo 223/283/363/423 User's Guides	1-1-0	2010-06-16
User`s Guide	German	ineo 223/283/363/423 User's Guides	1-1-1	2010-06-16
User`s Guide	Spanish	ineo 223/283/363/423 User's Guides	1-1-1	2010-06-16
User`s Guide	French	ineo 223/283/363/423 User's Guides	1-1-1	2010-06-16
User`s Guide	Italian	ineo 223/283/363/423 User's Guides	1-1-1	2010-06-16
User`s Guide	Dutch	ineo 223/283/363/423 User's Guides	1-1-1	2010-06-16
Quick Guide	English	ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides	1-1-0	2010-06-16
Quick Guide	Czech	ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides	1-1-1	2010-06-16
Quick Guide	Danish	ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides	1-1-1	2010-06-16
Quick Guide	German	ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides	1-1-1	2010-06-16
Quick Guide	Greek	ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides	1-1-1	2010-06-16
Quick Guide	Spanish	ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides Spanish	1-1-1	2010-06-16
Quick Guide	French	ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides	1-1-1	2010-06-16
Quick Guide	Hungarian	ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides	1-1-1	2010-06-16
Quick Guide	Italian	ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides	1-1-1	2010-06-16
Quick Guide	Dutch	ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides	1-1-1	2010-06-16
Quick Guide	Norwegian	ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides	1-1-1	2010-06-16
Quick Guide	Polish	ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides	1-1-1	2010-06-16
Quick Guide	Portuguese	ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides	1-1-1	2010-06-16
Quick Guide	Russian	ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides	1-1-1	2010-06-16
Quick Guide	Slovakian	ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides	1-1-1	2010-06-16
Quick Guide	Turkish	ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides	1-1-1	2010-06-16
Declaration of Conformity	English	Declaration of Conformity for ineo 223, 283, 363, 423	i3	2011-09-15
Declaration of Conformity	English	Declaration of Conformity for ineo 223, 283, 363, 423	i1n	2012-11-14

Autre documentation Konica Minolta :

Konica-Minolta-Di2510-Di3010-Di3510-Advanced-Information-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C550-bizhub-C451-bizhub-C203-bizhub-C253-bizhub-C353-bizhub-C650-Advanced-Function-Operations-i-Option-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C203-Advanced-Function-Operations-i-Option2-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-3730DN-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-PageScope-Account-Manager-Ver.2.1-User-s-Guide-EFIGS-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C554-C454-C364-C284-C224-User-Guides-part-1-2-French-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-162-210-copier-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-552-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-130f-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-PRO-PRESS-C6000-C7000_ug_Expert-Guide-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-2400W-User-Documentation-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-User-Manual-bizhub-C252-Phase3-complete-set-Documentation-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C200-Phase2-User-Manuals-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C200-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C10-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-163-211-User-Manual-Copier-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-1600f-User-Manual-Copier-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-131f-190f-User-Manual-Manuels

Konica-bizhub-131f-190f-Advanced-Information-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-190f-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C253-Advanced-Function-Operations-i-Option-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C253-Advanced-Function-Operations-i-Option2-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C250-Francais-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-1690MF-Manuel

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-362-282-222-Français-Manuel

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C552-Français-Manuel

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C250-Français-Manuel

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C220-Anglais-English-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-36-Anglais-English-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-363-Anglais-English-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-363-Anglais-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-363-Pays-Bas-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-283-Russe-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-222-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C552-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C203-C253-C353-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-601-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C452-bizhub-C552-bizhub-C652DS-bizhub-C652-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C554-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-652-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C224-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C652DS-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub_c652-c652ds-c552-c452-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Photocopieur-Multifonctions-Couleur-bizhub-C10P-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Photocopieur-Multifonctions-Couleur-bizhub-C10-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Photocopieur-Multifonctions-Couleur-7823-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C20-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C25-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C250-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-2490MF-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-1600W-Manuel

Konica-Minolta-7823-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5670EN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5650EN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-7823-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-7450II-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-8650DN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-7450-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-7300-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4750EN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-2490MF-Imprimante-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4750DN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4690MF-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4695MF-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4650EN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4650DN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-2500W-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-3730DN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5570-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5550-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5450-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5440DL-Couleur-Manuels

Box operations www.develop.eu ineo 223/283/363/423 Contents-1 Table of contents 1 Introduction 1.1 Welcome .......................................................................................................................................... 1-3 1.1.1 User's guides ..................................................................................................................................... 1-3 1.1.2 User's Guide ...................................................................................................................................... 1-4 1.2 Conventions used in this manual .................................................................................................. 1-5 1.2.1 Symbols used in this manual ............................................................................................................. 1-5 To use this machine safely................................................................................................................. 1-5 Procedural instruction........................................................................................................................ 1-5 Key symbols....................................................................................................................................... 1-6 1.2.2 Original and paper indications ........................................................................................................... 1-6 Original and paper sizes .................................................................................................................... 1-6 Original and paper indications ........................................................................................................... 1-6 1.3 To check the function you want to use......................................................................................... 1-7 Understanding Operation Flow.......................................................................................................... 1-7 Using Menu Tree................................................................................................................................ 1-7 2 User Box Function Overview 2.1 User Box functions ......................................................................................................................... 2-3 2.1.1 Available User Box functions ............................................................................................................. 2-4 Saving documents ............................................................................................................................. 2-4 Using documents............................................................................................................................... 2-5 Organizing documents....................................................................................................................... 2-7 2.1.2 Configuring settings for using the User Box functions ...................................................................... 2-8 Registering a User Box ...................................................................................................................... 2-8 When using this machine as a relay device ....................................................................................... 2-8 The User Box to which data is saved for memory reception............................................................. 2-8 2.2 Information ...................................................................................................................................... 2-9 2.2.1 User authentication............................................................................................................................ 2-9 MFP authentication............................................................................................................................ 2-9 External server authentication ........................................................................................................... 2-9 Account track authentication ........................................................................................................... 2-10 2.2.2 Restriction of box registration.......................................................................................................... 2-10 Public/Personal/Group User Boxes ................................................................................................. 2-10 Bulletin Board User Box................................................................................................................... 2-10 Polling TX User Box ......................................................................................................................... 2-10 Memory RX User Box ...................................................................................................................... 2-11 Relay User Box ................................................................................................................................ 2-11 Confidential RX User Box ................................................................................................................ 2-11 2.2.3 Restriction of file name .................................................................................................................... 2-11 2.3 Authentication and accessible User Boxes................................................................................ 2-12 2.3.1 When User Authentication or Account Track is not enabled........................................................... 2-12 2.3.2 When only user authentication is enabled ....................................................................................... 2-12 2.3.3 When only account track is enabled................................................................................................ 2-13 2.3.4 When user authentication and account track are enabled and synchronized................................. 2-13 2.3.5 When user authentication and account track are enabled but not synchronized ........................... 2-14 Contents-2 ineo 223/283/363/423 3 Control Panel/Liquid Crystal Display 3.1 Control panel ................................................................................................................................... 3-3 3.2 Touch panel ..................................................................................................................................... 3-5 3.2.1 Screen component............................................................................................................................. 3-5 Icons that appear in the touch panel ................................................................................................. 3-5 3.2.2 Display and operation of Left panel ................................................................................................... 3-6 Job List .............................................................................................................................................. 3-7 Job List - Delete................................................................................................................................. 3-7 Job List - Job Details ......................................................................................................................... 3-8 User Box information ....................................................................................................................... 3-14 Use/File - Detail................................................................................................................................ 3-14 Use/File - Check Job Settings ......................................................................................................... 3-14 Use/File - Check Job Settings - Destination Settings ..................................................................... 3-15 Use/File - Check Job Settings - Document Setting Contents ......................................................... 3-15 Use/File - Check Job Settings - Communication Settings .............................................................. 3-16 Use/File - Check Job Settings - Check E-Mail Settings.................................................................. 3-16 Preview ............................................................................................................................................ 3-16 Preview ............................................................................................................................................ 3-17 Preview (Print/Combine) .................................................................................................................. 3-17 Preview (Send/Bind TX) ................................................................................................................... 3-18 4 User Box Operation Flow 4.1 Saving documents in User Boxes.................................................................................................. 4-3 4.2 Printing documents from a User Box............................................................................................ 4-5 4.3 Sending documents from a User Box ........................................................................................... 4-8 4.4 Saving a document in an external memory ................................................................................ 4-11 4.5 Saving a Document from the External Memory into a User Box.............................................. 4-13 4.6 Printing a document from an external memory ......................................................................... 4-15 4.7 Filing documents in a User Box................................................................................................... 4-17 4.8 Printing a Document Saved in a Cellular Phone or PDA ........................................................... 4-19 4.9 Saving a Document Stored in a Cellular Phone or PDA to a User Box.................................... 4-21 4.10 Menu tree of the User Box mode ................................................................................................ 4-23 4.10.1 Save Document................................................................................................................................ 4-23 Public, Personal, or Group User Box............................................................................................... 4-23 System User Box ............................................................................................................................. 4-24 4.10.2 Use/File ............................................................................................................................................ 4-26 Print (for Public/Personal/Group User Boxes) ................................................................................. 4-26 Send (for Public/Personal/Group User Boxes) ................................................................................ 4-29 Filing Settings (for public/personal/group User Boxes) ................................................................... 4-32 Application (for Public/Personal/Group User Boxes)....................................................................... 4-33 System User Box ............................................................................................................................. 4-34 5 Accessing the User Box mode 5.1 Accessing the User Box mode ...................................................................................................... 5-3 5.2 User Box Operation Menu.............................................................................................................. 5-4 5.2.1 Save Document.................................................................................................................................. 5-4 5.2.2 Use/File .............................................................................................................................................. 5-4 6 Save Document 6.1 Save Document Overview.............................................................................................................. 6-3 6.1.1 Functions ........................................................................................................................................... 6-3 Public/Personal/Group User Boxes ................................................................................................... 6-3 Annotation User Box.......................................................................................................................... 6-3 External Memory................................................................................................................................ 6-3 6.1.2 Initial Window of Save Document...................................................................................................... 6-4 Public/Personal/Group User Boxes ................................................................................................... 6-4 System User Box ............................................................................................................................... 6-4 ineo 223/283/363/423 Contents-3 6.1.3 Save Document window.................................................................................................................... 6-5 6.2 Scan Settings .................................................................................................................................. 6-6 6.2.1 Basic - Original Type.......................................................................................................................... 6-6 6.2.2 Basic - Simplex/Duplex ..................................................................................................................... 6-7 6.2.3 Basic - Resolution.............................................................................................................................. 6-7 6.2.4 Basic - File Type ................................................................................................................................ 6-8 File Type............................................................................................................................................. 6-8 Encryption .......................................................................................................................................... 6-9 Encryption - Detail Settings ............................................................................................................... 6-9 Outline PDF...................................................................................................................................... 6-11 Scan Setting..................................................................................................................................... 6-11 6.2.5 Basic - Density................................................................................................................................. 6-12 6.2.6 Basic - Color .................................................................................................................................... 6-12 6.2.7 Scan Size ......................................................................................................................................... 6-13 Standard size ................................................................................................................................... 6-13 Custom Size..................................................................................................................................... 6-13 Photo Size........................................................................................................................................ 6-13 6.2.8 Image Adjustment............................................................................................................................ 6-14 Background Removal ...................................................................................................................... 6-14 Sharpness ........................................................................................................................................ 6-15 6.2.9 Application - Frame Erase ............................................................................................................... 6-15 6.2.10 Application - Book Copy.................................................................................................................. 6-16 Book copy method .......................................................................................................................... 6-16 Book Erase - Frame Erase ............................................................................................................... 6-16 Book Erase - Center Erase .............................................................................................................. 6-17 Binding Position ............................................................................................................................... 6-17 6.2.11 Separate Scan ................................................................................................................................. 6-18 6.3 Original Settings............................................................................................................................ 6-19 6.3.1 Special Original ................................................................................................................................ 6-19 6.3.2 Direction Settings - Original Direction ............................................................................................. 6-19 6.3.3 Direction Settings - Binding Position ............................................................................................... 6-20 6.3.4 Despeckle ........................................................................................................................................ 6-20 7 Use/File 7.1 Overview of the Use/File operations............................................................................................. 7-3 7.1.1 Functions of Use/File ......................................................................................................................... 7-3 Printing a document........................................................................................................................... 7-3 Sending.............................................................................................................................................. 7-3 Filing................................................................................................................................................... 7-3 Application settings ........................................................................................................................... 7-3 7.1.2 Detail of the Use Document screen ................................................................................................... 7-4 7.1.3 If a password is specified for a User Box .......................................................................................... 7-5 7.2 Print .................................................................................................................................................. 7-6 7.2.1 Overview of the Print tab ................................................................................................................... 7-6 Description of the Print tab ................................................................................................................ 7-6 Print.................................................................................................................................................... 7-7 Combine............................................................................................................................................. 7-7 7.2.2 Print.................................................................................................................................................... 7-8 7.2.3 Combine............................................................................................................................................. 7-8 Document Order ................................................................................................................................ 7-8 Configurable items to combine and print documents ....................................................................... 7-9 7.3 Print - Basic (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) .................................................................. 7-10 7.3.1 Copies.............................................................................................................................................. 7-10 7.3.2 1-Sided/2-Sided............................................................................................................................... 7-10 7.3.3 Finishing........................................................................................................................................... 7-11 Sort/Group ....................................................................................................................................... 7-11 Offset ............................................................................................................................................... 7-11 Staple ............................................................................................................................................... 7-11 Staple - Position Setting .................................................................................................................. 7-12 Contents-4 ineo 223/283/363/423 Punch............................................................................................................................................... 7-12 Punch - Position Setting .................................................................................................................. 7-12 Fold/Bind.......................................................................................................................................... 7-13 7.3.4 Combine........................................................................................................................................... 7-14 7.3.5 Zoom................................................................................................................................................ 7-14 7.3.6 Continuous Print .............................................................................................................................. 7-15 7.4 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) ........................................................ 7-16 7.4.1 Page Margin..................................................................................................................................... 7-16 Page Margin..................................................................................................................................... 7-16 Image Shift ....................................................................................................................................... 7-16 Image Shift - Change Back Shift ..................................................................................................... 7-17 7.4.2 Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert ............................................................................................................. 7-17 7.4.3 Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert - Cover Sheet...................................................................................... 7-18 7.4.4 Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert - Insert Sheet ...................................................................................... 7-19 7.4.5 Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert - Chapters........................................................................................... 7-20 7.4.6 Stamp/Composition......................................................................................................................... 7-21 7.4.7 Stamp/Composition - Date/Time..................................................................................................... 7-21 7.4.8 Stamp/Composition - Page Number ............................................................................................... 7-22 Settings ............................................................................................................................................ 7-22 Insert Sheet Setting ......................................................................................................................... 7-23 7.4.9 Stamp/Composition - Stamp........................................................................................................... 7-23 7.4.10 Stamp/Composition -Copy Security -Copy Protect ........................................................................ 7-24 Copy Protect Type........................................................................................................................... 7-25 Detail Settings.................................................................................................................................. 7-25 Position ............................................................................................................................................ 7-25 7.4.11 Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Guard........................................................................ 7-26 Copy Guard Type............................................................................................................................. 7-26 Detail Settings.................................................................................................................................. 7-27 7.4.12 Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Password Copy.................................................................. 7-27 Stamp Type...................................................................................................................................... 7-28 Detail Settings.................................................................................................................................. 7-28 7.4.13 Stamp/Composition - Stamp Repeat .............................................................................................. 7-28 Stamp Repeat Type ......................................................................................................................... 7-29 Detail Settings.................................................................................................................................. 7-30 Position ............................................................................................................................................ 7-30 7.4.14 Stamp/Composition - Header/Footer .............................................................................................. 7-30 Check/Change Temporarily ............................................................................................................. 7-31 7.4.15 Stamp/Composition - Registered Overlay....................................................................................... 7-32 Settings ............................................................................................................................................ 7-32 Overlay Setting................................................................................................................................. 7-33 7.5 Send ............................................................................................................................................... 7-34 7.5.1 Overview of the Transmission Settings............................................................................................ 7-34 Description of the Send tab ............................................................................................................. 7-34 Send................................................................................................................................................. 7-35 Bind TX............................................................................................................................................. 7-35 7.5.2 Transmission Settings...................................................................................................................... 7-36 7.5.3 Combine........................................................................................................................................... 7-37 Document Order .............................................................................................................................. 7-37 7.6 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box)............................................................................... 7-38 7.6.1 Address Book - Search.................................................................................................................... 7-38 Address Type................................................................................................................................... 7-38 Index ................................................................................................................................................ 7-39 Detail Search.................................................................................................................................... 7-39 Detail Search - Search options ........................................................................................................ 7-40 7.6.2 Direct Input ...................................................................................................................................... 7-40 7.6.3 Direct Input - Fax ............................................................................................................................. 7-41 Next Destination............................................................................................................................... 7-41 When the Confirm Address (TX) function is specified: .................................................................... 7-41 7.6.4 Direct Input - E-mail......................................................................................................................... 7-41 ineo 223/283/363/423 Contents-5 Next Destination............................................................................................................................... 7-41 7.6.5 Direct Input - Internet Fax................................................................................................................ 7-42 Next Destination............................................................................................................................... 7-42 Receiver RX Ability........................................................................................................................... 7-42 7.6.6 Direct Input - IP Address Fax........................................................................................................... 7-42 7.6.7 Direct Input - PC (SMB) ................................................................................................................... 7-43 Host Name....................................................................................................................................... 7-43 File Path ........................................................................................................................................... 7-43 User Name....................................................................................................................................... 7-43 Password ......................................................................................................................................... 7-43 Reference......................................................................................................................................... 7-43 Next Destination............................................................................................................................... 7-43 7.6.8 Direct Input - FTP............................................................................................................................. 7-44 Host Name....................................................................................................................................... 7-44 File Path ........................................................................................................................................... 7-44 User Name....................................................................................................................................... 7-44 Password ......................................................................................................................................... 7-44 Detail Settings.................................................................................................................................. 7-44 Next Destination............................................................................................................................... 7-44 7.6.9 Direct Input - WebDAV..................................................................................................................... 7-45 Host Name....................................................................................................................................... 7-45 File Path ........................................................................................................................................... 7-45 User Name....................................................................................................................................... 7-45 Password ......................................................................................................................................... 7-45 Detail Settings.................................................................................................................................. 7-45 Next Destination............................................................................................................................... 7-45 7.6.10 Job History....................................................................................................................................... 7-46 7.6.11 Address Search................................................................................................................................ 7-46 7.6.12 LDAP Search - Search..................................................................................................................... 7-47 7.6.13 LDAP Search - Advanced Search.................................................................................................... 7-47 Name................................................................................................................................................ 7-47 E-mail Addr. ..................................................................................................................................... 7-47 Fax Number ..................................................................................................................................... 7-47 Last Name........................................................................................................................................ 7-47 First Name........................................................................................................................................ 7-47 City................................................................................................................................................... 7-47 Company Name............................................................................................................................... 7-48 Department ...................................................................................................................................... 7-48 OR/AND/STARTS WITH/ENDS WITH.............................................................................................. 7-48 7.6.14 Overview of the Document Settings ................................................................................................ 7-48 7.6.15 Document Settings - Resolution...................................................................................................... 7-48 7.6.16 Document Settings - File Type ........................................................................................................ 7-49 File Type........................................................................................................................................... 7-49 Encryption ........................................................................................................................................ 7-50 Encryption - Detail Settings ............................................................................................................. 7-50 Stamp Composition ......................................................................................................................... 7-52 Outline PDF...................................................................................................................................... 7-52 Scan Setting..................................................................................................................................... 7-53 7.6.17 Document Settings - Color .............................................................................................................. 7-53 7.6.18 Overview of the Communication Settings ....................................................................................... 7-54 7.6.19 Communication Settings - Line Setting ........................................................................................... 7-54 Description of Line Settings............................................................................................................. 7-54 Overseas TX..................................................................................................................................... 7-54 ECM OFF ......................................................................................................................................... 7-55 V.34 OFF .......................................................................................................................................... 7-55 Check Dest. & Send......................................................................................................................... 7-55 Select Line ....................................................................................................................................... 7-55 7.6.20 Communication Settings - E-Mail Settings...................................................................................... 7-56 E-mail Settings................................................................................................................................. 7-56 Document Name.............................................................................................................................. 7-56 Subject ............................................................................................................................................. 7-56 From................................................................................................................................................. 7-57 Contents-6 ineo 223/283/363/423 Body................................................................................................................................................. 7-57 7.6.21 Communication Settings - URL Notification Setting ....................................................................... 7-58 URL Notification............................................................................................................................... 7-58 Detail Search.................................................................................................................................... 7-58 Direct Input ...................................................................................................................................... 7-58 7.6.22 Communication Settings - Communication Method Settings ......................................................... 7-59 Timer transmission (Timer TX).......................................................................................................... 7-59 Password transmission (Password TX)............................................................................................ 7-60 F-Code transmission (F-Code TX) ................................................................................................... 7-60 7.6.23 Communication Settings - E-mail Encryption.................................................................................. 7-61 7.6.24 Communication Settings - Digital Signature.................................................................................... 7-61 7.6.25 Communication Settings - Fax Header Settings ............................................................................. 7-61 7.6.26 Overview of the Application settings ............................................................................................... 7-62 7.6.27 Application - Stamp/Composition - Date/Time ............................................................................... 7-62 7.6.28 Application - Stamp/Composition - Page Number.......................................................................... 7-62 7.6.29 Application - Stamp/Composition - Stamp ..................................................................................... 7-62 7.6.30 Application - Stamp/Composition - Header/Footer......................................................................... 7-63 7.6.31 Application - Send & Print................................................................................................................ 7-63 7.7 Filing Settings (Public, Personal, or Group User Boxes) ........................................................... 7-64 7.7.1 Overview of the Filing Settings ........................................................................................................ 7-64 Description of the Filing Settings tab............................................................................................... 7-64 7.7.2 Deleting documents ......................................................................................................................... 7-65 7.7.3 Edit Name ........................................................................................................................................ 7-65 7.7.4 Moving documents .......................................................................................................................... 7-65 7.7.5 Copy................................................................................................................................................. 7-66 7.7.6 Save in external memory ................................................................................................................. 7-66 Document Settings .......................................................................................................................... 7-67 Document Settings - Resolution...................................................................................................... 7-67 Document Settings -File Type ......................................................................................................... 7-68 Document Settings - Color .............................................................................................................. 7-68 7.7.7 Document Details............................................................................................................................. 7-69 Displaying detailed information........................................................................................................ 7-69 Preview ............................................................................................................................................ 7-69 7.8 Application..................................................................................................................................... 7-70 7.8.1 Overview of the Application settings ............................................................................................... 7-70 Description of the Application tab ................................................................................................... 7-70 7.8.2 Edit Document ................................................................................................................................. 7-71 Edit Document - Delete Page .......................................................................................................... 7-71 Edit Document - Rotate Page.......................................................................................................... 7-72 Edit Document - Move Page............................................................................................................ 7-74 Preview/Set Range .......................................................................................................................... 7-76 Preview/Specify by Input ................................................................................................................. 7-77 7.8.3 Register Overlay............................................................................................................................... 7-78 Register Overlay - New.................................................................................................................... 7-79 Register Overlay - Overwrite............................................................................................................ 7-80 Detail Settings.................................................................................................................................. 7-81 7.9 Bulletin Board User Box (System User Box)............................................................................... 7-82 7.9.1 Overview of the Bulletin Board User Boxes..................................................................................... 7-82 7.9.2 Bulletin Board User Box screen....................................................................................................... 7-82 7.9.3 Printing a document in a Bulletin Board User Box .......................................................................... 7-82 7.9.4 Deleting a document in the Bulletin Board User Box ...................................................................... 7-82 7.10 Polling TX User Box (System User Box)...................................................................................... 7-83 7.10.1 Overview of the Polling Transmission User Boxes .......................................................................... 7-83 7.10.2 Printing a document in the Polling TX User Box.............................................................................. 7-83 7.10.3 Deleting a document in the Polling TX User Box............................................................................. 7-83 7.11 Secure Document User Box (System User Box) ........................................................................ 7-84 7.11.1 Overview of the Secure Document User Box .................................................................................. 7-84 7.11.2 Authentication procedure 1 ............................................................................................................. 7-84 ineo 223/283/363/423 Contents-7 7.11.3 Authentication procedure 2 ............................................................................................................. 7-84 7.11.4 Print - Printing .................................................................................................................................. 7-85 Copies.............................................................................................................................................. 7-85 Print.................................................................................................................................................. 7-85 Finishing........................................................................................................................................... 7-85 Combine........................................................................................................................................... 7-85 Zoom................................................................................................................................................ 7-85 Page Margin..................................................................................................................................... 7-85 Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert ............................................................................................................. 7-85 Stamp/Composition......................................................................................................................... 7-85 7.11.5 Filing Settings .................................................................................................................................. 7-86 7.12 Memory RX User Box (System User Box)................................................................................... 7-87 7.12.1 Overview of the Memory RX User Box ............................................................................................ 7-87 7.12.2 Print.................................................................................................................................................. 7-87 7.12.3 Filing Settings .................................................................................................................................. 7-88 7.13 Annotation User Box (System User Box) .................................................................................... 7-89 7.13.1 Overview of the Annotation User Box.............................................................................................. 7-89 7.13.2 Print - Basic ..................................................................................................................................... 7-89 7.13.3 Print - Page Margin .......................................................................................................................... 7-89 7.13.4 Print - Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert - Cover Sheet........................................................................... 7-90 7.13.5 Print - Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert - Insert Sheet ........................................................................... 7-90 7.13.6 Print - Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert - Chapters................................................................................ 7-90 7.13.7 Print - Stamp/Composition - Date/Time .......................................................................................... 7-90 7.13.8 Print - Stamp/Composition - Page Number .................................................................................... 7-90 7.13.9 Print - Stamp/Composition - Stamp................................................................................................ 7-90 7.13.10 Printing Preferences - Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Protect .................................. 7-90 7.13.11 Printing Preferences - Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Guard.................................... 7-90 7.13.12 Print - Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Password Copy....................................................... 7-90 7.13.13 Print - Stamp/Composition - Stamp Repeat ................................................................................... 7-90 7.13.14 Print - Stamp/Composition - Registered Overlay ............................................................................ 7-90 7.13.15 Description of the Send tab ............................................................................................................. 7-90 7.13.16 Send - Direct Input - E-mail ............................................................................................................. 7-90 7.13.17 Send - Direct Input - PC (SMB)........................................................................................................ 7-90 7.13.18 Send - Direct Input - FTP................................................................................................................. 7-91 7.13.19 Send - Direct Input - WebDAV......................................................................................................... 7-91 7.13.20 Send - Job History........................................................................................................................... 7-91 7.13.21 Send - LDAP Search - Search ......................................................................................................... 7-91 7.13.22 Send - LDAP Search - Advanced Search........................................................................................ 7-91 7.13.23 Send - Document Settings - Resolution .......................................................................................... 7-91 7.13.24 Send - Document Settings - File Type............................................................................................. 7-91 7.13.25 Send - Document Settings - Color .................................................................................................. 7-91 7.13.26 Send - Communication Settings - E-mail Settings .......................................................................... 7-91 7.13.27 Send - Communication Settings - URL Notification Setting............................................................ 7-91 7.13.28 Send - Communication Settings - E-mail Encryption...................................................................... 7-91 7.13.29 Send - Communication Settings - Digital Signature........................................................................ 7-91 7.13.30 Send - Application - Stamp/Composition - Date/Time.................................................................... 7-91 7.13.31 Send - Application - Stamp/Composition - Page Number .............................................................. 7-91 7.13.32 Send - Application - Stamp/Composition - Stamp.......................................................................... 7-92 7.13.33 Send - Application - Send & Print.................................................................................................... 7-92 7.13.34 Send - Application - Stamp Element ............................................................................................... 7-92 Secondary Field ............................................................................................................................... 7-92 Date/Time......................................................................................................................................... 7-92 Density ............................................................................................................................................. 7-93 Number Type ................................................................................................................................... 7-93 Print Position.................................................................................................................................... 7-93 7.13.35 Filing Settings .................................................................................................................................. 7-94 7.13.36 Application - Register Overlay ......................................................................................................... 7-94 Contents-8 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.14 Fax Retransmit User Box (System User Box)............................................................................. 7-95 7.14.1 Overview of the Fax Retransmit User Box....................................................................................... 7-95 7.14.2 Print - Proof Print ............................................................................................................................. 7-95 7.14.3 Send - Fax........................................................................................................................................ 7-95 7.14.4 Filing Settings - Delete..................................................................................................................... 7-96 7.15 Password Encrypted PDF User Box (System User Box) ........................................................... 7-97 7.15.1 Overview of the Password Encrypted PDF User Box...................................................................... 7-97 7.15.2 Print/Save −Print/Save..................................................................................................................... 7-97 7.15.3 Filing Settings - Delete..................................................................................................................... 7-97 7.16 ID & Print User Box (System User Box)....................................................................................... 7-98 7.16.1 Overview of the ID & Print User Box................................................................................................ 7-98 Viewing documents.......................................................................................................................... 7-98 7.16.2 Print - Print....................................................................................................................................... 7-99 7.16.3 Filing Settings - Delete..................................................................................................................... 7-99 7.17 External Memory (System User Box) ........................................................................................ 7-100 7.17.1 External memory device ................................................................................................................ 7-100 Supported external memory devices............................................................................................. 7-100 Connecting the external memory device ....................................................................................... 7-100 7.17.2 External memory screen ................................................................................................................ 7-101 Entering a file path ......................................................................................................................... 7-101 Selecting a file................................................................................................................................ 7-101 Printing encrypted PDF data.......................................................................................................... 7-101 Moving to the parent folder............................................................................................................ 7-101 Opening a folder ............................................................................................................................ 7-102 Print................................................................................................................................................ 7-102 Document Details........................................................................................................................... 7-102 7.17.3 Print - Basic ................................................................................................................................... 7-102 Copies............................................................................................................................................ 7-102 Print................................................................................................................................................ 7-102 Binding Position ............................................................................................................................. 7-102 Finishing......................................................................................................................................... 7-103 Paper.............................................................................................................................................. 7-103 7.17.4 Print- Application ........................................................................................................................... 7-103 Stamp/Composition - Date/Time................................................................................................... 7-103 Stamp/Composition - Page Number ............................................................................................. 7-103 Stamp/Composition - Stamp......................................................................................................... 7-103 Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Protect .................................................................... 7-103 Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Guard...................................................................... 7-103 Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Password Copy................................................................ 7-103 Stamp/Composition - Stamp Repeat ............................................................................................ 7-103 7.17.5 Filing Settings−Save in User Box................................................................................................... 7-104 7.18 Mobile/PDA (System User Box) ................................................................................................. 7-105 7.18.1 Operating environment .................................................................................................................. 7-105 7.18.2 Mobile/PDA - Print ......................................................................................................................... 7-106 Entering the PIN code.................................................................................................................... 7-106 Check printing preferences............................................................................................................ 7-106 7.18.3 Mobile/PDA - Save......................................................................................................................... 7-107 Entering the PIN code.................................................................................................................... 7-107 7.19 Confidential RX User Box (System User Box) .......................................................................... 7-108 7.19.1 Overview of the Confidential RX User Box .................................................................................... 7-108 7.19.2 Print................................................................................................................................................ 7-108 7.19.3 Filing Settings ................................................................................................................................ 7-109 8 User Box Settings 8.1 Menu tree of User Box Settings..................................................................................................... 8-2 8.1.1 User mode ......................................................................................................................................... 8-2 8.1.2 Administrator Settings ....................................................................................................................... 8-3 8.2 User mode settings......................................................................................................................... 8-5 ineo 223/283/363/423 Contents-9 8.2.1 Creating a User Box........................................................................................................................... 8-5 Public, Personal, or Group User Box................................................................................................. 8-5 Delete Empty User Box(es) (Administrator Settings) ......................................................................... 8-6 Bulletin Board User Box..................................................................................................................... 8-6 Relay User Box .................................................................................................................................. 8-8 Confidential RX User Box .................................................................................................................. 8-8 8.2.2 Custom Display Settings - User Box Setting................................................................................... 8-10 Default Tab....................................................................................................................................... 8-10 Shortcut key..................................................................................................................................... 8-10 8.2.3 Cellular Phone/PDA Setting - Link File Error Notification ................................................................ 8-11 8.2.4 Cellular Phone/PDA Setting - Proxy Server Use.............................................................................. 8-11 8.2.5 Cellular Phone/PDA Setting - Print Settings .................................................................................... 8-12 Basic - Print ..................................................................................................................................... 8-12 Basic - Paper ................................................................................................................................... 8-12 Basic - Finishing............................................................................................................................... 8-12 Application - Margin......................................................................................................................... 8-13 Application - Stamp/Composition - Date/Time ............................................................................... 8-13 Application - Stamp/Composition - Page Number.......................................................................... 8-13 Application - Stamp/Composition - Stamp ..................................................................................... 8-13 Application - Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Protect................................................. 8-13 Application - Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Guard .................................................. 8-13 Application - Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Password Copy ............................................ 8-13 Application - Stamp/Composition - Stamp Repeat ......................................................................... 8-13 8.3 Administrator Settings.................................................................................................................. 8-14 8.3.1 User Box permissions...................................................................................................................... 8-14 User types........................................................................................................................................ 8-14 Public User Box and Personal or Group User Box.......................................................................... 8-14 8.3.2 Creating a User Box......................................................................................................................... 8-15 8.3.3 Creating Public, Personal, or Group User Box ................................................................................ 8-15 8.3.4 Creating Bulletin Board User Box.................................................................................................... 8-15 8.3.5 Creating Relay User Box.................................................................................................................. 8-15 8.3.6 Creating Annotation User Box ......................................................................................................... 8-16 8.3.7 Creating Confidential RX User Box.................................................................................................. 8-17 8.3.8 Maximum Number of User Boxes.................................................................................................... 8-18 Public, Personal, or Group User Box............................................................................................... 8-18 Max. No. Of Use Boxes ................................................................................................................... 8-18 Maximum Number of User Boxes.................................................................................................... 8-18 8.3.9 User Box Setting.............................................................................................................................. 8-19 Delete Unused User Box.................................................................................................................. 8-19 Delete Secure Print Documents....................................................................................................... 8-19 Auto Delete Secure Document ........................................................................................................ 8-20 Encrypted PDF Delete Time............................................................................................................. 8-20 ID & Print Delete Time...................................................................................................................... 8-21 Document Hold Setting.................................................................................................................... 8-21 External Memory Function Settings................................................................................................. 8-22 Allow/Restrict User Box................................................................................................................... 8-22 ID & Print Delete after Print Setting.................................................................................................. 8-23 Document Delete Time Setting ........................................................................................................ 8-23 ID & Print Settings............................................................................................................................ 8-24 8.3.10 Cellular Phone/PDA Setting ............................................................................................................. 8-24 8.3.11 User Box Administrator Setting ....................................................................................................... 8-25 Setting User Box administrator........................................................................................................ 8-25 Logging in to this machine as the User Box administrator.............................................................. 8-25 Administrator's available functions .................................................................................................. 8-25 8.3.12 Security Details ................................................................................................................................ 8-26 Security Print Only ........................................................................................................................... 8-26 8.3.13 HDD Settings/SSD Settings............................................................................................................. 8-26 Check HDD Capacity ....................................................................................................................... 8-26 Check SSD Capacity ....................................................................................................................... 8-27 Overwrite HDD Data......................................................................................................................... 8-27 Overwrite All Data ............................................................................................................................ 8-28 HDD Lock Password........................................................................................................................ 8-29 Contents-10 ineo 223/283/363/423 Format HDD ..................................................................................................................................... 8-30 Format SSD...................................................................................................................................... 8-31 HDD Encryption Setting................................................................................................................... 8-31 8.3.14 Stamp Settings ................................................................................................................................ 8-32 Apply Stamps................................................................................................................................... 8-32 9 Web Connection 9.1 Using Web Connection................................................................................................................... 9-3 9.1.1 Operating environment ...................................................................................................................... 9-3 9.1.2 Accessing Web Connection............................................................................................................... 9-3 9.1.3 Web browser cache ........................................................................................................................... 9-4 For Internet Explorer .......................................................................................................................... 9-4 For Netscape Navigator ..................................................................................................................... 9-4 For Mozilla Firefox.............................................................................................................................. 9-4 9.1.4 Online help function ........................................................................................................................... 9-4 9.2 Login and logout ............................................................................................................................. 9-5 9.2.1 Login and logout flows....................................................................................................................... 9-5 When user authentication or account track is not enabled ............................................................... 9-5 When User Authentication or Account Track is enabled ................................................................... 9-7 9.2.2 Logout................................................................................................................................................ 9-8 9.2.3 Login .................................................................................................................................................. 9-9 Login options ..................................................................................................................................... 9-9 Logging in as a public user .............................................................................................................. 9-10 Logging in as a registered user........................................................................................................ 9-11 Logging in to administrator mode.................................................................................................... 9-12 Display mode in administrator mode ............................................................................................... 9-13 Logging in as a User Box administrator........................................................................................... 9-14 9.3 Page Configuration....................................................................................................................... 9-15 9.4 User Mode Overview .................................................................................................................... 9-17 9.4.1 Information ....................................................................................................................................... 9-17 9.4.2 Job ................................................................................................................................................... 9-18 9.4.3 User Boxes....................................................................................................................................... 9-18 9.4.4 Direct Print ....................................................................................................................................... 9-19 9.4.5 Store Address .................................................................................................................................. 9-20 9.4.6 Customize ........................................................................................................................................ 9-21 9.5 Handling a document in a User Box............................................................................................ 9-22 9.5.1 Listing the documents saved in a User Box .................................................................................... 9-22 Open User Box ................................................................................................................................ 9-22 File List............................................................................................................................................. 9-23 9.5.2 Printing a document......................................................................................................................... 9-24 9.5.3 Sending a document to another machine........................................................................................ 9-27 9.5.4 Downloading document data to your computer .............................................................................. 9-29 9.5.5 Moving or copying a document to another User Box...................................................................... 9-32 9.5.6 Deleting a document........................................................................................................................ 9-33 9.6 Administrator Mode Overview ..................................................................................................... 9-35 9.6.1 Maintenance .................................................................................................................................... 9-35 9.6.2 System Settings............................................................................................................................... 9-36 9.6.3 Security ............................................................................................................................................ 9-37 9.6.4 User Authentication/Account Track................................................................................................. 9-38 9.6.5 Network............................................................................................................................................ 9-39 9.6.6 User Boxes....................................................................................................................................... 9-40 9.6.7 Printer Settings ................................................................................................................................ 9-41 9.6.8 Store Address .................................................................................................................................. 9-42 9.6.9 Fax Settings ..................................................................................................................................... 9-43 9.6.10 Setting for each purpose ................................................................................................................. 9-44 ineo 223/283/363/423 Contents-11 10 Appendix 10.1 Error message list ......................................................................................................................... 10-3 10.2 Glossary ......................................................................................................................................... 10-4 11 Index 11.1 Index by item ................................................................................................................................. 11-3 11.2 Index by button.............................................................................................................................. 11-6 Contents-12 ineo 223/283/363/423 1 Introduction ineo 223/283/363/423 1-3 1.1 Welcome 1 1 Introduction 1.1 Welcome Thank you for purchasing this machine. This User's Guide describes the functions, operating instructions, precautions for correct operation, and simple troubleshooting guidelines of this machine. In order to obtain maximum performance from this product and use it effectively, please read this User's Guide as necessary. 1.1.1 User's guides User's guide Overview [Quick Guide Copy/Print/Fax/Scan/Box Operations] This manual describes operating procedures and the functions that are most frequently used in order to enable you to begin using this machine immediately. This manual also contains notes and precautions that should be followed to ensure safe usage of this machine and describes details on trademarks and copyrights. Please be sure to read this manual before using this machine. [User's Guide Copy Operations] This manual describes details on copy mode operations and the settings of this machine. • Specifications of originals and copy paper • Copy function • Maintaining this machine • Troubleshooting [User's Guide Enlarge Display Operations] This manual describes details on operating procedures of the enlarge display mode. • Copy function • Scanning function • G3 fax function • Network fax function [User's Guide Print Operations] This manual describes details on printer functions. • Printer function • Setting the printer driver [User's Guide Box Operations] This manual describes details on User Box functions. • Saving data in user boxes • Retrieving data from user boxes • Transferring and printing data from user boxes [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations] This manual describes details on transmitting scanned data. • E-mail TX, FTP TX, SMB TX, Save in User Box, WebDAV TX, Web Services • G3 fax • IP Address Fax, Internet Fax [User's Guide Fax Driver Operations] This manual describes details on the fax driver function that transmits faxes directly from a computer. • PC-FAX [User's Guide Network Administrator] This manual describes details on setting methods for each function using the network connection. • Network settings • Settings using Web Connection 1 Welcome 1-4 ineo 223/283/363/423 1.1 1.1.2 User's Guide This User's Guide is intended for users ranging from those using this machine for the first time to administrators. It describes basic operations, functions that enable more convenient operations, simple troubleshooting operations, and various setting methods of this machine. Note that basic technical knowledge about the product is required to enable users to perform maintenance work or troubleshooting operations. Limit your troubleshooting operations to the areas explained in this manual. Should you experience any problems, please contact our service representative. [User's Guide Advanced Function Operations] This manual describes details on functions that become available by registering the optional license kit and by connecting to an application. • Web browser function • Image panel • PDF Processing Function • Searchable PDF • My panel and My address functions User's guide Overview ineo 223/283/363/423 1-5 1.2 Conventions used in this manual 1 1.2 Conventions used in this manual 1.2.1 Symbols used in this manual Symbols are used in this manual to express various types of information. The following describes each symbol related to correct and safe usage of this machine. To use this machine safely 7 WARNING - This symbol indicates that a failure to heed the instructions may lead to death or serious injury. 7 CAUTION - This symbol indicates that negligence of the instructions may lead to mishandling that may cause injury or property damage. NOTICE This symbol indicates a risk that may result in damage to this machine or documents. Follow the instructions to avoid property damage. Procedural instruction 0 This check mark indicates an option that is required in order to use conditions or functions that are prerequisite for a procedure. 1 This format number "1" represents the first step. 2 This format number represents the order of serial steps. % This symbol indicates a supplementary explanation of a procedural instruction. % This symbol indicates transition of the control panel to access a desired menu item. This symbol indicates a desired page. The operation procedures are described using illustrations. 1 Conventions used in this manual 1-6 ineo 223/283/363/423 1.2 dReference This symbol indicates a reference. View the reference as required. Key symbols [ ] Key names on the touch panel or computer screen, or a name of user's guide are indicated by these brackets. Bold text This presents a key name, part name, product name or option name on the control panel. 1.2.2 Original and paper indications Original and paper sizes The following explains the indication for originals and paper described in this manual. When indicating the original or paper size, the Y side represents the width and the X side the length. Original and paper indications w indicates the paper size with the length (X) being longer than the width (Y). v indicates the paper size with the length (X) being shorter than the width (Y). ineo 223/283/363/423 1-7 1.3 To check the function you want to use 1 1.3 To check the function you want to use This manual contains details on setting up the functions. Understanding Operation Flow This manual provides a chapter "User Box Operation Flow" that describes how to use the major functions of this machine. The flow charts in the chapter will help you understand the general flow of operations such as saving and printing data. Clicking the link in the flow chart takes you to the relevant function setting pages where you can see more detail. Using Menu Tree Various functions can be configured for this machine. For information on what button to select to find specific setting items and the list of items that can be configured, refer to the Menu tree pages. In the menu tree pages, there is a hierarchy of functions under each button. Clicking the link in the menu tree takes you to the relevant function setting pages where you can see more details. 1 To check the function you want to use 1-8 ineo 223/283/363/423 1.3 2 User Box Function Overview ineo 223/283/363/423 2-3 2.1 User Box functions 2 2 User Box Function Overview 2.1 User Box functions The User Box functions allow you to save document data to the machine's internal hard disk and later print them. Documents that can be saved are data scanned for copying and saved scan data. To save data to a box, create the box, and then save the data to the specified box. The saved data can be printed, sent by Email, transferred via FTP, or sent to a computer as may be necessary. Using the User Box functions enables you to save the effort involved in scanning originals repeatedly or saving data to each computer. Reference - A Hard Disk must be installed in order to use the functions described in this manual. - Some User Boxes are available even when no Hard Disk is installed. - If no Hard Disk is installed, data is saved in the internal memory (SSD: Solid State Drive) installed in this machine. - A Hard Disk is installed as a standard feature in ineo 423. A hard disk is installed as a standard feature or offered as an option for ineo 363 depending on the area they are sold in. A hard disk can be installed as an option in ineo 223/283. - The following shows whether or not each function is available when no Hard Disk is installed. For details, refer to the explanation of each function. Functions Available o / Unavailable e with no HDD installed Note User Box - Public/Personal/Group User Boxes e Bulletin Board User Box o Polling TX User Box o Secure Document User Box e Memory RX User Box o Annotation User Box e Fax Retransmit User Box o Password Encrypted PDF User Box e ID & Print User Box e External Memory o Unavailable for some operations Cellular Phone/PDA o Unavailable for some operations Confidential RX User Box o 2 User Box functions 2-4 ineo 223/283/363/423 2.1 2.1.1 Available User Box functions Saving documents Data can be saved to the following boxes. *1 For details on how to send documents for print job from a computer and save them in the User Box, refer to the [User's Guide Print Operations]. 1 Mobile/PDA 2 Fax 3 Computer 4 FTP server, etc. 5 Original 6 External Memory User Box Description Reference Public/Personal/Group User Boxes (*1) Save a document copied or scanned using this machine. You can also save a document that was print-instructed through a computer connected to a network. Some User Authentication or Account Track settings restrict users who can use User Boxes such as the Personal or Group User Box. p. 6-3 Annotation User Box Save document data to be printed and sent with an image of the date/time or an annotation number to documents saved in Scan mode. p. 6-3 External Memory This item appears when an external memory device is installed. • You can save all scanned documents directly in an external memory connected to this machine. • You can save a document stored in a User Box in an external memory. • You can save a file stored in an external memory in a User Box. p. 6-3 Mobile/PDA Save a document stored in a cellular phone or PDA in the Public, Personal, or Group User Box. p. 7-107 Confidential RX User Box Save a document that was sent from the destination machine by confidential transmission. p. 7-108 2 4 5 6 1 3 ineo 223/283/363/423 2-5 2.1 User Box functions 2 Using documents Use the document data saved in boxes. Depending on the box, you can use the data as follows: *1 For details on how to send documents for print job from a computer and save them in the User Box, refer to the [User's Guide Print Operations]. *2 For details on polling transmission, polling reception, memory reception, and file retransmission, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. *3 For details on how to save documents to the Secure Document User Box, refer to the [User's Guide Print Operations]. *4 For print instruction of an encrypted PDF, refer to the Direct Print manual or the direct print in the Web Connection online help. Reference - The Public/Personal/Group, Secure Document, Annotation, Password Encrypted PDF, and ID & Print User Boxes are available only when a Hard Disk is installed. - The Confidential RX User Box is not available when a Hard Disk is installed. - If a Hard Disk is installed, Confidential RX can be enabled when the Confidential RX function is added to the Public/Personal/Group User Box. For details, refer to page 8-5. - The "Saving a Document from the External Memory into a User Box" function for external memory is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. - [Save in User Box] for Cellular Phone/PDA is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. User Box Description Reference Public/Personal/Group User Boxes (*1) Print and send saved documents. You can also select multiple documents for printing/transmission. Some User Authentication or Account Track settings restrict users who can use User Boxes such as the Personal or Group User Box. p. 7-10 Bulletin Board User Box This item appears when the optional Fax Kit is installed. You can print a document saved in the Bulletin Board User Box. p. 7-82 Polling TX User Box (*2) This item appears when the optional Fax Kit is installed. You can print documents sent via polling. p. 7-83 Secure Document User Box (*3) Print saved documents. Enter an ID and password for printing. p. 7-84 Memory RX User Box (*2) This item appears when the optional Fax Kit is installed. You can confirm and print the fax document received though the memory RX setting. p. 7-87 Annotation User Box Print or transmit document data saved in Scan mode with an image of the date/time or an annotation number. p. 7-89 Fax Retransmit User Box (*2) This item appears when the optional Fax Kit is installed. With this User Box, you can resend a saved document or print it for confirmation. p. 7-95 Password Encrypted PDF User Box (*4) Print a saved password encrypted PDF document. Encrypted PDF files saved in an external memory and sent for print jobs are also saved in this box. The predefined password is required for printing. p. 7-97 ID & Print User Box This item appears when user authentication settings are configured. You can log in as a user and print a document sent for print jobs from the printer driver. p. 7-98 External Memory This item appears when an external memory device is installed. You can print documents saved in an external memory connected to this machine. p. 7-100 Cellular Phone or PDA Print a document saved in a cellular phone or PDA. You can save a document stored in a cellular phone or PDA in the Public, Personal, or Group User Box. p. 7-106 Confidential RX User Box Print a document that was received by confidential reception. p. 7-108 2 User Box functions 2-6 ineo 223/283/363/423 2.1 1 Fax 2 Computer 3 E-mail, etc. 4 FTP server, etc. 5 Cellular phone or PDA 6 External memory 7 Printout 4 6 7 1 2 3 5 ineo 223/283/363/423 2-7 2.1 User Box functions 2 Organizing documents Organize documents by renaming the saved document, changing the boxes where they are saved, or duplicating or deleting them. * The function for saving a document in a User Box is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. 1 Mobile/PDA 2 External Memory User Box Delete Edit Name Move Copy Save in User Box Save in USB memory (when external memory is connected) Document Details Public/Personal/Group User Boxes o o o o − o o Bulletin Board User Box o − − − − − − Polling TX User Box o − − − − − − Secure Document User Box o o − − − − o Memory RX User Box o o − − − − o Annotation User Box o o − − − − o Fax Retransmit User Box o − − − − − o Password Encrypted PDF User Box o − − − − − o ID & Print User Box o − − − − − o External Memory, Mobile/ PDA − − − − o * − o Confidential RX User Box o o − − − − o 2 1 2 User Box functions 2-8 ineo 223/283/363/423 2.1 2.1.2 Configuring settings for using the User Box functions Before using the User Box functions, the following settings should be configured. Registering a User Box Save the User Box where documents will be registered. Configure boxes by using the machine's touch panel or by using Web Connection from a Web browser on a computer on the network. Reference - The following User Boxes are configurable. – Public/Personal/Group User Boxes(p. 8-5) – Bulletin Board User Box (when using the bulletin board function) (p. 8-6) – Annotation User Box (p. 8-16) – Confidential RX User Box (p. 8-17) When using this machine as a relay device If the optional Fax Kit is installed, and you want to use this machine for relaying fax transmission, create a Relay User Box for saving documents temporarily before they are relayed. (p. 8-8) To create a Relay User Box, specify in advance the group containing fax numbers of relay destinations. The User Box to which data is saved for memory reception If the optional Fax Kit is installed, and you do not want to print while receiving data, configure the memory reception settings. dReference For details on how to configure memory reception settings, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. ineo 223/283/363/423 2-9 2.2 Information 2 2.2 Information This section describes information you should know before using the User Box functions. 2.2.1 User authentication To use this machine, some devices have been preset so that you must enter an account or user name and a password. For details on the account or user name available for using the devices, contact your administrator. MFP authentication Enter the user name and password, and then press either [Login] in the touch panel or the Access key on the control panel. External server authentication Enter the user name and password, and then press either [Login] in the touch panel or the Access key on the control panel. 2 Information 2-10 ineo 223/283/363/423 2.2 Account track authentication Enter the account name and password, and then press either [Login] in the touch panel or the Access key on the control panel. Reference - When user authentication is enabled, the only the boxes accessible by the logged in users are displayed. For details, refer to page 2-12. - If a user enters an incorrect password a specified number of times when Mode 2 is selected in Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error in Administrator Settings, the user is locked, and cannot use the control panel. For details on how to disable Prohibit Functions When Authentication Error, contact your administrator. - If Authentication Manager is used for authentication, ask your server administrator about the login procedure. - When you use the optional Authentication Unit for authentication, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations] for the login procedure. 2.2.2 Restriction of box registration Public/Personal/Group User Boxes The User Box functions provide Public User Boxes, which can be used by more than one person, Personal User Boxes, which can be used only by a single person, and Group User Boxes, which can be used by the users who are logged in as members of the User Box owner account. The following lists the limitations on those User Boxes: - Before saving documents, create a User Box to save data. - Up to 1,000 User Boxes can be created. - Up to 200 documents can be saved in a single User Box. - A total of 10,000 pages can be saved in all User Boxes. - A total of 3,000 documents can be saved in all User Boxes. - This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. Bulletin Board User Box Reference - Up to 10 Bulletin Board User Boxes can be created. - Only one document can be saved in a single Bulletin Board User Box. Polling TX User Box Only one document can be saved in a single User Box. ineo 223/283/363/423 2-11 2.2 Information 2 Memory RX User Box Up to 500 documents can be saved in the Memory RX User Box. - If no Hard Disk is installed, the maximum number of documents may not be able to be saved depending on the amount of data currently stored. Relay User Box Reference - Up to 5 Relay User Boxes can be created. - Only one document can be saved in a single Relay User Box. Confidential RX User Box The following lists the limitations on this User Box: - Up to 20 User Boxes can be created. - Up to 180 documents can be saved in a single User Box. - A total of 180 pages can be saved in all User Boxes. - A total of 180 documents can be saved in all User Boxes. - The maximum number of documents may not be able to be saved depending on the amount of data currently stored. - This function is not available when a Hard Disk is installed. 2.2.3 Restriction of file name Name document data to be saved. Reference - The names can contain up to 30 characters. - You can edit the names after the documents have been saved. - Press this button to specify the name when saving data. Otherwise, a predefined name is applied to the data. If the data is saved without a name specified, names are created by combining the following elements. The following describes elements of an example document name "SMFP11102315230". Reference - The Public/Personal/Group User Box functions are available only when a Hard Disk is installed. Item Description S This character indicates the mode when the document is saved. "S" appears for documents saved in the Fax/Scan mode screen or the User Box screen. C: Copy S: Fax/Scan, User Box P: Print R: Received fax MFP This represents the name of the device that scanned the data. This item displays the name that is entered in [Device Name] under [Input Machine Address] of [Administrator/Machine Setting] in Administrator Settings. When changing the displayed name, specify it with up to 10 characters. 11102315230 This indicates the year (last two digits), month, day, hour and minute when the data was scanned. If a series of documents are scanned at the same time (minute), serial numbers are attached to the last digits. _0001 This indicates the page when multi-page data is scanned. This numeral does not appear in the Document Name column, but is added automatically as part of the name when the file is transmitted. Consider this part for FTP or other transmission when a server has restriction regarding file names. .TIF This is the extension for the specified data format. The characters do not appear in the Document Name column, but is added automatically as part of the name when the file is transmitted. 2 Authentication and accessible User Boxes 2-12 ineo 223/283/363/423 2.3 2.3 Authentication and accessible User Boxes When you apply user authentication and account track settings, the accessible User Boxes and the permissions change as shown in the following. Configure the user authentication and account track settings according to the desired functions. 2.3.1 When User Authentication or Account Track is not enabled Reference - Users can access all Public User Boxes. - User Boxes created by users and administrators are Public User Boxes. - Users cannot create any User Boxes when the Allow/Restrict User Box is set to Restrict in Administrator Settings. 2.3.2 When only user authentication is enabled Reference - Users can access all Public User Boxes and only Personal User Boxes that the user has created. - The Personal User Boxes are inaccessible by other users. - Press this button to set up a User Box administrator. - A User Box administrator can access all Public User Boxes and all Personal User Boxes. - If you delete authentication data by canceling user authentication settings or changing authentication methods, all Personal User Boxes become Public User Boxes. Create and access Public User Box User 1 User 2 Access allowed Personal User Box of user 2 Personal User Box of user 1 Public User Box User Box administrator ineo 223/283/363/423 2-13 2.3 Authentication and accessible User Boxes 2 2.3.3 When only account track is enabled Reference - Users can access all Public User Boxes and only Group User Boxes of accounts that the user belongs to. - If you delete authentication data by canceling account track settings or changing authentication methods, all Group User Boxes become Public User Boxes. 2.3.4 When user authentication and account track are enabled and synchronized As the account for users has been registered in advance, users cannot access Group User Boxes of accounts that they do not belong to. Account B Public User Box Account A Access allowed Group User Box of account A Group User Box of account B Account A Account B User 1 User 2 2 Authentication and accessible User Boxes 2-14 ineo 223/283/363/423 2.3 Reference - Users can access all Public User Boxes, only Group User Boxes of the account that the user belongs to, and only Personal User Boxes that the user has created. - The Personal User Boxes are inaccessible by other users. - Press this button to set up a User Box administrator. - A User Box administrator can access all Public User Boxes, all Personal User Boxes and all Group User Boxes. - If you delete authentication data by canceling user authentication settings or changing authentication methods, all Personal User Boxes and all group boxes become Public User Boxes. 2.3.5 When user authentication and account track are enabled but not synchronized As the account for a user has not been registered in advance, a user must enter an account name and password when logging in. Each time a user logging in, the user can access the Group User Boxes of a different account by as a member of the account. User 1 User 2 Account A Account B Public User Box Personal User Box of user 1 Group User Box of account A Personal User Box of user 2 Group User Box of account B Access allowed User Box administrator Account A Account B User 1 ineo 223/283/363/423 2-15 2.3 Authentication and accessible User Boxes 2 Reference - Users can access all Public User Boxes and only Personal User Boxes that the user has created. - The Personal User Boxes are inaccessible by other users. - A user can access Group User Boxes of an account simply by entering an account name and password of the account when logging in. - Press this button to set up a User Box administrator. - A User Box administrator can access all Public User Boxes, all Personal User Boxes and all Group User Boxes. - If you delete authentication data by canceling user authentication settings or changing authentication methods, all Personal User Boxes and all group boxes become Public User Boxes. User 1 Access allowed Access permitted through entry of account name and password User Box administrator Public User Box Personal User Box of user 1 Group User Box of account A Group User Box of account B 2 Authentication and accessible User Boxes 2-16 ineo 223/283/363/423 2.3 3 Control Panel/Liquid Crystal Display ineo 223/283/363/423 3-3 3.1 Control panel 3 3 Control Panel/Liquid Crystal Display 3.1 Control panel Use the control panel for User Box mode operation. The following describes the buttons and switches in the control panel. No. Name Description 1 Touch Panel Various screens and messages are displayed. Configure the various settings by directly touching the panel. 2 Power Indicator Lights up in blue when the machine is turned on with the main power switch. 3 Sub Power Switch Press this switch to turn on/off machine operations, including copying, printing and scanning. When turned off, the machine enters an energy conservation state. 4 Power Save Press this key to enter Power Save mode. While the machine is in Power Save mode, the indicator on the Power Save key lights up in green and the touch panel goes off. To exit from Power Save mode, press the Power Save key again. 5 Mode Memory Press this key to register (store) the desired copy/scan settings as a program or to recall a registered copy/scan program. 6 Utility/Counter Press this key to display the Utility screen and the Meter Count screen. 7 Reset Press this key to clear all settings (except programmed settings) entered using the control panel and touch panel. 1 2 5 4 6 3 7 8 9 1413 10 15 16 17 18 12 11 19 20 21 22 3 Control panel 3-4 ineo 223/283/363/423 3.1 7 CAUTION - Do not apply extreme pressure to the touch panel, otherwise the touch panel may be scratched or damaged. Never push down on the touch panel with force, and never use a hard or pointed object to make a selection in the touch panel. 8 Interrupt Press this key to enter Interrupt mode. While the machine is in Interrupt mode, the indicator on the Interrupt key lights up in green and the message "Now in Interrupt mode." appears on the touch panel. To cancel Interrupt mode, press the Interrupt key again. 9 Stop Pressing the Stop key during scanning temporarily stops the scan operation. 10 Proof Copy Press this key to print a single proof copy to be checked before printing a large number of copies. You can check the finishing state on the touch panel by pressing this key before scanning or copying. • This key is not available when saving documents by pressing the User Box key. • To check the preview image when saving in a User Box, press the Fax/Scan key. For checking preview procedure, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. 11 Start Press this key to start scanning. When this machine is ready to begin a scan operation, the indicator on the Start key lights up in blue. If the indicator on the Start key lights up in orange, scan operation cannot be started. Press this key to restart a stopped job. 12 Data Indicator Flashes in blue while a print job is being received. Lights up in blue when data is being printed. 13 C Press this key to erase a value (such as the number of copies, a zoom ratio, or a size) entered using the keypad. 14 Keypad Press this key to enter the number of copies, zoom ratio, and various other settings. 15 Guidance Press this key to display the Guidance screen. From this screen, you can view descriptions of the various functions and details of operations. 16 Enlarge Display Press this key to enter Enlarge Display mode. If you use Authentication Manager for authentication, the Enlarge Display screen is not available. 17 Accessibility Press this key to display the screen for configuring settings for user accessibility functions. 18 Access If user authentication or account track settings have been applied, press this key after entering the user name and password (for user authentication) or the account name and password (for account track) in order to use this machine. Press this key to log off from the machine as well. 19 Brightness adjustment dial Use this dial to adjust the brightness of the touch panel. 20 User Box Press this key to enter User Box mode. While the machine is in User Box mode, the indicator on the User Box key lights up in green. 21 Fax/Scan Press this key to enter Fax/Scan mode. While the machine is in Fax/Scan mode, the indicator on the Fax/Scan key lights up in green. For details on the fax and scan functions, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. 22 Copy Press this key to enter Copy mode. (As a default, the machine is in Copy mode.) While the machine is in Copy mode, the indicator on the Copy key lights up in green. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. No. Name Description ineo 223/283/363/423 3-5 3.2 Touch panel 3 3.2 Touch panel 3.2.1 Screen component Icons that appear in the touch panel Icons indicating the status of this machine may appear in the icon display area. The following icons may be displayed. No. Name Description 1 Message display area Displays the status of the machine and details on operation procedures. 2 Functions/settings display area Displays tabs and buttons for displaying screens containing various functions. Use this area to configure various functions. Press a tab or button to display the corresponding screen for configuring the settings. 3 Icon display area Displays icons, which indicate the status of jobs and the machine, and shortcut keys. 4 Left panel Displays various buttons, such as [Job List] to display the jobs that are currently being performed/queued (waiting) to be performed, and [Check Job] to display the result of the specified settings. For details on the display and description of the left panel, refer to page 3-6. 5 Toner supply indicators Displays the remaining toner level. 4 5 1 2 3 Icon Description Indicates that data is being sent from the machine, regardless of the current mode. Indicates that the machine is receiving data, regardless of the current mode. Indicates that there is an error with the printing or scanning function. Press this icon to view a screen containing a warning code. If the warning screen has been closed while a warning occurs, press this button to display the warning screen again. 3 Touch panel 3-6 ineo 223/283/363/423 3.2 3.2.2 Display and operation of Left panel In the left panel of the touch panel, there are buttons for checking the status of jobs and the configuration of the machine. The following buttons are available in the left panel in the User Box mode. Appears when there is a message indicating that consumables must be replaced or the machine requires maintenance. Press this icon to display the message, and then perform the replacement or maintenance procedure. Appears when an error occurs with the connection to the POP server. Indicates that there is no paper in the paper tray. Indicates that very little paper remains in the paper tray. Indicates that the enhanced security mode is enabled. Indicates that an external memory device is connected to the machine. Indicates that a nonstandard external memory has been connected to this machine, therefore, USB connection is not enabled. Indicates that the job is in the waiting-for-redial status because, for example, the recipient's line is busy when sending with the G3 Fax or IP Address Fax function. Icon Description No. Name Description 1 [Job List] Press this button to check the job currently being performed and the job log. 2 [Check Job] Press this button to check information of the selected User Box, and various settings of the scan, print and transmission functions. 3 [Preview] Press this button to check the preview image of a saved document. 1 2 3 ineo 223/283/363/423 3-7 3.2 Touch panel 3 Job List A command to perform an operation such as saving data to a User Box, or printing or sending saved documents is called a job. Select [Job List] to display the job currently being performed. Reference - The Public/Personal/Group User Boxes are available only when a Hard Disk is installed. Job List - Delete Press this button to delete the job in process to cancel the operation. Select the job from the job list, and then press [Delete]. Check the message that appears, and delete the job. No documents in a User Box will be deleted even if the job currently being run is deleted. 3 Touch panel 3-8 ineo 223/283/363/423 3.2 Job List - Job Details Press this button to view the list of jobs being performed and the job log for confirmation. There are the following four types of jobs: Reference - The function for saving a document in the Public/Personal/Group User Box is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. - The Confidential RX User Box is not available when a Hard Disk is installed. - If a Hard Disk is installed, Confidential RX can be enabled when the Confidential RX function is added to the Public/Personal/Group User Box. For details, refer to page 8-5. Item Description [Print] Lists print jobs for copying, computer printout, received faxes, or reports. [Send] Lists scanner and fax transmission jobs. [Receive] Lists fax reception jobs. [Save] Lists User Box saving jobs. Item Description List items No.: Job identification number assigned when the job is queued. User Name: Displays the user name or user name/account name of the user who stored the document. Status: The status of the job (receiving/queued/printing/printing stopped/print error/saving to memory) is displayed. Document Name: File name being printed. Time Stored: Displays the time that the job was queued. Org.: Displays the number of pages in the original. Copies: Displays the number of copies to be printed. [ ][ ] When there are more than the upper limit of seven jobs to be displayed at one time, press these buttons to display other jobs. [Delete] Press this button to delete the selected job. [Increase Priority] Press this button to change the priority of the job. • If you set Changing Job Priority in Administrator Settings to "Restrict", you cannot specify the output priority of the jobs. • If the setting is specified so that the current print job can be interrupted, printing is interrupted and printing of the job given priority begins. Printing of the interrupted job restarts automatically once printing for the job given priority is finished. [Release Held Job] Press this button to change the settings of a stored job, or print or delete the job. [Check Job Set.] Press this button to check the settings of the selected job. Press either [ Back] or [Forward ] to check the settings. ineo 223/283/363/423 3-9 3.2 Touch panel 3 Reference - When user authentication settings are applied, the names of documents that have not been saved by logged in users cannot be viewed. - The names of confidential documents are not displayed. - The function for saving a document in the Public/Personal/Group User Box is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. - The Confidential RX User Box is not available when a Hard Disk is installed. - If a Hard Disk is installed, Confidential RX can be enabled when the Confidential RX function is added to the Public/Personal/Group User Box. For details, refer to page 8-5. Reference - When user authentication settings are applied, the names of documents that have not been saved by logged in users cannot be viewed. - The names of confidential documents are not displayed. - To view scanned images, you must set "Job History Thumbnail Display" to "ON" in Administrator Settings in advance. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. - The function for saving a document in the Public/Personal/Group User Box is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. - The Confidential RX User Box is not available when a Hard Disk is installed. - If a Hard Disk is installed, Confidential RX can be enabled when the Confidential RX function is added to the Public/Personal/Group User Box. For details, refer to page 8-5. [Detail] Press this button to check the status, the registration source/user name, document name, output tray, stored time, number of original pages, number of copies, or external server information for the selected job. To delete a job, press [Delete]. • The external server information that is available by pressing [Detail] appears only when using external server authentication. Item Description List items No.: Job identification number assigned when the job is queued. User Name: Displays the user name or user name/account name of the user who stored the document. Document Name: File name being printed. Time Stored: Displays the time that the job was queued. Org.: Displays the number of pages in the original. Copies: Displays the number of copies to be printed. Result: Displays the result of the operation (completed successfully/deleted due to error/deleted by user/part of mode cancelled). [ ][ ] When there are more than the upper limit of seven jobs to be displayed at one time, press these buttons to display other jobs. [Deleted Jobs]/[Finished Jobs]/[All Jobs] Switch to display the job type. [Detail] Allows you to check the result, error details, registration source/user name, document name, output tray, stored time, completed time, number of original pages, number of copies, number of pages to be printed, or external server information for the selected job. • The external server information that is available by pressing [Detail] appears only when using external server authentication. [Scanned Image] Select the job to display the scanned image. Item Description 3 Touch panel 3-10 ineo 223/283/363/423 3.2 Reference - When user authentication settings are applied, the names of documents that have not been saved by logged in users cannot be viewed. - The names of confidential documents are not displayed. - The function for saving a document in the Public/Personal/Group User Box, Internet fax function, and IP address fax function are available only when a Hard Disk is installed. Item Description List items No.: Job identification number assigned when the job is queued. Address Type: Displays the destination type (including fax, E-Mail, FTP, PC (SMB), WebDAV, TWAIN, or setting disabled*). "TWAIN" appears for the job that is sent via Web service. Status: Displays the status of the job (sending/queued/dialing/pending for redial/deleting). Address: Displays the fax number, E-mail address, User Box name, etc. of the recipient's machine. Time Stored: Displays the time that the job was queued. Org.: Displays the number of pages in the original. * This is displayed when sending data while the address is deleted. [ ][ ] When there are more than the upper limit of seven jobs to be displayed at one time, press these buttons to display other jobs. [Timer TX Job] Displays the status of the reserved transmission in the memory. To delete a job, press [Delete]. [L1][L2] These buttons appear when two Fax Kit are installed. Press one of these buttons. The job list of the selected line appears. [Delete] Press this button to delete the selected job. [Redial] Select a job of which the status is set to "Waiting To Redial", to perform redialing. [Check Job Set.] Press this button to check the settings of the selected job. Press either [ Back] or [Forward ] to check the settings. [Detail] Press this button to check the registration source/user name, file name, destination type, destination, stored time, transmission, number of original pages and external server information for the selected job. To delete a job, press [Delete]. • The external server information that is available by pressing [Detail] appears only when using external server authentication. • [Type] is displayed only when the destination is a fax, Internet fax, or IP address fax. Item Description List items No.: Job identification number assigned when the job is queued. Address Type: Displays the destination type (including fax, E-Mail, FTP, PC (SMB), WebDAV, TWAIN, or setting disabled*). "TWAIN" appears for the job that is sent via Web service. Address: Displays the fax number, E-mail address, User Box name, etc. of the recipient's machine. Time Stored: Displays the time that the job was queued. Org.: Displays the number of pages in the original. Result: Displays the result of the operation (completed successfully/deleted due to error/deleted by user). "Error detected" is also displayed for broadcasting. * This is displayed when sending data while the address is deleted. [ ][ ] When there are more than the upper limit of seven jobs to be displayed at one time, press these buttons to display other jobs. [Deleted Jobs]/[Finished Jobs]/[All Jobs] Switch to display the job type. ineo 223/283/363/423 3-11 3.2 Touch panel 3 Reference - When user authentication settings are applied, the names of documents that have not been saved by logged in users cannot be viewed. - The names of confidential documents are not displayed. - To view scanned images, you must set "Job History Thumbnail Display" to "ON" in Administrator Settings in advance. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. - The function for saving a document in the Public/Personal/Group User Box, Internet fax function, and IP address fax function are available only when a Hard Disk is installed. Reference - When user authentication settings are applied, the names of documents that have not been saved by logged in users cannot be viewed. - The names of confidential documents are not displayed. [Comm. List] Displays the list of scanner and fax transmission (sent/received) jobs. You can print Activity Report, TX Report and RX Report in respective list screens. [Detail] Press this button to check the result, error details, registration source/user name, file name, destination type, destination, stored time, communication, number of original pages and external server information for the selected job. • The external server information that is available by pressing [Detail] appears only when using external server authentication. • [Type] is displayed only when the destination is a fax, Internet fax, or IP address fax. [Scanned Image] Select the job to display the scanned image. Item Description List items No.: Job identification number assigned when the job is queued. User Name: Displays the user name or user name/account name of the user who stored the document. Status: Displays the status of the job (receiving/dialing (Polling RX)/queued/printing/printing stopped/print error/saving to memory/deleting). Document Name: Displays the name of the received or saved document. Time Stored: Displays the time that the job was queued. Org.: The number of original pages that were received. [ ][ ] When there are more than the upper limit of seven jobs to be displayed at one time, press these buttons to display other jobs. [L1][L2] These buttons appear when two Fax Kit are installed. Press one of these buttons. The job list of the selected line appears. [Delete] Press this button to delete the selected job. [Redial] Select a job of which the status is set to "Waiting To Redial", to perform redialing. [Forward] Forwards the fax received and stored in the memory (in-memory proxy reception). Specify the recipients either by selecting destinations registered in the address book or by entering directly. [Detail] Press this button to check the state, registration source/user name, document name, output tray, stored time, transmission time, number of original pages, or external server information for the selected job. To delete a job, press [Delete]. Item Description 3 Touch panel 3-12 ineo 223/283/363/423 3.2 Reference - When user authentication settings are applied, the names of documents that have not been saved by logged in users cannot be viewed. - The names of confidential documents are not displayed. - To view received images, you must set "Job History Thumbnail Display" to "ON" in Administrator Settings in advance. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. Reference - When user authentication settings are applied, the names of documents that have not been saved by logged in users cannot be viewed. - The names of confidential documents are not displayed. - The function for saving a document in the Public/Personal/Group User Box is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. - The Confidential RX User Box is not available when a Hard Disk is installed. - If a Hard Disk is installed, Confidential RX can be enabled when the Confidential RX function is added to the Public/Personal/Group User Box. For details, refer to page 8-5. Item Description List items No.: Job identification number assigned when the job is queued. User Name: Displays the user name or user name/account name of the user who stored the document. Document Name: Displays the name of the received or saved document. Time Stored: Displays the time that the job was queued. Org.: Displays the number of pages in the original. Result: Displays the result of the operation (completed successfully/deleted due to error/deleted by user/part of mode cancelled). [ ][ ] When there are more than the upper limit of seven jobs to be displayed at one time, press these buttons to display other jobs. [Deleted Jobs]/[Finished Jobs]/[All Jobs] Switch to display the job type. [Comm. List] Displays the list of scanner and fax transmission (sent/received) jobs. You can print Activity Report, TX Report and RX Report in respective list screens. [Detail] Press this button to check the job result, error details, registration source/user name, file name, output tray, stored time and number of original pages for the selected job. [Received Image] Select the job to display the received image. Item Description List items No.: Job identification number assigned when the job is queued. User Name: Displays the user name or user name/account name of the user who stored the document. Status: Displays the status of the job (receiving, saving to memory, sending). Document Name: Displays the name of the saved document. Time Stored: Displays the time that the job was queued. Org.: Displays the number of pages in the original. [ ][ ] When there are more than the upper limit of seven jobs to be displayed at one time, press these buttons to display other jobs. [Delete] Press this button to delete the selected job. [Detail] Press this button to check the status, the registration source/user name, document name, User Box, stored time, number of original pages, or external server information for the selected job. To delete a job, press [Delete]. • The external server information that is available by pressing [Detail] appears only when using external server authentication. ineo 223/283/363/423 3-13 3.2 Touch panel 3 Reference - When user authentication settings are applied, the names of documents that have not been saved by logged in users cannot be viewed. - The names of confidential documents are not displayed. - To view saved images, you must set "Job History Thumbnail Display" to "ON" in Administrator Settings in advance. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. - The function for saving a document in the Public/Personal/Group User Box is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. - The Confidential RX User Box is not available when a Hard Disk is installed. - If a Hard Disk is installed, Confidential RX can be enabled when the Confidential RX function is added to the Public/Personal/Group User Box. For details, refer to page 8-5. Item Description List items No.: Job identification number assigned when the job is queued. User Name: Displays the user name or user name/account name of the user who stored the document. Document Name: Displays the name of the saved document. Time Stored: Displays the time that the job was queued. Org.: Displays the number of pages in the original. Result: Displays the result of the operation (completed successfully/deleted due to error/deleted by user/part of mode cancelled). [ ][ ] When there are more than the upper limit of seven jobs to be displayed at one time, press these buttons to display other jobs. [Deleted Jobs]/[Finished Jobs]/[All Jobs] Switch to display the job type. [Comm. List] Displays the list of scanner and fax transmission (sent/received) jobs. You can print Activity Report, TX Report and RX Report in respective list screens. [Detail] Press this button to check the result, error details, registration source/user name, document name, User Box, stored time, number of original pages, or external server information for the selected job. • The external server information that is available by pressing [Detail] appears only when using external server authentication. [Saved Image] Select the job to display the saved image. 3 Touch panel 3-14 ineo 223/283/363/423 3.2 User Box information Displays the User Box information when you select a User Box. Use/File - Detail Press [Detail] on the lower left of the Use Document screen to check the time stored, user name, document name, the number of pages, and job number of the selected document. Reference - When you select multiple documents, use [ ][ ] to switch pages. dReference For checking preview image, refer to page 3-16. Use/File - Check Job Settings Select [Send] or [Bind TX] in the Send tab to display the address entry screen. [Check Job Settings] is displayed on the lower left of the screen. Reference - Press [Check Job Settings] to check the following settings. – Destination Settings – Document Setting Contents – Communication Settings (Not displayed when Combine is enabled.) – Check E-Mail Settings ineo 223/283/363/423 3-15 3.2 Touch panel 3 Use/File - Check Job Settings - Destination Settings Displays the list of destinations that are registered in the machine. Reference - To add a directly entered destination to the address book, select the destination, and press [Store Address]. - To check the detailed information of the destination, select a destination, and press [Details]. - To delete a destination, select one you want to delete, and then press [Delete]. dReference For details on how to register a destination to the address book, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. Use/File - Check Job Settings - Document Setting Contents View the list of resolution, file type, and color settings. 3 Touch panel 3-16 ineo 223/283/363/423 3.2 Use/File - Check Job Settings - Communication Settings You can check the line settings and transmission method settings. Press either [ Back] or [Forward ] to check the settings. Use/File - Check Job Settings - Check E-Mail Settings Check the document name, subject, From address and message body to send E-mail messages. Preview Check the preview image of the selected document when using or filing documents. Press [Preview] to select one document. The image of the first page is displayed in the left panel. Reference - For a document with multiple pages, only the image of the first page can be viewed. ineo 223/283/363/423 3-17 3.2 Touch panel 3 Preview Press [Detail] to enlarge the preview image. Enlarge the image of the document to check details. The image can be magnified 2 times, 4 times or 8 times. To view the desired portion of the enlarged image, use the scroll bars located in the right and the bottom of the image. Preview (Print/Combine) Preview the page image of printing result by pressing the [Preview] - [Detail] in the left panel when you have selected [Print] or [Combine]. Reference - For a document with multiple pages, images of all pages can be viewed. Item Description [ Prev. Page]/ [Next Page ] If the saved document contains multiple pages, use these buttons to switch the display to another page. [Zoom] Enlarge the image of the document to check details. The image can be magnified 2 times, 4 times or 8 times. To view the desired portion of the enlarged image, use the scroll bars located in the right and the bottom of the image. [Rotate Image] : Rotates the currently displayed page by 180 degrees to show the image. [Rotate Pages]: Select if the saved document contains multiple pages. • You can select multiple images in the page to be rotated. • [Odd Page]: Select images in the odd numbered pages. • [Even Page]: Select images in the even numbered pages. • [Select All]: Select images in all pages. • [Rotation Angle]: Click [180°] to rotate a page. [View Finishing] Displays the specified settings as icons and text in the preview image. Cancel [View Finishing] to erase the icons and text so that only the image appears in the screen. 3 Touch panel 3-18 ineo 223/283/363/423 3.2 Preview (Send/Bind TX) Preview the page image of sending result by pressing the [Preview] - [Detail] in the left panel when you have selected [Send] or [Bind TX]. Item Description [Scan] Displays the preview for E-mail TX/PC (FTP)/File TX (SMB)/File TX (WebDAV) operations. [Fax] Press this button to display the preview for G3 fax, IP address fax, or Internet fax operations. [ Prev. Page]/ [Next Page ] If the saved document contains multiple pages, use these buttons to switch the display to another page. [Zoom] Enlarge the image of the document to check details. The image can be magnified 2 times, 4 times or 8 times. To view the desired portion of the enlarged image, use the scroll bars located in the right and the bottom of the image. [Rotate Image] When [Scan] is selected in [Preview] : Rotates the currently displayed page 90 degrees anti-clockwise to show the image. : Rotates the currently displayed page 90 degrees clockwise to show the image. [Rotate Pages]: Select if the saved document contains multiple pages. • You can select multiple images in the page to be rotated. • [Odd Page]: Select images in the odd numbered pages. • [Even Page]: Select images in the even numbered pages. • [Select All]: Select images in all pages. • [Rotation Angle]: Select [Left 90°], [Right 90°], or [180°] as the rotation angle. When the destination is a fax, an image is sent at 180 degrees if [Left 90°] is selected in [Rotation Angle] and at 0° if [Right 90°] is selected. If TIFF or JPEG is selected as the file format to read a long original, the rotation mode may not be specified. When [Fax] is selected in [Preview] A finishing page image is displayed in black and white. : Rotates the currently displayed page by 180 degrees to show the image. [Rotate Pages]: Select if the saved document contains multiple pages. • You can select multiple images in the page to be rotated. • [Odd Page]: Select images in the odd numbered pages. • [Even Page]: Select images in the even numbered pages. • [Select All]: Select images in all pages. • [Rotation Angle]: Click [180°] to rotate a page. [Delete Page] Displayed when the saved document contains multiple pages while [Send] is selected. You can select multiple images in the page to be deleted. [Odd Pages]: Select images in the odd numbered pages to delete them. [Even Pages]: Select images in the even numbered pages to delete them. All pages cannot be deleted. [View Finishing] View the finishing image with the configured settings, including printing the data, applied. When you cancel [View Finishing], only the image appears in the screen. ineo 223/283/363/423 3-19 3.2 Touch panel 3 Reference - If you select [Bind TX], the delete page function becomes unavailable. - If you select [Send] for multiple documents, the rotate page and delete page functions become unavailable. 3 Touch panel 3-20 ineo 223/283/363/423 3.2 4 User Box Operation Flow ineo 223/283/363/423 4-3 4.1 Saving documents in User Boxes 4 4 User Box Operation Flow 4.1 Saving documents in User Boxes This section describes the steps for saving documents in Public User Boxes. This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. Press the User Box key in the control panel Select the desired User Box, and then press [Save Document] Configure the document name (p. 6-5), scan settings (p. 6-6) and original settings (p. 6-19) 4 Saving documents in User Boxes 4-4 ineo 223/283/363/423 4.1 Reference - When saving an original with an embedded password, the password entry screen appears. Enter the password and press [OK] to start saving. - You cannot save an original with copy guard embedded. Load the original Press [Start] or the Start key in the control panel ineo 223/283/363/423 4-5 4.2 Printing documents from a User Box 4 4.2 Printing documents from a User Box This section describes the steps for printing documents saved in Public User Boxes. This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. Press the User Box key in the control panel Select the desired User Box, and then press [Use/File] Select the [Print] tab Select documents 4 Printing documents from a User Box 4-6 ineo 223/283/363/423 4.2 If you have selected a single document, press [Print] (p. 7-6) When selecting multiple documents and printing them using added functions, press [Combine] (p. 7-7) Configure the printing order (bind order) (p. 7-8) Configure basic and application settings (p. 7-10, p. 7-16) Configure basic and application settings (p. 7-10, p. 7-16) To confirm the contents, display the preview (p. 3-17) ineo 223/283/363/423 4-7 4.2 Printing documents from a User Box 4 Press [Start] or the Start key in the control panel 4 Sending documents from a User Box 4-8 ineo 223/283/363/423 4.3 4.3 Sending documents from a User Box This section describes the steps for sending documents saved in Public User Boxes. This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. Press the User Box key in the control panel Select the desired User Box, and then press [Use/File] Select the [Send] tab Select documents ineo 223/283/363/423 4-9 4.3 Sending documents from a User Box 4 If you have selected a single document, press [Send]. (p. 7-34) When selecting multiple documents and specifying the file type or stamp, press [Bind TX] (p. 7-34) Configure the sending order (bind order) (p. 7-8) Specify the destination Address Book Direct Input Job History (The job history of fax, Internet fax, or IP address fax is not displayed when Bind TX is selected.) Address Search Also specify a scan/fax program. For details on scan/fax programs, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. 4 Sending documents from a User Box 4-10 ineo 223/283/363/423 4.3 Configure document, communication, and application settings (p. 7-48) Configure document, communication, and application settings (p. 7-48) To confirm the contents, display the preview (p. 3-18) Press [Start] or the Start key in the control panel ineo 223/283/363/423 4-11 4.4 Saving a document in an external memory 4 4.4 Saving a document in an external memory This section describes the steps for saving scanned images in the external memory. Press User Box in the control panel while the external memory is connected to this machine Connect the external memory to this machine, and then press [Save a document to External Memory.] Press [Save Document] Press [User Box] Select the [System User Box] tab. Press [External Memory], then [OK] 4 Saving a document in an external memory 4-12 ineo 223/283/363/423 4.4 Reference - When saving an original with an embedded password, the password entry screen appears. Enter the password and press [OK] to start saving. - You cannot save an original with copy guard embedded. - A function to save a document in external memory is set to OFF (not saved) in the factory setting. In addition, it is set to OFF (cannot be saved) by the user function settings when user authentication is enabled. To save a document in external memory, change the setting to enable you to save a document in Administrator Settings. For details, refer to page 8-22. Configure the document name (p. 6-5), scan settings (p. 6-6) and original settings (p. 6-19) Load the original Press [Start] or the Start key in the control panel ineo 223/283/363/423 4-13 4.5 Saving a Document from the External Memory into a User Box 4 4.5 Saving a Document from the External Memory into a User Box This section describes the steps for saving a document stored in the external memory to a User Box. This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. Press User Box in the control panel while the external memory is connected to this machine Connect the external memory to this machine, and then press [Save a document from External Memory to a User Box.] Select the [System User Box] tab. Press [External Memory], then [Use/File] Press the [Filing Settings] tab Select a document, and then press [Save to User Box] 4 Saving a Document from the External Memory into a User Box 4-14 ineo 223/283/363/423 4.5 Reference - A function to save documents in an external memory is set to OFF (cannot be saved) by factory default. In addition, it is set to OFF (cannot be saved) by the user function settings when user authentication is enabled. To save a document from the external memory into a User Box, change the setting to enable you to save a document in Administrator Settings. For details, refer to page 8-22. Specify the User Box and document name (p. 7-104) Press [Start] or the Start key in the control panel ineo 223/283/363/423 4-15 4.6 Printing a document from an external memory 4 4.6 Printing a document from an external memory This section describes the steps for printing documents saved in the external memory. Press User Box in the control panel while the external memory is connected to this machine Connect the external memory to this machine, and then press [Print a document from External Memory.] Select the [System User Box] tab, and then press [External Memory] Press [Use/File] Select a file, and then press [Print] (p. 7-101) 4 Printing a document from an external memory 4-16 ineo 223/283/363/423 4.6 Reference - A function to save documents in an external memory is set to OFF (cannot be saved) by factory default. In addition, it is set to OFF (cannot be saved) by the user function settings when user authentication is enabled. To save a document from the external memory into a User Box, change the setting to enable you to save a document in Administrator Settings. For details, refer to page 8-22. Configure print settings (p. 7-102) Press [Start] or the Start key in the control panel ineo 223/283/363/423 4-17 4.7 Filing documents in a User Box 4 4.7 Filing documents in a User Box This section describes the steps for filing documents saved in Public User Boxes. This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. Press the User Box key in the control panel Select the desired User Box, and then press [Use/File] Select the [Filing Settings] tab Select documents, and then select a function (p. 7-64) 4 Filing documents in a User Box 4-18 ineo 223/283/363/423 4.7 dReference To delete the documents, refer to page 7-65. To rename the documents, refer to page 7-65. To move the documents to other User Boxes, refer to page 7-65. To copy the documents to other User Boxes, refer to page 7-66. To save a document in the external memory, refer to page 7-66. To check information of the documents or preview the documents, refer to page 7-69. ineo 223/283/363/423 4-19 4.8 Printing a Document Saved in a Cellular Phone or PDA 4 4.8 Printing a Document Saved in a Cellular Phone or PDA This section describes the steps for printing a document saved in a cellular phone or PDA. Press the User Box key in the control panel Select the [System User Box] tab. Press [Mobile/ PDA], then [Use/File] Press [Print List] To check printing preferences, press [Check Print Settings] 4 Printing a Document Saved in a Cellular Phone or PDA 4-20 ineo 223/283/363/423 4.8 dReference To configure print settings from a cellular phone or PDA, refer to page 8-12. Enter the PIN code displayed in the control panel to the cellular phone or PDA (p. 7-105) ineo 223/283/363/423 4-21 4.9 Saving a Document Stored in a Cellular Phone or PDA to a User Box 4 4.9 Saving a Document Stored in a Cellular Phone or PDA to a User Box This section describes the steps for saving a document stored in a cellular phone or PDA to a User Box. This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. Press the User Box key in the control panel Select the [System User Box] tab. Press [Mobile/ PDA], then [Use/File] Press [Save in User Box] Select the desired User Box, and then press [OK] 4 Saving a Document Stored in a Cellular Phone or PDA to a User Box 4-22 ineo 223/283/363/423 4.9 Enter the PIN code displayed in the control panel to the cellular phone or PDA (p. 7-106) ineo 223/283/363/423 4-23 4.10 Menu tree of the User Box mode 4 4.10 Menu tree of the User Box mode This section describes the configuration and settings for the functions available in the User Box mode. 4.10.1 Save Document Public, Personal, or Group User Box The following shows the menu tree for saving documents in Public, Personal, or Group User Boxes. This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. First level Second level Third level Fourth level [User Box] (p. 6-5) [Document Name] (p. 6-5) [Scan Settings] [Original Type] (p. 6-6) [Simplex/Duplex] (p. 6-7) [Resolution] (p. 6-7) [File Type] [File Type] (p. 6-8) [Encryption] (p. 6-9) [Outline PDF] (p. 6-11) [Scan Setting] (p. 6-11) [Density] (p. 6-12) [Color] (p. 6-12) [Scan Size] (p. 6-13) [Image Adjustment] [Background Removal] (p. 6-14) [Sharpness] (p. 6-15) [Application] [Frame Erase] (p. 6-15) [Book Copy] (p. 6-16) [Separate Scan] (p. 6-18) [Original Settings] [Special Original] (p. 6-19) [Mixed Original] [Z-Folded Original] [Long Original] 4 Menu tree of the User Box mode 4-24 ineo 223/283/363/423 4.10 System User Box The following shows the menu tree for saving documents in System User Boxes. [Direction Settings] [Original Direction] (p. 6-19) [Binding Position] (p. 6-20) [Auto] [Top] [Left] [Despeckle] (p. 6-20) First level Second level Third level Fourth level First level Second level Third level Fourth level [Annotation User Box] [User Box] (p. 6-5) [Document Name] (p. 6-5) [Scan Settings] [Original Type] (p. 6-6) [Simplex/Duplex] (p. 6-7) [Resolution] (p. 6-7) [File Type] [File Type] (p. 6-8) [Encryption] (p. 6-9) [Outline PDF] (p. 6-11) [Scan Setting] (p. 6-11) [Density] (p. 6-12) [Color] (p. 6-12) [Scan Size] (p. 6-13) [Image Adjustment] [Background Removal] (p. 6-14) [Sharpness] (p. 6-15) [Application] [Frame Erase] (p. 6-15) [Book Copy] (p. 6-16) [Separate Scan] (p. 6-18) ineo 223/283/363/423 4-25 4.10 Menu tree of the User Box mode 4 Reference - The [Annotation User Box] is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. - [Save in User Box] for [Mobile/PDA] is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. [Original Settings] [Special Original] (p. 6-19) [Mixed Original] [Z-Folded Original] [Long Original] [Direction Settings] [Original Direction] (p. 6-19) [Binding Position] (p. 6-20) [Despeckle] (p. 6-20) [External Memory] [User Box] (p. 6-5) [Document Name] (p. 6-5) [Scan Settings] [Original Type] (p. 6-6) [Simplex/Duplex] (p. 6-7) [Resolution] (p. 6-7) [File Type] [File Type] (p. 6-8) [Encryption] (p. 6-9) [Outline PDF] (p. 6-11) [Scan Setting] (p. 6-11) [Density] (p. 6-12) [Color] (p. 6-12) [Scan Size] (p. 6-13) [Image Adjustment] [Background Removal] (p. 6-14) [Sharpness] (p. 6-15) [Application] [Frame Erase] (p. 6-15) [Book Copy] (p. 6-16) [Separate Scan] (p. 6-18) [Original Settings] [Special Original] (p. 6-19) [Mixed Original] [Z-Folded Original] [Long Original] [Direction Settings] [Original Direction] (p. 6-19) [Binding Position] (p. 6-20) [Despeckle] (p. 6-20) [Mobile/PDA] [Save in User Box] (p. 7-105) First level Second level Third level Fourth level 4 Menu tree of the User Box mode 4-26 ineo 223/283/363/423 4.10 4.10.2 Use/File Print (for Public/Personal/Group User Boxes) The following shows the menu tree for using or filing documents in Public, Personal, or Group User Boxes, and configuring print settings. The following describes items available using the framed buttons. This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. First level Second level Third level Fourth level [Print] [Copies:] (p. 7-10) [Print] (p. 7-10) [1-Sided] [2-Sided] [Finishing] (p. 7-11) [Sort] (p. 7-11) [Group] (p. 7-11) [Offset] (p. 7-11) [Staple] (p. 7-11) [Punch] (p. 7-12) [Fold/Bind] (p. 7-13) [Half-Fold] [Center Staple & Fold] [Combine] (p. 7-14) [Combine Pages] [Combine Direction] [Zoom] (p. 7-14) [Existing Setting] [Manual] [Full Size] [Minimal] [Fixed Zoom] [User Preset Zoom] [Page Margin] (p. 7-16) [Margin Position] [Adjust Value] [Image Shift] (p. 7-16) [Vertical Shift] [Horizontal Shift] [Change Back Shift] ineo 223/283/363/423 4-27 4.10 Menu tree of the User Box mode 4 [Sheet/Cover/ Chapter Insert] [Cover Sheet] (p. 7-18) [Front Cover] [Back Cover] [Insert Sheet] (p. 7-19) [Insert Paper] [Insert Type] [Chapters] (p. 7-20) [Chapter Paper] [Stamp/Composition] (p. 7-21) [Date/Time] (p. 7-21) [Date Format] [Time Format] [Pages] [Print Position] [Text Details] [Page Number] (p. 7-22) [Starting Page Number] [Page Number Type] [Starting Chapter Number] [Insert Sheet Setting] (p. 7-23) [Print Position] [Text Details] [Stamp] (p. 7-23) [Stamp Type/Preset Stamps] [Pages] [Text Size] [Print Position] [Copy Security] [Copy Protect] (p. 7-25) [Copy Guard] (p. 7-26) [Password Copy] (p. 7-27) [Stamp Repeat] (p. 7-28) [Stamp Repeat Type] (p. 7-29) [Detail Settings] (p. 7-30) [Position] (p. 7-30) [Header/Footer] (p. 7-30) [Recall Header/ Footer] [Mode Check] [Registered Overlay] (p. 7-32) [Recall Overlay Image] [Pages] First level Second level Third level Fourth level 4 Menu tree of the User Box mode 4-28 ineo 223/283/363/423 4.10 [Combine] [Copies:] (p. 7-10) [Print] (p. 7-10) [1-Sided] [2-Sided] [Finishing] (p. 7-11) [Offset] (p. 7-11) [Staple] (p. 7-11) [Punch] (p. 7-12) [Fold/Bind] (p. 7-13) [Half-Fold] [Center Staple & Fold] [Continuous Print] (p. 7-15) [Page Margin] (p. 7-16) [Margin Position] [Adjust Value] [Image Shift] (p. 7-16) [Vertical Shift] [Horizontal Shift] [Change Back Shift] [Stamp/Composition] [Date/Time] (p. 7-21) [Date Format] [Time Format] [Pages] [Print Position] [Text Details] [Page Number] (p. 7-22) [Starting Page Number] [Page Number Type] [Starting Chapter Number] [Print Position] [Text Details] [Stamp] (p. 7-23) [Stamp Type/Preset Stamps] [Pages] [Text Size] [Print Position] [Copy Security] (p. 7-24) [Copy Protect] (p. 7-25) [Copy Guard] (p. 7-26) [Password Copy] (p. 7-27) [Stamp Repeat] (p. 7-28) [Stamp Repeat Type] (p. 7-29) [Detail Settings] (p. 7-30) [Position] (p. 7-30) [Header/Footer] (p. 7-30) [Recall Header/ Footer] [Mode Check] First level Second level Third level Fourth level ineo 223/283/363/423 4-29 4.10 Menu tree of the User Box mode 4 Send (for Public/Personal/Group User Boxes) The following shows the Use/File - Send menu tree for Public, Personal, or Group User Boxes. The following describes items available using the framed buttons. This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. [Registered Overlay] (p. 7-32) [Recall Overlay Image] [Pages] [Document Details] [Preview] (p. 7-69) First level Second level Third level Fourth level First level Second level Third level Fourth level [Send] [Address Book] [Search] (p. 7-38) [Direct Input] [Fax] (p. 7-41) [Fax Number] [E-Mail] (p. 7-41) [Internet Fax] (p. 7-42) [RX Ability (Destination)] (p. 7-42) [IP Address Fax] (p. 7-42) [Address] [Port Number] [Destination Machine Type] [PC (SMB)] (p. 7-43) [Host Name] [File Path] [User Name] [Password] [Reference] [FTP] (p. 7-44) [Host Name] [File Path] [User Name] [Password] [Detailed Settings] 4 Menu tree of the User Box mode 4-30 ineo 223/283/363/423 4.10 [WebDAV] (p. 7-45) [Host Name] [File Path] [User Name] [Password] [Detailed Settings] [Job History] (p. 7-46) [Address Search] (p. 7-46) [Search] (p. 7-47) [Advanced Search] (p. 7-47) [Document Settings] [Resolution] (p. 7-48) [File Type] (p. 7-49) [File Type] (p. 7-49) [Encryption] (p. 7-50) [Stamp Composition] (p. 7-52) [Outline PDF] (p. 7-52) [Scan Setting] (p. 7-53) [Color] (p. 7-53) [Use Existing Color Setting] [Full Color] [Gray Scale] [Black] [Communication Settings] [Line Settings] (p. 7-54) [Overseas TX] (p. 7-54) [ECM OFF] (p. 7-55) [V.34 OFF] (p. 7-55) [Check Dest. & Send] (p. 7-55) [Select Line] (p. 7-55) [E-Mail Settings] (p. 7-56) [Document Name] (p. 7-56) [Subject] (p. 7-56) [From] (p. 7-57) [Body] (p. 7-57) [URL Notification Setting] (p. 7-58) [Address Book] [Detail Search] [Direct Input] [Communication Method Settings] (p. 7-59) [Timer TX] (p. 7-59) [Password TX] (p. 7-60) [F-Code TX] (p. 7-60) First level Second level Third level Fourth level ineo 223/283/363/423 4-31 4.10 Menu tree of the User Box mode 4 [E-Mail Encryption] (p. 7-61) [Digital Signature] (p. 7-61) [Fax Header Settings] (p. 7-61) [Application] [Stamp/Composition] [Date/Time] (p. 7-21) [Page Number] (p. 7-22) [Stamp] (p. 7-62) [Header/Footer] (p. 7-30) [Send & Print] (p. 7-63) [Copies:] [Simplex/Duplex] [Staple] [Bind TX] [Address Book] [Search] (p. 7-38) [Direct Input] [E-Mail] (p. 7-41) [PC (SMB)] (p. 7-43) [Host Name] [File Path] [User Name] [Password] [Reference] [FTP] (p. 7-44) [Host Name] [File Path] [User Name] [Password] [Detailed Settings] [WebDAV] (p. 7-45) [Host Name] [File Path] [User Name] [Password] [Detailed Settings] [Job History] (p. 7-46) [Address Search] (p. 7-46) [Search] (p. 7-47) [Advanced Search] (p. 7-47) [Document Settings] [File Type] (p. 7-49) [File Type] (p. 7-49) [Encryption] (p. 7-50) [Stamp Composition] (p. 7-52) [Outline PDF] (p. 7-52) [Scan Setting] (p. 7-53) First level Second level Third level Fourth level 4 Menu tree of the User Box mode 4-32 ineo 223/283/363/423 4.10 Filing Settings (for public/personal/group User Boxes) The following shows the Use/File - Filing Settings menu tree for Public, Personal, or Group User Boxes. The following describes items available using the framed buttons. This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. [Communication Settings] [E-Mail Settings] (p. 7-56) [Document Name] (p. 7-56) [Subject] (p. 7-56) [From] (p. 7-57) [Body] (p. 7-57) [URL Notification Setting] (p. 7-58) [Address Book] [Detail Search] [Direct Input] [E-Mail Encryption] (p. 7-61) [Digital Signature] (p. 7-61) [Application] [Stamp/Composition] [Date/Time] (p. 7-21) [Page Number] (p. 7-22) [Stamp] (p. 7-62) [Header/Footer] (p. 7-30) [Send & Print] [Copies:] [Simplex/Duplex] [Staple] [Document Details] [Preview] (p. 7-69) First level Second level Third level Fourth level First level Second level Third level Fourth level [Delete] (p. 7-65) [Edit Name] (p. 7-65) [Move] (p. 7-65) [Copy] (p. 7-66) [Save to External Memory.] (p. 7-66) ineo 223/283/363/423 4-33 4.10 Menu tree of the User Box mode 4 Application (for Public/Personal/Group User Boxes) The following shows the File/Use - Application menu tree for Public, Personal, or Group User Boxes. The following describes items available using the framed buttons. This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. [Document Details] [Preview] (p. 7-69) First level Second level Third level Fourth level First level Second level Third level Fourth level [Edit Document] [Delete Page] (p. 7-71) [Rotate Page] (p. 7-72) [Move Page] (p. 7-74) [Preview] (p. 7-77) [Preview /Set Range] (p. 7-76) [Register Overlay] (p. 7-78) [Overlay Image] [Edit] [New] (p. 7-79) [Overwrite] (p. 7-80) [Detail Settings] (p. 7-81) [Density] [Document Details] [Preview] 4 Menu tree of the User Box mode 4-34 ineo 223/283/363/423 4.10 System User Box The following shows the Use/File menu tree for System User Boxes. First level Second level Third level Fourth level [Bulletin Board User Box] (p. 7-82) [Polling TX User Box] (p. 7-83) [Secure Document User Box] [Print] − [Print] [Copies:] (p. 7-85) [Print] (p. 7-85) [1-Sided] [2-Sided] [Finishing] (p. 7-11) [Sort] [Group] [Offset] [Staple] [Punch] [Fold/Bind] (p. 7-13) [Combine] (p. 7-14) [Combine Pages] [Combine Direction] [Zoom] (p. 7-14) [Existing Setting] [Manual] [Full Size] [Minimal] [Fixed Zoom] [User Preset Zoom] [Page Margin] (p. 7-16) [Margin Position] [Adjust Value] [Image Shift] [Sheet/Cover/ Chapter Insert] (p. 7-17) [Cover Sheet] [Insert Sheet] [Chapters] ineo 223/283/363/423 4-35 4.10 Menu tree of the User Box mode 4 [Stamp/Composition] (p. 7-21) [Date/Time] [Page Number] [Stamp] [Copy Security] [Stamp Repeat] [Header/Footer] [Registered Overlay] [Filing Settings] (p. 7-86) [Delete] [Edit Name] [Document Details] [Preview] (p. 7-69) [Compulsory Memory RX User Box] [Print] (p. 7-87) [Filing Settings] (p. 7-88) [Delete] [Edit Name] [Document Details] [Preview] (p. 7-69) [Annotation User Box] [Print] − [Print] [Copies:] (p. 7-10) [Print] (p. 7-10) [1-Sided] [2-Sided] [Finishing] (p. 7-11) [Sort] [Group] [Offset] [Staple] [Punch] [Fold/Bind] (p. 7-13) [Combine] (p. 7-14) [Combine Pages] [Combine Direction] [Zoom] (p. 7-14) [Existing Setting] [Manual] [Full Size] [Minimal] [Fixed Zoom] [User Preset Zoom] [Page Margin] (p. 7-16) [Margin Position] [Adjust Value] [Image Shift] [Sheet/Cover/ Chapter Insert] [Cover Sheet] (p. 7-18) [Insert Sheet] (p. 7-19) [Chapters] (p. 7-20) First level Second level Third level Fourth level 4 Menu tree of the User Box mode 4-36 ineo 223/283/363/423 4.10 [Stamp/Composition] (p. 7-21) [Date/Time] (p. 7-21) [Page Number] (p. 7-22) [Stamp] (p. 7-23) [Copy Security] (p. 7-24) [Stamp Repeat] (p. 7-28) [Registered Overlay] (p. 7-32) [Send] − [Send] [Address Book] (p. 7-38) [Direct Input] [E-Mail] (p. 7-41) [PC (SMB)] (p. 7-43) [FTP] (p. 7-44) [WebDAV] (p. 7-45) [Job History] (p. 7-46) [Address Search] (p. 7-46) [Search] (p. 7-47) [Advanced Search] (p. 7-47) [Document Settings] [Resolution] (p. 7-48) [File Type] (p. 7-49) [Color] (p. 7-53) [Communication Settings] [E-mail Settings] (p. 7-56) [URL Notification Setting] (p. 7-58) [E-Mail Encryption] (p. 7-61) [Digital Signature] (p. 7-61) [Application] [Stamp/Composition] (p. 7-62) [Send & Print] (p. 7-63) [Stamp Element] (p. 7-92) [Filing Settings] (p. 7-94) [Delete] [Edit Name] [Application] [Register Overlay] (p. 7-78) [Document Details] [Preview] (p. 7-69) [Fax Retransmit User Box] [Print] [Proof Print] (p. 7-95) [Send] [Fax] (p. 7-95) [Filing Settings] [Delete] (p. 7-96) [Document Details] [Preview] First level Second level Third level Fourth level ineo 223/283/363/423 4-37 4.10 Menu tree of the User Box mode 4 Reference - The Confidential RX User Box is not available when a Hard Disk is installed. - If a Hard Disk is installed, Confidential RX can be enabled when the Confidential RX function is added to the Public/Personal/Group User Box. For details, refer to page 8-5. - The Secure Document, Annotation, Password Encrypted PDF, and ID & Print User Boxes are available only when a Hard Disk is installed. - The "Saving a Document from the External Memory into a User Box" function for external memory is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. - [Save in User Box] for Mobile/PDA is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. [Password Encrypted PDF User Box] [Print/Save] [Print/Save] (p. 7-97) [Filing Settings] [Delete] (p. 7-97) [Document Details] [ID & Print User Box] [Print] [Print] (p. 7-99) [Filing Settings] [Delete] (p. 7-99) [Document Details] [Preview] (p. 7-69) [External Memory] [Print] − [Print] [Copies:] (p. 7-102) [Print] (p. 7-102) [1-Sided] [2-Sided] [Binding Position] (p. 7-102) [Top] [Left] [Right] [Finishing] (p. 7-11) [Sort] [Group] [Offset] [Staple] [Punch] [Fold/Bind] [Paper] (p. 7-103) [Stamp/Composition] [Date/Time] (p. 7-21) [Page Number] (p. 7-22) [Stamp] (p. 7-23) [Copy Security] (p. 7-24) [Stamp Repeat] (p. 7-28) [Filing Settings] [Save to User Box] [User Box] [Document Name] [Document Details] [Mobile/PDA] [Print List] [Check Print Settings] (p. 7-106) [Save in User Box] (p. 7-107) [Confidential RX User Box] [Print] (p. 7-108) [Filing Settings] (p. 7-109) First level Second level Third level Fourth level 4 Menu tree of the User Box mode 4-38 ineo 223/283/363/423 4.10 5 Accessing the User Box mode ineo 223/283/363/423 5-3 5.1 Accessing the User Box mode 5 5 Accessing the User Box mode 5.1 Accessing the User Box mode Before starting this procedure, turn this machine on. When this machine is ready to copy data, the basic settings screen appears. To access the User Box mode, press the User Box key in the control panel. The User Box mode window appears. Lightly press the desired button in the window to display menus or functions. Then select the target one. 5 User Box Operation Menu 5-4 ineo 223/283/363/423 5.2 5.2 User Box Operation Menu Accessing the User Box mode enables you to select the operation menus below. 5.2.1 Save Document Scan the original loaded on this machine and save it in a User Box. You can specify the name or image quality of an original when saving it. dReference For details on the Save Document function, refer to page 6-4. For details on the Save Document menu structure, refer to page 4-23. 5.2.2 Use/File Print or send a document saved in a User Box. When printing a document, you can specify the number of sets or page margins. When sending a document, you can specify the file type. If necessary, you can rename or move a document saved in a User Box, or copy a document to another User Box. dReference For details on the Use/File function, refer to page 7-3. For details on the Use/File menu structure, refer to page 4-26. 6 Save Document ineo 223/283/363/423 6-3 6.1 Save Document Overview 6 6 Save Document 6.1 Save Document Overview 6.1.1 Functions Save Document enables you to directly specify a destination User Box when saving a document in the User Box mode. Using Save Document, document are saved in the same way as when scanned data is saved. Public/Personal/Group User Boxes You can save a document copied or scanned using this machine. You can also save a document that was print-instructed through a computer connected to a network. Some User Authentication or Account Track settings limit users who can use User Boxes such as the Personal or Group User Box. This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. Annotation User Box If you want to print or send a document with the date and time or filing number image, save the document in the Annotation User Box. To use this box, select the [System User Box] tab, and then press [Annotation User Box]. This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. External Memory You can directly save a scanned document in the external memory connected to this machine. To use this function, check that the external memory is connected to the USB connector of this machine, select the [System User Box] tab, and then press [External Memory]. Otherwise, on the screen that is displayed when the external memory device has been connected to the USB connector, press [Save a document to External Memory.]. Reference - A function to save a document to the external memory or to save a document stored in the external memory to a User Box is set to OFF (cannot be saved) in the factory default. In addition, it is set to OFF (cannot be saved) by the user function settings when user authentication is enabled. To save a document in external memory, change the setting to enable you to save a document in Administrator Settings. For details, refer to page 8-22. The function to save a document in external memory is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. dReference For information on the available external memory, refer to page 7-100. 6 Save Document Overview 6-4 ineo 223/283/363/423 6.1 6.1.2 Initial Window of Save Document Public/Personal/Group User Boxes Select the [Public], [Personal], or [Group] tab to display a list of User Boxes you can save a document in. Specify the desired User Box. System User Box Select the [System User Box] tab to display a list of User Boxes you can save a document in. Specify the desired User Box. Reference - If [Annotation User Box] is selected, further specify the desired User Box. ineo 223/283/363/423 6-5 6.1 Save Document Overview 6 6.1.3 Save Document window The available setting items in the Save Document screen are as follows. Reference - For the external memory, you cannot change the destination User Box. - To save a document in external memory, change the setting to enable you to save a document in Administrator Settings. For details, refer to page 8-22. Item Description [User Box] For Public, Personal, Group and Annotation User Boxes, you can change the destination User Box for saving a document. To change the User Box, press [User Box] and select a User Box. • If there is no User Box with the specified number, a new Public User Box is automatically created. [Document Name] Press this button to display a keyboard to enter a document name. Enter the document name in the control panel. [Scan Settings] Configure detailed settings for scanning the document. For details, refer to page 6-6. [Original Settings] Configure the detailed settings for the original type and original direction. For details, refer to page 6-19. 6 Scan Settings 6-6 ineo 223/283/363/423 6.2 6.2 Scan Settings Press [Scan Settings] in the Save Document tab to configure the detailed scan settings. 6.2.1 Basic - Original Type Select the original type based on the original contents. The available original types are as follows. If you select [Text/Photo] or [Photo], you can also specify the photo type. Item Description [Text] Original that consists of only text. [Text/Photo] Original that consists of both text and photos (halftone). [Photo] Original that consists of only photos (halftone). [Dot Matrix Original] Original with faint-printing in whole. [Copied Paper] Original with even density that was printed using a copier or printer. Item Description [Photo Paper] Select this setting for a photo printed on printing paper. [Printed Photo] Select this setting for printed photos such as in books or magazines. ineo 223/283/363/423 6-7 6.2 Scan Settings 6 6.2.2 Basic - Simplex/Duplex Select whether to scan one or both sides of the original. 6.2.3 Basic - Resolution Select the resolution for scanning. Reference - The amount of data increases depending on the selected resolution, and you may not be able to save data in an external memory. If you cannot save data, reduce the resolution and retry saving it. Item Description [1-Sided] Scans one side of the original. [2-Sided] Scans both sides of the original. [Cover + 2-Sided] Scans the first page of the original as a cover in the single-sided mode, and also scans the remaining pages in the double-sided mode. 6 Scan Settings 6-8 ineo 223/283/363/423 6.2 6.2.4 Basic - File Type Select the file type to save scanned data. File Type The available file types are as follows. dReference You can specify the compression format when saving a TIFF file in color. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. You cannot specify some file formats depending on the Color settings. The following shows the combinations of the File Type and Color settings. Reference - Even if you have selected the file type when saving a document in a User Box, you must specify the file type when downloading the data of the document. - If you select [JPEG], [Page Separation] is automatically selected and set to [1 Every X Page(s)] in Scan Setting. Item Description [PDF] Saves data in PDF format. [Compact PDF] Further compressed PDF file. This format is useful when saving a scanned full color data. [TIFF] Saves data in TIFF format. [JPEG] Saves data in JPEG format. [XPS] Saves data in XPS format. [Compact XPS] Saves data in further compressed XPS file. Auto Color Full Color Gray scale Black PDF o o o o Compact PDF o o o − TIFF o o o o JPEG o o o − XPS o o o o Compact XPS o o o − ineo 223/283/363/423 6-9 6.2 Scan Settings 6 Encryption If the [PDF] or [Compact PDF] is selected for the file format, the encryption level can be specified. Reference - You cannot check the contents of an encrypted document in the preview screen. Encryption - Detail Settings Configure the detailed permission settings when the document permission is specified on the Encryption screen. Item Description Encryption Level Select the encryption level. [Password] Enter the password necessary to open encrypted data (up to 32 characters). For confirmation, enter the password twice. [Document Permissions] Enter the password necessary to change document permissions (up to 32 characters). For confirmation, enter the password twice. 6 Scan Settings 6-10 ineo 223/283/363/423 6.2 Press [Forward ] to further configure Changes Allowed settings. Item Description [Printing Allowed] Select whether to allow or restrict printing data. [Low Resolution] appears when the Encryption Level is set to [High level]. [Enable copying of text, images and other content] Select whether to allow or restrict extracting text images. ineo 223/283/363/423 6-11 6.2 Scan Settings 6 Outline PDF Configure this item when [Compact PDF] is selected for the file type. This function performs outline processing for characters, ensuring a smooth display image. It is also available when editing data using an application such as Adobe Illustrator. dReference This function enables you to specify the accuracy of outline processing when creating outline PDF data. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. Scan Setting Specify whether to save all pages of a document to one file, or to save each page to one file. Reference - If you select [Page Separation] when saving a document in a User Box, the selection of Page Separation is stored, and then the document is saved as a [Multi Page] file. - The selection of Page Separation is enabled when sending data to an E-Mail, PC (SMB), or FTP destination. Item Description [Changes Allowed] Select the permission level about changes to the document, including signing, entering, or commenting data. Item Description [Multi Page] Creates all the scanned originals as one file. This item cannot be specified together with [JPEG]. [Page Separation] Separates the scanned data to save every specified number of pages to one file. Use the keypad to enter the number of pages to be saved in one file. [E-mail Attachment Method] Specify the method to use to attach a file to an E-mail when Page Separation is selected. • [All Files Sent as one (1) E-mail]: Attaches all files to one E-mail. • [One (1) File per E-Mail]: Attaches one file to one E-mail. 6 Scan Settings 6-12 ineo 223/283/363/423 6.2 6.2.5 Basic - Density Adjust the density for the scanned document. 6.2.6 Basic - Color Specify whether to scan original in color or black-and-white. Some color settings may not be available, depending on the selected File Type settings. The following shows the combinations of the File Type and Color settings. Item Description [Auto Color] Automatically detects the color of the original and scans it to fit the original setting. [Full Color] Scans the original in full color. [Gray Scale] Select this setting for originals with high-level halftone such as black-and-white photos. [Black] Select this setting for originals with distinct black and white areas, such as line drawings. Auto Color Full Color Gray scale Black PDF o o o o Compact PDF o o o − TIFF o o o o JPEG o o o − XPS o o o o Compact XPS o o o − ineo 223/283/363/423 6-13 6.2 Scan Settings 6 6.2.7 Scan Size Select the paper size of the original to be scanned. Standard size Press [Auto] to automatically detect the size of the first page in the original when scanning. To scan the original with a predetermined paper size, select that size. Custom Size Enter the dimensions of a custom size other than the standard sizes. Reference - X-direction: Enter a value from 2 to 7 inches (30.0 to 432.0 mm). - Y-direction: Enter a value from 2 to 11-11/16 inches (30.0 to 297.0 mm). Photo Size Select the 3 e 5 or 2-1/4 e 3-1/4 size for photographs. 6 Scan Settings 6-14 ineo 223/283/363/423 6.2 6.2.8 Image Adjustment Adjust the background density or sharpness for the scanned document. Background Removal Adjust the background density of the scanned original. When scanning a colored-paper original, the background color may be scanned resulting in the entire image becoming dark. To avoid this, you can adjust the background density. Select the background removal method, and specify the level. To automatically adjust the density, press [Auto]. Reference - To prevent the dark part in the back side from being scanned as shade, select [Bleed Removal]. - To scan an original with the colored background such as a map, select [Paper Discoloration Adj]. ineo 223/283/363/423 6-15 6.2 Scan Settings 6 Sharpness This settings allows you to sharpen character edges or other borders for the scanned document. 6.2.9 Application - Frame Erase Configure the setting for erasing frames on a two-page spread. Reference - If you have specified the frame width to be erased in the Frame Erase setting of the Book Copy function, the same value is automatically configured for this [Frame Erase] function. - To erase all frames with the same width, specify a numeric value between 1/16 and 2 inches (0.1 and 50.0 mm) under [Frame]. - To individually specify the top, left, right, and bottom widths, press the desired button and specify a numeric value for that side. - To not erase frames, press [None]. 6 Scan Settings 6-16 ineo 223/283/363/423 6.2 6.2.10 Application - Book Copy Configure settings to scan a two-page spread. Settings include scanning method, binding positions and erasing unwanted areas. For paper size of the original, select the size of the spread. Book copy method Select the scanning method. Book Erase - Frame Erase Configure the setting for erasing frames on a two-page spread. Reference - If you have specified the frame width to be erased in the Frame Erase function, the same value is automatically configured for this [Frame Erase] setting of the Book Copy function. - To erase all frames with the same width, specify a numeric value between 1/16 and 2 inches (0.1 and 50.0 mm) under [Frame]. - To individually specify the top, left, right, and bottom widths, press the desired button and specify a numeric value for that side. - To not erase frames, press [None]. Item Description [Book Spread] Scans a two-page spread as a single page. [Separation] Scans a two-page spread as two pages (left and right). [Front Cover] Scans the first page as a front cover. [Front + Back Covers] Scans the first page as a front cover, the second page as a back cover, and the third and subsequent pages as a body. ineo 223/283/363/423 6-17 6.2 Scan Settings 6 Book Erase - Center Erase Configure settings to erase the shaded part around the binding position in the center of the original. Reference - Use the keypad or press [-] or [+] to enter a numeric value between 1/16 and 1-3/16 inches (0.1 and 30.0 mm). Binding Position If you have selected Separation, Front Cover, or Front + Back Covers, press [Binding Position], and then select the binding position. 6 Scan Settings 6-18 ineo 223/283/363/423 6.2 6.2.11 Separate Scan The scan operation can be divided into several sessions by types of originals, for example, when all pages of originals cannot be loaded into the ADF, when the originals are placed on the original glass, or when singlesided originals and double-sided originals are mixed. Press [Separate Scan] to highlight the display. ineo 223/283/363/423 6-19 6.3 Original Settings 6 6.3 Original Settings Specify the type of original that is loaded, for example, if it contains mixed page sizes or Z-folded originals. Under Original Settings, you can select two or more items at the same time. 6.3.1 Special Original The available setting items are as follows. 6.3.2 Direction Settings - Original Direction Select the orientation of the original. After the document is scanned, the data is processed so that it is correctly oriented. Item Contents [Mixed Original] Select this setting when loading originals with different sizes together into the ADF. The scanning speed will be lowered because the size of each page is detected before it is scanned. [Z-Folded Original] Select this setting to detect the size of a Z-folded original by the length fed through the ADF. [Long Original] Select this setting for originals that are longer than the standard size. 6 Original Settings 6-20 ineo 223/283/363/423 6.3 6.3.3 Direction Settings - Binding Position Select the binding position of the original when it has punched holes or is stapled. When a double-sized original is scanned, the binding position is corrected on the back side. 6.3.4 Despeckle Reduces the influence of a dirt of the slit glass upon the scanned image when loading an original in the ADF. Reference - Specifying Despeckle will drop the scanning speed. - If the slit glass is too dirty, clean it. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. Item Description [Auto] Sets the binding position to the long side if the size is 11-11/16 inches (297 mm) or smaller, or the short side otherwise. [Top] Select this setting if the original is loaded with the binding position at the top. [Left] Select this setting if the original is loaded with the binding position at the top. 7 Use/File ineo 223/283/363/423 7-3 7.1 Overview of the Use/File operations 7 7 Use/File 7.1 Overview of the Use/File operations 7.1.1 Functions of Use/File Printing a document You can print a document that was saved in a User Box in the Copy, Fax/Scan, print instruction, or Fax reception mode. You can add finishing settings such as the number of copies or 2-sided print settings during printing the document. In addition, you can specify Combine to print two or more documents at the same time. Sending You can distribute a document that was saved in a User Box in the Copy, Fax/Scan, print instruction, or Receive mode, for example, by E-mail or fax. You can add finishing or transmission settings when distributing the document. You can also specify Bind TX to select two or more documents and distribute them at the same time. Filing You can perform various document filing operations such as moving or copying documents between User Boxes. You can also save a document stored in a User Box in the external memory. Application settings You can move or rotate pages in saved documents, or register overlay images. 7 Overview of the Use/File operations 7-4 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.1 7.1.2 Detail of the Use Document screen Select the User Box where you want to print and distribute documents. The following screen is displayed. This section describes the setting items, pointing to the Public User Box as an example. No. Name Description 1 [Print] Configure settings to print the selected documents. (p. 7-6) 2 [Send] Configure the destination and other settings to send the selected documents. (p. 7-34) 3 [Filing Settings] Rename, move, or copy the selected documents. (p. 7-64) 4 [Application] Edit the selected document on a page-basis or register overlay images. (p. 7-70) 5 [Save Document] Select this tab to display the Save Document screen. The Use/File settings you have configured are canceled. 6 − Displays the number and name of the specified User Box. 7 − Displays a list of the documents saved in the User Box. 8 [ ][ ] If the specified User Box contains seven or more documents, use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up or down the list. 9 [Select All] Press this button to select all documents in the specified User Box. 10 [Reset] Press this button to reset all documents in the User Box. 11 [Detail View]/[Thumbnail View] Press this button to switch the display format of saved documents. [Thumbnail View]: A reduced image of the first page, number of pages, and document name of each document are displayed. [Detail View]: The time stored, user name, and document name of each document are displayed. Every time you press the [Time Stored] column header, the documents are sorted in ascending or descending order of the time stored alternately. 12 Print Settings/Transmission Settings/ Filing Settings/ Application Settings Configurable items for the selected tab are displayed. 13 [Document Details] Press this button to check the detailed information or preview image of the document. 4 6 7 1 2 3 11 12 9 10 13 5 8 ineo 223/283/363/423 7-5 7.1 Overview of the Use/File operations 7 7.1.3 If a password is specified for a User Box If a password is specified for a User Box, the password entry screen appears. Enter the password, and press [OK]. 7 Print 7-6 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.2 7.2 Print This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. 7.2.1 Overview of the Print tab Description of the Print tab Select the [Print] tab to display the following screen. The available setting items for [Print] are as follows. dReference For details on other items, refer to page 7-4. No. Name Description 1 [Print] Configure settings to print the selected documents. If you have selected multiple documents, the document print setting function is not available. (p. 7-8) 2 [Combine] Configure the printing order or other setting to print two or more document selected. (p. 7-8) 2 1 ineo 223/283/363/423 7-7 7.2 Print 7 Print Press [Print] to display the following screen. In the Print screen, the two categories of the configurable items are provided: [Basic] and [Application]. Combine Press [Combine], and then configure Combine settings to display the following screen. In the Combine screen, two categories of the configurable items are provided: [Basic] and [Application]. No. Name Description 1 [Basic] Configure the basic settings such as the number of copies and 1-Sized or 2-Sized printing. 2 [Application] Configure the more complicated settings such as the page margin and stamp. 1 2 No. Name Description 1 [Basic] Configure the basic settings such as the number of copies and 1-Sized or 2-Sized printing. 2 [Application] Configure the more complicated settings such as the page margin and stamp. 1 2 7 Print 7-8 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.2 7.2.2 Print In the Print - Print Details screen, configure or change the following functions. Reference - The staple function is available when the optional Finisher FS-527 or Finisher FS-529 is installed. - The Punch settings is available when the Punch Kit is installed on the optional Finisher FS-527. - The Fold/Bind function is available when the Saddle Stitcher is installed on the optional Finisher FS- 527. 7.2.3 Combine Document Order After selecting documents, press [Combine] to display the document order selection screen. Documents will be printed in the order they are displayed in this screen. When this screen appears, the documents are displayed in the order they were selected. Reference - To change the order, select a reorder source document, then a reorder destination document. If a document has a watermark at the head, the same watermark is also printed for the second and subsequent documents. If a document does not have a watermark at the head, no watermark is printed even when it is specified for some of the second and subsequent documents. Item Description [Copies:] Specify the number of copies. [Print] Select either 1-Sided Print or 2-Sided Print. [Finishing] Configure settings such as for sorting or grouping, stapling, punching, or folding or center stapling. [Combine] Configure settings to print multiple (2, 4, or 8) pages on one page when printing a multi-page document. Specify the number of sheets per page and the combination order. [Zoom] Configure settings to enlarge or reduce an image when printing documents. Select the magnification. [Page Margin] The page margin is set to the left, right, or top of paper. You can shift the image part according to the page margin. [Sheet/Cover/ Chapter Insert] Configure settings to insert a cover sheet, insert sheets between selected pages, or insert sheets for separating chapters. [Stamp/Composition] Configure settings to print the determined items such as date and time or stamp. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-9 7.2 Print 7 Configurable items to combine and print documents In the Combine - Print Details screen, configure or change the settings for the following functions. Reference - The staple function is available when the optional Finisher FS-527 or Finisher FS-529 is installed. - The Punch settings is available when the Punch Kit is installed on the optional Finisher FS-527. - The Fold/Bind function is available when the Saddle Stitcher is installed on the optional Finisher FS-527. - When combining and printing document, you cannot select the Sort, or Group function. Item Description [Copies:] Specify the number of copies. [Print] Select either 1-Sided Print or 2-Sided Print. [Finishing] Configure settings such as for offsetting, stapling, punching, or folding or center stapling. [Continuous Print] Configure this item when [2-Sided] is selected in [Print]. Specify whether, after printing an odd-page document, to print the first page of the next document on the back side of the last page of the first document. [Page Margin] The page margin is set to the left, right, or top of paper. You can shift the image part according to the page margin. [Stamp/Composition] Configure settings to print the determined items such as date and time or stamp. 7 Print - Basic (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-10 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.3 7.3 Print - Basic (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. 7.3.1 Copies Use the keypad to enter the number of copies. The allowable range is 1 to 9999. Reference - To reset the setting to 1, press the [C] key on the control panel. 7.3.2 1-Sided/2-Sided Select whether to print one side or both sides of sheets of paper. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-11 7.3 Print - Basic (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 7.3.3 Finishing Configure sorting, grouping, finishing and other settings. The number of punched holes varies depending on the country you are in. dReference When the finisher is installed, you can change the ejection method in Administrator Settings. For the Offset function, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. Sort/Group Selecting Sort feeds copies by set. Selecting Group feeds copies by page. Offset Select Yes to sort sheets by set or page so that the user knows where the document is separated. When the finisher is installed, the printed sheets are fed while shifting them for each separation. When the finisher is not installed, the printed sheets are fed while alternately sorting them. Staple Printed sheets are stapled at a corner or two points. 7 Print - Basic (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-12 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.3 Staple - Position Setting If you select the type of stapling, specify the position. The following screen shows an example of [2 Position]. Punch Printed sheets are punched for filing. Punch - Position Setting Specify hole positions. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-13 7.3 Print - Basic (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 Fold/Bind The following settings are available when the Saddle Stitcher is installed on the Finisher FS-527. Select the desired function. Item Description [Half-Fold] Folds printed sheets of paper before being fed. [Center Staple & Fold] Staples printed sheets of paper at two center points and folds them in two before being fed. 7 Print - Basic (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-14 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.3 7.3.4 Combine A multi-page original is combined and printed on one page. 7.3.5 Zoom The images can be enlarged or reduced when they are printed. Specify the magnification. Item Description [2in1] Combines a 2-page original into one page. [4in1] Combines a 4-page original into one page. You can select the combining order of original pages. [8in1] Combines An 8-page original into one page. You can select the combining order of original pages. Item Description [Existing Setting] Prints A document with the magnification that was specified when it was saved. [Manual] Specify the magnification between 25.0% and 400.0% on a 0.1% basis. Use the keypad to directly enter the magnification. [Full Size] Prints a document with the size specified when it was saved, without being enlarged or reduced. [Minimal] Reduces a document slightly to leave margin around the image. [+][-] Press this button to adjust the zoom ratio of the image on a 0.1% basis. [Fixed Zoom] Specify the fixed magnification that is preset in this machine. This setting is useful when enlarging or reducing documents to a standard size. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-15 7.3 Print - Basic (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 Reference - Regardless of the Use Existing Color Setting or Original Type setting, you can print documents saved in A4v size in enlarged A3w size. To rotate and enlarge the image as shown in the example, you must previously set [Enlargement Rotation] to [Allow] in the Utility menu. For details on the enlargement rotation, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. 7.3.6 Continuous Print You can select this setting if you have selected 2-Sided printing when combining and printing documents. Multiple document are printed continuously when they are combined and printed. When printing in 2-Sided mode, select whether, if printing a document ends on the front side of a sheet of paper, to start printing of the next document on the back side of the sheet or on the front side of a new sheet. Reference - [Yes]: The next document is printed continuously from the back side of the last page of the previous document. - [No]: The next document is printed from the front side of a new sheet. [User Preset Zoom] In addition to fixed magnifications, preset frequently used magnifications in advance and use them later. • You can preset up to three magnifications. dReference For details on presetting magnifications, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. Item Description 7 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-16 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.4 7.4 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. 7.4.1 Page Margin The page margin is set to the left, right, or top of paper. It can assure a punching or stapling space. Page Margin Image Shift When a page margin is created, the image can be shifted according the position of the margin. You can specify the shift length to move the image to the left, right, top, or bottom within 1/16 to 10 inches (0.1 to 250.0 mm) to fit the page margin position. Reference - Specify the page margin width on a 1/16 inch (0.1 mm) basis by pressing [-] or [+]. - To set the margin width to 0 inch (0 mm), press [No Shift]. Item Description [Margin Position] Select the margin position. [Auto Zoom]: A page margin position along the long side of the paper is selected if the original length is 11-11/16 inches (297 mm) or less. A page margin is created along the short side of the paper if the original length exceeds 11-11/16 inches (297 mm). [Top]: Select this setting to position a margin on the top. [Left]: Select this setting to position a margin on the left. [Right]: Select this setting to position a margin on the right. [Adjust Value] Specify the width of a page margin between 1/16 and 3/4 inches (0.1 and 20.0 mm). To set the margin width to 0 inch (0 mm), press [None]. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-17 7.4 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 Image Shift - Change Back Shift To create a page margin in 2-Sided printing mode, press [Change Back Shift] to specify the image shift length on the back side. You can specify the shift length to move the image to the left, right, top, or bottom within 1/16 to 10 inches (0.1 to 250.0 mm) to fit the page margin position. Reference - Specify the page margin width on a 1/16 inch (0.1 mm) basis by pressing [-] or [+]. - To set the margin width to 0 inch (0 mm), press [No Shift]. 7.4.2 Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert You can configure the Cover Sheet, Insert Sheet, or Chapters function. Item Description [Cover Sheet] Prints documents with front and back covers. [Insert Sheet] Inserts colored sheets or other type of paper before the specified pages when documents are printed. [Chapters] Configure this setting when printing documents in 2-Sided printing mode. Documents are printed while pages are fed so that the specified pages, the first page of each chapter for example, necessarily turns to the front side. 7 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-18 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.4 7.4.3 Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert - Cover Sheet Documents are printed with front and back covers. The available setting items are as follows. The following shows the front and back cover settings. Item Description [Front Cover]/ [Back Cover] Configure settings for front and back covers. For details, refer to the table below. [Paper] Select a paper tray in the following cases. • When [Front (Copy)] or [Front (Blank)] is selected for [Front Cover] • When [Back (Copy)] or [Back (Blank)] is selected for [Back Cover] Item Description Front Cover None A front cover is not attached to a document. Front (Copy) The first page of a document is printed on the front cover sheet. The second page is printed on the back side of the front cover sheet when [2-Sided] printing is selected. Front (Blank) A blank sheet is inserted before the first page of a document. Back Cover None A back cover is not attached to a document. Back (Copy) The last page of a document is printed on the back cover sheet. The last two pages are printed on the front and back sides of the back cover sheet when [2-Sided] printing is selected. Back (Blank) A blank sheet is inserted after the last page of a document. ABC COVERABC ineo 223/283/363/423 7-19 7.4 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 Reference - Load the front and back cover sheets in the tray in advance. - To add cover sheet setting when printing the document that you copied and saved in a User Box, either one of the following conditions must have been satisfied when you saved the document. – A paper tray was specified – Cover Sheets were configured 7.4.4 Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert - Insert Sheet Colored sheets or other type of paper are inserted before the specified pages when documents are printed. You can configure the setting to insert sheets into up to 30 positions in an original of up to 999 pages. The available setting items are as follows. Select [Copy] or [Blank] in Insert Type. Configure the setting as follows depending on whether you select 1- Sided or 2-Sided printing. Example: When page "6" is specified Item Description Page specification/[ Sort] Specify a page you want to insert a sheet into. Press a page button, and use the keypad to enter the desired page number. To sort the entered pages in ascending order, press [Sort]. [Insert Paper] Select a tray to load the sheets to be inserted. Check that sheets are loaded with the same size and orientation as for the printing paper. [Insert Type] Specify whether to print a document on the inserted sheets (Copy) or leave them blank (Blank). For details, refer to the table below. Item Description [Copy] (when 1- Sided is selected) A sheet is inserted as the sixth sheet and the sixth page of the document is printed on that sheet. [Copy] (when 2- Sided is selected) The back side of the third sheet is left blank. A specified sheet is inserted as the fourth sheet and the sixth and seventh pages of the document are printed on that sheet. 7 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-20 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.4 7.4.5 Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert - Chapters You can configure this setting when printing documents in 2-Sided printing mode. Documents are printed while pages are fed so that the specified pages, the first page of each chapter for example, necessarily turns to the front side. You can configure the setting to insert sheets into up to 30 positions in an original of up to 999 pages. The available setting items are as follows. [Blank] (when 1- Sided is selected) A specified sheet is inserted after the sixth page. [Blank] (when 2- Sided is selected) A specified sheet is inserted as the fourth sheet. When you specify an odd pages, the back side of the inserted sheet is left blank. Item Description Item Description Page specification/[ Sort] Specify front-sided pages. Press a page button, and use the keypad to enter the desired page number. To sort the entered pages in ascending order, press [Sort]. [Chapter Paper] To copy document data on chapter sheets, select [Copy Insert] and select a chapter paper tray. Check that sheets are loaded with the same size and orientation as for the printing paper. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-21 7.4 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 7.4.6 Stamp/Composition In Stamp/Composition screen, you can configure the following functions. 7.4.7 Stamp/Composition - Date/Time The date and time of printing are printed on the pages. Item Description [Date/Time] The date and time of printing are printed on the pages. [Page Number] A page number is printed on all pages of a document. [Stamp] A preset character string such as "URGENT" is printed on pages. [Copy Protect] Hidden text is printed on all pages to prevent unauthorized copying. [Copy Guard] A stamp is printed on all pages as a copy guard. [Password Copy] A document is printed with an embedded password on all pages to prevent unauthorized copying. [Stamp Repeat] Text or an image is repeatedly printed on all pages. [Header/Footer] A header or footer is printed on pages. • This item is not displayed when the header or footer is not registered. dReference For details on how to register a header or footer, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations] or [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. [Registered Overlay] A registered image is overlaid on printed pages. • This item is not displayed when no overlay image is registered. dReference For details on how to register an overlay image, refer to page 7-78. Item Description [Date Format] Select the format for the date. [Time Format] Specify whether to add the time, and select the format to display the time. [Pages] Select whether to print the date and time on all pages or the first page only. [Print Position] Specify the print position. To fine-adjust the print position, press [Adjust Position]. Specify the shift length of the print position to the left, right, top or bottom using a value between 1/16 and 1-15/16 inches (0.1 and 50.0 mm) [Text Details] Specify the details of text to be printed. • [Text Color]: Select the printing color from black, red, blue, green, yellow, cyan, or magenta. • [Text Size]: Select the printing text size from 8 pt, 10 pt, 12 pt, or 14 pt. • [Text Type]: Select the font type from Times Roman or Helvetica. 7 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-22 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.4 Reference - [Text Details] - [Text Color] cannot be selected when printing. 7.4.8 Stamp/Composition - Page Number The page number is printed on all pages of the document. Settings Reference - [Text Details] - [Text Color] cannot be selected when printing. Item Description [Starting Page Number] Specify the starting page number. [Starting Chapter Number] Specify the starting chapter number. [Page Number Type] Select the format to display a page number. [Insert Sheet Setting] Specify whether to print a page number on an inserted sheet. For the available settings, refer to page 7-23. [Print Position] Specify the print position. To fine-adjust the print position, press [Adjust Position]. Specify the shift length of the print position to the left, right, top or bottom using a value between 1/16 and 1-15/16 inches (0.1 and 50.0 mm) [Text Details] Specify the details of text to be printed. • [Text Color]: Select the printing color from black, red, blue, green, yellow, cyan, or magenta. • [Text Size]: Select the printing text size from 8 pt, 10 pt, 12 pt, or 14 pt. • [Text Type]: Select the font type from Times Roman or Helvetica. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-23 7.4 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 Insert Sheet Setting Specify whether to print a page number on inserted sheets. 7.4.9 Stamp/Composition - Stamp A preset character string such as "URGENT" is printed on pages. Item Description [Cover Sheet] [Print on Front and Back Cover] A page number is printed on the front and back covers. [Print on Back Cover only] A page number is not printed on the front cover. [Do not print Page Number] A page number is printed on neither the front cover nor the back cover. [Insert Sheet (Copy)] [Print Page #] A page number is printed on inserted copy sheets. [Do Not Print #] A page number is not printed on inserted copy sheets. [Skip the Page(s)] Inserted copy sheets are not counted. Page numbers are not printed. [Insert (Blank)] [Do Not Print #] Page numbers are not printed on inserted blank sheets. [Skip the Page(s)] Inserted blank sheets are not counted. Page numbers are not printed. Item Description [Stamp Type/Preset Stamps] Select a stamp type such as URGENT, PLEASE REPLY, or DO NOT COPY. [Pages] Select whether to print the date and time on all pages or the first page only. 7 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-24 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.4 7.4.10 Stamp/Composition -Copy Security -Copy Protect Hidden text is printed on all pages to prevent unauthorized copying. When a document printed with copy protection text is copied, the hidden text appears clearly repeated throughout the pages of the copies so that the reader knows that it is a copy. Configure the setting for the copy protect to be applied. You can apply up to eight strings or stamps. If you set the angle of strings or stamps to 45 degrees (or -45 degrees), however, the number of areas in which you can place strings or stamps is limited to 4. In the Copy Protect screen, you can configure the following settings. [Text Size] Select the printing text size from Minimal or Standard. [Print Position] Specify the print position. To fine-adjust the print position, press [Adjust Position]. Specify the shift length of the print position to the left, right, top or bottom using a value between 1/16 and 1-15/16 inches (0.1 and 50.0 mm). Item Description Item Description [Copy Protect Type] Select a type of copy protect to be printed. [Detail Settings] Press this button to specify the density and text size of copy protect to be printed. [Position] Press this button to specify the angle and printing order of copy protect to be printed. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-25 7.4 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 Copy Protect Type Detail Settings Press [Detail Settings] to specify the density, background pattern, and other items. Position In the Copy Protect setting screen, press [Position] to specify the print position by angling the selected stamp or leaving a space. Configure the following settings. - Setting an angle of the copy protect within the area (+45 degrees/0 degrees/-45 degrees) - Inserting a space between copy protects - Reordering printing order of copy protect - Deleting the copy protect or space Item Description [Registered Stamp] Press this button to apply the stamp images that were pre-registered with the utility software. • Use Copy Protection Utility to register stamps. For details, refer to the relevant utility software manual. • Registered stamps may require multiple areas depending on their contents. [Preset Stamp] Press this button to apply a standard string such as Invalid Copy, Copy, or Private as a preset stamp. One stamp requires one area. [Date/Time] Press this button to apply the date and time the document was registered. • [Date Format] requires one area. • [Time Format] requires one area. [Other] Press this button to specify the job number, serial number, and distribution control number the document was registered with. • [Job Number]: The job number for the print job is printed. A job number requires one area. • [Serial Number]: The serial number assigned to this machine is printed. The serial number requires one area. The serial number is assigned at the time of shipment of this machine. For details on settings, contact your service representative. • [Distribution Control Number]: The entered number of copies is printed. A distribution control number requires one area. Enter the distribution control number, and select "Number Only" or "Put zeros in front(total 8-digits)" as the output format. Item Description [Density] Select the density from the light, standard, or dark. [Copy Protect Pattern] Select the pattern and contrast to be applied when the copy is reproduced. Select the patter from Emboss Text or Emboss Background. [Text Size] Select the printing text size from Minimal, Standard, or Large. [Pattern Overwrite] Select pattern printing from Front (Overwrite) or Back. [Background Pattern] Select the background pattern from eight types. Item Description [Change Pos./Delete] Select a copy protect to be changed, and then press [Change Position]/[Insert Space]/[Delete]. 7 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-26 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.4 7.4.11 Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Guard To prevent unauthorized copying, this function prints a text such as "Invalid Copy" or "Private" or information such as Date/Time on all pages of paper as a copy guard (copy inhibit information) when printing. A page with a copy guard printed on it cannot be copied or saved in a User Box. Configure the setting for the copy guard to be applied. You can apply up to 6 copy guards. For Copy Guard, you can configure the following settings. Copy Guard Type Item Description [Copy Guard Type] Select a type of copy guard. [Detail Settings] Specify the pattern and text size of the selected copy guard. Item Description [Preset Stamp] Press this button to apply a standard string such as Invalid Copy, Copy, or Private as a preset stamp. One stamp requires one area. [Date/Time] Press this button to apply the date and time the document was registered. • [Date Format] requires one area. • [Time Format] requires one area. [Other] Press this button to specify the job number, serial number, and distribution control number the document was registered with. • [Job Number]: The job number for the print job is printed. A job number requires one area. • [Serial Number]: The serial number assigned to this machine is printed. The serial number requires one area. The serial number is assigned at the time of shipment of this machine. For details on settings, contact your service representative. • [Distribution Control Number]: The entered number of copies is printed. A distribution control number requires one area. Enter the distribution control number, and select "Number Only" or "Put zeros in front(total 8-digits)" as the output format. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-27 7.4 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 Detail Settings Press [Detail Settings] to specify the contrast, background pattern, and other items. 7.4.12 Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Password Copy To prevent unauthorized copying, this function configures stamp settings for a text such as "Invalid Copy" or "Private" or information such as Date/Time on all pages of paper, and prints with an embedded password. When a sheet of paper with an embedded password is copied, scanned, or saved in a User Box, the currently running job is suspended, and the password entry screen is displayed. In this case, enter the password to carry out the desired operation. To enable Password Copy, select [Yes], and press [Password] to specify the password. Reference - For confirmation, enter the password twice in the control panel. If a password is specified, you can configure a stamp. You can apply up to 6 stamps. Item Description [Copy Guard Pattern] Specify the contrast of a copy guard. [Emboss Background] is selected for the pattern. [Text Size] Select the printing text size from Minimal, Standard, or Large. [Background Pattern] Select the background pattern from eight types. Item Description [Stamp Type] Select the type of stamps. [Detail Settings] Specify the pattern and text size of the selected password copy. 7 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-28 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.4 Stamp Type Detail Settings Press [Detail Settings] to specify the contrast, background pattern, and other items. 7.4.13 Stamp/Composition - Stamp Repeat Text or an image is repeatedly printed on all pages. Copy Protect stamps are used to prevent recopying. However, Stamp Repeat stamps can be recopied. You can apply up to eight strings or stamps. If you set the angle of strings or stamps to 45 degrees (or -45 degrees), however, the number of areas in which you can place strings or stamps is limited to 4. In the Stamp Repeat screen, you can configure the following settings. Item Description [Preset Stamp] Press this button to apply a standard string such as Invalid Copy, Copy, or Private as a preset stamp. One stamp requires one area. [Date/Time] Press this button to apply the date and time the document was registered. • [Date Format] requires one area. • [Time Format] requires one area. [Other] Press this button to specify the job number, serial number, and distribution control number the document was registered with. • [Job Number]: The job number for the print job is printed. A job number requires one area. • [Serial Number]: The serial number assigned to this machine is printed. The serial number requires one area. The serial number is assigned at the time of shipment of this machine. For details on settings, contact your service representative. • [Distribution Control Number]: The entered number of copies is printed. A distribution control number requires one area. Enter the distribution control number, and select "Number Only" or "Put zeros in front(total 8-digits)" as the output format. Item Description [Password Copy Pattern] Specify the contrast of a pattern. [Emboss Background] is selected for the pattern. [Text Size] Select the printing text size from Minimal, Standard, or Large. [Background Pattern] Select the background pattern from eight types. Item Description [Stamp Repeat Type] Select a type of stamp repeat to be printed. [Detail Settings] Specify the color, density, and text size of stamp repeat to be printed. [Position] Select the angle or printing order of stamp repeat to be printed. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-29 7.4 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 Stamp Repeat Type Item Description [Registered Stamp] Press this button to apply the stamp images that were pre-registered with the utility software. • Use Copy Protection Utility to register stamps. For details, refer to the relevant utility software manual. • Registered stamps may require multiple areas depending on their contents. [Preset Stamp] Press this button to apply a standard string such as Invalid Copy, Copy, or Private as a preset stamp. One stamp requires one area. [Date/Time] Press this button to apply the date and time the document was registered. • [Date Format] requires one area. • [Time Format] requires one area. [Other] Press this button to specify the job number, serial number, and distribution control number the document was registered with. • [Job Number]: The job number for the print job is printed. A job number requires one area. • [Serial Number]: The serial number assigned to this machine is printed. The serial number requires one area. The serial number is assigned at the time of shipment of this machine. For details on settings, contact your service representative. • [Distribution Control Number]: The entered number of copies is printed. A distribution control number requires one area. Enter the distribution control number, and select "Number Only" or "Put zeros in front(total 8-digits)" as the output format. 7 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-30 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.4 Detail Settings Press [Detail Settings] to specify the density, character size, and other items. Position In the Stamp Repeat setting screen, press [Position] to determine the print position of the stamp, for example, by angling the stamp or leaving a space. Configure the following settings. - Setting an angle of the stamp repeat within the area (+45 degrees/0 degrees/45 degrees) - Inserting a space between stamp repeats - Reordering printing order of stamp repeat - Deleting the stamp repeat or space 7.4.14 Stamp/Composition - Header/Footer Configure settings to insert the header or footer. To insert the header or footer, you must register their contents in Administrator Settings in advance. Press Check/Change Temporarily to temporarily change and print the contents of the registered header and footer. dReference For details on how to register the header or footer, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. Item Description [Density] Select the density from the light, standard, or dark. [Text Size] Select the printing text size from Minimal, Standard, or Large. [Pattern Overwrite] Select pattern printing from [Front (Overwrite)], [Transparent], or [Back]. Item Description [Change Pos./Delete] Select Stamp Repeat to be changed, and press [Change Position]/[Insert Space]/[Delete] to specify. Item Description [Recall Header/ Footer] Select the desired ones from the registered headers and footers. [Check/Change Temporarily] Press this button to check or change the selected header or footer. For details, refer to page 7-31. [Reset] Press this button to cancel the use of the temporarily changed header or footer. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-31 7.4 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 Check/Change Temporarily In the Header/Footer setting screen, press [Check/Change Temporarily] to change the registered header or footer. Reference - [Text Details] - [Text Color] cannot be selected when printing. Item Description [Header Settings], [Footer Settings] Specify whether to print the header and footer. Press [Print] to configure the following setting. • [Text]: Specify a header or footer text in the touch panel. • [Date/Time]: Configure the date and time settings for the header or footer. • [Other]: Configure setting to add the distribution control number, job number, or serial number to the header or footer. The serial number is assigned at the time of shipment of this machine. For details on settings, contact your service representative. [Pages] Select whether to print the header and footer on all pages or the first page only. [Text Details] Specify the details of text to be printed. • [Text Color]: Select the printing color from black, red, blue, green, yellow, cyan, or magenta. • [Text Size]: Select the printing text size from 8 pt, 10 pt, 12 pt, or 14 pt. • [Text Type]: Select the font type from Times Roman or Helvetica. 7 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-32 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.4 7.4.15 Stamp/Composition - Registered Overlay Settings A registered image is overlaid and printed on the specified pages. Select [Yes] to use an overlay image. Reference - Overlay images can be registered in Copy mode as well as in User Box mode. An overlay image that was registered in Copy mode can be used for printing a document in the User Box. An overlay image that was registered from an image in the User Box can be used in Copy mode. dReference For details on how to register an overlay image, refer to page 7-78. Item Description [Recall Overlay Image] Specify whether to print a registered overlay image on the front or back side. Press an item to select an overlay image and configures its setting. For details, refer to page 7-33. [Pages] Select whether to print the selected overlay image on all pages or the first page only. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-33 7.4 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 Overlay Setting Select an overlay image and configure it settings. You can also preview the image. Reference - The following shows three methods for composing an overlay. – [Transparent]: Increases the brightness of the overlay image to be superimposed. This setting prevents an original from being hidden by the composed overlay image. – [Background Composition (Original)]: Composes the original as the background. The overlay image is superimposed on the original when they are printed. – [Back]: Composes the overlay image as the background. The original is superimposed on the overlay image when they are printed. Item Description [Thumbnail View]/[Display Name] In the thumb-nail view, you can check overlay images. In the Display Name mode, you can check overlay images using their file names. Select the desired overlay image. [Detail Settings] Press this button to specify how to compose an overlay image. • [Density]: Use the keypad to enter the density of an overlay image (using a value between 20 to 100%). • [Composition]: Select Transparent, Background Composition (Original) or Back to specify how to compose an overlay image. [Image Details] Press this button to check the details of the overlay image including the preview image, size, and color. 7 Send 7-34 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.5 7.5 Send This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. 7.5.1 Overview of the Transmission Settings You can use the following functions to send a document saved in a User Box. Using these functions enables you to easily send data by only registering destinations in this machine without transferring data via computers. Description of the Send tab Press [Send] to display the following screen. The available setting items for [Transmission Settings] are as follows. dReference For details on other items, refer to page 7-4. Item Description Fax Sends document data by fax. E-mail Sends document data as an attachment file of an E-mail. Internet Fax Sends document data as an attachment file of an E-mail via an intranet or Internet. IP Address Fax Sends document data to the destination specified with the IP address (host name) or E-mail address of the destination. PC (SMB) Sends document data to the shared folder in the specified computer. FTP Sends document data to the specified FTP server. WebDAV Sends document data to the specified server via network. No. Item Description 1 [Send] Configure the destination and other settings to send the selected documents. If you have selected multiple documents, [Document Settings] and [Application] are not available. (p. 7-36) 2 [Bind TX] Configure the printing order or other setting to print two or more document selected. (p. 7-37) 1 2 ineo 223/283/363/423 7-35 7.5 Send 7 Send Press [Send] to display the following screen. You can configure transmission destination and additional functions. Bind TX Press [Bind TX] to display the following screen after specifying the bind order. Some destination types or function are not displayed since multiple documents are sent. No. Item Description 1 Configure the destinations Configure the destinations. (p. 7-38) 2 Configure the functions Configure the functions that can be added when transmitting documents. (p. 7-48) 1 2 No. Item Description 1 Configure the destinations Configure the destinations. (p. 7-38) 2 Configure the functions Configure the functions that can be added when transmitting documents. (p. 7-48) 1 2 7 Send 7-36 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.5 7.5.2 Transmission Settings Press [Send] to specify destinations and functions that can be added when transmitting documents. Reference - [Direct Input] is not displayed when Manual Destination Input is set to Restrict in [Security Settings] in Administrator Settings. No. Item Description 1 [Address Book] Press this button to select the recipient from the pre-registered destinations. 2 [Direct Input] Press this button to directly enter unregistered destinations. 3 [Job History] Select the recipients from the transmission log. 4 [Address Search] Press this button to search for the registered address when the LDAP server is used. 5 [Group] Press this button to list the registered group addresses. 6 [Search] Press this button to search the address book for destination. 7 [Document Settings] Press this button to specify the resolution, file type, or color when sending a document. 8 [Communication Settings] Press this button to configure communication settings. 9 [Application] Press this button to specify additional functions such as Stamp or Page Print. 1 2 3 4 9 5 6 7 8 ineo 223/283/363/423 7-37 7.5 Send 7 7.5.3 Combine Document Order After selecting documents, press [Bind TX] to display the binding order selection screen. Documents will be sent in the order they are displayed in this screen. When this screen appears, the documents are displayed in the order they were selected. Reference - To change the order, select a reorder source document, then a reorder destination document. 7 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-38 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.6 7.6 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. 7.6.1 Address Book - Search Search for transmission destinations. The following methods are available to search for the registered destinations. Address Type Press this button to search for the destination by address type that was specified when the destination is registered. dReference For details on the [Default Address Book] setting, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. The [Search] screen is displayed when you press [Search] if [Default Address Book] is set to [Index] in [User Settings] - [Custom Display Settings] - [Scan/Fax Settings] in the Utility menu. No. Item Description 1 [Address Type] Registers addresses by registered type. 1 ineo 223/283/363/423 7-39 7.6 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 Index The Index screen appears by index that was specified when they were registered. The [Index] screen is displayed when you press [Search] if [Default Address Book] is set to [Address Type] in [User Settings] - [Custom Display Settings] - [Scan/Fax Settings] in the Utility menu. Detail Search Enter the address name or a part of the address to search for the destination address. Select either [Name] or [Address], and enter an index. No. Item Description 1 [Index] Displays destinations for each registered index. 1 7 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-40 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.6 Detail Search - Search options In the Detail Search screen, select a condition to display search options. Select the additional search conditions, and press [OK]. Reference - To configure whether to display the search option screen and options displayed on that screen, use [Search Option Settings] in the setting menu. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. 7.6.2 Direct Input Directly enter an unregistered destination as a recipient. Reference - When Manual Destination Input is set to Individual Management in [Security Settings] in Administrator Settings, Direct Input is not available except for Fax. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-41 7.6 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 7.6.3 Direct Input - Fax Enter the fax number in the touch panel. Next Destination Press this button to continuously specify another destination. When the Confirm Address (TX) function is specified: You are prompted to enter the fax number again after pressing [OK]. Enter the fax number, and press [Start]. Reference - [Next Destination] can be selected on the second input screen. dReference For details on the Confirm Address (TX) function, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. 7.6.4 Direct Input - E-mail Enter the E-mail address in the touch panel. Reference - You can register the frequently used user names or domain names and call them when sending E-mail messages. Before you use this function, you must register the prefix and suffix in Administrator Settings. For details on the prefix and suffix, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator]. Next Destination Press this button to continuously specify another destination. 7 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-42 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.6 7.6.5 Direct Input - Internet Fax Enter the E-mail address in the touch panel. Reference - You can register the frequently used user names or domain names and call them when sending E-mail messages. Before you use this function, you must register the prefix and suffix in Administrator Settings. For details on the prefix and suffix, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator]. Next Destination Press this button to continuously specify another destination. Receiver RX Ability Select settings that are receivable in the Internet Fax destination. You can select multiple receivable settings. 7.6.6 Direct Input - IP Address Fax Enter the IP Address Fax destination. Item Description [Compression Type] Select JPEG Color, JPEG (Grayscale), MMR, MR, or MH. [Paper Size] Select A3, B4 or A4. [Resolution] 600e600 dpi (Ultra Fine), 400e400 dpi (Super Fine), 200e200 dpi (Fine), or 200e100 dpi (Standard). Item Description [Address] Enter the IP address (host name) or E-mail address of the destination. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-43 7.6 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 7.6.7 Direct Input - PC (SMB) Directly enter the PC (SMB) address. Host Name Specify the host name or IP address of the destination in the touch panel. File Path Enter the path of the destination folder in the touch panel. User Name Enter the login user name in the touch panel. Password Enter the login user password in the touch panel. Reference Check the folder information on the destination computer. Next Destination Press this button to continuously specify another destination. [Port Number] Use the keypad to enter the sending port number (using a value from 1 to 65535). [Destination Machine Type] Select [Color] when the destination machine supports color printing. [Next Destination] Press this button to continuously specify another destination. Item Description 7 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-44 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.6 7.6.8 Direct Input - FTP Directly enter the FTP address. Host Name Specify the host name or IP address of the destination in the touch panel. File Path Enter the path of the destination folder in the touch panel. User Name Enter the login user name in the touch panel. Press [Anonymous] to enter "anonymous". Password Enter the login user password in the touch panel. Detail Settings Press this button to configure the more detailed settings. Next Destination Press this button to continuously specify another destination. Item Description [Port Number] Enter a port number. [PASV] Specify whether to use the PASV mode. [Proxy] Specify whether to use a proxy server. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-45 7.6 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 7.6.9 Direct Input - WebDAV Directly enter the WebDAV destination. Host Name Specify the host name or IP address of the destination in the touch panel. File Path Enter the path of the destination folder in the touch panel. User Name Enter the login user name in the touch panel. Password Enter the login user password in the touch panel. Detail Settings Press this button to configure the more detailed settings. Next Destination Press this button to continuously specify another destination. Item Description [Port Number] Enter a port number. [Proxy] Specify whether to use a proxy server. [SSL Settings] Specify whether to use SSL for sending. 7 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-46 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.6 7.6.10 Job History Job History displays the latest five fax destinations that this machine have sent faxes to. You can select destinations from this history. 7.6.11 Address Search The [Address Search] tab is displayed when the LDAP server is configured in Administrator Settings. Reference - For details on the LDAP server setting, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator] - Enabling LDAP. - The display position of [Address Search] tab varies depending on user settings. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-47 7.6 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 7.6.12 LDAP Search - Search Enter a search keyword and press [Start Search] to search for the destination address in the specified LDAP server. 7.6.13 LDAP Search - Advanced Search Specify multiple search conditions to search for the target address. Name Enter the name in the touch panel. E-mail Addr. Enter the E-mail address in the touch panel. Fax Number Enter the fax number in the touch panel. Last Name Enter the last name in the touch panel. First Name Enter the first name in the touch panel. City Enter the city name in the touch panel. 7 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-48 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.6 Company Name Enter the company name in the touch panel. Department Enter the department in the touch panel. OR/AND/STARTS WITH/ENDS WITH Select the search condition from OR, AND, STARTS WITH, or ENDS WITH. When not specifying any conditions, press [No]. 7.6.14 Overview of the Document Settings Configure document settings such as the resolution or file type. 7.6.15 Document Settings - Resolution Select the resolution for sending faxes. Reference - This function is not available when performing Bind TX. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-49 7.6 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 7.6.16 Document Settings - File Type Specify the file type of data being transmitted. File Type The available file types are as follows. Reference - JPEG cannot be selected when binding and sending multiple documents. - If you select JPEG, [Page Separation] is automatically selected and set to [1 Every X Page(s)] in Scan Setting. - You can specify the compression format when saving a TIFF file in color. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. Item Description [PDF] Saves data in PDF format. [Compact PDF] Further compressed PDF file. [TIFF] Saves data in TIFF format. [JPEG] Saves data in JPEG format. [XPS] Saves data in XPS format. [Compact XPS] Saves data in further compressed XPS file. 7 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-50 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.6 Encryption If the [PDF] or [Compact PDF] is selected for the file format, the encryption level can be specified. Encryption - Detail Settings Configure the detailed permission settings when the document permission is specified in [Encryption]. Item Description [Encryption Level] Select the encryption level. [Password] Configure this item when you select the password for the encryption type. Enter the password necessary to open encrypted data (up to 32 characters). For confirmation, enter the password twice. [Document Permissions] Configure this item when you select the password for the encryption type. Enter the password necessary to change document permissions (up to 32 characters). For confirmation, enter the password twice. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-51 7.6 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 Press [Forward ] to further configure Changes Allowed settings. Item Description [Printing Allowed] Select whether to allow or restrict printing data. [Low Resolution] appears when the Encryption Level is set to [High level]. [Enable copying of text, images and other content] Select whether to allow or restrict extracting text images. 7 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-52 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.6 Stamp Composition Press this button to select how to compose the contents to be added in Stamp/Composition. Outline PDF Outline PDF can be selected when Compact PDF is selected for the file type. This function performs outline processing for characters, ensuring a smooth display image. It is also available when editing data using an application such as Adobe Illustrator. dReference This function enables you to specify the accuracy of outline processing when creating outline PDF data. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. Item Description [Changes Allowed] Select the permission level about changes to the document, including signing, entering, or commenting data. Item Description [Image] Select this setting to insert the text as an image. [Text] Select this setting to insert the text as text. • The date, time, page number, header, or footer is composed as text. • The stamp is composed as an image. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-53 7.6 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 Scan Setting Specify a collection of data. 7.6.17 Document Settings - Color Configure color settings to send documents. Data that has been saved using this machine contains the full color data even if it is saved in gray scale or black and white; therefore, it can be changed to full color when it is sent. Reference - This function is not available when performing Bind TX. - A document that has been saved in gray scale or black and white using a different machine does not contain the full color data; therefore, it cannot be changed to full color when it is sent. Item Description [Multi Page] Creates all the scanned originals as one file. This item cannot be specified together with the JPEG file type. [Page Separation] Separates the scanned data to save every specified number of pages to one file. Use the keypad to enter the number of pages to be saved in one file. • [Page Separation] cannot be selected when binding and sending multiple documents. [E-mail Attachment Method] Specify the method to use to attach a file to an E-mail when Page Separation is selected. • [All Files Sent as one (1) E-mail]: Attaches all files to one E-mail. • [One (1) File per E-Mail]: Attaches one file to one E-mail. Item Description [Use Existing Color Setting] Sends documents with the color setting used when they were saved. [Full Color] Sends documents in full color. [Gray Scale] Sends documents in gray scale. [Black] Sends documents in black and white. 7 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-54 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.6 7.6.18 Overview of the Communication Settings Configure communication lines, digital signature, and other communication settings. 7.6.19 Communication Settings - Line Setting Description of Line Settings Configure line settings for fax transmission. Overseas TX Faxes are sent to locations with poor communication conditions at a lower baud rate. Reference - This function cannot be used together with the following functions. – Polling TX – Polling RX – Bulletin board ineo 223/283/363/423 7-55 7.6 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 ECM OFF The Error Correction Mode (ECM) is turned off when sending data. ECM is an error correction mode defined by ITU-T (International Telecommunication Union - Telecommunication Standardization Sector). Fax machines equipped with the ECM feature communicate with each other, confirming that the data sent is free of errors. Thus, communication can be made free from disturbances due to line noises, etc. If noises frequently occur, it may take a slightly long time to complete a communication compared with ECM OFF. After sending has been ended, this machine automatically returns to ECM ON. Reference - This machine sends faxes in ECM ON unless ECM OFF is specified. - This function cannot be used together with the following functions. – Polling RX – Polling TX – V.34 OFF – Bulletin board registration – Bulletin board polling reception V.34 OFF V34 is a communication mode used for super G3 fax communication. When the remote machine or this machine is connected to a telephone line via PBX, however, you may not establish a communication in the super G3 mode depending on telephone line conditions. In this case, it is recommended that you turn V34 off to send data. After sending has been completed, this machine automatically returns to the V34 mode. Reference - This function cannot be used together with the following functions. – Polling RX – Polling TX – Bulletin board registration – Bulletin board polling reception – ECM OFF Check Dest. & Send The specified fax number is compared with the remote fax number (CSI) and data is sent only when those fax numbers match. If they do not match, the communication will fail; therefore preventing a sending error. Reference - To use the Check Dest. & Send, you must register the local fax number in the remote machine in advance. Select Line You can specify [Line 1] or [Line 2] for sending data when two optional Fax Kit are installed. Specify the line used for transmission. If you select [Not Set], either Line 1 or Line 2 whichever is not busy is used for transmission. If both lines are idle, Line 1 is used first. Reference - You cannot specify a line when [Line 2 Setting] is set to [RX Only] in [Multi Line Settings]. For details on the Multi Line Usage function, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. - To use two lines as external and extension lines, be sure to specify the line to be used. If you select [Not Set], a sending failure may occur. 7 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-56 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.6 7.6.20 Communication Settings - E-Mail Settings E-mail Settings Specify the document name, subject, From address and message body for sending e-mail messages. Document Name The name of the file to be saved is displayed. This document name can also be specified in the [File Document] screen. The document name whichever is specified later will be applied to this column. You can enter up to 30 characters. Subject The text specified in the Utility menu is automatically displayed. To change the contents, press [Direct Input]. You can enter up to 64 characters. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-57 7.6 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 From Displays the E-mail address of the administrator specified in the Utility menu. Reference - The E-mail address of this machine is used for Internet faxing. - You cannot directly enter the address when [Change the "From" Address] is set to Restrict in Administrator Settings - [System Settings] - [Restrict User Access] - [Restrict Access to Job Settings]. For details on the [Change the "From" Address] setting, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. Body The E-mail body specified in the Utility menu is displayed. To change the contents, press [Direct Input]. You can enter up to 256 characters. 7 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-58 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.6 7.6.21 Communication Settings - URL Notification Setting URL Notification Use the URL Notification function to specify the E-mail address to be notified about the completion of a job and data location. The URL contains information for linking to a User Box. Click the link in the text to directly move to the User Box screen. Reference - A destination for the User Box in the main unit, FTP, PC (SMB), and WebDAV operation can be specified for the destination in URL Notification Setting. - URL Notification Setting does not function when sending E-mails or faxes. - If the authentication mode or User Box password is enabled, the password input screen corresponding to each respective authentication status appears. On completion of all authentication processing, the User Box screen appears. Detail Search You can search for E-mail addresses from the registered destinations. Enter the address name or a part of the address to search for the destination address. Select either [Name] or [Destination], and enter an index. Direct Input Enter the E-mail address in the touch panel. Reference - You can register the frequently used user names or domain names and call them when sending E-mail messages. Before you use this function, you must register the prefix and suffix in Administrator Settings. For details on the prefix and suffix, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator]. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-59 7.6 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 7.6.22 Communication Settings - Communication Method Settings Specify how to send or receive data. Timer transmission (Timer TX) Specify the sending time. Transmitting faxes in discount telephone rate hours such as late at night or early in the morning will reduce the cost. Use the keypad to specify the communication starting time. Reference - It is specified in hours and minutes. - You cannot specify the date. 7 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-60 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.6 Password transmission (Password TX) Use this function to send a document by attaching a password. If the recipient's fax machine is set to closed network reception, the sender's fax machine should transmit the same password as used for the closed network reception. Reference - You can use this function only when the remote machine is our model and supports the closed network reception (with password) function. - Use the keypad to enter the password. F-Code transmission (F-Code TX) This function allows you send documents to a specific User Box of the remote machine by entering the SUB address and the password. F-Code TX can be used for the confidential transmission and relay transmission functions. Reference - To use the F-Code for transmission, the remote machine must support the F-Code function. Item Description Confidential TX Documents are sent to the Confidential RX User Box of the remote machine. Enter the destination User Box number in the SUB Address box and the confidential transmission password in the Password box. Relay TX Documents are sent to the Relay Distribution User Box of the remote machine when the remote machine supports the relay distribution function. Enter the Relay Distribution User Box number in the SUB Address box and the password in the Password box. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-61 7.6 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 7.6.23 Communication Settings - E-mail Encryption This item is displayed when [S/MIME Communication Settings] is set to [ON] in Administrator Settings - [Network Settings] - [E-Mail Settings]. Specify whether to encrypt E-mails to be sent from this machine. dReference For details on the S/MIME Communication Settings, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator]. 7.6.24 Communication Settings - Digital Signature This item is displayed when [S/MIME Communication Settings] is set to [ON] in Administrator Settings - [Network Settings] - [E-Mail Settings]. Select whether to add a digital signature to E-mails to be sent from this machine. Reference - You may not be able to add a digital signature or you may be forced to add a digital signature depending on the S/MIME communication settings. dReference For details on the S/MIME Communication Settings, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator]. 7.6.25 Communication Settings - Fax Header Settings Specify whether to attach sender information (TTI) when sending documents. Select the sender name from the sender name list. Reference - To register the contents of the header information to be added to the original, use [Header Information] in the Utility menu. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. - To register how the header information will be added, use [Header/Footer Position] in the Utility menu. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. 7 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-62 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.6 7.6.26 Overview of the Application settings Configure the other settings (Stamp/Composition, and Send & Print) that are available for sending documents. 7.6.27 Application - Stamp/Composition - Date/Time For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-21. 7.6.28 Application - Stamp/Composition - Page Number For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-22. 7.6.29 Application - Stamp/Composition - Stamp A preset character string such as "URGENT" is printed on pages. Item Description [Stamp Type/Preset Stamps] Select a stamp type such as URGENT, PLEASE REPLY, or DO NOT COPY. Pages Select whether to print the date and time on all pages or the first page only. [Text Size] Select the printing text size from Minimal or Standard. [Text Color] Select the printing color from black, red, blue, green, yellow, cyan, or magenta. [Print Position] Specify the print position. To fine-adjust the print position, press [Adjust Position]. Specify the shift length of the print position to the left, right, top or bottom using a value between 1/16 and 1-15/16 inches (0.1 and 50.0 mm) ineo 223/283/363/423 7-63 7.6 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 7.6.30 Application - Stamp/Composition - Header/Footer For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-30. 7.6.31 Application - Send & Print Specify whether to print documents while being sent. Also configure print settings. Item Description [Copies:] Use the keypad to enter the number of copies. A number between 1 and 9999 can be specified. [Simplex/Duplex] Select 1-Sided or 2-Sided. [Staple] Select whether to staple the printed sheets. [Staple] - [Position Setting] If you select the type of stapling, specify the position. Filing Settings (Pub 7 lic, Personal, or Group User Boxes) 7-64 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.7 7.7 Filing Settings (Public, Personal, or Group User Boxes) This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. 7.7.1 Overview of the Filing Settings You can rename or delete documents saved in a Public, Personal, or Group User Box so that the documents in the box are organized. The available functions are as follows. Description of the Filing Settings tab Press [Filing Settings] to display the following screen. The available setting items for [Filing Settings] are as follows. dReference For details on other items, refer to page 7-4. Item Description Delete Deletes an unnecessary document such as a document that you have printed or sent. Edit Name Renames a saved document. Move Moves the data of a saved document to another Public, Personal, or Group User Box. Copy Copies the data of a saved document to another Public, Personal, or Group User Box. Save in external memory Saves a document from a User Box into the external memory, which is connected to this machine. Document Details Enables you to check the date and time a document has been saved as well as a preview image. No. Item Description 1 [Delete] Deletes the selected document. 2 [Edit Name] Renames the selected document. 3 [Move] Configure settings to move the selected document. 4 [Copy] Configure settings to copy the selected document. 5 [Save to External Memory.] Saves the selected document in the external memory. 2 3 4 5 1 ineo 223/283/363/423 7-65 7.7 Filing Settings (Public, Personal, or Group User Boxes) 7 7.7.2 Deleting documents You can delete unnecessary files, for example the files you have already printed. You can select multiple files and delete them at the same time. After checking document details, press [Delete]. 7.7.3 Edit Name Renames a saved document. Enter a new name in the touch panel. Reference - The new document name will be used as the file name when it is set. Note that when you rename the document that you plan to send, consider the naming and other conditions forced by the destination server. - If necessary, you can rename the document just before you send it. 7.7.4 Moving documents Move a saved document to another User Box. For the destination User Box, a Public, Personal, or Group User Box can be selected. Select the destination User Box, check document data, and then press Start on the control panel or [Start] in the touch panel. Reference - The contents displayed in a Personal or Group User Box vary depending on the logged in user. - You do not need to enter the password even if it is specified in the destination User Box. Filing Settings (Pub 7 lic, Personal, or Group User Boxes) 7-66 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.7 7.7.5 Copy Copy the data of a saved document to another User Box. For the destination User Box, a Public, Personal, or Group User Box can be selected. Select the destination User Box, check document data, and then press Start on the control panel or [Start] in the touch panel. Reference - The contents displayed in a Personal or Group User Box vary depending on the logged in user. - You do not need to enter the password even if it is specified in the destination User Box. 7.7.6 Save in external memory You can save a document stored in a User Box to the external memory. Pressing [Document Settings], to configure the settings of a document to be saved. Reference - For information on the external memory, refer to page 7-100. - Multiple documents can be saved collectively. - A document cannot be renamed while it is being saved. Before saving a document, change the file name as appropriate. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-67 7.7 Filing Settings (Public, Personal, or Group User Boxes) 7 Document Settings You can specify the resolution, file type, and color of the document to be saved. If you select multiple documents, settings are reflected in all documents. Document Settings - Resolution Select the resolution of the document to be saved. Filing Settings (Pub 7 lic, Personal, or Group User Boxes) 7-68 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.7 Document Settings -File Type When specifying the file type, select [Yes]. The available setting items are as follows. Document Settings - Color For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-53. Item Description [File Type] Select the file type for the file to be saved. [Encryption] If the PDF or Compact PDF is selected for the file format, the encryption level can be specified. For details, refer to page 7-50. [Outline PDF] Configure this item when you select Compact PDF for the file type. For details, refer to page 7-52. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-69 7.7 Filing Settings (Public, Personal, or Group User Boxes) 7 7.7.7 Document Details Check the details of a saved document in the touch panel. Displaying detailed information Select a document, and press [Document Details] to check. The following information is displayed. Preview In the Document Details screen, press [Preview] to check the preview image of the saved document. You can view the image at full size or at a size of 2, 4 or 8 times the normal size. After you have changed the display size, use the scroll bars located in the right and the bottom of the image to view to the desired portion. Reference - For a document with multiple pages, only the image of the first page can be viewed. Item Description [Registered Time] Displays the date and time the document was registered. [User Name] Displays the user name or mode (SCAN, COPY, or PRINT) by which the document was registered. [Document Name] Displays the name of the document. [No. of Pages] Displays the number of pages in the document. [Job No.] Displays the job number when the document was registered. [ ][ ] If multiple documents are selected, use [ ] or [ ] to switch them. [Preview] Press this button to change to the Preview screen. For details, refer to page 7-69. 7 Application 7-70 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.8 7.8 Application This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. 7.8.1 Overview of the Application settings You can edit a document saved in a Public, Personal, or Group User Box by changing the order of or delete pages in the document. You can also register the image of a saved document to be overlaid on the printed data. The available functions are as follows. Description of the Application tab Press [Application] to display the following screen. The available setting items for [Application Settings] are as follows. dReference For details on other items, refer to page 7-4. Item Description Edit Document Deletes, rotates, or moves the selected page. Register Overlay Registers the image of a saved document to be overlaid on the printed data. Document Details Enables you to check the date and time a document has been saved as well as a preview image. No. Item Description 1 [Edit Document] Deletes, rotates, or moves the selected page. 2 [Register Overlay] Registers the image of a saved document to be overlaid on the printed data. 1 2 ineo 223/283/363/423 7-71 7.8 Application 7 7.8.2 Edit Document Select a document and press [Edit Document]. The Edit Document screen is displayed. To view the image of a document page before editing it, press the [Preview /Set Range]. For details, refer to page 7-76. Edit Document - Delete Page You can delete a specific page from a saved document. For example, you can delete blank pages to reduce the amount of data. 0 If you delete the only page of a document, the whole document will be deleted. 0 You will be unable to undo the deletion or restore the deleted pages because they are overwritten when they are deleted. If you will need the unchanged version of the document, make a backup copy of the document in advance. For details on how to copy a document, refer to page 7-66. 1 Select a page to be deleted, and then press [Delete Page]. % To select only odd pages, press [Odd Page]. % To select only even pages, press [Even Page]. % After selecting [Odd Page] or [Even Page], you can use a page key to select the desired page or cancel the selection. 2 Check that the specified page has been deleted from the screen. % At this time, the specified page is not deleted from document data. % In this example, the specified pages (pages 1, 3, and 4) have been deleted. 3 To completely delete the pages, press [Start] or the Start key on the control panel. % To cancel the deletion, press [Cancel] to return to the Application screen. 7 Application 7-72 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.8 4 Check the information of the displayed screen. To delete the pages, select [Save]. % To cancel the deletion, press [Do Not Save] to return to the Edit Document screen. The selected pages are deleted and the document is saved. Edit Document - Rotate Page You can rotate the specified pages in a saved document. When a double-sided original has been scanned, the top and bottom may be reversed page by page or the orientation may be different depending on the original orientation. In this case, you can rotate selected pages so that the whole document will be viewed more easily. 0 You will be unable to restore the pages because they are overwritten when they are rotated. If you will need the unchanged version of the document, make a backup copy of the document in advance. For details on how to copy a document, refer to page 7-66. 1 Select a page to be rotated, and then press [Rotate Page]. % To select only odd pages, press [Odd Page]. % To select only even pages, press [Even Page]. % After selecting [Odd Page] or [Even Page], you can use a page key to select the desired page or cancel the selection. The preview images of the selected pages are displayed together with the rotation setting screen. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-73 7.8 Application 7 2 While checking the preview image, select the rotation angle. % You can select a rotation angle from left 90 degrees, right 90 degrees, and 180 degrees. % In this example, [Left 90°] is selected. 3 Press [OK]. 4 If you are sure to rotate the selected pages, press [Start] or the Start key on the control panel. % In the example, the specified pages (pages 1 and 2) have been rotated. % At this time, the document data is not changed. 5 Check the information of the displayed screen. To rotate the pages, select [Save]. % To cancel the rotation, press [Do Not Save] to return to the Edit Document screen. The selected pages are rotated and the document is saved. 7 Application 7-74 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.8 Edit Document - Move Page You can change the order of the pages within a saved document by moving the specified pages. 0 You cannot rotate the only page of a document. 0 You will be unable to restore the pages because they are overwritten when they are moved. If you will need the unchanged version of the document, make a backup copy of the document in advance. For details on how to copy a document, refer to page 7-66. 0 You can directly enter the page number you want the selected page move to. This is useful when a document consists of many pages. For details, refer to page 7-77. 1 Select a page to be moved, and then press [Move Page]. % Only one page can be moved at a time. To move two or more pages, repeat the above steps for each of the pages you want to move. % The example demonstrates how to move page 6 to between pages 2 and 3. The destination setting screen is displayed. 2 While checking the screen, select the moving position. % To move the selected page to the beginning of the document, press [Top]. % To move the selected page to the end of the document, press [Last Page]. % To move the selected page to between pages, press between them. 3 Press [OK]. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-75 7.8 Application 7 4 If you are sure to move the selected page, press [Start] or the Start key on the control panel. % At this time, the document data is not changed. 5 Check the information of the displayed screen. To move the page, select [Save]. % To cancel the movement, press [Do Not Save] to return to the Edit Document screen. The selected page is moved and the document is saved. 7 Application 7-76 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.8 Preview/Set Range You can specify a range of pages and check preview images when the selected document consists of multiple pages. You can also change the display size. Item Description [ Prev. Page] Moves to the previous page. [Next Page ] Press this button to move to the next page. [Zoom] You can view the image at full size or at a size of 2, 4 or 8 times the normal size. After you have changed the display size, use the scroll bars located in the right and the bottom of the image to view to the desired portion. [Set Page Range] Specify the range of pages to be checked. Use the keypad to enter a number in [From:] and [To:] respectively. Then press [Display Page] to preview the specified starting or ending page. To set [From:] or [To:] to the page being previewed, select the button and then press [Match Display]. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-77 7.8 Application 7 Preview/Specify by Input This item is displayed when [Move Page] is selected. When too many pages are saved, specify the destination page by entering the page number. The following shows a procedure to specify the destination of the move operation. 1 In the Move Page screen, press [Preview]. The Preview/Specify by Input screen is displayed. 2 Display the previous or next page of the destination. % Press [ Prev. Page] or [Next Page ], or use the keypad to enter a page number and press [View]. % You can use [Zoom] to view the selected pages at full size or at a size of 2, 4 or 8 times the normal size. After you have changed the display size, use the scroll bars located in the right and the bottom of the image to view to the desired portion. 7 Application 7-78 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.8 3 Specify the insertion position. % To move before the displayed page, press [Before]. % To move after the displayed page, press [After]. 4 Press [OK]. 7.8.3 Register Overlay Register a document saved in a User Box as an overlay image. You can overlay the selected image to a printed document using [Stamp/Composition] in the Print tab. This function is useful when you want to print the images (such as company or product logos) that are not provided by this machine (stamps and page numbers are those provided by this machine). Reference - You can register up to 100 overlay images. - When you select a multi-page document, the first page is registered as an overlay image. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-79 7.8 Application 7 Register Overlay - New Register a new overlay image. 1 Select a document and press [Register Overlay]. 2 Press an unregistered image button and press [New]. 3 Enter the name of the overlay image to be registered, and press [OK]. % You can enter up to 16 characters. 4 Press [Start]. 7 Application 7-80 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.8 Register Overlay - Overwrite You can overwrite the registered overlay image with new one. 1 Select a document and press [Register Overlay]. 2 Press the image button to be overwritten, and press [Overwrite]. 3 Check the displayed message, and press [Overwrite]. 4 Press [Start]. The overlay image is overwritten. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-81 7.8 Application 7 Detail Settings Configure the density of the newly registered or overwritten overlay image. % Select the button of a target overlay image, and press [Detail Settings]. After configuring settings, press [OK]. Item Description [Density] Specify the density of the image. Use the keypad to enter the density using a value between 20 and 100%. 7 Bulletin Board User Box (System User Box) 7-82 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.9 7.9 Bulletin Board User Box (System User Box) 7.9.1 Overview of the Bulletin Board User Boxes The Bulletin Board User Box is used to register a browsing document. A document registered in the Bulletin Board User Box is sent by the polling transmission function when a polling request is issued from the remote machine. 7.9.2 Bulletin Board User Box screen Select the [Bulletin Board User Box] in the [System] tab to display registered Bulletin Board User Boxes. Select the Bulletin Board User Box that contains the document registered in this machine. 7.9.3 Printing a document in a Bulletin Board User Box You can print a document saved in the Bulletin Board User Box. Check the preview or information of the document, press [Start] or the Start key on the control panel. 7.9.4 Deleting a document in the Bulletin Board User Box You can save only one document in one Bulletin Board User Box. To register a new document in the Bulletin Board User Box, delete the existing document, and send a new document to the Bulletin Board User Box. To delete the document saved in the Bulletin Board User Box, check its registration time or source, and press [Delete]. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-83 7.10 Polling TX User Box (System User Box) 7 7.10 Polling TX User Box (System User Box) 7.10.1 Overview of the Polling Transmission User Boxes The Polling TX User Box is used to save a document to be sent in response to a request from a receiver. The process of saving a specific document in the Polling TX User Box is called polling transmission. 7.10.2 Printing a document in the Polling TX User Box You can print a document saved in the Polling TX User Box. Check the preview or information of the document, press [Start] or the Start key on the control panel. Reference - You can register a document in the Polling TX User Box as an overlay image. For details on how to register an overlay image, refer to page 7-79. 7.10.3 Deleting a document in the Polling TX User Box You can save only one document in the Polling TX User Box. To register a new document in the Polling TX User Box, delete the existing document, and perform polling transmission of a new document. To delete the document saved in the Polling TX User Box, check its registration time or source, and press [Delete]. dReference For details on the polling transmission procedure, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. 7 Secure Document User Box (System User Box) 7-84 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.11 7.11 Secure Document User Box (System User Box) 7.11.1 Overview of the Secure Document User Box The Secure Document User Box is used to save a document that was printed with the specified ID and password. To print a document, you must enter the ID and password. The authentication procedure varies depending on the Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error setting in Administrator Settings - [Security Settings] - [Security Details]. For details, contact the administrator of this machine. Reference - This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. dReference For details on how to save a secure document, refer to the [User's Guide Print Operations]. 7.11.2 Authentication procedure 1 Follow the procedure below when Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error is set to [Mode 1] in [Security Settings] - [Security Details] of Administrator Settings. 7.11.3 Authentication procedure 2 Follow the procedure below when Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error is set to [Mode 2] in [Security Settings] - [Security Details] of Administrator Settings. Reference - If [Mode 2] is selected, enter the password for each document even when the ID is the same. This is because you need to select the document first before entering the password. Therefore, the security level in this mode is higher than mode 1. Press [Secure Document User Box] Enter the ID of the secure document Enter the password of the secure document A list of documents appears Select the document to be printed, and configure print settings Press [Secure Document User Box] Enter the ID of the secure document A list of documents appears Select the document to be printed, and enter the password of the secure document ineo 223/283/363/423 7-85 7.11 Secure Document User Box (System User Box) 7 7.11.4 Print - Printing You can add some functions to a document saved in the Secure Document User Box when printing the document. Copies Use the keypad to enter the number of copies. A number between 1 and 9999 can be specified. Print Select 1-Sided or 2-Sided. Finishing For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-11. Combine For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-14. Zoom For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-14. Page Margin For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-16. Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-17. Stamp/Composition For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-21. 7 Secure Document User Box (System User Box) 7-86 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.11 7.11.5 Filing Settings You can handle a document saved in the Secure Document User Box. Reference - To delete all documents in the Secure Document User Box at a time, select [User Box Settings] - [Delete Secure Print Documents] in Administrator Settings. For details, refer to page 8-19. The available setting items are as follows. Item Description [Delete] Deletes an unnecessary document such as a document that you have printed. [Edit Name] Renames a saved document. [Document Details] Enables you to check the date and time a document has been saved as well as a preview image. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-87 7.12 Memory RX User Box (System User Box) 7 7.12 Memory RX User Box (System User Box) 7.12.1 Overview of the Memory RX User Box The Memory RX User Box is used to save a received document in the memory and print it as required. When memory reception is enabled, a received document is automatically saved in the Memory RX User Box. To check a document saved in the Memory RX User Box, select [Compulsory Memory RX User Box] in the [System User Box] tab, and then enter the password that was specified when memory reception was enabled. dReference For details on how to specify the password for memory reception settings, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. 7.12.2 Print Select a document to be printed, and press [Print]. After the specified document has been printed, data is deleted automatically. 7 Memory RX User Box (System User Box) 7-88 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.12 7.12.3 Filing Settings You can handle a document saved in the Memory RX User Box. The available setting items are as follows. Item Description [Delete] Deletes a document that does not need to be printed. [Edit Name] Renames a saved document. [Document Details] Enables you to check the date and time a document has been saved as well as a preview image. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-89 7.13 Annotation User Box (System User Box) 7 7.13 Annotation User Box (System User Box) 7.13.1 Overview of the Annotation User Box Annotation User Boxes are used to automatically assign a number to a saved documents and add the number when printing or sending the document. You can pre-register the number to be assigned when creating the User Box and change it when printing or sending documents. For the functions you can configure when printing or sending documents, refer to page 7-10 and the sections that follow. Select [Annotation User Box] in the [System User Box] tab, and press [Use/File]. The registered Annotation User Boxes are displayed. Reference - This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. - Go to Administrator Settings to register the Annotation User Box. For details, refer to page 8-16. - For the types of numbers that can be printed in Annotation User Boxes, refer to page 7-92. - To print the numbers specified in the Annotation User Box without saving a document in the User Box, set Auto Document Delete Time to [Do Not Keep]. This is useful for managing the numbers that are added to the copied documents. Specify the Auto Document Delete Time when you create an Annotation User Box. For details, refer to page 8-16. If you open a User Box, you can configure print and transmission settings. 7.13.2 Print - Basic For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-10. 7.13.3 Print - Page Margin For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-16. 7 Annotation User Box (System User Box) 7-90 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.13 7.13.4 Print - Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert - Cover Sheet For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-18. 7.13.5 Print - Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert - Insert Sheet For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-19. 7.13.6 Print - Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert - Chapters For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-20. 7.13.7 Print - Stamp/Composition - Date/Time For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-21. 7.13.8 Print - Stamp/Composition - Page Number For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-22. 7.13.9 Print - Stamp/Composition - Stamp For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-23. 7.13.10 Printing Preferences - Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Protect For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-24. 7.13.11 Printing Preferences - Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Guard For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-26. 7.13.12 Print - Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Password Copy For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-27. 7.13.13 Print - Stamp/Composition - Stamp Repeat For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-28. 7.13.14 Print - Stamp/Composition - Registered Overlay For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-32. 7.13.15 Description of the Send tab For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-34. 7.13.16 Send - Direct Input - E-mail For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-41. 7.13.17 Send - Direct Input - PC (SMB) For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-43. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-91 7.13 Annotation User Box (System User Box) 7 7.13.18 Send - Direct Input - FTP For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-44. 7.13.19 Send - Direct Input - WebDAV For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-45. 7.13.20 Send - Job History For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-46. 7.13.21 Send - LDAP Search - Search For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-47. 7.13.22 Send - LDAP Search - Advanced Search For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-47. 7.13.23 Send - Document Settings - Resolution For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-48. 7.13.24 Send - Document Settings - File Type For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-49. 7.13.25 Send - Document Settings - Color For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-53. 7.13.26 Send - Communication Settings - E-mail Settings For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-56. 7.13.27 Send - Communication Settings - URL Notification Setting For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-58. 7.13.28 Send - Communication Settings - E-mail Encryption For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-61. 7.13.29 Send - Communication Settings - Digital Signature For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-61. 7.13.30 Send - Application - Stamp/Composition - Date/Time For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-62. 7.13.31 Send - Application - Stamp/Composition - Page Number For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-62. 7 Annotation User Box (System User Box) 7-92 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.13 7.13.32 Send - Application - Stamp/Composition - Stamp For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-62. 7.13.33 Send - Application - Send & Print For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-63. 7.13.34 Send - Application - Stamp Element Secondary Field Add text to a number to be printed. You can enter up to 20 characters. Date/Time Select the format for the date and time to be printed. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-93 7.13 Annotation User Box (System User Box) 7 Density Select the density for the annotation numbers to be printed. Number Type Select the output format (number of digits) for the annotation numbers to be printed. Print Position Select the printing position. 7 Annotation User Box (System User Box) 7-94 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.13 7.13.35 Filing Settings You can handle a document saved in an Annotation User Box. The available setting items are as follows. 7.13.36 Application - Register Overlay For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-78. Item Description [Delete] Deletes an unnecessary document such as a document that you have printed. [Edit Name] Renames a saved document. [Document Details] Enables you to check the date and time a document has been saved as well as a preview image. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-95 7.14 Fax Retransmit User Box (System User Box) 7 7.14 Fax Retransmit User Box (System User Box) 7.14.1 Overview of the Fax Retransmit User Box The Fax Retransmit User Box is used to save a document, which was unable to be sent after the number of redials reached the value specified in Line Parameter Settings because the remote machine was busy when sending the fax for a predetermined time period. With this User Box, you can print for conformation or resend a saved document later. Select [Fax Retransmit User Box] in the [System User Box] tab, and press [Use/File]. A list of saved documents are displayed. Reference - Before you can save a document in the Fax Retransmit User Box, you must enable the Fax Retransmit User Box in the [Fax Settings] of Administrator Settings. For details on settings, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. 7.14.2 Print - Proof Print Before retransmitting a saved document, you can print the document for conformation. Data is not deleted after being printed. Select a document to be printed, and press [Proof Print]. Check document information, and press [Start]. 7.14.3 Send - Fax Retransmit a saved document. Select a document, select the [Send] tab, and press [Fax]. Reference - You can specify a new destination when retransmitting a document. You can specify the new destination in Address Book, Direct Input, or Job History. - You can configure transmission settings when you retransmit a saved document. You can also configure line and fax header settings. For details, refer to page 7-54 and page 7-61. - After document sending has been completed, data is deleted automatically. 7 Fax Retransmit User Box (System User Box) 7-96 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.14 7.14.4 Filing Settings - Delete Stop retransmission and delete the target document. Select a document, select the [Filing Settings] tab, and press [Delete]. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-97 7.15 Password Encrypted PDF User Box (System User Box) 7 7.15 Password Encrypted PDF User Box (System User Box) 7.15.1 Overview of the Password Encrypted PDF User Box When you use Web Connection or Direct Print to print a PDF file that has been saved with a password configured, or you print an encrypt PDF data that has been saved in the external memory, the data is automatically saved in the Password Encrypted PDF User Box. Select [Password Encrypted PDF User Box] in the [System User Box] tab, and press [Use/File]. A list of saved documents are displayed. Reference - This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. - Only password encrypted PDF data saved by the user who is logged in is displayed when User Authentication is enabled in this machine. 7.15.2 Print/Save −Print/Save Select a document to be printed or saved, and press [Print/Save]. When printing or saving a document, enter the password assigned to the PDF file. After printing or saving has been completed, documents in the Password Encrypted PDF User Box are deleted automatically. Reference - Whether to print or save is specified in the direct print instruction issued from your computer. You cannot change a print instruction to a save instruction or vice versa. 7.15.3 Filing Settings - Delete You can delete a saved document if it does not need to be printed. Select a document to be deleted, and press [Delete]. 7 ID & Print User Box (System User Box) 7-98 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.16 7.16 ID & Print User Box (System User Box) 7.16.1 Overview of the ID & Print User Box Viewing documents This item appears when user authentication settings are configured. A document saved in this User Box can be printed by the user of the document when the user is logged in to the machine. When you print a document from a computer over the network to this machine by entering the user name and password, the document is temporarily saved in the ID & Print User Box. % Select [ID & Print User Box] in the [System User Box] tab, and press [Use/File]. A list of saved documents are displayed. Reference - This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. - When there are documents saved in the ID & Print User Box, the following buttons are displayed in the login screen. Enter the user name and password, and press the desired button. – [Begin Printing]: Press this button to print documents saved in the ID & Print User Box without logging in to this machine. – [Print & Login]: Press this button to login to this machine and print the documents saved in the ID & Print User Box. – [Login]: Press this button to log in to this machine but not print the documents. After you are logged in, you can print or delete documents saved in the ID & Print User Box. - Documents can be saved in the ID & Print User Box even when user authentication is not enabled. In addition, jobs saved by public users can be saved in the ID & Print User Box. For details, refer to page 8-24. - After printing documents has been completed, the data in the ID & Print User Box is deleted automatically. A confirmation screen for confirming if you are sure to delete the data appears depending on the settings in Administrator Settings. dReference For details on how to print a document from a computer to the ID & Print User Box, refer to the [User's Guide Print Operations]. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-99 7.16 ID & Print User Box (System User Box) 7 7.16.2 Print - Print 1 Select a document to be printed, and press [Print]. 2 Select whether to delete the document after printing. 7.16.3 Filing Settings - Delete Select a document to be deleted, and press [Delete]. 7 External Memory (System User Box) 7-100 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.17 7.17 External Memory (System User Box) 7.17.1 External memory device Reference - The "Saving a Document from the External Memory into a User Box" function and the encrypted PDF document printing function are available only when a Hard Disk is installed. Supported external memory devices Requirements for external memory devices of this machine are as follows. - USB flash memory device that supports the USB (1.1/2.0) interface - FAT32-formatted memory device Connecting the external memory device 0 Use the USB connector on the side that is near the control panel. Do not use the USB connector near the rear side because it is used for optional devices. 0 Do not disconnect the external memory device while saving a document in the external memory device or printing a document saved in the external memory device. 0 Do not use the USB device (hard disk or USB hub) other than the USB flash memory device. 0 Do not connect or disconnect the USB memory when the hourglass is being displayed in the control panel while this machine is active. 0 Do not disconnect the USB memory just after connecting it. % Connect the external memory device to the USB connector on the side of this machine. When the external memory device is connected, an icon appears at the bottom of the screen and the following screen is displayed. If you will immediately use the external memory, select the intended purpose. When not using the exert memory, select [Close]. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-101 7.17 External Memory (System User Box) 7 Reference - The intended purpose of the external memory to be displayed varies depending on the administrator settings. 7.17.2 External memory screen When the external memory device is connected, select [External Memory] to display the folder structure. Entering a file path In the touch panel, you can specify the file path to the folder containing the document to be printed. Press [File Path], and enter the file path. Reference - Make sure that the total length of the file path and file name do not exceed 250 characters. If the number of characters exceeds the limit, the file list is not displayed. Selecting a file You can print the following file types: PDF, JPEG, TIFF, and XPS. Select a document of one of these types from the list. Reference - 2-sided printing, punching, or stapling are not supported for JPEG and XPS files. - Printing is not possible when printing is restricted by Security Settings of a PDF file. - This machine supports printing of PDF Version 1.6 or earlier. - Only the files of printable file types are displayed in the list. - File access fails when the total length of the file path and file name exceeds 250 characters. - Up to 200 printable files are displayed in the folder of the specified file path. If the folder contains 200 or more files, it may take time to display the file list screen. - When no Hard Disk is installed, it may be impossible to print a large-size file. In this case, you should install a Hard Disk. Printing encrypted PDF data To print the encrypted PDF data saved in the external memory device, select the data in the External Memory screen and print the data. When the print command is issued, the encrypted PDF data in the external memory is saved in the Password Encrypted PDF User Box of this machine. Access the Password Encrypted PDF User Box of this machine, and then print the data. dReference For the Password Encrypted PDF User Box, refer to page 7-97. Moving to the parent folder To move to the parent folder, press [Up]. 7 External Memory (System User Box) 7-102 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.17 Opening a folder To check the contents of a specific folder, press [Open]. Print Select a document to be printed, and press [Print]. The Print Details screen is displayed. Document Details You can check the modification date, file name, and other properties of the selected document. 7.17.3 Print - Basic Press [Print] to display the following screen. Copies Use the keypad to enter the number of copies. A number between 1 and 9999 can be specified. Print Select 1-Sided or 2-Sided. Binding Position When you select 2-Sided in [Print], select the binding position. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-103 7.17 External Memory (System User Box) 7 Finishing For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-11. Reference - 2-sided printing, punching, or stapling are not supported for JPEG and XPS files. Paper Select a tray to load printing paper. 7.17.4 Print- Application Stamp/Composition - Date/Time For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-21. Stamp/Composition - Page Number For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-22. Stamp/Composition - Stamp For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-23. Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Protect For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-24. Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Guard For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-26. Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Password Copy For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-27. Stamp/Composition - Stamp Repeat For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-28. 7 External Memory (System User Box) 7-104 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.17 7.17.5 Filing Settings−Save in User Box This function saves a document stored in the external memory in a User Box. Specify the User Box and document name, and press [Start] or the Start key on the control panel. Item Description [User Box] Select the Public, Personal, or Group User Box to save data in. [Document Name] Specify the name of the document to be saved. • If you select multiple files, you cannot specify the document name. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-105 7.18 Mobile/PDA (System User Box) 7 7.18 Mobile/PDA (System User Box) This function enables you to print a document stored in a cellular phone or PDA via a Bluetooth communication or to save such a document in a User Box. Reference - [Save in User Box] is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. 7.18.1 Operating environment The cellular phones and PDAs that can be connected to this machine and the printable file must satisfy the following conditions. Reference - To print documents from a cellular phone or PDA, the optional Local Interface Kit EK-605 is required. The settings for enabling a Bluetooth communication are also required. Contact your service representative in advance. - If you cannot access the link file when attempting to print an XHTML file, the document will either not be printed or will be printed in a black frame depending on the setting in [User Settings] − [Cellular Phone/PDA Setting] − [Link File Error Notification]. - To access the link file for printing an XHTML file, [WebDAV Settings] of this machine is required. - To use a proxy for connection, register a proxy server in [Administrator Settings] - [Network Settings] - [WebDAV Settings] - [WebDAV Client Settings] - [Host Address], and set [User Settings] - [Cellular Phone/PDA Setting] - [Proxy Server Use] to [ON]. - The communication speed may drop or communication may be interrupted due to obstacles, signal quality, magnetic field or static electricity. - Protected documents and image data may not be sent depending on the security setting of the cellular phone or PDA. Communication protocol Bluetooth Ver. 2.0 + EDR Supporting profile OPP/BPP/SPP/BIP/HCRP Supporting file type PDF/CPDF/XPS/CXPS/TIFF/JPEG/XHTML/RepliGo • For XHTML file types, the machine supports the character code of UTF-8/Shift- JIS/ISO-8859 and the link file extensions of JPEG/JPG/PNG. • This machine supports RepliGo version 2.1.0.8. 7 Mobile/PDA (System User Box) 7-106 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.18 7.18.2 Mobile/PDA - Print Reference - To save a file stored in a cellular phone or PDA in a User Box, or to print such a file, configure the appropriate setting in Administrator Settings in advance. For details, refer to page 8-24. To use a Bluetooth communication, the Bluetooth setting must be enabled in this machine. For details, refer to [User's Guide Network Administrator]. - When user authentication is specified on this machine, even a registered user cannot print a document unless printing from a cellular phone or PDA is allowed in the machine setting. For user authentication, contact the administrator of this machine. Entering the PIN code If you enter the 4-digit PIN code from a cellular phone or PDA, a connection is established, and data is sent to this machine to be printed. Reference - Check the PIN code in the instruction manual or in the setting instructions of the cellular phone or PDA. Check printing preferences You can check the overview of the settings to print the received data. dReference To configure print settings, select [Cellular Phone/PDA Setting] in the Utility menu. For details, refer to page 8-12. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-107 7.18 Mobile/PDA (System User Box) 7 7.18.3 Mobile/PDA - Save Entering the PIN code If you enter the 4-digit PIN code from a cellular phone or PDA, a connection is established, and data is sent to this machine to be saved in a User Box. Reference - Check the PIN code in the instruction manual or in the setting instructions of the cellular phone or PDA. 7 Confidential RX User Box (System User Box) 7-108 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.19 7.19 Confidential RX User Box (System User Box) 7.19.1 Overview of the Confidential RX User Box The Confidential RX User Box is used to store a document, which is received from the destination machine by confidential reception, and print it as required. Select [Confidential RX User Box] in the [System User Box] tab, and press [Use/File]. The registered Confidential RX User Boxes are displayed. Reference - This function is not available when a Hard Disk is installed. - If a Hard Disk is installed, Confidential RX can be enabled when the Confidential RX function is added to the Public/Personal/Group User Box. For details, refer to page 8-5. - Go to Administrator Settings to register the Confidential RX User Box. For details, refer to page 8-17. 7.19.2 Print Select a document to be printed, and press Print. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-109 7.19 Confidential RX User Box (System User Box) 7 7.19.3 Filing Settings You can handle a document saved in a Confidential RX User Box. The available setting items are as follows. Item Description [Delete] Deletes a document that does not need to be printed. [Edit Name] Renames a saved document. [Document Details] Enables you to check the date and time a document has been saved as well as a preview image. 7 Confidential RX User Box (System User Box) 7-110 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.19 8 User Box Settings 8 Menu tree of User Box Settings 8-2 ineo 223/283/363/423 8.1 8 User Box Settings 8.1 Menu tree of User Box Settings The following shows the menus and items used to configure User Box settings in the Utility menu. 8.1.1 User mode Reference - *1 The Confidential RX User Box is displayed when a Fax Kit is installed while no Hard Disk is installed. - *2 This item is displayed only when a Hard Disk is installed. First level Second level Third level Fourth level 1 [One-Touch/User Box Registration] 2 [Create User Box] (p. 8-5) 1 [Public/Personal User Box]*1 (p. 8-5) [New] [Edit] [Delete] 2 [Bulletin Board User Box] (p. 8-6) [New] [Edit] [Delete] 3 [Relay User Box] (p. 8-8) [New] [Edit] [Delete] 2 [User Settings] 2 [Custom Display Settings] 3 [User Box Settings] (p. 8-10) [Default Tab] *2 [Shortcut Key 1] [Shortcut Key 2] [Cellular Phone/PDA Setting] [Link File Error Notification] (p. 8-11) [Proxy Server Use] (p. 8-11) [Print] (p. 8-12) [Print] [Paper] [Finishing] [Page Margin] [Stamp/Composition] ineo 223/283/363/423 8-3 8.1 Menu tree of User Box Settings 8 8.1.2 Administrator Settings First level Second level Third level Fourth level 1 [System Settings] 0 [User Box Settings] (p. 8-19) 1 [Delete Unused User Box]*2 (p. 8-19) 2 [Delete Secure Print Documents]*2 (p. 8-19) 3 [Auto Delete Secure Document]*2 (p. 8-20) 4 [Encrypted PDF Delete Time]*2 (p. 8-20) 5 [ID & Print Delete Time]*2 (p. 8-21) 6 [Document Hold Setting] (p. 8-21) 7 [External Memory Function Settings] (p. 8-22) [Save Document] [Print Document] [External Memory Document Scan] *2 8 [Allow/Restrict User Box] (p. 8-22) 9 [ID & Print Delete after Print Setting]*2 (p. 8-23) 0 [Document Delete Time Setting]*2 (p. 8-23) 8 Menu tree of User Box Settings 8-4 ineo 223/283/363/423 8.1 Reference - *1 The Confidential RX User Box is displayed when a Fax Kit is installed while no Hard Disk is installed. - *2 This item is displayed only when a Hard Disk is installed. - *3 This item is not displayed when a Hard Disk is installed. 3 [One-Touch/User Box Registration] 2 [Create User Box] (p. 8-15) 1 [Public/Personal User Box]*1 (p. 8-5) [New] [Edit] [Delete] [Delete Empty User Box(es)] (p. 8-6) 2 [Bulletin Board User Box] (p. 8-6) [New] [Edit] [Delete] 3 [Relay User Box] (p. 8-8) [New] [Edit] [Delete] 4 [Annotation User Box]*2 (p. 8-16) [New] [Edit] [Delete] 4 [Maximum Number of User Boxes]*2 (p. 8-18) [Max. No. of Use Boxes] [Maximum Number of User Boxes] 4 [User Authentication/ Account Track] 2 [User Authentication Settings] 1 [Administrative Setting] [ID & Print Settings]* 2 (p. 8-24) 9 [System Connection] 5 [Cellular Phone/PDA Setting] (p. 8-24) 0 [Security Settings] 2 [User Box Administrator Setting]*2 (p. 8-25) 4 [Security Details] [Secure Print Only]*2 (p. 8-26) 6 [HDD Settings]*2 1 [Check HDD Capacity]*2 (p. 8-26) 2 [Overwrite HDD Data]*2 (p. 8-27) [Overwrite Method] [Encryption Priority] [Overwrite Priority] 3 [Overwrite All Data] (p. 8-28) 4 [HDD Lock Password]*2 (p. 8-29) 5 [Format HDD]*2 (p. 8-30) 6 [HDD Encryption Setting]*2 (p. 8-31) 6 [SSD Settings]*3 1 [Check SSD Capacity]*3 (p. 8-27) 2 [Overwrite All Data] (p. 8-28) 3 [Format SSD]*3 (p. 8-31) 8 [Stamp Settings] 1 [Apply Stamps] (p. 8-32) [Printing] [Sending] First level Second level Third level Fourth level ineo 223/283/363/423 8-5 8.2 User mode settings 8 8.2 User mode settings 8.2.1 Creating a User Box Public, Personal, or Group User Box Create a Public, Personal, or Group User Box. You can configure the following items when create a User Box. This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. Register a Confidential RX User Box when a Fax Kit is installed while no Hard Disk is installed. For details, refer to page 8-8. Reference - To change the setting of a created User Box, select the target User Box and press [Edit]. - If [Edit] is selected, you cannot change the User Box number. - To delete a created User Box, select the target User Box and press [Delete]. Page (1/2) Item Description [User Box No.] Automatically displays an unassigned number. To specify a User Box number, press [User Box No.], and use the keypad to enter the User Box number between 1 and 999999999. [User Box Name] Press [User Box Name], and enter the User Box name in the control panel (up to 20 characters). Specifying different User Box numbers enables you to create User Boxes with the same name. [Password] Specify a password to limit access to the User Box. Press [Password], and enter the password in the control panel (up to 8 characters). [Index] Select the index type. [Type] Select [Public], [Personal], or [Group] depending on User Authentication or Account Track settings. If [Personal] is selected, specify the owner user. To select the owner user, use the owner user change page. If [Group] is selected, specify the owner account. To select the owner account, use the Change Owner screen. 8 User mode settings 8-6 ineo 223/283/363/423 8.2 Page (2/2) Delete Empty User Box(es) (Administrator Settings) Automatically searches for and deletes an empty User Box if the Public, Personal, or Group User Box is created in Administrator Settings. Press [Delete Empty User Box(es)] in the Create User Box screen. This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. Bulletin Board User Box Create a Bulletin Board User Box. You can create up to 10 Bulletin Board User Boxes. The available setting items are as follows. Reference - To change the setting of a created User Box, select the target User Box and press [Edit]. - If [Edit] is selected, you cannot change the User Box number. - To delete a created User Box, select the target User Box and press [Delete]. Item Description [Auto Document Delete Time] Specify the period from the date/time when a document was saved in or last retrieved form a User Box to the date/time when it is to be deleted automatically. • In Delete Time, you can specify the time in addition to the number of days. To specify the time, enter the numeric value on a 1-minute basis in the range from 5 minutes to 12 hours. • When not deleting a document, select [Save]. • Depending on the settings in Administrator Settings, you may not be able to operate. [Confidential RX] This item appears when the optional Fax Kit is installed. Select whether to add the confidential RX function to a User Box. When adding the confidential RX function, enter the confidential RX password. • For confirmation, enter the confidential RX password again. ineo 223/283/363/423 8-7 8.2 User mode settings 8 Page (1/2) Page (2/2) Item Description [User Box No.] Automatically displays an unassigned number. To specify a User Box number, press [User Box No.], and use the keypad to enter the User Box number between 1 and 999999999. [User Box Name] Press [User Box Name], and enter the User Box name in the control panel (up to 20 characters). Specifying different User Box numbers enables you to create User Boxes with the same name. [Password] Specify a password to limit access to the User Box. Press [Password], and enter the password in the control panel (up to 8 characters). [User Box Type] Select [Public], [Personal], or [Group] depending on User Authentication or Account Track settings. If [Personal] is selected, specify the owner user. To select the owner user, use the owner user change page. If [Group] is selected, specify the owner account. To select the owner account, use the Change Owner page. Item Description [Auto Document Delete Time] Specify the period from the date/time when a document was saved in or last retrieved form a User Box to the date/time when it is to be deleted automatically. • In Delete Time, you can specify the time in addition to the number of days. To specify the time, enter the numeric value on a 1-minute basis in the range from 5 minutes to 12 hours. • When not deleting a document, select [Save]. 8 User mode settings 8-8 ineo 223/283/363/423 8.2 Relay User Box You can create up to five Relay User Boxes. The creation and editing setting items are as follows. Reference - To change the setting of a created User Box, select the target User Box and press [Edit]. - If [Edit] is selected, you cannot change the User Box number. - To delete a created User Box, select the target User Box and press [Delete]. dReference For details on how to register the header or footer, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. Confidential RX User Box You can register up to 20 Confidential RX User Boxes. The available setting items are as follows. Reference - The Confidential RX User Box is available when a Fax Kit is installed while no Hard Disk is installed. - If a Hard Disk is installed, Confidential RX can be enabled when the Confidential RX function is added to the Public/Personal/Group User Box. For details, refer to page 8-5. - To change the setting of a created User Box, select the target User Box and press [Edit]. - If [Edit] is selected, you cannot change the User Box number. - To delete a created User Box, select the target User Box and press [Delete]. Item Description [User Box No.] Automatically displays an unassigned number. To specify a User Box number, press [User Box No.], and use the keypad to enter the User Box number between 1 and 999999999. [User Box Name] Press [User Box Name], and enter the User Box name in the control panel (up to 20 characters). Specifying different User Box numbers enables you to create User Boxes with the same name. [Relay Destination] Select a relay destination to send data from the Relay User Box. Pre-register the relay destination as a group destination. • When registering a group destination as a relay destination, be sure to set Abbreviation Dial in the group destination in advance. [Relay TX Password] Specify a password to limit access to the User Box. Press [Relay TX Password], and enter the password in the control panel (up to 8 characters). ineo 223/283/363/423 8-9 8.2 User mode settings 8 Page (1/2) Page (2/2) Item Description [User Box No.] Automatically displays an unassigned number. To specify a User Box number, press [User Box No.], and use the keypad to enter the User Box number between 1 and 999999999. [User Box Name] Press [User Box Name], and enter the User Box name in the control panel (up to 20 characters). Specifying different User Box numbers enables you to create User Boxes with the same name. [Password] Specify a password to limit access to the User Box. Press [Password], and enter the password in the control panel (up to 8 characters). [User Box Type] Select [Public], [Personal], or [Group] depending on User Authentication or Account Track settings. If [Personal] is selected, specify the owner user. To select the owner user, use the owner user change page. If [Group] is selected, specify the owner account. To select the owner account, use the Change Owner page. Item Description [Auto Document Delete Time] Specify the period from the date/time when a document was saved in or last retrieved form a User Box to the date/time when it is to be deleted automatically. • In Delete Time, you can specify the time in addition to the number of days. To specify the time, enter the numeric value on a 1-minute basis in the range from 5 minutes to 12 hours. • When not deleting a document, select [Save]. 8 User mode settings 8-10 ineo 223/283/363/423 8.2 8.2.2 Custom Display Settings - User Box Setting You can customize the User Box screen to fit your operating environment. Default Tab Specify the User Box page to be displayed after pressing [User Box] key on the control panel. Reference - [Public]: Displays the Public User Box page. - [Personal]: Displays the Personal User Box page when User Authentication is enabled. - [System]: Displays the System User Box page. - [Group]: Displays the Group User Box page when Account Track is enabled. - This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. Shortcut key This function enables you to add up to two shortcut keys in the area on the lower right of the page. It is available when registering the frequently used System User Box as a shortcut key. Reference - A shortcut key is displayed only in the User Box mode after pressing the [User Box] key. Switching to the Fax/Scan or Copy mode does not display the target User Box shortcut key. - If Shortcut Key 1 is configured, [Language Selection] is not displayed. [Comm. Password] Specify a confidential RX password. Press [Comm. Password], and enter the password in the control panel (up to 8 characters). • For confirmation, enter the communication password twice. Item Description ineo 223/283/363/423 8-11 8.2 User mode settings 8 8.2.3 Cellular Phone/PDA Setting - Link File Error Notification This function enables you to specify processing to be performed if you cannot access a link file when attempting to print an XHTML file from a cellular phone or PDA. (Default: [ON]) - [ON]: Prints a link file part in a black frame. - [OFF]: Does not print a link file part. 8.2.4 Cellular Phone/PDA Setting - Proxy Server Use This function enables you to specify whether to use a proxy server to access a link file when printing an XHTML file from a cellular phone or PDA. (Default: [OFF]) - [ON]: Uses a proxy server. - [OFF]: Does not use a proxy server. Reference - When using a proxy server for connection, select [Administrator Settings] - [Network Settings] - [Web- DAV Settings] - [WebDAV Client Settings] - [Proxy Server Address] to register the desired proxy server. For details, refer to [User's Guide Network Administrator]. 8 User mode settings 8-12 ineo 223/283/363/423 8.2 8.2.5 Cellular Phone/PDA Setting - Print Settings When using a cellular phone or PDA to print a document through this machine, configure print settings. Basic - Print Select 1-Sided or 2-Sided. Basic - Paper Select the printing paper size if the sent data does not contain paper size information. Basic - Finishing Specify Fold/Bind, Staple, or Punch. ineo 223/283/363/423 8-13 8.2 User mode settings 8 Reference - The number of punched holes varies depending on the country you are in. Application - Margin Select the margin position. Application - Stamp/Composition - Date/Time For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-21. Application - Stamp/Composition - Page Number For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-22. Application - Stamp/Composition - Stamp For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-23. Application - Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Protect For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-24. Application - Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Guard For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-26. Application - Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Password Copy For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-27. Application - Stamp/Composition - Stamp Repeat For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-28. 8 Administrator Settings 8-14 ineo 223/283/363/423 8.3 8.3 Administrator Settings 8.3.1 User Box permissions User types This machine is intended for users of various positions. The User Box function therefore provides "User Box Administrator" in addition to the administrator of this machine. The following shows the users and their available User Box types. Reference - To log in to this machine as the User Box administrator, execute the following steps when setting User Authentication. – Enter "boxadmin" in the User Name box. – Enter the password specified in page 8-25 in the Password box. Public User Box and Personal or Group User Box The following shows the available functions of the (1) Public User Box that can be accessed by all users and the (2) Personal or Group User Box that can be accessed only by specific users. *1 The registered users can handle only the User Boxes that were created by them. *2 The User Box administrator and administrator can handle User Boxes without entering the password even if it is specified for the User Boxes. Item Description Public user When user authentication is disabled, every user is logged in as a public user. Registered user User registered by the administrator when User Authentication is enabled. User Box administrator User who logs in as the User Box administrator when User Authentication is enabled. This user can access all User Boxes regardless of whether a password is specified. Administrator User who manages this machine. This user can create, change, or delete all User Boxes regardless of whether a password is specified. Function Create User Box Check, download, or delete a document Change User Box setting Delete User Box User Box type Public Personal or Group Public Personal or Group Public Personal or Group Public Personal or Group Public user o − o − o − o − Registered user o o o o*1 o o*1 o o*1 User Box administrator o*2 o*2 o*2 o*2 o*2 o*2 o*2 o*2 Administrator o o − − o*2 o*2 o*2 o*2 ineo 223/283/363/423 8-15 8.3 Administrator Settings 8 8.3.2 Creating a User Box You can register a new User Box. The following describes the types of the User Boxes that can be registered. Reference - Disabling User Authentication or Account Track saves the User Box registered as a Personal or Group User Box as a Public User Box. The User Box name however remains unchanged. - When User Authentication or Account Track is enabled, enter the ID and password when logging in to this machine. After this, be sure to press [Login] or the Access key in the control panel to complete authentication processing. If authentication is not completed, you cannot create a Personal or Group User Box. - When a Hard Disk is installed while the optional Fax Kit is installed, you can configure confidential RX (F-Code TX) settings as the Public, Personal, or Group User Box extension function. The Confidential RX User Box is not available when a Hard Disk is installed. For details on the confidential RX function, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. - When the setting for User Authentication is configured, you can specify a User Box administrator. A User Box administrator can access all Public, Personal, and Group User Boxes. Reference - If [Password Rules] is enabled, you cannot create a password that is less than eight characters. - When the registered User Box password is less than eight characters, change it to eight characters before enabling Password Rules. For details on Password Rules, refer to [User's Guide Copy Operations]. - The Public/Personal/Group and Annotation User Boxes are available only when a Hard Disk is installed. 8.3.3 Creating Public, Personal, or Group User Box For details, refer to page 8-5. 8.3.4 Creating Bulletin Board User Box For details, refer to page 8-6. 8.3.5 Creating Relay User Box For details, refer to page 8-8. Item Description Public User Box Public User Box that can be accessed by everyone. Personal User Box Personal User Box that can be accessed by only the login user when User Authentication is enabled. Group User Box User Box that can be accessed by only the user in the login account when Account Track is enabled. Bulletin Board User Box User Box used to perform Bulletin Polling TX or RX with F codes. This item is available when the optional Fax Kit is installed. Relay User Box User Box used to save relay data when using this machine as a relay distribution station to perform relay distribution with F codes. This item is available when the optional Fax Kit is installed. Annotation User Box User Box used to print or send a saved document with the date/time or filing number image. Specify the type of the text to be added when using this User Box. When registering this User Box, specify the administrator mode. Confidential RX User Box User Box used to save and print a document that was sent from the destination machine by confidential transmission. This item is available when a Fax Kit is installed while no Hard Disk is installed. The Confidential RX User Box is not available when a Hard Disk is installed. 8 Administrator Settings 8-16 ineo 223/283/363/423 8.3 8.3.6 Creating Annotation User Box Create an Annotation User Box. You can configure the following items when create a User Box. This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. Reference - To change the setting of a created User Box, select the target User Box and press [Edit]. - If [Edit] is selected, you cannot change the User Box number. - To delete a created User Box, select the target User Box and press [Delete]. Page (1/3) Reference - If [Password Rules] is enabled, you cannot create a password that is less than eight characters. - When the registered User Box password is less than eight characters, change it to eight characters before enabling Password Rules. For details on Password Rules, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. Item Description [User Box No.] Automatically displays an unassigned number. To specify a User Box number, press [User Box No.], and use the keypad to enter the User Box number between 1 and 999999999. [User Box Name] Press [User Box Name], and enter the User Box name in the control panel (up to 20 characters). Specifying different User Box numbers enables you to create User Boxes with the same name. [Password] Specify a password to limit access to the User Box. Press [Password], and enter the password in the control panel (up to 8 characters). ineo 223/283/363/423 8-17 8.3 Administrator Settings 8 Page (2/3) Page (3/3) 8.3.7 Creating Confidential RX User Box For details, refer to page 8-8. Item Description [Count Up] Select whether to count the annotation number by job or by page. [Secondary Field] Add text to the number to be printed (up to 20 characters). [Date/Time] Select the format to display the date and time to be printed. [Density] Select the density of the annotation numbers to be printed. [Number Type] Select the output format (number of digits) of the annotation numbers to be printed. [Print Position] Select the printing position. [Primary Field] Add any text (up to 40 characters). Item Description [Auto Document Delete Time] Specify the period from the date/time when a document was saved in or last retrieved form a User Box to the date/time when it is to be deleted automatically. • In Delete Time, you can specify the time in addition to the number of days. To specify the time, enter the numeric value on a 1-minute basis in the range from 5 minutes to 12 hours. • When not deleting a document, select [Save]. • To use a document to give an annotation only without saving or using it for copying, select [Do Not Keep]. 8 Administrator Settings 8-18 ineo 223/283/363/423 8.3 8.3.8 Maximum Number of User Boxes Specify the maximum number of User Boxes that can be created for each user. This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. Public, Personal, or Group User Box Select [Public], [Personal], or [Group] depending on User Authentication or Account Track settings. Max. No. Of Use Boxes To specify the maximum number of User Boxes, select [ON]. To not specify the limit and allow users to create an infinite number of User Boxes, select [OFF]. Maximum Number of User Boxes The allowable range of the maximum number of User Boxes is 0 to 1000. Use the keypad to enter the maximum number of User Boxes, and press [Apply] to determine it. Reference - If the maximum number of User Boxes is set to "0", you cannot create new ones. - When the selected user already sets the number of User Boxes to 3, the allowable range of the maximum number of User Boxes changes 3 to 1000. ineo 223/283/363/423 8-19 8.3 Administrator Settings 8 8.3.9 User Box Setting Delete Unused User Box Delete a User Box with no document saved, as an unnecessary User Box. To delete a User Box, confirm the message that appears and select [Yes]. Reference - This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. Delete Secure Print Documents This function deletes all documents saved in the Secure Document User Box. To delete the User Box, confirm the message and select [Yes]. Reference - This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. 8 Administrator Settings 8-20 ineo 223/283/363/423 8.3 Auto Delete Secure Document Specify the period from the date/time when a secure document was saved or last retrieved to the date/time when it is to be deleted automatically. Reference - In Delete Time, specify 5 minutes to 12 hours (on a 1-minute basis), 1 day, 2 days, 3 days, 7 days, or 30 days. - When not deleting a document, select [Save]. - This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. Encrypted PDF Delete Time Specify the period from the date/time when an encrypted PDF document was saved or last retrieved to the date/time when it is to be deleted automatically. Reference - In Delete Time, specify 5 minutes to 12 hours (on a 1-minute basis), 1 day, 2 days, 3 days, 7 days, or 30 days. - When not deleting a document, select [Save]. - This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. ineo 223/283/363/423 8-21 8.3 Administrator Settings 8 ID & Print Delete Time Specify the period from the date/time when a document was saved in or last retrieved from the ID & Print User Box to the date/time when it is to be deleted automatically. Reference - In Delete Time, specify 5 minutes to 12 hours (on a 1-minute basis), 1 day, 2 days, 3 days, 7 days, or 30 days. - When not deleting a document, select [Save]. - This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. Document Hold Setting Specify whether to save a document in a User Box when sending or printing it. Reference - When deleting a document after printing or sending, select [Yes]. To display a deletion confirmation screen when printing or sending, select [ON] on the deletion selection screen. - To delete a document after printing or sending the document, select [No]. 8 Administrator Settings 8-22 ineo 223/283/363/423 8.3 External Memory Function Settings Set the function of the external memory connected to this machine to ON or OFF. Reference - A function to save a document in external memory is set to OFF (not saved) in the factory setting. It is also set to OFF (not saved) in the user function setting when User Authentication is enabled. To save a document in external memory, change the setting to enable you to save a document in Administrator Settings. Allow/Restrict User Box Specify whether to release functions so that the user can create, edit, or delete a User Box. Reference - To enable the user to handle those functions, select [Allow]. - When not enabling the user to handle those functions, select [Prohibit]. Only the administrator can then create, edit, or delete a User Box. Item Description [Save Document] Select whether to save (ON) or not save (OFF) scanned documents or documents stored in a User Box to the external memory. [Print Document] Select whether to print (ON) or not print (OFF) documents saved in the external memory using the [Use/File] function. [External Memory Document Scan] Scan a document in the external memory and select whether to save (ON) or not save (OFF) it in a User Box. • This item is displayed only when a Hard Disk is installed. ineo 223/283/363/423 8-23 8.3 Administrator Settings 8 ID & Print Delete after Print Setting Select whether to check that the document saved in the ID & Print User Box has been deleted after printed. Reference - To check with the user whether to delete the target document, select [Confirm with User]. - To delete the target document without checking with the user after printing, select [Always Delete]. - This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. Document Delete Time Setting This function enables the administrator to specify the period from the date/time when a document was saved in or retrieved from a User Box to the date/time when it is to be deleted automatically when the user cannot specify the document deletion time. When automatically specifying the document deletion time, select [Yes] and sec the deletion time. Reference - In Delete Time, specify 5 minutes to 12 hours (on a 1-minute basis), 1 day, 2 days, 3 days, 7 days, or 30 days. - When not deleting a document, select [Save]. - This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. 8 Administrator Settings 8-24 ineo 223/283/363/423 8.3 ID & Print Settings Configure settings for ID & Print User Box. Reference - A public user job is printed or saved when public user printing is enabled. - A user-unauthorized job is printed or saved when Print without Authentication is enabled. - For details on printing by public users and Print without Authentication, refer to the [User's Guide Print Operations]. - This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. 8.3.10 Cellular Phone/PDA Setting Select whether to allow or restrict the function for using a cellular phone or PDA. Item Description [ID & Print] [ON]: Saves all the Normal Print and Authentication & Print jobs, which were requested from a registered user, in the ID & Print User Box. [OFF]: Saves the Authentication & Print job, which was requested from a registered user, in the ID & Print User Box. The Normal Print job is output without being saved in the User Box. [Public User] [Print Immediately]: Outputs a public user job or user-unauthorized job without saving it in the User Box. [Save]: Saves a public user job or user-unauthorized job in the ID & Print User Box. ineo 223/283/363/423 8-25 8.3 Administrator Settings 8 8.3.11 User Box Administrator Setting The User Box administrator is available when User Authentication is enabled. If you log in to this machine as the User Box administrator, you can reference the contents of all the created User Boxes regardless of whether the password is specified. This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. Setting User Box administrator To set a User Box administrator, select [Allow], and press [Password Setting] to register the User Box administrator's password. Reference - For confirmation, enter the password twice. - If [Password Rules] is enabled, you cannot create a password that is less than eight characters. - When the registered User Box password is less than eight characters, change it to eight characters before enabling "Password Rules". For details on Password Rules, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. Logging in to this machine as the User Box administrator Enter the following items in the login screen. User name: boxadmin Password: Password determined in the User Box Administrator Setting screen Administrator's available functions The following functions are available when you log in as the User Box administrator. - Creating Public, Personal, or Group User Box - Checking, downloading, or deleting documents saved in all User Boxes - Changing all User Box settings - Deleting all User Boxes 8 Administrator Settings 8-26 ineo 223/283/363/423 8.3 8.3.12 Security Details Security Print Only Use this setting to specify to enable only Secure Print when issuing the print command from the printer driver. To print a document, you must enter the ID and password. Reference - This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. 8.3.13 HDD Settings/SSD Settings Check HDD Capacity You can check the occupied and free spaces in the HDD. Reference - This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. ineo 223/283/363/423 8-27 8.3 Administrator Settings 8 Check SSD Capacity You can check the occupied and free spaces in the SSD. Reference - This function is not available when a Hard Disk is installed. Overwrite HDD Data You can specify how to overwrite and delete HDD data. When image data saved in the HDD becomes unnecessary, this function overwrites meaningless data in all areas that contain the image data to destroy the original data. This function also destroys the non-image data structure to prevent a data leak when the installed HDD has been stolen. The available setting items are as follows. (Default: Mode 1) Item Description [Mode 1] Overwritten with 0x00 [Mode 2] Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff Overwritten with letter "A" (0x61) Verified [Encryption Priority] Performs encryption processing at a higher security level. In HDD Encryption Setting, however, data overwriting is performed unlike [Mode 1] or [Mode 2] setting. Always specify [Encryption Priority]. [Overwrite Priority] In HDD Encryption Setting, however, data overwriting is performed based on [Mode 1] or [Mode 2] setting. 8 Administrator Settings 8-28 ineo 223/283/363/423 8.3 Reference - This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. - When changing Encryption Priority or Overwrite Priority setting, format the HDD after rebooting this machine. However, be careful that data is erased by formatting the HDD. - For the data erased by formatting the HDD, refer to page 8-30. Overwrite All Data This function overwrites and deletes all data in the total capacity of the HDD. 0 This function is available when disposing of this machine. Before performing this function, be sure to consult your service representative. 0 While overwriting and deleting data, do not turn the main power switch off and on. % To overwrite and delete data, select the HDD overwrite method, and press [Delete]. Overwrite and delete processing is performed after this machine has been rebooted. The available setting items are as follows. Reference - It takes approximately 40 minutes to execute Mode 1. Item Description [Mode 1] Overwritten with 0x00 [Mode 2] Overwritten with 1-byte random numbers Overwritten with 1-byte random numbers Overwritten with 0x00 [Mode 3] Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff Overwritten with 1-byte random numbers Verified [Mode 4] Overwritten with 1-byte random numbers Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff [Mode 5] Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff [Mode 6] Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff Overwritten with specified 512-byte data [Mode 7] Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff Overwritten with 0xaa [Mode 8] Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff Overwritten with 0xaa Verified ineo 223/283/363/423 8-29 8.3 Administrator Settings 8 This function overwrites and deletes all data in the total capacity of the SSD. 0 This function is available when disposing of this machine. Before performing this function, be sure to consult your service representative. 0 While overwriting and deleting data, do not turn the main power switch off and on. % To perform the overwrite and delete function, press [Yes] Overwrite and delete processing is performed after this machine has been rebooted. HDD Lock Password You can specify the password to lock the HDD. 0 Be sure to keep the specified password carefully so that you will never forget it. Forgetting the password will require a large amount of recovery work. % Specify the password, and reboot this machine. The HDD password is specified. Reference - Enter the HDD password using 20 characters. Note that all the characters must not be the same. - If you have already specified the HDD password, [Change] and [Release] appears. You can change or release the HDD password. This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. 8 Administrator Settings 8-30 ineo 223/283/363/423 8.3 Format HDD This function formats the HDD. 0 To turn the main power switch off and on, first turn the main power off, and then turn it on after 10 or more seconds have elapsed. Not doing so may result in an operation failure. % To format the HDD, select [Yes] to follow the displayed messages. After formatting has been completed, reboot this machine. Reference - Using the Web Connection export function backs up user registration information or address data. For details, refer to the Web Connection online help. - The following shows the data deleted by formatting the HDD. – Program – Address Book – Authentication method setting – User authentication setting – Account track setting – User Box – User Box setting – Documents in User Boxes – Confidential User Box setting – Bulletin Board User Box setting - This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. ineo 223/283/363/423 8-31 8.3 Administrator Settings 8 Format SSD This function formats the SSD. 0 To turn the main power switch off and on, first turn the main power off, and then turn it on after 10 or more seconds have elapsed. Not doing so may result in an operation failure. % To format the HDD, select [Yes] to follow the displayed messages. After formatting has been completed, reboot this machine. Reference - Using the Web Connection export function backs up user registration information or address data. For details, refer to the Web Connection online help. - The following shows the data deleted by formatting the HDD. – Program – Address Book – Authentication method setting – User authentication setting – Account track setting – User Box – User Box setting – Documents in User Boxes – Confidential RX User Box setting – Bulletin Board User Box setting - This function is not available when a Hard Disk is installed. HDD Encryption Setting You can configure HDD encryption setting. Specifying a 20-character encryption passphrase for the HDD prevents the user from easily reading the data saved in the HDD. 0 Be sure to keep the specified encryption passphrase carefully so that you will never forget it. 0 The encryption passphrase setting must be configured by the administrator of this machine. 0 To turn the main power switch off and on, first turn the main power off, and then turn it on after 10 or more seconds have elapsed. Not doing so may result in an operation failure. % Specify the encryption passphrase, and reboot this machine. The encryption passphrase setting then becomes available. Reference - Enter the encryption passphrase using 20 characters. Note that all the characters must not be the same. - Encryption passphrase setting becomes available after this machine has been rebooted. This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. 8 Administrator Settings 8-32 ineo 223/283/363/423 8.3 8.3.14 Stamp Settings Apply Stamps This function applies the predetermined stamp to all documents to be output from this machine, ensuring security. Specify whether to apply a stamp when printing or sending. To apply stamps, select [Apply], and then configure settings for the stamp to be added continuously. Reference - The following shows the types of the stamps that can be applied to the printed data. – Date/Time – Page Number – Stamp – Copy Security (Copy Protect, Copy Guard, Password Copy) – Stamp Repeat – Header/Footer – Registered Overlay - The following shows the types of the stamps that can be applied to the transmitted data. – Date/Time – Page Number – Stamp – Header/Footer dReference For details on the stamp setting, refer to page 7-21. 9 Web Connection ineo 223/283/363/423 9-3 9.1 Using Web Connection 9 9 Web Connection 9.1 Using Web Connection Web Connection is a device control utility provided by the HTTP server built in the printer controller. Using a Web browser on a computer connected to the network, you can change machine settings and check the status of the machine. Using this utility, you can configure some settings, which are to be handled in the control panel of this machine, through your computer, and also smoothly enter characters. 9.1.1 Operating environment 9.1.2 Accessing Web Connection 0 Start the Web browser to access Web Connection. 0 If User Authentication is enabled, enter the user name and password. For details, refer to page 9-11. 0 For details on setting the IP address of this machine, refer to [User's Guide Network Administrator]. 0 Web Connection has two view modes: Flash and HTML. For details, refer to page 9-9. 1 Start the Web browser. 2 Enter the IP address of the machine in the URL field, and then press [Enter]. http:/// Example: When the IP address of this machine is 192.168.1.20: - http://192.168.1.20/ When IPv6 is set to "ON" while a browser other than Internet Explorer 6 is used: - Enter the IPv6 address enclosed in brackets ([ ]). – http://[IPv6 address of the machine]/ Example: When the IPv6 address of this machine is fe80::220:6bff:fe10:2f16: - http://[fe80::220:6bff:fe10:2f16]/ - If IPv6 is set to "ON" while Internet Explorer is used, add "fe80::220:6bff:fe10:2f IPv6_MFP_1" to the hosts file in advance, and specify the address with the domain name. The main menu or login page appears. Network Ethernet (TCP/IP) Applications on computer Web browser: • Microsoft Internet Explorer Ver. 6/7/8 (JavaScript and Cookies enabled) • Netscape Navigator 7.02 or later (JavaScript and Cookies enabled) • Mozilla Firefox 1.0 or later (JavaScript and Cookies enabled) • Netscape Navigator 7.02 or later (JavaScript and Cookies enabled) • Mozilla Firefox 1.0 or later (JavaScript and Cookies enabled) • Netscape Navigator 7.02 or later (JavaScript and Cookies enabled) • Mozilla Firefox 1.0 or later (JavaScript and Cookies enabled) Adobe® Flash® Player: • Plug-in Ver.7.0 or later required to select Flash as the display format. • Plug-in Ver.9.0 or later required to use the Data Management Utility (font/macro data management). 9 Using Web Connection 9-4 ineo 223/283/363/423 9.1 9.1.3 Web browser cache The Web browser has the cache function; therefore, the latest information may not be shown in the page displayed using Web Connection. Using the cache function may result in an operation failure. When using Web Connection, disable the cache function on the Web browser. Reference - Some Web browser versions may provide different menus and item names. For details, refer to the Help for the Web browser. - With the cache function enabled, timeout occurs in the administrator mode, and after that, how many time you try to access, just timeout recurs. It results in the control panel of this machine being locked, and you cannot handle the control panel. In this case, turn the main power off, and then turn it on again. To avoid this problem, disable the cache function. For Internet Explorer 1 Select [Internet Options] in the [Tools] menu. 2 In the [General] tab, select [Temporary Internet files] - [Settings]. 3 Select [Every visit to the page], and click [OK]. For Netscape Navigator 1 Select [Preferences] in the [Edit] menu. 2 In [Category] on the left, select [Advanced] - [Cache]. 3 In [Document in cache is compared to document on network], select [Every time]. For Mozilla Firefox 1 Select [Options] in the [Tools] menu. 2 Select [Privacy], and then click [Settings] in the Private Data section. 3 Select the [Cache] check box under [Private Data] select the [Clear private data when closing Firefox] check box under [Settings], and then click [OK]. 9.1.4 Online help function You can display the online help regarding the function being configured after logging in to Web Connection and clicking . Reference - To display the online help, connect your computer to the Internet. ineo 223/283/363/423 9-5 9.2 Login and logout 9 9.2 Login and logout 9.2.1 Login and logout flows Accessing with Web Connection displays the login page when User Authentication or Account Track is enabled, and displays the login page in the public user mode when User Authentication or Account Track is not enabled. When re-logging in to this machine as a different user or as an administrator, log out once, and log in again. When user authentication or account track is not enabled You are automatically logged in as a public user. To log in as an administrator, log out once. 9 Login and logout 9-6 ineo 223/283/363/423 9.2 Login as an administrator again. ineo 223/283/363/423 9-7 9.2 Login and logout 9 When User Authentication or Account Track is enabled If Authentication Manager is used for authentication, ask your server administrator about the login procedure. The User Authentication or Account Track page appears. Enter the required items to log in. To log in as a different user or as an administrator, log out once. 9 Login and logout 9-8 ineo 223/283/363/423 9.2 9.2.2 Logout Click [Logout] or [To Login Screen] at the upper right of the window. A logout confirmation page appears. Click [OK] to return to the login page. Reference - The login page that appears differs depending on whether Authentication is enabled in this machine. - When logged in as a public user, [To Login Screen] appears. When logged in as a registered user or an administrator, [Logout] appears. - If timeout occurred because no operation was performed for the specified period during login or if authentication setting was changed using the control panel while logging in to the user mode, you will automatically log out of the mode. - For details on how to specify the timeout period of the user or administrator modes, refer to page 9-37. Log in again. ineo 223/283/363/423 9-9 9.2 Login and logout 9 9.2.3 Login Web Connection provides the user or administrator mode depending on how to log in. If necessary, you can log in to the user mode as an administrator or User Box administrator depending on user authentication or User Box administrator setting. Reference - A User Box administrator can be specified only when a Hard Disk is installed. - You can log in as a User Box administrator when the User Box administrator is enabled using the control panel. For details on the User Box administrator setting, permissions, and password, refer to the page 8-25. - Logging in to the user mode as an administrator enables you to perform job deletion processing, which is not available in the administrator. - In the login page, select the desired Data Management Utility. For details on Data Management Utility, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator]. Login options You can select items as required when logging in. Reference - If Flash is selected in View Mode, the following items are displayed using Flash. – Status icons and messages – Status of [Paper Tray] in [Information] - [Device Information] – Status of [Job] Item Description Language Select the language to display information in. View Mode Select Flash or HTML. • To use the read-out software, select HTML. • In the IPv6 environment, select HTML. • To select Flash, prepare Flash Player. User Assist Select the [Display dialog box in case of warning.] check box to display the dialog box when a warning has occurred or during operation after login. 9 Login and logout 9-10 ineo 223/283/363/423 9.2 Logging in as a public user If user authentication is not enabled on the machine, you will be logging in as a public user. In the login page, select [Public User], and click [Login]. ineo 223/283/363/423 9-11 9.2 Login and logout 9 Logging in as a registered user Specify the registered user name and password to log in when User Authentication is enabled in this machine. % In the login page, enter the user name and the password, and click [Login]. Reference - If Account Track is enabled, also enter the account name and password. - To select a user name from a list, click [User List]. - If External Server Authentication is enabled, select a server. - To log in to the user mode as an administrator, select [Administrator] - [Administrator (User Mode)], and enter the administrator password. - If [Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error] in Administrator Settings is set to Mode 2 and a user enters an incorrect password the specified number of times, that user will be locked out and will no longer be able to use the machine. For details on how to disable Prohibit Functions When Authentication Error, contact your administrator. - [User List] is available only when User Name List is set to [ON]. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. 9 Login and logout 9-12 ineo 223/283/363/423 9.2 Logging in to administrator mode To configure the system or network setting, log in to the administrator mode. 1 Select [Administrator], and then click [Login]. 2 Enter the administrator password, and then click [OK]. % To log in to the user mode as an administrator, select [Administrator (User Mode)], and enter the administrator password. % Logging in to the administrator mode locks the control panel of this machine, and you will not be able to use it. % Depending on the status of this machine, you may not be able to log in to the administrator mode. % If [Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error] in the Administrator Settings is set to Mode 2 and an incorrect password is entered the specified number of times, it is no longer possible to log in to the administrator mode. For details on the Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error parameter, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. % The password entry page varies depending on the machine settings. % You can display the explanation of functions (Help) when necessary. To display Help, select [ON] in Display Setting. [On Mouse]: Point the cursor to display Help. [On Focus]: Select an item to display Help. ineo 223/283/363/423 9-13 9.2 Login and logout 9 Display mode in administrator mode In [System Settings] - [Display Setting], the display mode in the administrator mode can be selected from [Tab Function Display] or [List Function Display]. This manual shows an example where the [List Function Display] is set as the display mode. In either display mode, the available items are the same. In the default setting, the screen is displayed in [Tab Function Display]. In [Tab Function Display], click the desired icon to change the menu. In [List Function Display], change the menu from the list box. Select the desired menu in the drop-down list, click [Display]. 9 Login and logout 9-14 ineo 223/283/363/423 9.2 Logging in as a User Box administrator You can log in to the user mode as an administrator to delete a job when User Authentication is enabled in this machine. If necessary, you can log in to the user mode as a User Box administrator when the User Box administrator is enabled using the control panel. % In the login page, select [Administrator] and click [Login]. % To log in to the user mode as a User Box administrator, select [User Box Administrator], and enter the User Box administrator's password. Reference - A User Box administrator can be specified only when a Hard Disk is installed. - To log in to the user mode as an administrator, select [Administrator] - [Administrator (User Mode)], and enter the administrator password. - If [Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error] in the Administrator Settings is set to Mode 2 and an incorrect password is entered the specified number of times, it is no longer possible to log in to the administrator mode. For details on the Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error parameter, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. - The password entry page varies depending on the machine settings. - You can display the explanation of functions (Help) when necessary. To display Help, select [ON] in Display Setting. – [On Mouse]: Point the cursor to display Help. – [On Focus]: Select an item to display Help. ineo 223/283/363/423 9-15 9.3 Page Configuration 9 9.3 Page Configuration Logging in to Web Connection displays the page that is configured as shown below. This example shows the items in Information - Device Information. Reference - The contents of the Web Connection pages vary depending on the options installed in this machine or the settings of this machine. No. Item Description 1 Login user name Displays the current login mode icon and user name (public, administrator, User Box administrator, registered user, or account). Click the user name to display the login user name. 2 Status display Displays the status of the printer and scanner sections of this machine with icons and messages. Clicking the desired icon when an error occurs displays the information (Consumable Info, Paper Tray, or user registration page) associated with the icon to enable you to check the status. 3 Message display Displays the operating status of this machine. 4 [To Login Screen]/ [Logout] Click this button to log out the current mode and log in again. When logged in as a public user, [To Login Screen] appears. When logged in as a registered user or an administrator, [Logout] appears. 1 2 3 4 10 5 6 7 8 9 9 Page Configuration 9-16 ineo 223/283/363/423 9.3 5 [Change Password] Click this button to jump to the user password change page. This button appears only in the user mode page in which you logged in as a registered user. 6 Help You can display the online help for the currently configured function. For the specified pages, refer to "Online Assistance" in page 9-17. 7 Refresh Click this icon to refresh the information displayed in the page. 8 Icon Select the category of the item to be displayed. The following icons are displayed in the user mode. • Information • Job • User Box • Direct Print • Store Address • Customize 9 Menu Displays information and setting for the selected icon. The menu that appears in this area varies depending on which icon was selected. 10 Information and settings Displays the details of the item selected in the menu. No. Item Description ineo 223/283/363/423 9-17 9.4 User Mode Overview 9 9.4 User Mode Overview Logging in to the user mode enables you to configure the following functions. 9.4.1 Information dReference You can also check the explanation of the user mode in the Web Connection online help or Web Connection manual included in the application DVD-ROM. For details on the online help, refer to page 9-4. Item Description [Device Information] Enables you to check the components, options, consumables, and meter counts of this machine. [Online Assistance] Enables you to check the online assistance about this product. [Change User Password] Changes the password of the login user. [Function Permission Information] Enables you to check the function permission information about the user or account. [Network Setting Information] Enables you to check the network settings of this machine. [Print Setting Information] Enables you to check the printer controller settings of this machine. [Print Information] Prints font or configuration information. 9 User Mode Overview 9-18 ineo 223/283/363/423 9.4 9.4.2 Job 9.4.3 User Boxes dReference For details on how to handle User Boxes, refer to page 9-22. Item Description [Current Jobs] Enables you to check the currently executed job or queued jobs. [Job History] Enables you to check the executed jobs. [Communication List] Enables you to check the completed transmission and reception jobs. Item Description [Open User Box] Opens the currently created User Box (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) to enable you to print, send, or download a document saved in the User Box or to change the User Box setting. [Create User Box] Enables to create a new User Box. ineo 223/283/363/423 9-19 9.4 User Mode Overview 9 Reference - [Open User Box] and [Create User Box] are displayed only when a Hard Disk is installed. 9.4.4 Direct Print Reference - [Direct Print] may not be displayed depending on settings in the administrator mode. - A colored original is converted to black and white for printing even if Direct Print is specified. - [Save in User Box] and [Secure Print] in [Application Setting] are displayed only when a Hard Disk is installed. - If the following original is downloaded while no Hard Disk is installed, memory overflow may occur, resulting in a printing failure. – Large volume original – Original that contains complicated figures and requires a large amount of memory to process it [Open System User Box] This function opens the System User Box (Bulletin Board, Polling TX, Compulsory Memory RX, Confidential RX, or Relay User Box) to enable you to handle a document saved in the User Box or change the User Box setting. • The Bulletin Board, Polling TX, Compulsory Memory RX, and Relay User Boxes are available when the optional Fax Kit is installed. • The Confidential RX User Box is available when the optional Fax Kit is installed while no Hard Disk is installed. [Create System User Box] Enables you to create a new Bulletin Board, Confidential RX, or Relay User Box. • The Bulletin Board and Relay User Boxes are available when the optional Fax Kit is installed. • The Confidential RX User Box is available when the optional Fax Kit is installed while no Hard Disk is installed. Item Description Item Description [Direct Print] Specify a file saved in the computer to print it using this machine. If necessary, you can select Application to save a document in the specified User Box. 9 User Mode Overview 9-20 ineo 223/283/363/423 9.4 9.4.5 Store Address [Store Address] may not be displayed depending on settings in the administrator mode. Item Description [Address Book] Enables you to check the address book registered in this machine or to register and change an address. [Group] Enables you to check the group address book registered in this machine or to register and change an address. [Program] Enables you to check the program address book registered in this machine or to register and change an address. [Temporary One-Touch] Enables you to check the temporary program address book registered in this machine or to register and change an address. [Subject] Enables you to register or change up to 10 subjects when sending E-mails. [Text] Enables you to register or change up to 10 body messages when sending E-mails. ineo 223/283/363/423 9-21 9.4 User Mode Overview 9 9.4.6 Customize This function enables you to specify the initial screen after logging in. Item Description [Option] Enables you to configure the settings displayed in the initial page after logging in to this machine. 9 Handling a document in a User Box 9-22 ineo 223/283/363/423 9.5 9.5 Handling a document in a User Box This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. The [Open User Box] menu supports the following functions. - Listing the documents saved in a User Box - Printing a document - Sending a document to another machine - Downloading and saving document data in your computer - Moving or copying a document to another User Box - Deleting a document 9.5.1 Listing the documents saved in a User Box Logging in displays a list of the User Boxes (Public, Personal, and Group User Boxes) created in the accessed MFP. Open User Box Select the target User Box name in the User Box list. Otherwise, enter the User Box number and password, and click [OK]. Reference - Selecting a User Box name with a password displays the password entry page. "Open User Box" is displayed as shown below depending on the User Authentication or Account Track settings. - [Open User Box(Public)]: Displayed when User Authentication is not enabled. - [Open User Box(Public/Personal)]: Displayed when User Authentication is enabled. - [Open User Box(Public/Group)]: Displayed when Account Track is enabled. - [Open User Box(Public/Group/Personal)]: Displayed when User Authentication and Account Track are enabled. Item Description [User Box Number] Enter the number of the User Box to be opened. [User Box Password] If a password is set to the target User Box, enter the password. ineo 223/283/363/423 9-23 9.5 Handling a document in a User Box 9 File List Selecting a User Box displays its basic information and also lists the documents saved in the User Box. Item Description [Search from Index] Displays a list of User Boxes for each index, which was selected when creating a User Box. [Page (Display by 50 cases)] When this machine contains 50 or more User Boxes, specify the desired page to change the display. [User Box List] Displays the User Box number, User Box name, User Box type, and creation date and time. A User Box with a password is displayed by a keyshaped icon. Item Description [User Box Settings] Click this button to change the User Box name, index, extension, or password setting. [Delete User Box] Click this button to delete the displayed User Box. • Deleting a User Box erases all the documents saved in the User Box. Thumbnail View To view a thumbnail image for each document, click [ON]. When you do not view thumbnail images, click [OFF]. Specify operation Select the target operation, for example, printing, moving, copying, or deleting a document, sending to another machine, or downloading to your computer. For details, refer to page 9-24. [Changes the display] Select the target operation, and click this button to display the "Select" check box for the document that can be handled by the target function. Select Displays a check box for the document that can be handled by the selected function. Thumbnail Displays the image of the first page when the thumbnail image display function is enabled. 9 Handling a document in a User Box 9-24 ineo 223/283/363/423 9.5 Reference - If 11 or more documents are saved, [Page (Display by 10 cases)] is displayed. 9.5.2 Printing a document 1 Select [Specify operation] - [Print], and click [Changes the display]. The select check box is displayed for printable documents. Document Name Displays a document name. Number of Originals Displays the number of originals in a document. [Edit Name] Click this button to rename a document. Item Description ineo 223/283/363/423 9-25 9.5 Handling a document in a User Box 9 2 Select the check box of the target document, and click [Print Setting]. 9 Handling a document in a User Box 9-26 ineo 223/283/363/423 9.5 3 Configure print settings. % If multiple documents are selected while Combine is set to [OFF], Basic Setting and Application Setting will become unavailable. % [Save Print Settings] is not displayed when multiple documents are selected. 4 Click [OK]. Printing starts. 5 Click [OK]. You then return to the File List page. Item Description [Change order] Displayed when multiple documents are selected. This function enables you to change the printing order. Click the target document, and select [Top], [Up], [Down], [Bottom], or [Undo]. When checking a thumbnail image for each document, click [Thumbnail View]. [Combine] Displayed when multiple documents are selected. This function prints the selected documents as one. [Basic Setting] Specify Number of Copies, 2-Sided Print, Continuous Print, and Finishing settings. • Continuous Print is displayed when multiple documents are selected. [Application Setting] Configure more detailed setting such as Page Margin or Stamp. When using this function, click [Display]. [Save Print Settings] Select whether to save print setting. ineo 223/283/363/423 9-27 9.5 Handling a document in a User Box 9 9.5.3 Sending a document to another machine 1 Select [Specify operation] - [Send to other device], and click [Changes the display]. The select check box is displayed for documents that can be sent. 2 Select the check box of the target document, and click [TX Setting]. 9 Handling a document in a User Box 9-28 ineo 223/283/363/423 9.5 3 Configure send settings. Item Description [Specify destination] Click [Search from List] to select the destination in the address book. When checking the destination list, click [Check Destination]. ineo 223/283/363/423 9-29 9.5 Handling a document in a User Box 9 % If multiple documents are selected while Bind TX is set to [OFF], File Type or Application Setting will become unavailable. 4 Click [OK]. Sending starts. 5 Click [OK]. You then return to the File List page. 9.5.4 Downloading document data to your computer 1 Select [Specify operation] - [Download to PC], and click [Changes the display]. The select check box for selecting an available document is displayed. [Change order] Displayed when multiple documents are selected. This function enables you to change the sending order. Click the target document, and select [Top], [Up], [Down], [Bottom], or [Undo]. When checking a thumbnail image for each document, click [Thumbnail View]. [Bind TX] Displayed when multiple documents are selected. This function sends the selected documents as one. [File Type] Specify the file type and encryption contents for a file to be sent. [Communication Setting] Configure E-mail settings or specify the URL notification destination. When using this function, click [Display]. [Application Setting] Configure more detailed setting such as Stamp or Send & Print. When using this function, click [Display]. Item Description 9 Handling a document in a User Box 9-30 ineo 223/283/363/423 9.5 2 Select the check box of the target document, and click [Download Setting]. 3 Configure settings. ineo 223/283/363/423 9-31 9.5 Handling a document in a User Box 9 4 Click [OK]. 5 When [Preparation for download has been completed] has appeared, click [Download]. The File Download page appears. 6 Click [Save]. 7 Specify the saving place and file name, and click [Save]. 8 Click [Back]. You then return to the File List page. Item Description [Change order] Displayed when multiple documents are selected. This function collects pages in the order in which they are displayed, and prints them as one document. If necessary, you can change that order. Click the target document, and select [Top], [Up], [Down], [Bottom], or [Undo]. When checking a thumbnail image for each document, click [Thumbnail View]. [File Format] Select the file type for the file to be saved. [Page Range] Download all pages or specify the range of successive pages. 9 Handling a document in a User Box 9-32 ineo 223/283/363/423 9.5 9.5.5 Moving or copying a document to another User Box 1 Select [Specify operation] - [Move/Copy], and click [Changes the display]. The check box for selecting an available document is displayed. 2 Select the check box of the target document, and click [Move/Copy Setting]. % You cannot select multiple documents. ineo 223/283/363/423 9-33 9.5 Handling a document in a User Box 9 3 Configure settings. 4 Click [OK]. This moves or copies the document. 5 Click [OK]. You then return to the File List page. 9.5.6 Deleting a document 1 Select [Specify operation] - [Delete], and click [Changes the display]. The check box for selecting an available document is displayed. Item Description [User Box Number] Select the User Box to move or copy a document from the User Box List. [Copy] Select this check box to copy a document to the target User Box. 9 Handling a document in a User Box 9-34 ineo 223/283/363/423 9.5 2 Select the check box of the target document, and click [Delete]. % To select or unselect all documents, select the [Check/Uncheck] check box. 3 Check the document name to be deleted, and click [OK]. % When checking a thumbnail image for each document, click [Thumbnail View]. 4 Click [OK]. This deletes a document(s), and returns you to the File List page. ineo 223/283/363/423 9-35 9.6 Administrator Mode Overview 9 9.6 Administrator Mode Overview Logging in to the administrator mode enables you to use the following functions. Reference - For details on the administrator mode, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator]. - The administrator modes are classified into two display modes: [Tab Function Display] and [List Function Display]. This manual shows an example where the [List Function Display] is set. For details, refer to page 9-13. 9.6.1 Maintenance Item Description [Meter Count] Enables you to check the meter count of this machine. [ROM Version] Enables you to check the ROM version. [Import/Export] Saves (exports) setting information of this machine as a file, or writes (imports) it from a file to this machine. [Status Notification Setting] Configure the function to be reported to a registered user when an error has occurred in this machine. Specify the destination and items to notify a registered user of an error. [Total Counter Notification Setting] Configure the setting to notify the target user of the total counter by E-mail, and register the E-mail address of the destination. [Date/Time Setting] Specify the date and time displayed in this machine. [Timer Setting] Configure Power Save or Weekly Timer Setting in this machine. [Network Error Code Display Setting] Specify whether to display the network error code. [Reset] Clears all settings for the network, controller and destinations. 9 Administrator Mode Overview 9-36 ineo 223/283/363/423 9.6 Reference - The following functions are available only when a Hard Disk is installed. – [License Settings] – [Edit Font/Macro] (This item is displayed, but cannot be specified.) – [Job Log] 9.6.2 System Settings Reference - To use this machine as a scanner with the application software under TWAIN, install the dedicated driver software TWAIN. For details, refer to the TWAIN driver manual in the DVD supplied together with this machine. [License Settings] Allows you to issue a license and enable functions. Also, a request code can be issued. [Edit Font/Macro] Adds font or macro. [Job Log] Allows you to create and download log data of the jobs that were executed in this machine. Item Description Item Description [Machine Setting] Changes the registration information of this machine. [Register Support Information] Specify support information (such as contact name, corporate URL, or online manual URL) of this machine. To display this information, select [Information] - [Online Assistance]. [Network TWAIN] Specify the time to release the operation lock when scanning (excluding push-scanning). If necessary, configure settings to enable saving or reading a document in or from the external memory. [User Box Setting] Define the User Box functions such as deleting an unnecessary User Box or specifying the document deletion time. If necessary, configure settings to enable saving or reading a document in or from the external memory. [Stamp Settings] Register a header or footer. In addition, in [Fax TX Settings], specify whether to cancel the stamp setting for fax transmission. [Blank Page Print Settings] Specify whether to print contents configured in [Stamp/Composition] on blank pages. [Skip Job Operation Settings] Specify whether to skip a job. [Flash Display Setting] Specify whether to allow or restrict the flash display. ineo 223/283/363/423 9-37 9.6 Administrator Mode Overview 9 Reference - The following functions are available only when a Hard Disk is installed. – [Delete Unused User Box], [Delete Secure Print File], [Delete Time Setting], [Document Delete Time Setting], and [ID & Print Delete Time ] in [User Box Setting] – [User Box Setting] - [External Memory Function Settings] - [USB to User Box] – [System Connection Setting] - [Application Connection Setting] 9.6.3 Security [Administrator Password Setting] is not displayed when: - The SSL certificate is not installed - Enhanced Security Mode is set to "ON" - [Mode Using SSL/TLS] is set to [None] in [Security] - [PKI Settings] - [SSL Setting] even though a device certificate is already registered [System Connection Setting] Configure the automatic setting of Prefix/Suffix or the setting for printing data in a cellular phone. In [Application Connection Setting], specify whether to cancel a connection from this machine to My Panel Manager. [Display Setting] Select the display mode in the administrator mode from [Tab Function Display] or [List Function Display]. [Outline PDF Setting] Specify whether to outline text. Item Description Item Description [PKI Settings] Register device certificates and configure the SSL, protocol, or external certificate settings. • [Protocol Setting] is displayed only when a Hard Disk is installed. [Certificate Verification Settings] Specify the items to validate a certificate. [Address Reference Setting] When giving destination access permission, specify a reference allowed group name or access allowed level. [Restrict User Access] Specify the function to restrict user operations. [Copy Security] Specify whether to use the copy guard or password copy function. [Auto Logout] Specify the time to automatically log out the administrator or user mode. [Administrator Password Setting] Specify the password to log in to the administrator mode. 9 Administrator Mode Overview 9-38 ineo 223/283/363/423 9.6 9.6.4 User Authentication/Account Track Item Description [General Settings] Configure the User Authentication or Account Track setting in this machine. To enable authentication, configure the number of assigned counters or the When Number of Jobs Reach Maximum setting. [User Authentication Setting] When enabling User Authentication, register the target user or configure user setting. [Account Track Settings] When enabling Account Track, register and edit the target account. [External Server Settings] When enabling external server authentication, register the external server. [Public User Box Setting] Specify the upper limit of the number of User Boxes. • This item is displayed only when a Hard Disk is installed. [Scan to Home Settings] Configure the setting to send a file to the Home folder. [Scan to Authorized Folder Settings] Configure settings to restrict manual transmission destinations. ineo 223/283/363/423 9-39 9.6 Administrator Mode Overview 9 9.6.5 Network Item Description [TCP/IP Setting] Configure the TCP/IP setting when connecting this machine via network. [E-mail Setting] Configure the settings to send or receive E-mails (including Internet fax), and specify the extension function such as E-mail authentication. [LDAP Setting] Configure the settings to register the LDAP server. [IPP Setting] Configure the IPP print setting. [FTP Setting] Configure the settings to use this machine as an FTP client or server. [SNMP Setting] Configure SNMP settings. [SMB Setting] Configure the SMB client, WINS, SMB print, or Direct Hosting setting. [Web Service Settings] Configure the settings to perform scanning or printing using Web services. [Bonjour Setting] Configure Bonjour settings. [NetWare Setting] Configure NetWare settings. [AppleTalk Setting] Configure AppleTalk settings. [Network Fax Setting] Configure the direct SMTP TX or direct SMTP RX settings. [WebDAV Settings] Configure the WebDAV settings. [OpenAPI Setting] Configure the OpenAPI settings. 9 Administrator Mode Overview 9-40 ineo 223/283/363/423 9.6 Reference - The following functions are available only when a Hard Disk is installed. – [S/MIME] in [E-mail Setting] – [Network Fax Setting] 9.6.6 User Boxes Logging in to the administrator mode enables you to handle a User Box without entering the password when opening it. [TCP Socket Setting] Configure the TCP Socket settings to have a data communication between this machine and the application software in your computer. [IEEE802.1x Authentication Setting] Configure IEEE802.1X authentication settings. [LLTD Setting] Select whether to enable or disable LLTD. [SSDP Settings] Configure the SSDP settings. [Bluetooth Setting] Select whether to enable or disable Bluetooth. • To enable a Bluetooth communication, contact your service representative in advance. Item Description Item Description [Open User Box] Opens the currently created User Box (Public, Group, or Personal User Box) to enable you to change the User Box setting. • Document operations are not available in the administrator mode. • User Box operations are available even if a password is specified for the target User Box. [Create User Box] Enables to create a new User Box. [Open System User Box] Open the System User Box (Bulletin Board, Confidential RX, Relay, or Annotation User Box) to enable you to handle a document saved in the User Box or change the User Box setting. • The Bulletin Board and Relay User Boxes are available when the optional Fax Kit is installed. • The Confidential RX User Box is available when the optional Fax Kit is installed while no Hard Disk is installed. • The Annotation User Box is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. ineo 223/283/363/423 9-41 9.6 Administrator Mode Overview 9 Reference - [Open User Box] and [Create User Box] are displayed only when a Hard Disk is installed. 9.6.7 Printer Settings [Create System User Box] Enables you to create a new Bulletin Board, Confidential RX, Relay, or Annotation User Box. • The Bulletin Board and Relay User Boxes are available when the optional Fax Kit is installed. • The Confidential RX User Box is available when the optional Fax Kit is installed while no Hard Disk is installed. • The Annotation User Box is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. Item Description Item Description [Basic Setting] Specify the default values of the printer. [PCL Setting] Specify the default values in the PCL mode. [PS Setting] Specify the default values in the PS mode. [TIFF Setting] Specify the paper to print TIFF images. [XPS Settings] Configure the XPS print settings. [Interface Setting] Specify the timeout period of the interface. [Direct Print Settings] Configure the settings to enable direct printing using Web Connection. [Assign Account to Acquire Device Info] Select whether to specify a password to acquire device information through the printer driver. If [ON] is selected, specify the password. 9 Administrator Mode Overview 9-42 ineo 223/283/363/423 9.6 9.6.8 Store Address Item Description [Address Book] Enables you to check the address book registered in this machine or to register and change an address. [Group] Enables you to check the group address book registered in this machine or to register and change an address. [Program] Enables you to check the program address book registered in this machine or to register and change an address. [Temporary One-Touch] Enables you to check the temporary program address book registered in this machine or to register and change an address. [Subject] Registers up to 10 subjects when sending E-mails. [Text] Registers up to 10 body messages to be used when sending E-mails. [Application Registration] Registers application settings and server addresses when using the applications such as RightFax Server registered in the external server. Registering applications and servers enables you to automatically connect to the server of the selected application. • [Application Registration] is not displayed when the optional Fax Kit is installed. [Prefix/Suffix] Registers Prefix or Suffix to be added as destination information when Emailing. ineo 223/283/363/423 9-43 9.6 Administrator Mode Overview 9 9.6.9 Fax Settings Item Description [Header/Footer Position] Configure the setting to print the sender or receiving information. [Line Parameter Setting] Specify the fax line such as Dialing Method. [TX/RX Settings] Configure the paper, User Box, and other settings for sending or receiving data. [Function Setting] Configure the fax settings for Memory RX or Network Fax. [PBX Connection Setting] Specify the outside line at PBX connection. [Report Settings] Configure the setting for a report, for example, Activity Report, to be output when sending or receiving data. [Multi Line Settings] Specify the parameters and functions of the extended line. • This item is displayed when a line is extended. [Network Fax Setting] Configure the setting to use network fax. • This item is displayed only when a Hard Disk is installed. [Header Information] Registers sender information and fax number when sending data. [Fax Print Quality Settings] Specify whether to correct a received G3 fax according to the resolution. • The low resolution means 200 dpi e 100 dpi, 200 dpi e 200 dpi, or 300 dpi e 300 dpi, and the high resolution means 400 dpi e 400 dpi. 9 Administrator Mode Overview 9-44 ineo 223/283/363/423 9.6 9.6.10 Setting for each purpose For an item with multiple settings required, configure them according to the instructions shown in the window. The available setting items are as follows. - Configure the settings for sending a scanned document - Configure the network print settings - Restrict users using this machine Reference - As the setting procedure proceeds, its progress flow is displayed on the left. - If setting is cancelled, you will return to the Setting for each purpose screen after the items that were configured before cancellation have been applied. 10 Appendix ineo 223/283/363/423 10-3 10.1 Error message list 10 10 Appendix 10.1 Error message list If an error message appears, perform the corresponding operation described below. dReference For details on the network settings, refer to [User's Guide Network Administrator]. Message Cause and remedy Unable to connect to the network. Make sure that the network cable is correctly connected. In addition, make sure that Network Settings in Administrator Settings have been correctly configured. The address for the communication method cannot be selected since the number of addresses has exceeded the maximum allowed for broadcasting. The number of destinations specified exceeds the number possible for a broadcast transmission. Reduce the number of broadcast destinations, or send the transmission in multiple batches. Document could not be saved in user box due to insufficient HDD capacity. Check log. The hard disk is full. Delete unnecessary data, and then try saving the data again. The number of registered user boxes has reached the max. allowance. The number of registered user boxes has reached the maximum allowed. The number of User Boxes that can be registered has reached the maximum number possible. The number of documents saved in the User Box has reached its maximum. The number of documents saved in the User Box has reached its maximum. The number of documents that can be saved in a User Box has reached the maximum number possible. The number of programmed jobs has reached the max. allowance. Wait until a programmed job is completed. The number of jobs that can be programmed has reached the maximum number possible. Wait until a job has been completed, or delete a current job. 10 Glossary 10-4 ineo 223/283/363/423 10.2 10.2 Glossary Term Description 10Base-T/100Base- TX/1000Base-T A set of specifications under the Ethernet standards. Those cables that consist of twisted copper wire pairs are used. The transmission speed of 10Base-T is 10 Mbps, of 100Base-TX is 100 Mbps, and of 1000Base-T is 1000 Mbps. Adobe® Flash® Software or its file format developed by Adobe Systems Inc. (formerly by Macromedia, Inc.), used to create a content by compiling vectorgraphic animations and sounds. The software allows handling interactive contents using keyboard or mouse. The files can be kept relatively compact and accessed from a Web browser with dedicated plug-in software. Anonymous FTP While normal FTP sites are protected by an account name and password, this type of FTP site can be used by anyone without a password by simply entering anonymous as the account name. Authentication & print A function that allows you to print the job sent from the printer driver during user authentication. Auto IP A function to obtain an IP address automatically. If one fails to get an IP address via DHCP, the auto IP gets an IP address from the space of "169.254.0.0". bit The abbreviation for binary digit. The smallest unit of information (data quantity) handled by a computer or printer. A bit uses only a 0 or a 1 to indicate data. Bitmap Font A font using a collection of dots to present characters. Jagged edges are conspicuous for the larger size Bitmap Font characters. BMP The abbreviation for bitmap. This is a file format for saving image data. (The file extension is ".bmp".) Commonly used on Windows platforms. BMP covers the color depth from monochrome (2 values) to full color (16,777,216 colors). BMP images are not suitable for compressed storage. Byte A byte indicates a unit of information (data quantity) handled by a computer or printer. A byte consists of eight bits. Compact PDF A compression method for minimizing the data size using the PDF format, used for digitalizing color documents. Compact PDF allows high compression performance by identifying the text and image regions, and applying the resolution and compression method optimized for each region. The compact PDF method can be selected in this machine when using the scanning function to digitalize documents. Contrast The difference in intensity between the light and dark parts of the image (light/dark variation). "Low contrast" indicates an image with little light/dark variation, while "High contrast" an image with large light/dark variation. Default An initial setting. The settings selected in advance and enabled when the machine is turned on, or the settings selected in advance and enabled when the function is activated. Default Gateway A device, such as a computer or router, used as a "gateway" to access computers on different LANs. Density The amount of density of an image. Density Compensation A color tone correction function used for output devices such as printers and displays. DHCP The acronym for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. used for a client computer on the TCP/IP network to load network configuration automatically from a server. Just using a DHCP server to centrally manage IP addresses of the DHCP clients enables you to construct a network without IP address conflicts or other troubles. Dither A method of presenting the quasi-shading of gray using black and white colors. This method is easier to process than error diffusion, but may stir some unevenness on the image. ineo 223/283/363/423 10-5 10.2 Glossary 10 DNS The acronym for Domain Name System. DNS allows for obtaining the IP address corresponding to a host name in network environments. This system enables a user to access other computers on the network by specifying host names instead of elusive and non-intuitive IP addresses. DPI (dpi) The acronym for Dots Per Inch. A unit of resolution used for printers and scanners. This indicates the number of dots used to represent an inch. The higher this value, the higher the resolution. Driver Software that works as a bridge between a computer and a peripheral device. Ethernet A standard for LAN transmission lines. File extension Characters added to a file name for the recognition of the file format. The file extension is added after a dot of a file name, for example, ".bmp" or ".jpg". FTP The acronym for File Transfer Protocol. This is a protocol used for transferring files via the Internet, an intranet or other TCP/IP network. Gradation The shading levels of an image. Larger number of the levels can reproduce smoother transition of the shading. Gray scale A form of presenting monochrome image by using the gradation information shifting from black to white. Halftone A method for presenting the shading of an image by using different sizes of black and white dots. Hard disk A large capacity storage device for storing data. The data is retained even after the power is turned off. HTTP The acronym for HyperText Transfer Protocol. This is a protocol used to send or receive data between a Web server and a client (such as a Web browser). HTTP can exchange files such as images, sounds, and movies that are associated with documents, including their presentation formats and other information. Install To install hardware, operating systems, applications, printer drivers, or other software on to a computer. IP Address An address or a code used to identify an individual network device on the Internet. IPv4 (Internet Protocol version 4), a protocol widely used today, adopts a 32-bit number for an IP address separated into four sections. An example of an IPv4 IP address is: 192.168.1.10. On the other hand, IPv6 (Internet Protocol version 6), the next generation protocol, adopts 128-bit IP addresses. An IP address is assigned to every computer or other device connected to the Internet. JPEG The acronym for Joint Photographic Experts Group, One of the file formats used to save image data. (The file extension is ".jpg".) The compression ratio is generally 1/10 to 1/100. JPEG is an effective method to compress photographs and other natural images. Kerberos A network authentication system used for Windows 2000 or later, used as the Active Directory authentication. Kerberos arranges an authentic site within the network to provide two-phase authentication processes of users login and the use of network resources, allowing users to be securely and efficiently authenticated. LAN The acronym for Local Area Network. This is a network constructed by connecting computers on the same floor, in the same building, or in neighboring buildings. LDAP The acronym for Lightweight Directory Access Protocol, a protocol used to access a database that can manage E-mail addresses and environmental information of network users on the Internet, intranet, or other TCP/IP network. Memory A storage device used for storing data temporarily. Some types of memory retain data even after the power is turned off, while others not. Multi Page TIFF A TIFF file that contains multiple pages. Term Description 10 Glossary 10-6 ineo 223/283/363/423 10.2 OS The acronym for Operating System. This is base software used to control the system of a computer. Windows, MacOS, or UNIX is an OS. PASV The abbreviation for PASsiVe, a mode used to connect to an FTP server from within a firewall. If this mode is not selected, the firewall regards the access as unauthorized and blocks the connection, disabling any file transmission. PDF The acronym for Portable Document Format. This is an electronically formatted document with file extension of ".pdf". PDF is based on the PostScript format. You can use the free Adobe Reader software to view PDF documents. Pixel The smallest constitutional unit of an image. Plug and play A mechanism used to immediately detect a peripheral device when it is plugged into a computer, and search for an appropriate driver automatically, so that the device becomes operable. Port Number A number used to identify the transmission port assigned to each process running on a computer on the network. The same port cannot be used by multiple processes. PPI The acronym for Pixels Per Inch, Measuring unit for resolution, particularly for monitors and scanners. It indicates how many pixels are contained per inch. Preview A function allowing you to view an image before being processed for printing or scanning. Print job A print request transmitted from a computer to a printing device. Printer driver Software that works as a bridge between a computer and a printer. Property Attribute information. When using a printer driver, various functions can be specified in the file properties. By using properties of a file, you can check the attribute information about the file. Protocol A rule enabling a computer to communicate with other computers or peripherals. Proxy server A server that is installed to act as an intermediary connection between each client and different servers to effectively ensure security over the entire system for Internet connections. Resolution The resolution value indicates how much detail of an object can be reproduced precisely on an image or a print matter. Scanning The reading of an image in scanner operation by moving aligned image sensors step by step. The direction of moving image sensors is called the main scanning direction, and the direction of image sensors alignment is called the sub-scanning direction. Screen frequency The density of dots used to create the image. Single-page TIFF A TIFF file that contains only a single page. SMB The acronym for Server Message Block. This is a protocol for sharing files and printers mainly over the Windows network. SSD The acronym for Solid State Drive. This is a memory device installed in this machine. This drive is used to store a document saved or received from the fax function when no Hard Disk is installed. SSL/TLS The acronym for Secure Socket Layer/Transport Layer Security, an encoding method used to securely transmit data between the Web server and a browser. Subnet mask A value used to divide a TCP/IP network into small networks (subnetworks). This is used to identify how many higher-order bits of an IP address are used for the network address. TCP/IP The acronym for Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. It is a de facto standard protocol widely used for the Internet. An IP address is used to identify each network device. Thumbnail A function of displaying the content of an image or document file by a small image (image displayed when the file is opened). Term Description ineo 223/283/363/423 10-7 10.2 Glossary 10 TIFF The acronym for Tagged Image File Format, One of the file formats used for saving image data. (The file extension is ".tif".) By using the "tag" indicating the data type, information for various image formats can be saved in a single image data. TWAIN An interface standard defined for between imaging devices including scanners and digital cameras and applications including graphics software. To use a TWAIN compatible device, a relevant TWAIN driver is required. Uninstallation To delete software installed on a computer USB The acronym for Universal Serial Bus. This is a general-purpose interface defined for connecting a mouse, printer, and other devices with a computer. Web browser Software used to view Web pages. Typical Web browsers include Internet Explorer and Netscape Navigator. Term Description 10 Glossary 10-8 ineo 223/283/363/423 10.2 11 Index ineo 223/283/363/423 11-3 11.1 Index by item 11 11 Index 11.1 Index by item Numerics 1-sided/2-sided 7-10 A Accessing 9-3 Address book - search 7-38 Address search 7-46 Address type 7-38 Administrator settings 8-3, 8-14 Allow/restrict user box 8-22 Annotation user box 6-3, 7-89, 8-16 Application 7-62, 7-70 Application - book copy 6-16 Application - frame erase 6-15 Apply stamps 8-32 Auto delete secure document 8-20 B Background removal 6-14 Basic - color 6-12 Basic - density 6-12 Basic - file type 6-8 Basic - original type 6-6 Basic - resolution 6-7 Basic - simplex/duplex 6-7 Bind TX 7-35 Binding position 6-17 Body 7-57 Book copy method 6-16 Book erase - center erase 6-17 Book erase - frame erase 6-16 Bulletin board user box 7-82, 8-6 C Cellular phone/PDA setting 8-12, 8-24 Chapters 7-20 Check dest. & send 7-55 Check HDD capacity 8-26 Check printing preferences 7-106 Check SSD capacity 8-27 Check/change temporarily 7-31 City 7-47 Color 7-68 Combine 7-7, 7-14 Communication method settings 7-59 Communication settings 7-54 Company name 7-48 Compulsory memory RX user box 7-87 Confidential RX user box 8-8 Confidential RX user box (System user box) 7-108 Continuous print 7-15 Control panel 3-3 Copies 7-10 Copy 7-66 Copy guard type 7-26 Copy protect 7-24 Cover sheet 7-18 Creating a user box 8-5, 8-15 Custom display settings 8-10 Custom size 6-13 Customize 9-21 D Date/time 7-21 Default tab 8-10 Delete empty user box(es) (Administrator settings) 8-6 Delete page 7-71 Delete secure print documents 8-19 Delete unused user box 8-19 Deleting documents 7-65 Density 7-93 Department 7-48 Despeckle 6-20 Detail 3-12 Detail search 7-39, 7-58 Detail settings 7-25, 7-27, 7-28, 7-30, 7-44, 7-45, 7-81 Digital signature 7-61 Direct input 7-40, 7-58 Direct print 9-19 Direction settings - binding position 6-20 Direction settings - original direction 6-19 Displaying detailed information 7-69 Document delete time setting 8-23 Document details 7-69, 7-102 Document hold setting 8-21 Document name 7-56 Download 9-29 E ECM OFF 7-55 Edit document 7-71 Edit name 7-65 E-mail 7-41 E-mail addr. 7-47 E-mail encryption 7-61 E-Mail settings 7-56 Encrypted PDF data 7-101 Encrypted PDF delete time 8-20 11-4 ineo 223/283/363/423 11 Index by item 11.1 Encryption 6-9, 7-50 Encryption - detail settings 6-9, 7-50 Entering the PIN code 7-106 Error message list 10-3 External memory 4-11, 4-15, 6-3, 7-100 External memory function settings 8-22 F Fax 7-41 Fax header settings 7-61 Fax number 7-47 Fax retransmit user box 7-95 Fax settings 9-43 F-code transmission 7-60 File list 9-23 File name 2-11 File path 7-43, 7-44, 7-45, 7-101 File type 6-8, 7-49, 7-68 Filing 4-17 Filing settings 7-64 Finishing 7-11 First name 7-47 Fold/bind 7-13 Format HDD 8-30 Format SSD 8-31 From 7-57 FTP 7-44 G Glossary 10-4 Group 7-11 H HDD encryption setting 8-31 HDD lock password 8-29 HDD settings 8-26 Header/footer 7-30 Host name 7-43, 7-44, 7-45 I Icons 3-5 ID & print delete after print setting 8-23 ID & print delete time 8-21 ID & print settings 8-24 ID & print user box 7-98 Image adjustment 6-14 Image shift - change back shift 7-17 Index 7-39 Information 9-17 Insert sheet 7-19 Insert sheet setting 7-23 Internet fax 7-42 IP address fax 7-42 J Job 9-18 Job history 7-46 Job list 3-7 Job list - delete 3-7 Job list - job details 3-8 L Last name 7-47 LDAP search - advanced search 7-47 LDAP search - search 7-47 Left panel 3-6 Line setting 7-54 Link file error notification 8-11 M Maintenance 9-35 Maximum number of user boxes 8-18 Menu tree 1-7, 4-23, 8-2 Mobile/PDA 7-105 Move page 7-74 Move/copy 9-32 Moving documents 7-65 N Name 7-47 Network 9-39 New 7-79 Next destination 7-43, 7-44, 7-45 Number type 7-93 O Offset 7-11 Online help 9-4 Operating environment 9-3 OR/AND/STARTS WITH/ENDS WITH 7-48 Organizing documents 2-7 Original settings 6-19 Outline PDF 6-11, 7-52 Overlay setting 7-33 Overseas TX 7-54 Overwrite 7-80 Overwrite all data 8-28 Overwrite HDD data 8-27 P Page configuration 9-15 Page margin 7-16 Page number 7-22 Paper 7-103 Password 7-43, 7-44, 7-45 Password encrypted PDF user box 7-97 Password transmission 7-60 PC (SMB) 7-43 Photo size 6-13 Polling TX user box 7-83 Position 7-25, 7-30 Preview 3-16, 3-17, 7-69 Preview/set range 7-76 Preview/specify by input 7-77 Print 7-7, 7-8, 9-24 Print - application 7-16 ineo 223/283/363/423 11-5 11.1 Index by item 11 Print - basic 7-10, 7-102 Print position 7-93 Print/save 7-97 Printer settings 9-41 Printing 4-5, 4-15 Proxy server use 8-11 Punch 7-12 Punch - position setting 7-12 R Receiver RX ability 7-42 Reference 7-43 Register overlay 7-78 Registered overlay 7-32 Relay user box 8-8 Resolution 7-48, 7-67 Rotate page 7-72 S Save in external memory 7-66 Save in user box 7-104 Saving 4-3, 4-11 Saving documents 2-4, 6-3 Scan setting 6-11, 7-53 Scan settings 6-6 Scan size 6-13 Search options 7-40 Secondary field 7-92 Secure document user box 7-84 Security 9-37 Security details 8-26 Security print only 8-26 Select line 7-55 Send 7-34, 7-35, 9-27 Send & print 7-63 Sending 4-8 Separate scan 6-18 Setting for each purpose 9-44 Sharpness 6-15 Sheet/cover/chapter insert 7-17 Shortcut key 8-10 Sort 7-11 Special original 6-19 SSD settings 8-26 Stamp 7-23 Stamp composition 7-52 Stamp element 7-92 Stamp repeat 7-28 Stamp settings 8-32 Stamp type 7-28 Stamp/composition 7-21 Standard size 6-13 Staple 7-11 Staple - position setting 7-12 Store address 9-20, 9-42 Subject 7-56 System settings 9-36 System user box 6-4 T Timer transmission 7-59 Touch panel 3-5 U URL notification setting 7-58 Use/file 7-3 Use/file - check job settings 3-14 Use/file - check job settings - check e-mail settings 3-16 Use/file - check job settings - communication settings 3-16 Use/file - check job settings - destination settings 3-15 Use/file - check job settings - document setting contents 3-15 Use/file - details 3-14 User authentication 2-9 User authentication/account track 9-38 User box administrator setting 8-25 User box setting 8-10, 8-19 User boxes 9-18, 9-40 User name 7-43, 7-44, 7-45 Using documents 2-5 V V.34 OFF 7-55 W Web browser cache 9-4 Web Connection 9-3 WebDAV 7-45 Z Zoom 7-14 11-6 ineo 223/283/363/423 11 Index by button 11.2 11.2 Index by button Numerics 1-Sided 6-7 2in1 7-14 2-Sided 6-7 4in1 7-14 8in1 7-14 A Address Type 7-38 Advanced Search 7-47 All Jobs 3-9, 3-10, 3-12, 3-13 Allow/Restrict User Box 8-22 Annotation User Box 7-89, 8-16 Application 7-36 Apply Stamps 8-32 Auto 6-20 Auto Color 6-12 Auto Delete Secure Document 8-20 B Back (Blank) 7-18 Back (Copy) 7-18 Background Pattern 7-25, 7-27, 7-28 Background Removal 6-14 Bind TX 7-34 Binding Position 6-17, 6-20 Black 6-12, 7-53 Blank 7-20 Body 7-57 Book Copy 6-16 Book Spread 6-16 Bulletin Board User Box 7-82, 8-6 C Center Erase 6-17 Center Staple & Fold 7-13 Change Pos./Delete 7-25, 7-30 Chapter Paper 7-20 Chapters 7-17 Check HDD Capacity 8-26 Check Job 3-6 Check Job Set. 3-8, 3-10 Check Job Settings 3-14 Check SSD Capacity 8-27 Check/Change Temporarily 7-30 City 7-47 Color 6-12, 7-53 Combine 7-6, 7-8, 7-14 Comm. List 3-11, 3-12, 3-13 Communication Method Settings 7-59 Communication Settings 7-36 Compact PDF 6-8, 7-49 Compact XPS 6-8, 7-49 Company Name 7-48 Confidential RX User Box 4-37 Continuous Print 7-9, 7-15 Copied Paper 6-6 Copy 7-19, 7-64, 7-66 Copy Guard Pattern 7-27 Copy Protect 7-21, 7-24 Copy Protect Pattern 7-25 Cover + 2-Sided 6-7 Cover Sheet 7-17 Custom Display Settings - User Box Setting 8-10 Custom Size 6-13 D Date/Time 7-21, 7-25, 7-26, 7-28, 7-29, 7-92, 8-17 Default Tab 8-10 Delete 3-7, 3-8, 3-10, 3-11, 3-12, 7-64, 7-86, 7-88, 7-94, 7-96, 7-97, 7-99, 7-109 Delete Page 3-18 Delete Secure Print Documents 8-19 Delete Unused User Box 8-19 Deleted Jobs 3-9, 3-10, 3-12, 3-13 Deleting 7-65 Density 6-12, 7-25, 7-30, 7-81, 7-93, 8-17 Department 7-48 Despeckle 6-20 Detail 3-9, 3-10, 3-11, 3-12, 3-13, 3-14 Detail Search 7-39 Detail Settings 6-9, 7-24, 7-25, 7-27, 7-28, 7-30, 7-33, 7-44, 7-45, 7-81 Detail View 7-4 Digital Signature 7-61 Display Name 7-33 Do Not Print # 7-23 Do Not Print Page Number 7-23 Document Delete Time Setting 8-23 Document Details 7-4, 7-64, 7-69, 7-70, 7-86, 7-88, 7-94, 7-102, 7-109 Document Hold Setting 8-21 Document Name 6-5, 7-56 Document Permissions 6-9, 7-50 Document Settings 7-36 Dot Matrix Original 6-6 E ECM OFF 7-55 Edit Document 7-70 Edit Name 7-64, 7-65, 7-86, 7-88, 7-94, 7-109 E-mail 7-41 E-mail Addr. 7-47 E-mail Encryption 7-61 E-Mail Settings 7-56 Encrypted PDF Delete Time 8-20 Encryption 6-9, 7-50 Encryption Priority 8-27 Existing Setting 7-14 ineo 223/283/363/423 11-7 11.2 Index by button 11 External Memory 7-100 External Memory Document Scan 8-22 External Memory Function Settings 8-22 F Fax 3-18, 7-41, 7-95 Fax Header Settings 7-61 Fax Number 7-47 F-Code transmission 7-60 File Path 7-43, 7-44, 7-45 File Type 6-8, 7-49 Finished Jobs 3-9, 3-10, 3-12, 3-13 Finishing 7-8, 7-9 First Name 7-47 Fold/Bind 7-13 Format HDD 8-30 Format SSD 8-31 Forward 3-11 Frame Erase 6-15, 6-16 From 7-57 Front (Blank) 7-18 Front (Copy) 7-18 Front + Back Cover 6-16 Front Cover 6-16 FTP 7-44 Full Color 6-12, 7-53 Full Size 7-14 G Gray Scale 6-12, 7-53 Group 7-36 H Half-Fold 7-13 HDD Encryption Setting 8-31 HDD Lock Password 8-29 HDD Settings 8-26 Header/Footer 7-21, 7-30 Host Name 7-43, 7-44, 7-45 I ID & Print Delete after Print Setting 8-23 ID & Print Delete Time 8-21 ID & Print Settings 8-24 ID & Print User Box 7-98 Image 7-52 Image Adjustment 6-14 Image Details 7-33 Image Shift 7-16 Increase Priority 3-8 Index 7-39, 8-5 Insert Paper 7-19 Insert Sheet 7-17 Insert Sheet Setting 7-22 Insert Type 7-19 Internet Fax 7-42 IP Address Fax 7-42 J Job Details 3-8 Job List 3-6, 3-7 JPEG 6-8, 7-49 L L1 3-10, 3-11 L2 3-10, 3-11 Last Name 7-47 Left 6-20 Line Setting 7-54 Long Original 6-19 M Manual 7-14 Maximum Number of User Boxes 8-18 Memory RX User Box 7-87 Minimal 7-14 Mixed Original 6-19 Mode 1 8-27 Mode 2 8-27 Move 7-64 Moving documents 7-65 Multi Page 6-11, 7-53 N Name 7-47 New 7-79 Next Destination 7-43, 7-44, 7-45 Next Page 3-17, 3-18, 7-76 Number Type 7-93, 8-17 O OR/AND/STARTS WITH/ENDS WITH 7-48 Original Direction 6-19 Original Settings 6-5, 6-19 Original Type 6-6 Other 7-25, 7-26, 7-28, 7-29 Overseas TX 7-54 Overwrite 7-80 Overwrite All Data 8-28 Overwrite Priority 8-27 P Page Margin 7-8, 7-9, 7-16 Page Number 7-21, 7-22 Page Separation 6-11, 7-53 Paper 7-103 Password 6-9, 7-43, 7-44, 7-45, 7-50, 8-5, 8-7, 8-16 Password Copy Pattern 7-28 Password Encrypted PDF User Box 7-97 Password transmission 7-60 Pattern Overwrite 7-25, 7-30 PC (SMB) 7-43 PDF 6-8, 7-49 Photo 6-6 11-8 ineo 223/283/363/423 11 Index by button 11.2 Photo Size 6-13 Polling TX User Box 7-83 Position 7-24, 7-25, 7-28, 7-30 Position Setting 7-12 Preset Stamp 7-25, 7-26, 7-28, 7-29 Prev. Page 3-17, 3-18, 7-76 Preview 3-6, 3-16, 7-69 Preview/Set Range 7-76 Preview/Specify by Input 7-77 Primary Field 8-17 Print 7-6, 7-99, 7-102 Print Document 8-22 Print on Back Cover only 7-23 Print on Front and Back Cover 7-23 Print page # 7-23 Print Position 7-21, 7-22, 7-24, 7-62, 7-93, 8-17 Proof Print 7-95 Public, Personal, or Group User Box 8-5 R Receiver RX Ability 7-42 Redial 3-10, 3-11 Reference 7-43 Register Overlay 7-70, 7-78, 7-94 Registered Overlay 7-21, 7-32 Registered Stamp 7-25, 7-29 Relay Destination 8-8 Relay TX Password 8-8, 8-9 Relay User Box 8-8 Release Held Job 3-8 Reset 7-4 Resolution 6-7, 7-48 S Save Document 7-4, 8-22 Scan 3-18 Scan Settings 6-5 Scan Size 6-13 Search 7-36, 7-38, 7-47 Secondary Field 7-92, 8-17 Secure Document User Box 7-84 Security Print Only 8-26 Select All 7-4 Send & Print 7-63 Separate Scan 6-18 Separation 6-16 Sharpness 6-15 Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert 7-8 Shortcut key 8-10 Simplex/Duplex 6-7 Skip the Page(s) 7-23 Sort 7-19, 7-20 SSD Settings 8-26 Stamp 7-21, 7-23 Stamp Composition 7-52 Stamp Element 7-92 Stamp Repeat 7-21, 7-28 Stamp/Composition 7-8, 7-9, 7-62 Subject 7-56 T Text 6-6, 7-52 Text Color 7-62 Text Details 7-21, 7-22, 7-31 Text Size 7-24, 7-25, 7-27, 7-28, 7-30, 7-62 Text/Photo 6-6 Thumbnail View 7-4, 7-33 TIFF 6-8, 7-49 Timer transmission 7-59 Timer TX Job 3-10 Top 6-20 U URL Notification Setting 7-58 Use Existing Color Setting 7-53 User Box 6-5 User Box Administrator Setting 8-25 User Box Name 8-5, 8-7, 8-8, 8-9, 8-16 User Box No. 8-5, 8-7, 8-8, 8-9, 8-16 User Box Setting 8-19 User Name 7-43, 7-44, 7-45 V V.34 OFF 7-55 View Finishing 3-17, 3-18 W WebDAV 7-45 X XPS 6-8, 7-49 Z Z-Folded Original 6-19 Zoom 7-8, 7-14 1-1 1 Introduction 1.1 Welcome .......................................................................................................................................... 1-3 1.1.1 User's guides ..................................................................................................................................... 1-3 1.1.2 User's Guide ...................................................................................................................................... 1-4 1.2 Conventions used in this manual .................................................................................................. 1-5 1.2.1 Symbols used in this manual ............................................................................................................. 1-5 To use this machine safely................................................................................................................. 1-5 Procedural instruction........................................................................................................................ 1-5 Key symbols....................................................................................................................................... 1-6 1.2.2 Original and paper indications ........................................................................................................... 1-6 Original and paper sizes .................................................................................................................... 1-6 Original and paper indications ........................................................................................................... 1-6 1.3 To check the function you want to use......................................................................................... 1-7 Understanding Operation Flow.......................................................................................................... 1-7 Using Menu Tree................................................................................................................................ 1-7 2 User Box Function Overview 2.1 User Box functions ......................................................................................................................... 2-3 2.1.1 Available User Box functions ............................................................................................................. 2-4 Saving documents ............................................................................................................................. 2-4 Using documents............................................................................................................................... 2-5 Organizing documents....................................................................................................................... 2-7 2.1.2 Configuring settings for using the User Box functions ...................................................................... 2-8 Registering a User Box ...................................................................................................................... 2-8 When using this machine as a relay device ....................................................................................... 2-8 The User Box to which data is saved for memory reception............................................................. 2-8 2.2 Information ...................................................................................................................................... 2-9 2.2.1 User authentication............................................................................................................................ 2-9 MFP authentication............................................................................................................................ 2-9 External server authentication ........................................................................................................... 2-9 Account track authentication ........................................................................................................... 2-10 2.2.2 Restriction of box registration.......................................................................................................... 2-10 Public/Personal/Group User Boxes ................................................................................................. 2-10 Bulletin Board User Box................................................................................................................... 2-10 Polling TX User Box ......................................................................................................................... 2-10 Memory RX User Box ...................................................................................................................... 2-11 Relay User Box ................................................................................................................................ 2-11 Confidential RX User Box ................................................................................................................ 2-11 2.2.3 Restriction of file name .................................................................................................................... 2-11 2.3 Authentication and accessible User Boxes................................................................................ 2-12 2.3.1 When User Authentication or Account Track is not enabled........................................................... 2-12 2.3.2 When only user authentication is enabled ....................................................................................... 2-12 2.3.3 When only account track is enabled................................................................................................ 2-13 2.3.4 When user authentication and account track are enabled and synchronized................................. 2-13 2.3.5 When user authentication and account track are enabled but not synchronized ........................... 2-14 1-2 3 Control Panel/Liquid Crystal Display 3.1 Control panel ................................................................................................................................... 3-3 3.2 Touch panel ..................................................................................................................................... 3-5 3.2.1 Screen component............................................................................................................................. 3-5 Icons that appear in the touch panel ................................................................................................. 3-5 3.2.2 Display and operation of Left panel ................................................................................................... 3-6 Job List .............................................................................................................................................. 3-7 Job List - Delete................................................................................................................................. 3-7 Job List - Job Details ......................................................................................................................... 3-8 User Box information ....................................................................................................................... 3-14 Use/File - Detail................................................................................................................................ 3-14 Use/File - Check Job Settings ......................................................................................................... 3-14 Use/File - Check Job Settings - Destination Settings ..................................................................... 3-15 Use/File - Check Job Settings - Document Setting Contents ......................................................... 3-15 Use/File - Check Job Settings - Communication Settings .............................................................. 3-16 Use/File - Check Job Settings - Check E-Mail Settings.................................................................. 3-16 Preview ............................................................................................................................................ 3-16 Preview ............................................................................................................................................ 3-17 Preview (Print/Combine) .................................................................................................................. 3-17 Preview (Send/Bind TX) ................................................................................................................... 3-18 4 User Box Operation Flow 4.1 Saving documents in User Boxes.................................................................................................. 4-3 4.2 Printing documents from a User Box............................................................................................ 4-5 4.3 Sending documents from a User Box ........................................................................................... 4-8 4.4 Saving a document in an external memory ................................................................................ 4-11 4.5 Saving a Document from the External Memory into a User Box.............................................. 4-13 4.6 Printing a document from an external memory ......................................................................... 4-15 4.7 Filing documents in a User Box................................................................................................... 4-17 4.8 Printing a Document Saved in a Cellular Phone or PDA ........................................................... 4-19 4.9 Saving a Document Stored in a Cellular Phone or PDA to a User Box.................................... 4-21 4.10 Menu tree of the User Box mode ................................................................................................ 4-23 4.10.1 Save Document................................................................................................................................ 4-23 Public, Personal, or Group User Box............................................................................................... 4-23 System User Box ............................................................................................................................. 4-24 4.10.2 Use/File ............................................................................................................................................ 4-26 Print (for Public/Personal/Group User Boxes) ................................................................................. 4-26 Send (for Public/Personal/Group User Boxes) ................................................................................ 4-29 Filing Settings (for public/personal/group User Boxes) ................................................................... 4-32 Application (for Public/Personal/Group User Boxes)....................................................................... 4-33 System User Box ............................................................................................................................. 4-34 5 Accessing the User Box mode 5.1 Accessing the User Box mode ...................................................................................................... 5-3 5.2 User Box Operation Menu.............................................................................................................. 5-4 5.2.1 Save Document.................................................................................................................................. 5-4 5.2.2 Use/File .............................................................................................................................................. 5-4 6 Save Document 6.1 Save Document Overview.............................................................................................................. 6-3 6.1.1 Functions ........................................................................................................................................... 6-3 Public/Personal/Group User Boxes ................................................................................................... 6-3 Annotation User Box.......................................................................................................................... 6-3 External Memory................................................................................................................................ 6-3 6.1.2 Initial Window of Save Document...................................................................................................... 6-4 Public/Personal/Group User Boxes ................................................................................................... 6-4 System User Box ............................................................................................................................... 6-4 1-3 6.1.3 Save Document window .................................................................................................................... 6-5 6.2 Scan Settings .................................................................................................................................. 6-6 6.2.1 Basic - Original Type.......................................................................................................................... 6-6 6.2.2 Basic - Simplex/Duplex ..................................................................................................................... 6-7 6.2.3 Basic - Resolution.............................................................................................................................. 6-7 6.2.4 Basic - File Type ................................................................................................................................ 6-8 File Type............................................................................................................................................. 6-8 Encryption.......................................................................................................................................... 6-9 Encryption - Detail Settings ............................................................................................................... 6-9 Outline PDF...................................................................................................................................... 6-11 Scan Setting..................................................................................................................................... 6-11 6.2.5 Basic - Density................................................................................................................................. 6-12 6.2.6 Basic - Color .................................................................................................................................... 6-12 6.2.7 Scan Size ......................................................................................................................................... 6-13 Standard size ................................................................................................................................... 6-13 Custom Size..................................................................................................................................... 6-13 Photo Size........................................................................................................................................ 6-13 6.2.8 Image Adjustment ............................................................................................................................ 6-14 Background Removal ...................................................................................................................... 6-14 Sharpness ........................................................................................................................................ 6-15 6.2.9 Application - Frame Erase ............................................................................................................... 6-15 6.2.10 Application - Book Copy.................................................................................................................. 6-16 Book copy method .......................................................................................................................... 6-16 Book Erase - Frame Erase ............................................................................................................... 6-16 Book Erase - Center Erase .............................................................................................................. 6-17 Binding Position ............................................................................................................................... 6-17 6.2.11 Separate Scan ................................................................................................................................. 6-18 6.3 Original Settings............................................................................................................................ 6-19 6.3.1 Special Original ................................................................................................................................ 6-19 6.3.2 Direction Settings - Original Direction ............................................................................................. 6-19 6.3.3 Direction Settings - Binding Position ............................................................................................... 6-20 6.3.4 Despeckle ........................................................................................................................................ 6-20 7 Use/File 7.1 Overview of the Use/File operations............................................................................................. 7-3 7.1.1 Functions of Use/File ......................................................................................................................... 7-3 Printing a document........................................................................................................................... 7-3 Sending.............................................................................................................................................. 7-3 Filing................................................................................................................................................... 7-3 Application settings ........................................................................................................................... 7-3 7.1.2 Detail of the Use Document screen ................................................................................................... 7-4 7.1.3 If a password is specified for a User Box .......................................................................................... 7-5 7.2 Print .................................................................................................................................................. 7-6 7.2.1 Overview of the Print tab ................................................................................................................... 7-6 Description of the Print tab................................................................................................................ 7-6 Print.................................................................................................................................................... 7-7 Combine............................................................................................................................................. 7-7 7.2.2 Print.................................................................................................................................................... 7-8 7.2.3 Combine............................................................................................................................................. 7-8 Document Order ................................................................................................................................ 7-8 Configurable items to combine and print documents ....................................................................... 7-9 7.3 Print - Basic (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) .................................................................. 7-10 7.3.1 Copies.............................................................................................................................................. 7-10 7.3.2 1-Sided/2-Sided............................................................................................................................... 7-10 7.3.3 Finishing........................................................................................................................................... 7-11 Sort/Group ....................................................................................................................................... 7-11 Offset ............................................................................................................................................... 7-11 Staple ............................................................................................................................................... 7-11 Staple - Position Setting .................................................................................................................. 7-12 1-4 Punch............................................................................................................................................... 7-12 Punch - Position Setting .................................................................................................................. 7-12 Fold/Bind.......................................................................................................................................... 7-13 7.3.4 Combine........................................................................................................................................... 7-14 7.3.5 Zoom................................................................................................................................................ 7-14 7.3.6 Continuous Print .............................................................................................................................. 7-15 7.4 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) ........................................................ 7-16 7.4.1 Page Margin..................................................................................................................................... 7-16 Page Margin..................................................................................................................................... 7-16 Image Shift ....................................................................................................................................... 7-16 Image Shift - Change Back Shift ..................................................................................................... 7-17 7.4.2 Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert ............................................................................................................. 7-17 7.4.3 Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert - Cover Sheet...................................................................................... 7-18 7.4.4 Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert - Insert Sheet ...................................................................................... 7-19 7.4.5 Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert - Chapters........................................................................................... 7-20 7.4.6 Stamp/Composition......................................................................................................................... 7-21 7.4.7 Stamp/Composition - Date/Time..................................................................................................... 7-21 7.4.8 Stamp/Composition - Page Number ............................................................................................... 7-22 Settings ............................................................................................................................................ 7-22 Insert Sheet Setting ......................................................................................................................... 7-23 7.4.9 Stamp/Composition - Stamp........................................................................................................... 7-23 7.4.10 Stamp/Composition -Copy Security -Copy Protect ........................................................................ 7-24 Copy Protect Type........................................................................................................................... 7-25 Detail Settings.................................................................................................................................. 7-25 Position ............................................................................................................................................ 7-25 7.4.11 Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Guard........................................................................ 7-26 Copy Guard Type............................................................................................................................. 7-26 Detail Settings.................................................................................................................................. 7-27 7.4.12 Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Password Copy.................................................................. 7-27 Stamp Type...................................................................................................................................... 7-28 Detail Settings.................................................................................................................................. 7-28 7.4.13 Stamp/Composition - Stamp Repeat .............................................................................................. 7-28 Stamp Repeat Type ......................................................................................................................... 7-29 Detail Settings.................................................................................................................................. 7-30 Position ............................................................................................................................................ 7-30 7.4.14 Stamp/Composition - Header/Footer .............................................................................................. 7-30 Check/Change Temporarily ............................................................................................................. 7-31 7.4.15 Stamp/Composition - Registered Overlay....................................................................................... 7-32 Settings ............................................................................................................................................ 7-32 Overlay Setting................................................................................................................................. 7-33 7.5 Send ............................................................................................................................................... 7-34 7.5.1 Overview of the Transmission Settings............................................................................................ 7-34 Description of the Send tab ............................................................................................................. 7-34 Send................................................................................................................................................. 7-35 Bind TX............................................................................................................................................. 7-35 7.5.2 Transmission Settings...................................................................................................................... 7-36 7.5.3 Combine........................................................................................................................................... 7-37 Document Order .............................................................................................................................. 7-37 7.6 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box)............................................................................... 7-38 7.6.1 Address Book - Search.................................................................................................................... 7-38 Address Type................................................................................................................................... 7-38 Index ................................................................................................................................................ 7-39 Detail Search.................................................................................................................................... 7-39 Detail Search - Search options ........................................................................................................ 7-40 7.6.2 Direct Input ...................................................................................................................................... 7-40 7.6.3 Direct Input - Fax ............................................................................................................................. 7-41 Next Destination............................................................................................................................... 7-41 When the Confirm Address (TX) function is specified: .................................................................... 7-41 7.6.4 Direct Input - E-mail......................................................................................................................... 7-41 1-5 Next Destination............................................................................................................................... 7-41 7.6.5 Direct Input - Internet Fax................................................................................................................ 7-42 Next Destination............................................................................................................................... 7-42 Receiver RX Ability........................................................................................................................... 7-42 7.6.6 Direct Input - IP Address Fax........................................................................................................... 7-42 7.6.7 Direct Input - PC (SMB) ................................................................................................................... 7-43 Host Name ....................................................................................................................................... 7-43 File Path ........................................................................................................................................... 7-43 User Name ....................................................................................................................................... 7-43 Password ......................................................................................................................................... 7-43 Reference......................................................................................................................................... 7-43 Next Destination............................................................................................................................... 7-43 7.6.8 Direct Input - FTP............................................................................................................................. 7-44 Host Name ....................................................................................................................................... 7-44 File Path ........................................................................................................................................... 7-44 User Name ....................................................................................................................................... 7-44 Password ......................................................................................................................................... 7-44 Detail Settings.................................................................................................................................. 7-44 Next Destination............................................................................................................................... 7-44 7.6.9 Direct Input - WebDAV..................................................................................................................... 7-45 Host Name ....................................................................................................................................... 7-45 File Path ........................................................................................................................................... 7-45 User Name ....................................................................................................................................... 7-45 Password ......................................................................................................................................... 7-45 Detail Settings.................................................................................................................................. 7-45 Next Destination............................................................................................................................... 7-45 7.6.10 Job History....................................................................................................................................... 7-46 7.6.11 Address Search................................................................................................................................ 7-46 7.6.12 LDAP Search - Search..................................................................................................................... 7-47 7.6.13 LDAP Search - Advanced Search.................................................................................................... 7-47 Name................................................................................................................................................ 7-47 E-mail Addr. ..................................................................................................................................... 7-47 Fax Number ..................................................................................................................................... 7-47 Last Name........................................................................................................................................ 7-47 First Name........................................................................................................................................ 7-47 City................................................................................................................................................... 7-47 Company Name ............................................................................................................................... 7-48 Department ...................................................................................................................................... 7-48 OR/AND/STARTS WITH/ENDS WITH.............................................................................................. 7-48 7.6.14 Overview of the Document Settings ................................................................................................ 7-48 7.6.15 Document Settings - Resolution...................................................................................................... 7-48 7.6.16 Document Settings - File Type ........................................................................................................ 7-49 File Type........................................................................................................................................... 7-49 Encryption........................................................................................................................................ 7-50 Encryption - Detail Settings ............................................................................................................. 7-50 Stamp Composition ......................................................................................................................... 7-52 Outline PDF...................................................................................................................................... 7-52 Scan Setting..................................................................................................................................... 7-53 7.6.17 Document Settings - Color .............................................................................................................. 7-53 7.6.18 Overview of the Communication Settings ....................................................................................... 7-54 7.6.19 Communication Settings - Line Setting ........................................................................................... 7-54 Description of Line Settings............................................................................................................. 7-54 Overseas TX..................................................................................................................................... 7-54 ECM OFF ......................................................................................................................................... 7-55 V.34 OFF .......................................................................................................................................... 7-55 Check Dest. & Send......................................................................................................................... 7-55 Select Line ....................................................................................................................................... 7-55 7.6.20 Communication Settings - E-Mail Settings...................................................................................... 7-56 E-mail Settings................................................................................................................................. 7-56 Document Name.............................................................................................................................. 7-56 Subject ............................................................................................................................................. 7-56 From................................................................................................................................................. 7-57 1-6 Body................................................................................................................................................. 7-57 7.6.21 Communication Settings - URL Notification Setting ....................................................................... 7-58 URL Notification............................................................................................................................... 7-58 Detail Search.................................................................................................................................... 7-58 Direct Input ...................................................................................................................................... 7-58 7.6.22 Communication Settings - Communication Method Settings ......................................................... 7-59 Timer transmission (Timer TX).......................................................................................................... 7-59 Password transmission (Password TX)............................................................................................ 7-60 F-Code transmission (F-Code TX) ................................................................................................... 7-60 7.6.23 Communication Settings - E-mail Encryption.................................................................................. 7-61 7.6.24 Communication Settings - Digital Signature.................................................................................... 7-61 7.6.25 Communication Settings - Fax Header Settings ............................................................................. 7-61 7.6.26 Overview of the Application settings ............................................................................................... 7-62 7.6.27 Application - Stamp/Composition - Date/Time ............................................................................... 7-62 7.6.28 Application - Stamp/Composition - Page Number.......................................................................... 7-62 7.6.29 Application - Stamp/Composition - Stamp ..................................................................................... 7-62 7.6.30 Application - Stamp/Composition - Header/Footer......................................................................... 7-63 7.6.31 Application - Send & Print................................................................................................................ 7-63 7.7 Filing Settings (Public, Personal, or Group User Boxes) ........................................................... 7-64 7.7.1 Overview of the Filing Settings ........................................................................................................ 7-64 Description of the Filing Settings tab............................................................................................... 7-64 7.7.2 Deleting documents ......................................................................................................................... 7-65 7.7.3 Edit Name ........................................................................................................................................ 7-65 7.7.4 Moving documents .......................................................................................................................... 7-65 7.7.5 Copy................................................................................................................................................. 7-66 7.7.6 Save in external memory ................................................................................................................. 7-66 Document Settings .......................................................................................................................... 7-67 Document Settings - Resolution...................................................................................................... 7-67 Document Settings -File Type ......................................................................................................... 7-68 Document Settings - Color .............................................................................................................. 7-68 7.7.7 Document Details............................................................................................................................. 7-69 Displaying detailed information........................................................................................................ 7-69 Preview ............................................................................................................................................ 7-69 7.8 Application..................................................................................................................................... 7-70 7.8.1 Overview of the Application settings ............................................................................................... 7-70 Description of the Application tab ................................................................................................... 7-70 7.8.2 Edit Document ................................................................................................................................. 7-71 Edit Document - Delete Page .......................................................................................................... 7-71 Edit Document - Rotate Page.......................................................................................................... 7-72 Edit Document - Move Page............................................................................................................ 7-74 Preview/Set Range .......................................................................................................................... 7-76 Preview/Specify by Input ................................................................................................................. 7-77 7.8.3 Register Overlay............................................................................................................................... 7-78 Register Overlay - New.................................................................................................................... 7-79 Register Overlay - Overwrite............................................................................................................ 7-80 Detail Settings.................................................................................................................................. 7-81 7.9 Bulletin Board User Box (System User Box)............................................................................... 7-82 7.9.1 Overview of the Bulletin Board User Boxes..................................................................................... 7-82 7.9.2 Bulletin Board User Box screen....................................................................................................... 7-82 7.9.3 Printing a document in a Bulletin Board User Box .......................................................................... 7-82 7.9.4 Deleting a document in the Bulletin Board User Box ...................................................................... 7-82 7.10 Polling TX User Box (System User Box)...................................................................................... 7-83 7.10.1 Overview of the Polling Transmission User Boxes .......................................................................... 7-83 7.10.2 Printing a document in the Polling TX User Box.............................................................................. 7-83 7.10.3 Deleting a document in the Polling TX User Box............................................................................. 7-83 7.11 Secure Document User Box (System User Box) ........................................................................ 7-84 7.11.1 Overview of the Secure Document User Box .................................................................................. 7-84 7.11.2 Authentication procedure 1 ............................................................................................................. 7-84 1-7 7.11.3 Authentication procedure 2 ............................................................................................................. 7-84 7.11.4 Print - Printing .................................................................................................................................. 7-85 Copies.............................................................................................................................................. 7-85 Print.................................................................................................................................................. 7-85 Finishing........................................................................................................................................... 7-85 Combine........................................................................................................................................... 7-85 Zoom................................................................................................................................................ 7-85 Page Margin..................................................................................................................................... 7-85 Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert ............................................................................................................. 7-85 Stamp/Composition......................................................................................................................... 7-85 7.11.5 Filing Settings .................................................................................................................................. 7-86 7.12 Memory RX User Box (System User Box)................................................................................... 7-87 7.12.1 Overview of the Memory RX User Box ............................................................................................ 7-87 7.12.2 Print.................................................................................................................................................. 7-87 7.12.3 Filing Settings .................................................................................................................................. 7-88 7.13 Annotation User Box (System User Box) .................................................................................... 7-89 7.13.1 Overview of the Annotation User Box.............................................................................................. 7-89 7.13.2 Print - Basic ..................................................................................................................................... 7-89 7.13.3 Print - Page Margin .......................................................................................................................... 7-89 7.13.4 Print - Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert - Cover Sheet........................................................................... 7-90 7.13.5 Print - Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert - Insert Sheet ........................................................................... 7-90 7.13.6 Print - Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert - Chapters ................................................................................ 7-90 7.13.7 Print - Stamp/Composition - Date/Time .......................................................................................... 7-90 7.13.8 Print - Stamp/Composition - Page Number .................................................................................... 7-90 7.13.9 Print - Stamp/Composition - Stamp................................................................................................ 7-90 7.13.10 Printing Preferences - Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Protect .................................. 7-90 7.13.11 Printing Preferences - Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Guard.................................... 7-90 7.13.12 Print - Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Password Copy....................................................... 7-90 7.13.13 Print - Stamp/Composition - Stamp Repeat ................................................................................... 7-90 7.13.14 Print - Stamp/Composition - Registered Overlay ............................................................................ 7-90 7.13.15 Description of the Send tab ............................................................................................................. 7-90 7.13.16 Send - Direct Input - E-mail ............................................................................................................. 7-90 7.13.17 Send - Direct Input - PC (SMB)........................................................................................................ 7-90 7.13.18 Send - Direct Input - FTP................................................................................................................. 7-91 7.13.19 Send - Direct Input - WebDAV......................................................................................................... 7-91 7.13.20 Send - Job History........................................................................................................................... 7-91 7.13.21 Send - LDAP Search - Search ......................................................................................................... 7-91 7.13.22 Send - LDAP Search - Advanced Search........................................................................................ 7-91 7.13.23 Send - Document Settings - Resolution .......................................................................................... 7-91 7.13.24 Send - Document Settings - File Type............................................................................................. 7-91 7.13.25 Send - Document Settings - Color .................................................................................................. 7-91 7.13.26 Send - Communication Settings - E-mail Settings.......................................................................... 7-91 7.13.27 Send - Communication Settings - URL Notification Setting............................................................ 7-91 7.13.28 Send - Communication Settings - E-mail Encryption...................................................................... 7-91 7.13.29 Send - Communication Settings - Digital Signature........................................................................ 7-91 7.13.30 Send - Application - Stamp/Composition - Date/Time.................................................................... 7-91 7.13.31 Send - Application - Stamp/Composition - Page Number .............................................................. 7-91 7.13.32 Send - Application - Stamp/Composition - Stamp.......................................................................... 7-92 7.13.33 Send - Application - Send & Print.................................................................................................... 7-92 7.13.34 Send - Application - Stamp Element ............................................................................................... 7-92 Secondary Field ............................................................................................................................... 7-92 Date/Time......................................................................................................................................... 7-92 Density ............................................................................................................................................. 7-93 Number Type ................................................................................................................................... 7-93 Print Position.................................................................................................................................... 7-93 7.13.35 Filing Settings .................................................................................................................................. 7-94 7.13.36 Application - Register Overlay ......................................................................................................... 7-94 1-8 7.14 Fax Retransmit User Box (System User Box)............................................................................. 7-95 7.14.1 Overview of the Fax Retransmit User Box....................................................................................... 7-95 7.14.2 Print - Proof Print ............................................................................................................................. 7-95 7.14.3 Send - Fax........................................................................................................................................ 7-95 7.14.4 Filing Settings - Delete..................................................................................................................... 7-96 7.15 Password Encrypted PDF User Box (System User Box) ........................................................... 7-97 7.15.1 Overview of the Password Encrypted PDF User Box...................................................................... 7-97 7.15.2 Print/Save −Print/Save..................................................................................................................... 7-97 7.15.3 Filing Settings - Delete..................................................................................................................... 7-97 7.16 ID & Print User Box (System User Box)....................................................................................... 7-98 7.16.1 Overview of the ID & Print User Box................................................................................................ 7-98 Viewing documents.......................................................................................................................... 7-98 7.16.2 Print - Print....................................................................................................................................... 7-99 7.16.3 Filing Settings - Delete..................................................................................................................... 7-99 7.17 External Memory (System User Box) ........................................................................................ 7-100 7.17.1 External memory device ................................................................................................................ 7-100 Supported external memory devices............................................................................................. 7-100 Connecting the external memory device ....................................................................................... 7-100 7.17.2 External memory screen ................................................................................................................ 7-101 Entering a file path ......................................................................................................................... 7-101 Selecting a file................................................................................................................................ 7-101 Printing encrypted PDF data.......................................................................................................... 7-101 Moving to the parent folder............................................................................................................ 7-101 Opening a folder ............................................................................................................................ 7-102 Print................................................................................................................................................ 7-102 Document Details........................................................................................................................... 7-102 7.17.3 Print - Basic ................................................................................................................................... 7-102 Copies............................................................................................................................................ 7-102 Print................................................................................................................................................ 7-102 Binding Position ............................................................................................................................. 7-102 Finishing......................................................................................................................................... 7-103 Paper.............................................................................................................................................. 7-103 7.17.4 Print- Application ........................................................................................................................... 7-103 Stamp/Composition - Date/Time................................................................................................... 7-103 Stamp/Composition - Page Number ............................................................................................. 7-103 Stamp/Composition - Stamp......................................................................................................... 7-103 Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Protect .................................................................... 7-103 Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Guard...................................................................... 7-103 Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Password Copy................................................................ 7-103 Stamp/Composition - Stamp Repeat ............................................................................................ 7-103 7.17.5 Filing Settings−Save in User Box................................................................................................... 7-104 7.18 Mobile/PDA (System User Box) ................................................................................................. 7-105 7.18.1 Operating environment .................................................................................................................. 7-105 7.18.2 Mobile/PDA - Print ......................................................................................................................... 7-106 Entering the PIN code.................................................................................................................... 7-106 Check printing preferences............................................................................................................ 7-106 7.18.3 Mobile/PDA - Save......................................................................................................................... 7-107 Entering the PIN code.................................................................................................................... 7-107 7.19 Confidential RX User Box (System User Box) .......................................................................... 7-108 7.19.1 Overview of the Confidential RX User Box .................................................................................... 7-108 7.19.2 Print................................................................................................................................................ 7-108 7.19.3 Filing Settings ................................................................................................................................ 7-109 8 User Box Settings 8.1 Menu tree of User Box Settings..................................................................................................... 8-2 8.1.1 User mode ......................................................................................................................................... 8-2 8.1.2 Administrator Settings ....................................................................................................................... 8-3 8.2 User mode settings......................................................................................................................... 8-5 1-9 8.2.1 Creating a User Box........................................................................................................................... 8-5 Public, Personal, or Group User Box................................................................................................. 8-5 Delete Empty User Box(es) (Administrator Settings) ......................................................................... 8-6 Bulletin Board User Box..................................................................................................................... 8-6 Relay User Box .................................................................................................................................. 8-8 Confidential RX User Box .................................................................................................................. 8-8 8.2.2 Custom Display Settings - User Box Setting................................................................................... 8-10 Default Tab....................................................................................................................................... 8-10 Shortcut key..................................................................................................................................... 8-10 8.2.3 Cellular Phone/PDA Setting - Link File Error Notification ................................................................ 8-11 8.2.4 Cellular Phone/PDA Setting - Proxy Server Use.............................................................................. 8-11 8.2.5 Cellular Phone/PDA Setting - Print Settings .................................................................................... 8-12 Basic - Print ..................................................................................................................................... 8-12 Basic - Paper ................................................................................................................................... 8-12 Basic - Finishing............................................................................................................................... 8-12 Application - Margin......................................................................................................................... 8-13 Application - Stamp/Composition - Date/Time ............................................................................... 8-13 Application - Stamp/Composition - Page Number.......................................................................... 8-13 Application - Stamp/Composition - Stamp ..................................................................................... 8-13 Application - Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Protect................................................. 8-13 Application - Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Guard .................................................. 8-13 Application - Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Password Copy ............................................ 8-13 Application - Stamp/Composition - Stamp Repeat......................................................................... 8-13 8.3 Administrator Settings.................................................................................................................. 8-14 8.3.1 User Box permissions...................................................................................................................... 8-14 User types........................................................................................................................................ 8-14 Public User Box and Personal or Group User Box.......................................................................... 8-14 8.3.2 Creating a User Box......................................................................................................................... 8-15 8.3.3 Creating Public, Personal, or Group User Box ................................................................................ 8-15 8.3.4 Creating Bulletin Board User Box.................................................................................................... 8-15 8.3.5 Creating Relay User Box.................................................................................................................. 8-15 8.3.6 Creating Annotation User Box ......................................................................................................... 8-16 8.3.7 Creating Confidential RX User Box.................................................................................................. 8-17 8.3.8 Maximum Number of User Boxes.................................................................................................... 8-18 Public, Personal, or Group User Box............................................................................................... 8-18 Max. No. Of Use Boxes ................................................................................................................... 8-18 Maximum Number of User Boxes.................................................................................................... 8-18 8.3.9 User Box Setting.............................................................................................................................. 8-19 Delete Unused User Box.................................................................................................................. 8-19 Delete Secure Print Documents....................................................................................................... 8-19 Auto Delete Secure Document ........................................................................................................ 8-20 Encrypted PDF Delete Time............................................................................................................. 8-20 ID & Print Delete Time...................................................................................................................... 8-21 Document Hold Setting.................................................................................................................... 8-21 External Memory Function Settings................................................................................................. 8-22 Allow/Restrict User Box................................................................................................................... 8-22 ID & Print Delete after Print Setting.................................................................................................. 8-23 Document Delete Time Setting ........................................................................................................ 8-23 ID & Print Settings............................................................................................................................ 8-24 8.3.10 Cellular Phone/PDA Setting ............................................................................................................. 8-24 8.3.11 User Box Administrator Setting ....................................................................................................... 8-25 Setting User Box administrator........................................................................................................ 8-25 Logging in to this machine as the User Box administrator.............................................................. 8-25 Administrator's available functions .................................................................................................. 8-25 8.3.12 Security Details ................................................................................................................................ 8-26 Security Print Only ........................................................................................................................... 8-26 8.3.13 HDD Settings/SSD Settings............................................................................................................. 8-26 Check HDD Capacity ....................................................................................................................... 8-26 Check SSD Capacity ....................................................................................................................... 8-27 Overwrite HDD Data......................................................................................................................... 8-27 Overwrite All Data ............................................................................................................................ 8-28 HDD Lock Password........................................................................................................................ 8-29 1-10 Format HDD ..................................................................................................................................... 8-30 Format SSD...................................................................................................................................... 8-31 HDD Encryption Setting................................................................................................................... 8-31 8.3.14 Stamp Settings ................................................................................................................................ 8-32 Apply Stamps................................................................................................................................... 8-32 9 Web Connection 9.1 Using Web Connection................................................................................................................... 9-3 9.1.1 Operating environment ...................................................................................................................... 9-3 9.1.2 Accessing Web Connection............................................................................................................... 9-3 9.1.3 Web browser cache ........................................................................................................................... 9-4 For Internet Explorer .......................................................................................................................... 9-4 For Netscape Navigator ..................................................................................................................... 9-4 For Mozilla Firefox.............................................................................................................................. 9-4 9.1.4 Online help function ........................................................................................................................... 9-4 9.2 Login and logout ............................................................................................................................. 9-5 9.2.1 Login and logout flows....................................................................................................................... 9-5 When user authentication or account track is not enabled ............................................................... 9-5 When User Authentication or Account Track is enabled ................................................................... 9-7 9.2.2 Logout................................................................................................................................................ 9-8 9.2.3 Login .................................................................................................................................................. 9-9 Login options ..................................................................................................................................... 9-9 Logging in as a public user .............................................................................................................. 9-10 Logging in as a registered user........................................................................................................ 9-11 Logging in to administrator mode.................................................................................................... 9-12 Display mode in administrator mode ............................................................................................... 9-13 Logging in as a User Box administrator........................................................................................... 9-14 9.3 Page Configuration....................................................................................................................... 9-15 9.4 User Mode Overview .................................................................................................................... 9-17 9.4.1 Information ....................................................................................................................................... 9-17 9.4.2 Job ................................................................................................................................................... 9-18 9.4.3 User Boxes....................................................................................................................................... 9-18 9.4.4 Direct Print ....................................................................................................................................... 9-19 9.4.5 Store Address .................................................................................................................................. 9-20 9.4.6 Customize ........................................................................................................................................ 9-21 9.5 Handling a document in a User Box............................................................................................ 9-22 9.5.1 Listing the documents saved in a User Box .................................................................................... 9-22 Open User Box ................................................................................................................................ 9-22 File List............................................................................................................................................. 9-23 9.5.2 Printing a document......................................................................................................................... 9-24 9.5.3 Sending a document to another machine........................................................................................ 9-27 9.5.4 Downloading document data to your computer .............................................................................. 9-29 9.5.5 Moving or copying a document to another User Box...................................................................... 9-32 9.5.6 Deleting a document........................................................................................................................ 9-33 9.6 Administrator Mode Overview ..................................................................................................... 9-35 9.6.1 Maintenance .................................................................................................................................... 9-35 9.6.2 System Settings............................................................................................................................... 9-36 9.6.3 Security ............................................................................................................................................ 9-37 9.6.4 User Authentication/Account Track................................................................................................. 9-38 9.6.5 Network............................................................................................................................................ 9-39 9.6.6 User Boxes....................................................................................................................................... 9-40 9.6.7 Printer Settings ................................................................................................................................ 9-41 9.6.8 Store Address .................................................................................................................................. 9-42 9.6.9 Fax Settings ..................................................................................................................................... 9-43 9.6.10 Setting for each purpose ................................................................................................................. 9-44 1-11 10 Appendix 10.1 Error message list......................................................................................................................... 10-3 10.2 Glossary ......................................................................................................................................... 10-4 11 Index 11.1 Index by item ................................................................................................................................. 11-3 11.2 Index by button.............................................................................................................................. 11-6 1-12 1-1 Numerics 1-sided/2-sided 7-10 A Accessing 9-3 Address book - search 7-38 Address search 7-46 Address type 7-38 Administrator settings 8-3, 8-14 Allow/restrict user box 8-22 Annotation user box 6-3, 7-89, 8-16 Application 7-62, 7-70 Application - book copy 6-16 Application - frame erase 6-15 Apply stamps 8-32 Auto delete secure document 8-20 B Background removal 6-14 Basic - color 6-12 Basic - density 6-12 Basic - file type 6-8 Basic - original type 6-6 Basic - resolution 6-7 Basic - simplex/duplex 6-7 Bind TX 7-35 Binding position 6-17 Body 7-57 Book copy method 6-16 Book erase - center erase 6-17 Book erase - frame erase 6-16 Bulletin board user box 7-82, 8-6 C Cellular phone/PDA setting 8-12, 8-24 Chapters 7-20 Check dest. & send 7-55 Check HDD capacity 8-26 Check printing preferences 7-106 Check SSD capacity 8-27 Check/change temporarily 7-31 City 7-47 Color 7-68 Combine 7-7, 7-14 Communication method settings 7-59 Communication settings 7-54 Company name 7-48 Compulsory memory RX user box 7-87 Confidential RX user box 8-8 Confidential RX user box (System user box) 7-108 Continuous print 7-15 Control panel 3-3 Copies 7-10 Copy 7-66 Copy guard type 7-26 Copy protect 7-24 Cover sheet 7-18 Creating a user box 8-5, 8-15 Custom display settings 8-10 Custom size 6-13 Customize 9-21 D Date/time 7-21 Default tab 8-10 Delete empty user box(es) (Administrator settings) 8-6 Delete page 7-71 Delete secure print documents 8-19 Delete unused user box 8-19 Deleting documents 7-65 Density 7-93 Department 7-48 Despeckle 6-20 Detail 3-12 Detail search 7-39, 7-58 Detail settings 7-25, 7-27, 7-28, 7-30, 7-44, 7-45, 7-81 Digital signature 7-61 Direct input 7-40, 7-58 Direct print 9-19 Direction settings - binding position 6-20 Direction settings - original direction 6-19 Displaying detailed information 7-69 Document delete time setting 8-23 Document details 7-69, 7-102 Document hold setting 8-21 Document name 7-56 Download 9-29 E ECM OFF 7-55 Edit document 7-71 Edit name 7-65 E-mail 7-41 E-mail addr. 7-47 E-mail encryption 7-61 E-Mail settings 7-56 Encrypted PDF data 7-101 Encrypted PDF delete time 8-20 Encryption 6-9, 7-50 Encryption - detail settings 6-9, 7-50 Entering the PIN code 7-106 Error message list 10-3 External memory 4-11, 4-15, 6-3, 7-100 External memory function settings 8-22 F Fax 7-41 Fax header settings 7-61 Fax number 7-47 Fax retransmit user box 7-95 Fax settings 9-43 F-code transmission 7-60 File list 9-23 File name 2-11 1-2 File path 7-43, 7-44, 7-45, 7-101 File type 6-8, 7-49, 7-68 Filing 4-17 Filing settings 7-64 Finishing 7-11 First name 7-47 Fold/bind 7-13 Format HDD 8-30 Format SSD 8-31 From 7-57 FTP 7-44 G Glossary 10-4 Group 7-11 H HDD encryption setting 8-31 HDD lock password 8-29 HDD settings 8-26 Header/footer 7-30 Host name 7-43, 7-44, 7-45 I Icons 3-5 ID & print delete after print setting 8-23 ID & print delete time 8-21 ID & print settings 8-24 ID & print user box 7-98 Image adjustment 6-14 Image shift - change back shift 7-17 Index 7-39 Information 9-17 Insert sheet 7-19 Insert sheet setting 7-23 Internet fax 7-42 IP address fax 7-42 J Job 9-18 Job history 7-46 Job list 3-7 Job list - delete 3-7 Job list - job details 3-8 L Last name 7-47 LDAP search - advanced search 7-47 LDAP search - search 7-47 Left panel 3-6 Line setting 7-54 Link file error notification 8-11 M Maintenance 9-35 Maximum number of user boxes 8-18 Menu tree 1-7, 4-23, 8-2 Mobile/PDA 7-105 Move page 7-74 Move/copy 9-32 Moving documents 7-65 N Name 7-47 Network 9-39 New 7-79 Next destination 7-43, 7-44, 7-45 Number type 7-93 O Offset 7-11 Online help 9-4 Operating environment 9-3 OR/AND/STARTS WITH/ENDS WITH 7-48 Organizing documents 2-7 Original settings 6-19 Outline PDF 6-11, 7-52 Overlay setting 7-33 Overseas TX 7-54 Overwrite 7-80 Overwrite all data 8-28 Overwrite HDD data 8-27 P Page configuration 9-15 Page margin 7-16 Page number 7-22 Paper 7-103 Password 7-43, 7-44, 7-45 Password encrypted PDF user box 7-97 Password transmission 7-60 PC (SMB) 7-43 Photo size 6-13 Polling TX user box 7-83 Position 7-25, 7-30 Preview 3-16, 3-17, 7-69 Preview/set range 7-76 Preview/specify by input 7-77 Print 7-7, 7-8, 9-24 Print - application 7-16 Print - basic 7-10, 7-102 Print position 7-93 Print/save 7-97 Printer settings 9-41 Printing 4-5, 4-15 Proxy server use 8-11 Punch 7-12 Punch - position setting 7-12 R Receiver RX ability 7-42 Reference 7-43 Register overlay 7-78 Registered overlay 7-32 Relay user box 8-8 1-3 Resolution 7-48, 7-67 Rotate page 7-72 S Save in external memory 7-66 Save in user box 7-104 Saving 4-3, 4-11 Saving documents 2-4, 6-3 Scan setting 6-11, 7-53 Scan settings 6-6 Scan size 6-13 Search options 7-40 Secondary field 7-92 Secure document user box 7-84 Security 9-37 Security details 8-26 Security print only 8-26 Select line 7-55 Send 7-34, 7-35, 9-27 Send & print 7-63 Sending 4-8 Separate scan 6-18 Setting for each purpose 9-44 Sharpness 6-15 Sheet/cover/chapter insert 7-17 Shortcut key 8-10 Sort 7-11 Special original 6-19 SSD settings 8-26 Stamp 7-23 Stamp composition 7-52 Stamp element 7-92 Stamp repeat 7-28 Stamp settings 8-32 Stamp type 7-28 Stamp/composition 7-21 Standard size 6-13 Staple 7-11 Staple - position setting 7-12 Store address 9-20, 9-42 Subject 7-56 System settings 9-36 System user box 6-4 T Timer transmission 7-59 Touch panel 3-5 U URL notification setting 7-58 Use/file 7-3 Use/file - check job settings 3-14 Use/file - check job settings - check e-mail settings 3-16 Use/file - check job settings - communication settings 3-16 Use/file - check job settings - destination settings 3-15 Use/file - check job settings - document setting contents 3-15 Use/file - details 3-14 User authentication 2-9 User authentication/account track 9-38 User box administrator setting 8-25 User box setting 8-10, 8-19 User boxes 9-18, 9-40 User name 7-43, 7-44, 7-45 Using documents 2-5 V V.34 OFF 7-55 W Web browser cache 9-4 Web Connection 9-3 WebDAV 7-45 Z Zoom 7-14 1-4 1-1 Numerics 1-Sided 6-7 2in1 7-14 2-Sided 6-7 4in1 7-14 8in1 7-14 A Address Type 7-38 Advanced Search 7-47 All Jobs 3-9, 3-10, 3-12, 3-13 Allow/Restrict User Box 8-22 Annotation User Box 7-89, 8-16 Application 7-36 Apply Stamps 8-32 Auto 6-20 Auto Color 6-12 Auto Delete Secure Document 8-20 B Back (Blank) 7-18 Back (Copy) 7-18 Background Pattern 7-25, 7-27, 7-28 Background Removal 6-14 Bind TX 7-34 Binding Position 6-17, 6-20 Black 6-12, 7-53 Blank 7-20 Body 7-57 Book Copy 6-16 Book Spread 6-16 Bulletin Board User Box 7-82, 8-6 C Center Erase 6-17 Center Staple & Fold 7-13 Change Pos./Delete 7-25, 7-30 Chapter Paper 7-20 Chapters 7-17 Check HDD Capacity 8-26 Check Job 3-6 Check Job Set. 3-8, 3-10 Check Job Settings 3-14 Check SSD Capacity 8-27 Check/Change Temporarily 7-30 City 7-47 Color 6-12, 7-53 Combine 7-6, 7-8, 7-14 Comm. List 3-11, 3-12, 3-13 Communication Method Settings 7-59 Communication Settings 7-36 Compact PDF 6-8, 7-49 Compact XPS 6-8, 7-49 Company Name 7-48 Confidential RX User Box 4-37 Continuous Print 7-9, 7-15 Copied Paper 6-6 Copy 7-19, 7-64, 7-66 Copy Guard Pattern 7-27 Copy Protect 7-21, 7-24 Copy Protect Pattern 7-25 Cover + 2-Sided 6-7 Cover Sheet 7-17 Custom Display Settings - User Box Setting 8-10 Custom Size 6-13 D Date/Time 7-21, 7-25, 7-26, 7-28, 7-29, 7-92, 8-17 Default Tab 8-10 Delete 3-7, 3-8, 3-10, 3-11, 3-12, 7-64, 7-86, 7-88, 7-94, 7-96, 7-97, 7-99, 7-109 Delete Page 3-18 Delete Secure Print Documents 8-19 Delete Unused User Box 8-19 Deleted Jobs 3-9, 3-10, 3-12, 3-13 Deleting 7-65 Density 6-12, 7-25, 7-30, 7-81, 7-93, 8-17 Department 7-48 Despeckle 6-20 Detail 3-9, 3-10, 3-11, 3-12, 3-13, 3-14 Detail Search 7-39 Detail Settings 6-9, 7-24, 7-25, 7-27, 7-28, 7-30, 7-33, 7-44, 7-45, 7-81 Detail View 7-4 Digital Signature 7-61 Display Name 7-33 Do Not Print # 7-23 Do Not Print Page Number 7-23 Document Delete Time Setting 8-23 Document Details 7-4, 7-64, 7-69, 7-70, 7-86, 7-88, 7-94, 7-102, 7-109 Document Hold Setting 8-21 Document Name 6-5, 7-56 Document Permissions 6-9, 7-50 Document Settings 7-36 Dot Matrix Original 6-6 E ECM OFF 7-55 Edit Document 7-70 Edit Name 7-64, 7-65, 7-86, 7-88, 7-94, 7-109 E-mail 7-41 E-mail Addr. 7-47 E-mail Encryption 7-61 E-Mail Settings 7-56 Encrypted PDF Delete Time 8-20 Encryption 6-9, 7-50 Encryption Priority 8-27 Existing Setting 7-14 External Memory 7-100 External Memory Document Scan 8-22 External Memory Function Settings 8-22 F 1-2 Fax 3-18, 7-41, 7-95 Fax Header Settings 7-61 Fax Number 7-47 F-Code transmission 7-60 File Path 7-43, 7-44, 7-45 File Type 6-8, 7-49 Finished Jobs 3-9, 3-10, 3-12, 3-13 Finishing 7-8, 7-9 First Name 7-47 Fold/Bind 7-13 Format HDD 8-30 Format SSD 8-31 Forward 3-11 Frame Erase 6-15, 6-16 From 7-57 Front (Blank) 7-18 Front (Copy) 7-18 Front + Back Cover 6-16 Front Cover 6-16 FTP 7-44 Full Color 6-12, 7-53 Full Size 7-14 G Gray Scale 6-12, 7-53 Group 7-36 H Half-Fold 7-13 HDD Encryption Setting 8-31 HDD Lock Password 8-29 HDD Settings 8-26 Header/Footer 7-21, 7-30 Host Name 7-43, 7-44, 7-45 I ID & Print Delete after Print Setting 8-23 ID & Print Delete Time 8-21 ID & Print Settings 8-24 ID & Print User Box 7-98 Image 7-52 Image Adjustment 6-14 Image Details 7-33 Image Shift 7-16 Increase Priority 3-8 Index 7-39, 8-5 Insert Paper 7-19 Insert Sheet 7-17 Insert Sheet Setting 7-22 Insert Type 7-19 Internet Fax 7-42 IP Address Fax 7-42 J Job Details 3-8 Job List 3-6, 3-7 JPEG 6-8, 7-49 L L1 3-10, 3-11 L2 3-10, 3-11 Last Name 7-47 Left 6-20 Line Setting 7-54 Long Original 6-19 M Manual 7-14 Maximum Number of User Boxes 8-18 Memory RX User Box 7-87 Minimal 7-14 Mixed Original 6-19 Mode 1 8-27 Mode 2 8-27 Move 7-64 Moving documents 7-65 Multi Page 6-11, 7-53 N Name 7-47 New 7-79 Next Destination 7-43, 7-44, 7-45 Next Page 3-17, 3-18, 7-76 Number Type 7-93, 8-17 O OR/AND/STARTS WITH/ENDS WITH 7-48 Original Direction 6-19 Original Settings 6-5, 6-19 Original Type 6-6 Other 7-25, 7-26, 7-28, 7-29 Overseas TX 7-54 Overwrite 7-80 Overwrite All Data 8-28 Overwrite Priority 8-27 P Page Margin 7-8, 7-9, 7-16 Page Number 7-21, 7-22 Page Separation 6-11, 7-53 Paper 7-103 Password 6-9, 7-43, 7-44, 7-45, 7-50, 8-5, 8-7, 8-16 Password Copy Pattern 7-28 Password Encrypted PDF User Box 7-97 Password transmission 7-60 Pattern Overwrite 7-25, 7-30 PC (SMB) 7-43 PDF 6-8, 7-49 Photo 6-6 Photo Size 6-13 Polling TX User Box 7-83 Position 7-24, 7-25, 7-28, 7-30 Position Setting 7-12 Preset Stamp 7-25, 7-26, 7-28, 7-29 Prev. Page 3-17, 3-18, 7-76 1-3 Preview 3-6, 3-16, 7-69 Preview/Set Range 7-76 Preview/Specify by Input 7-77 Primary Field 8-17 Print 7-6, 7-99, 7-102 Print Document 8-22 Print on Back Cover only 7-23 Print on Front and Back Cover 7-23 Print page # 7-23 Print Position 7-21, 7-22, 7-24, 7-62, 7-93, 8-17 Proof Print 7-95 Public, Personal, or Group User Box 8-5 R Receiver RX Ability 7-42 Redial 3-10, 3-11 Reference 7-43 Register Overlay 7-70, 7-78, 7-94 Registered Overlay 7-21, 7-32 Registered Stamp 7-25, 7-29 Relay Destination 8-8 Relay TX Password 8-8, 8-9 Relay User Box 8-8 Release Held Job 3-8 Reset 7-4 Resolution 6-7, 7-48 S Save Document 7-4, 8-22 Scan 3-18 Scan Settings 6-5 Scan Size 6-13 Search 7-36, 7-38, 7-47 Secondary Field 7-92, 8-17 Secure Document User Box 7-84 Security Print Only 8-26 Select All 7-4 Send & Print 7-63 Separate Scan 6-18 Separation 6-16 Sharpness 6-15 Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert 7-8 Shortcut key 8-10 Simplex/Duplex 6-7 Skip the Page(s) 7-23 Sort 7-19, 7-20 SSD Settings 8-26 Stamp 7-21, 7-23 Stamp Composition 7-52 Stamp Element 7-92 Stamp Repeat 7-21, 7-28 Stamp/Composition 7-8, 7-9, 7-62 Subject 7-56 T Text 6-6, 7-52 Text Color 7-62 Text Details 7-21, 7-22, 7-31 Text Size 7-24, 7-25, 7-27, 7-28, 7-30, 7-62 Text/Photo 6-6 Thumbnail View 7-4, 7-33 TIFF 6-8, 7-49 Timer transmission 7-59 Timer TX Job 3-10 Top 6-20 U URL Notification Setting 7-58 Use Existing Color Setting 7-53 User Box 6-5 User Box Administrator Setting 8-25 User Box Name 8-5, 8-7, 8-8, 8-9, 8-16 User Box No. 8-5, 8-7, 8-8, 8-9, 8-16 User Box Setting 8-19 User Name 7-43, 7-44, 7-45 V V.34 OFF 7-55 View Finishing 3-17, 3-18 W WebDAV 7-45 X XPS 6-8, 7-49 Z Z-Folded Original 6-19 Zoom 7-8, 7-14 1-4 Guide de l’utilisateur Opérations de numérisation avancée . bizhub 362/282/222 Table des matières-1 Table des matières 1 Introduction 1.1 Energy Star®..................................................................................... 1-4 Définition d'un produit ENERGY STAR®....................................... 1-4 1.2 Marques commerciales et marques déposées ............................. 1-5 Information de licence.................................................................... 1-5 OpenSSL Statement ...................................................................... 1-6 1.3 A propos de ce manuel .................................................................... 1-9 Structure du Guide......................................................................... 1-9 Notation.......................................................................................... 1-9 Images présentées....................................................................... 1-10 Précautions d'utilisation............................................................... 1-10 Fonctions ne pouvant pas être utilisées ...................................... 1-10 1.4 Guides de l'utilisateur..................................................................... 1-12 Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Copie] ..................................... 1-12 Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner réseau]...................... 1-12 Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Boîte] ...................................... 1-12 Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Impression] ............................. 1-12 Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Numérisation avancée] (le présent manuel)....................................................................... 1-12 Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Fax]......................................... 1-13 1.5 Explication des conventions.......................................................... 1-14 Recommandations de sécurité .................................................... 1-14 Séquence d'actions ..................................................................... 1-14 Astuces ........................................................................................ 1-15 Repères de texte spéciaux .......................................................... 1-15 2 Fonctions 2.1 Télécopie par adresse IP ................................................................. 2-3 2.2 Scan vers PC..................................................................................... 2-4 2.3 Scanner IP ......................................................................................... 2-6 2.4 Relais IP............................................................................................. 2-7 2.5 PageScope Web Connection........................................................... 2-8 Table des matières-2 bizhub 362/282/222 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3.1 Spécifier un destinataire avec un bouton de numérotation 1-touche ............................................................................................. 3-3 Sélectionner un bouton une touche................................................ 3-3 Spécifier un destinataire en appuyant sur un bouton de numérotation 1-touche ................................................................... 3-3 Saisir le numéro du bouton 1-touche ............................................. 3-5 Recherche d'un destinataire une touche........................................ 3-7 3.2 Entrer une adresse............................................................................ 3-9 Pour entrer une adresse ................................................................. 3-9 3.3 Spécifier la qualité de numérisation et le taux zoom................... 3-12 Qualité........................................................................................... 3-12 Pour sélectionner un paramètre de qualité................................... 3-13 Densité .......................................................................................... 3-14 Pour sélectionner un paramètre Densité ...................................... 3-14 Réglage du Format Original .......................................................... 3-15 3.4 Spécifier des fonctions supplémentaires...................................... 3-16 Spécifier les informations sur l'identifiant ..................................... 3-18 Spécifier la condition d'impression du rapport d'émission .......... 3-20 Spécifier une émission 2en1......................................................... 3-21 Spécifier les paramètres d'émission recto-verso ......................... 3-22 Spécifier la priorité d'émission...................................................... 3-23 Spécifier les paramètres d'émission horloge................................ 3-23 Spécifier le paramètre Tampon .................................................... 3-25 3.5 Si l'émission n'est pas arrivée à son terme .................................. 3-26 Consulter le rapport d'émission.................................................... 3-26 Réexpédition ................................................................................. 3-27 3.6 Recevoir une télécopie par adresse IP.......................................... 3-28 3.7 Ajouter un destinataire ................................................................... 3-29 Pour programmer un bouton de numérotation 1-touche ............. 3-31 Changer/supprimer un bouton de numérotation 1-touche........... 3-34 Copier un bouton 1-touche .......................................................... 3-35 Enregistrer/Editer/Supprimer le destinataire secondaire.............. 3-36 Donner un nom à un index............................................................ 3-37 Pour nommer un index ................................................................. 3-37 Enregistrer un programme de courrier électronique..................... 3-39 Pour enregistrer une Programme E-mail ...................................... 3-41 Changer/Effacer un Programme E-mail........................................ 3-44 bizhub 362/282/222 Table des matières-3 4 Opérations Scan vers PC 4.1 Avant d'enregistrer ........................................................................... 4-3 Installer Scanner IP Scanner sur l'ordinateur................................. 4-3 Vérifier les paramètres réseau........................................................ 4-3 4.2 Spécifier une destination avec un bouton de numérotation 1-touche .................................................................... 4-4 Sélectionner un bouton une touche............................................... 4-4 Spécifier un destinataire en appuyant sur un bouton de numérotation 1-touche ............................................................. 4-5 Saisir le numéro du bouton 1-touche ............................................ 4-7 Recherche d'un destinataire une touche ....................................... 4-9 4.3 Entrer une adresse ......................................................................... 4-11 Pour entrer une adresse............................................................... 4-11 4.4 Spécifier la qualité de numérisation et le taux zoom.................. 4-14 Qualité .......................................................................................... 4-14 Pour sélectionner un paramètre de qualité .................................. 4-15 Densité ......................................................................................... 4-16 Pour sélectionner un paramètre Densité...................................... 4-16 Réglage du Format Original ......................................................... 4-17 4.5 Spécifier des fonctions supplémentaires..................................... 4-18 Spécifier la condition d'impression du rapport d'émission ......... 4-20 Spécifier une émission 2en1........................................................ 4-21 Spécifier les paramètres d'émission recto-verso ........................ 4-22 Spécifier la priorité d'émission..................................................... 4-24 Spécifier les paramètres d'émission horloge............................... 4-25 Spécifier le paramètre Tampon.................................................... 4-26 Spécifier le nom du fichier ........................................................... 4-27 4.6 Si les données n'ont pas pu être enregistrées ............................ 4-28 Consulter le rapport d'émission................................................... 4-28 Réexpédition ................................................................................ 4-29 4.7 Enregistrer une destination ........................................................... 4-30 Programmer un bouton 1-touche ................................................ 4-30 Pour programmer un bouton 1-touche........................................ 4-32 Changer/supprimer un bouton de numérotation 1-touche.......... 4-35 Copier un bouton 1-touche.......................................................... 4-36 Enregistrer/Editer/Supprimer le destinataire secondaire ............. 4-37 Table des matières-4 bizhub 362/282/222 5 Scanner IP 5.1 Avant d'utiliser Scanner IP ............................................................... 5-3 Scanner IP et ImageReceiver ......................................................... 5-3 Utiliser un routeur téléphonique...................................................... 5-4 Utiliser un modem ou un adaptateur de terminal ........................... 5-4 Utiliser Windows XP Service Pack 2/Windows Vista...................... 5-4 Autoriser l'utilisation de ImageReceiver.......................................... 5-6 Conflits de ports ImageReceiver .................................................... 5-7 Emissions SSL ................................................................................ 5-8 Installation des certificats ............................................................. 5-10 5.2 Installer/désinstaller les utilitaires................................................. 5-13 Méthodes d'installation du ImageReceiver................................... 5-13 Installer les utilitaires..................................................................... 5-14 Désinstaller les utilitaires (pour Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003).......................................... 5-17 5.3 Opérations de scanner IP ............................................................... 5-19 Fenêtre principale ......................................................................... 5-19 Commandes disponibles .............................................................. 5-21 Boîte de dialogue Scanner Settings ............................................. 5-24 Boîte de dialogue Sort Settings (Paramètres de tri) (onglet Scanner) ............................................................................ 5-26 Boîte de dialogue Sort Settings (onglet RX document (Réception document)).................................................................. 5-27 Boîte de dialogue Sort Settings (onglet TX document (Emission document)) ................................................................... 5-28 Boîte de dialogue Divided Settings (Paramètres de division) ....... 5-30 Boîte de dialogue Receive Notify Settings ................................... 5-31 FenêtreVisionner ........................................................................... 5-33 Boîte de dialogue Printer Setting .................................................. 5-34 Boîte de dialogue Print Property................................................... 5-35 5.4 Opérations ImageReceiver............................................................. 5-37 Icône ImageReceiver .................................................................... 5-37 Commandes ImageReceiver......................................................... 5-38 Boîte de dialogue Automatic Print Settings.................................. 5-41 Boîte de dialogue Folder and Printer Settings.............................. 5-42 5.5 Enregistrer les boutons et les opérations de numérisation .................................................................................... 5-43 Fonctionnement général ............................................................... 5-43 Démarrer Scanner IP .................................................................... 5-43 Enregistrer un bouton de numérisation ........................................ 5-44 Numériser un document à l'aide des paramètres enregistrés...... 5-47 Visionner l'image numérisée ......................................................... 5-49 Spécifier l'impression automatique avec IP Scanner ................... 5-50 bizhub 362/282/222 Table des matières-5 Imprimer automatiquement avec Scanner IP .............................. 5-54 Spécifier l'impression automatique avec ImageReceiver ............ 5-55 Imprimer automatiquement avec un bouton de numérotation 1-Touche...................................................................................... 5-58 Quitter Scanner IP........................................................................ 5-58 5.6 Autres opérations ........................................................................... 5-59 Transférer un document reçu vers Scanner IP ............................ 5-59 Transférer vers Scanner IP........................................................... 5-60 6 Opérations Relais IP 6.1 Avant l'émission................................................................................ 6-3 Définir "Restreindre" sous "Passerelle émission" .......................... 6-3 Spécifier les paramètres des stations de relais ............................. 6-3 6.2 Spécifier un destinataire avec un bouton de numérotation 1-touche ............................................................................................ 6-4 Sélectionner un bouton une touche............................................... 6-4 Spécifier un destinataire en appuyant sur un bouton de numérotation 1-touche ............................................................. 6-5 Saisir le numéro du bouton 1-touche ............................................ 6-7 Recherche d'un destinataire une touche ....................................... 6-9 Spécifier la chaîne de numérotation ............................................ 6-11 6.3 Entrer un numéro de fax ................................................................ 6-12 Pour entrer un numéro de fax ...................................................... 6-12 6.4 Spécifier la qualité de numérisation et le taux zoom.................. 6-15 Qualité .......................................................................................... 6-15 Pour sélectionner un paramètre de qualité .................................. 6-16 Densité ......................................................................................... 6-17 Pour sélectionner un paramètre Densité...................................... 6-17 Réglage du Format Original ......................................................... 6-18 6.5 Spécifier des fonctions supplémentaires..................................... 6-19 Spécifier la condition d'impression du rapport d'émission ......... 6-21 Spécifier une émission 2en1........................................................ 6-22 Spécifier les paramètres d'émission recto-verso ........................ 6-23 Spécifier le paramètre Priorité émission ...................................... 6-25 Spécifier les paramètres d'émission horloge............................... 6-26 Spécifier le paramètre Tampon.................................................... 6-27 6.6 Si l'émission n'est pas arrivée à son terme ................................. 6-28 Consulter le rapport d'émission................................................... 6-28 Réexpédition ................................................................................ 6-29 6.7 Enregistrer un destinataire ............................................................ 6-30 Programmer un bouton 1-touche ................................................ 6-30 Pour programmer un bouton 1-touche........................................ 6-32 Table des matières-6 bizhub 362/282/222 Changer/supprimer un bouton de numérotation 1-touche........... 6-35 Copier un bouton 1-touche .......................................................... 6-36 Enregistrer/Editer/Supprimer le destinataire secondaire.............. 6-37 7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7.1 Paramètres que vous pouvez définir avec PageScope Web Connection......................................................................................... 7-3 Onglet Lecture (mode Utilisateur) ................................................... 7-3 Onglet Réseau (Mode Administrateur)............................................ 7-4 7.2 Utiliser PageScope Web Connection .............................................. 7-5 Configuration minimale requise ...................................................... 7-5 Accéder à PageScope Web Connection ........................................ 7-6 Si les réglages Authentification Utilisateur ont été appliqués......... 7-7 Si les paramètres Authentification Groupe ont été appliqués ........ 7-7 Structure des pages ....................................................................... 7-8 Connexion en mode Administrateur ............................................. 7-10 Cache du navigateur Internet ....................................................... 7-12 Avec Internet Explorer .................................................................. 7-12 Avec Netscape.............................................................................. 7-12 7.3 Enregistrement adresse 1-touche (mode Utilisateur).................. 7-13 Donner un nom à un index............................................................ 7-17 Enregistrer un destinataire 1-touche ............................................ 7-19 Enregistrer une adresse secondaire ............................................. 7-21 Pour enregistrer un destinataire secondaire................................. 7-22 Modifier les paramètres d'un destinataire 1-touche..................... 7-25 Supprimer un destinataire 1-touche ............................................. 7-27 7.4 Paramètres relais IP (mode Administrateur)................................. 7-29 Sélectionner la station de relais IP à utiliser ................................. 7-29 Pour sélectionner une station de relais......................................... 7-30 Enregistrer une station de relais IP ............................................... 7-32 Pour enregistrer une station de relais IP....................................... 7-33 8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8.1 Paramètres disponibles .................................................................... 8-3 Paramètres pouvant être spécifiés depuis l'écran Gestion administrateur ................................................................................. 8-3 Liste des paramètres réseau requis................................................ 8-3 8.2 Paramètres relais IP.......................................................................... 8-6 Enregistrer une station de relais IP ................................................. 8-6 Pour enregistrer une station de relais IP......................................... 8-6 bizhub 362/282/222 Table des matières-7 Sélectionner une station de relais IP.............................................. 8-9 Spécifier le port de résultat de relais ........................................... 8-10 8.3 Spécifier les paramètres d'activation du logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil) ......................................................................................... 8-11 Paramètres de logiciel SW........................................................... 8-11 Pour spécifier un paramètre de commutation logicielle .............. 8-13 Spécifier les réglages pour limiter la numérotation et les émissions de radiodiffusion (mode 018)............................. 8-15 Spécifier les réglages de l'image sur le rapport de résultats (mode 023) ............................................................... 8-16 Spécifier les paramètres pour les émissions de récepteur vérifiées (mode 200) ..................................................................... 8-17 Spécifier l'identification de la télécopie directe et la télécopie par adresse IP (mode 351) ........................................... 8-19 Spécifier si les informations de l'identifiant sont ajoutées en cas de télécopie directe, d'exécution d'une opération de relais IP ou de transfert de documents reçus (mode 352) ........... 8-20 Spécifier l'écran par défaut pour l'introduction d'adresses (mode 366)................................................................. 8-21 Spécifier les paramètres des informations censées figurer sur le rapport pour la télécopie directe/les émissions par relais IP (mode 368) ..................................................................... 8-22 Spécifier la méthode de codage des émissions par relais IP (mode 381) ................................................................................... 8-23 Spécifier les paramètres relatifs aux résultats d'émission des émissions par relais IP (mode 382) .............................................. 8-24 Spécifier des paramètres pour limiter l'utilisation des modes de communication–1 (mode 475)...................................................... 8-26 Spécifier des paramètres pour limiter l'utilisation des modes de communication–2 (mode 476)...................................................... 8-28 Spécifier des paramètres pour limiter l'utilisation des modes de communication–3/Spécifier des restrictions pour l'enregistrement des adresses Fax et l'impression de rapports et spécifier le mode d'affichage des destinataires 1-Touche (mode 477).................... 8-30 Spécifier la méthode de suppression pour [Supp] dans les écrans de saisie (mode 478) ........................................................ 8-33 Spécifier les paramètres de limitation de l'authentification utilisateur aux seules fonctions de Numérisation (mode 479) ..... 8-34 9 Localisation de pannes 9.1 A l'apparition d'un certain écran..................................................... 9-3 9.2 Codes d'erreur .................................................................................. 9-4 Opérations Scan vers PC............................................................... 9-4 Opérations de scanner IP .............................................................. 9-5 Opérations relais IP........................................................................ 9-6 Table des matières-8 bizhub 362/282/222 9.3 Localisation de pannes..................................................................... 9-7 Télécopie par adresse IP ................................................................ 9-7 Opérations Scan vers PC ............................................................... 9-8 Opérations de scanner IP ............................................................... 9-9 Opérations de relais IP et autres .................................................. 9-15 10 Annexe 10.1 Caractéristiques .............................................................................. 10-3 Caractéristiques de télécopie par adresse IP............................... 10-3 Caractéristiques Scan vers PC..................................................... 10-3 Caractéristiques scanner IP.......................................................... 10-4 Caractéristiques de relais IP ......................................................... 10-4 10.2 Saisir du texte .................................................................................. 10-5 Pour taper du texte ....................................................................... 10-5 Liste des caractères disponibles .................................................. 10-6 10.3 Glossaire .......................................................................................... 10-7 10.4 Index ............................................................................................... 10-11 1 Introduction Introduction 1 bizhub 362/282/222 1-3 1 Introduction Nous vous remercions d'avoir porté votre choix sur cet appareil. Le présent guide de l'utilisateur renferme les détails des opérations requises pour l'utilisation des fonctions de numérisation avancée des bizhub 362, 282 et 222, les précautions d'emploi ainsi que les procédures de dépannage fondamentales. Avant d'utiliser ces appareils, il y a lieu de lire entièrement ce Guide de l'utilisateur pour assurer un fonctionnement correct et efficace de l'appareil. Après avoir lu ce Guide de l'utilisateur, rangez-le dans le logement du guide de manière à pouvoir vous y référer en cas de besoin lors de l'utilisation de la machine. Les illustrations contenues dans ce Guide peuvent représenter l'équipement réel de manière légèrement différente. 1 Introduction 1-4 bizhub 362/282/222 1.1 Energy Star® En tant que partenaires ENERGY STAR®, nous avons pu déterminer que cet appareil satisfait aux directives ENERGY STAR® en matière d'efficience énergétique. Définition d'un produit ENERGY STAR® Un produit ENERGY STAR® intègre une fonction spéciale qui lui permet de basculer automatiquement en "mode d'économie d'énergie" à l'issue d'une certaine période d'inactivité. Un produit ENERGY STAR® utilise l'énergie avec plus d'efficacité, vous permet d'économiser de l'argent sur vos factures d'électricité et contribue à protéger l'environnement. Introduction 1 bizhub 362/282/222 1-5 1.2 Marques commerciales et marques déposées KONICA MINOLTA, le logo KONICA MINOLTA et The essentials of imaging sont des marques déposées ou des marques de fabrique de KONICA MINOLTA HOLDINGS, INC. PageScope et bizhub sont des marques déposées ou des marques de fabrique de KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. Netscape Communications, le logo Netscape Communications, Netscape Navigator, Netscape Communicator et Netscape sont des marques de fabrique de Netscape Communications Corporation. Compact-VJE Copyright 1986-2003 VACS Corp. RC4® est une marque déposée ou une marque commerciale de RSA Security Inc. aux USA et/ou dans d'autres pays. RSA® est une marque déposée ou une marque commerciale de RSA Security Inc. RSA BSAFE® est une marque déposée ou une marque commerciale de RSA Security Inc. aux USA et/ou dans d'autres pays. Information de licence Ce produit contient un logiciel cryptographique RSA BSAFE de RSA Security Inc. 1 Introduction 1-6 bizhub 362/282/222 OpenSSL Statement OpenSSL License Copyright © 1998-2000 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment: "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)" 4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission. For written permission, please contact opensslcore@ openssl.org. 5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project. 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@crypt-Soft.com). This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). Introduction 1 bizhub 362/282/222 1-7 Original SSLeay License Copyright © 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) All rights reserved. This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscape's SSL. This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are adhered to. The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, Ihash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: "This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@crypt-soft.com)" The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the routines from the library being used are not cryptographic related. 4. If you include any Windows-specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement: "This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT 1 Introduction 1-8 bizhub 362/282/222 (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. The licence and distribution terms for any publicly available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed, i.e., this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public Licence.] All other product names mentioned are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. Information carried in this manual including design and related materials, and software contained in the machine and software attached to the CD-ROM are valuable assets of NEC, NEC AccessTechnica, Ltd. and respective licensee(s). NEC, NEC AccessTechnica, Ltd. and the licensee shall reserve all rights to design, produce, copy, use and sell this manual, including the patents, copyrights, and other proprietary rights, except when such an action is permitted to be transferred to another company with a written consent. Introduction 1 bizhub 362/282/222 1-9 1.3 A propos de ce manuel Le présent Guide de l'utilisateur couvre les fonctions qui sont ajoutées lorsque le scanner est installé sur les bizhub 362, 282 et 222. Ce chapitre présente la structure du manuel et les règles de notation des noms de produit, etc. Ce manuel s'adresse aux utilisateurs qui comprennent les opérations de base des ordinateurs et de cette machine. Pour les procédures d'exploitation du système d'exploitation Windows ou Macintosh et des applications logicielles, veuillez vous référer aux manuels correspondants. Structure du Guide Ce Guide comprend les chapitres suivants. Chapitre 1 Introduction Chapitre 2 Fonctions Chapitre 3 Télécopie par adresse IP Chapitre 4 Opérations Scan vers PC Chapitre 5 Scanner IP Chapitre 6 Opérations Relais IP Chapitre 7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection Chapitre 8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion Chapitre 9 Localisation de pannes Chapitre 10 Annexe Notation Nom de produit Notation dans le manuel bizhub 362/282/222 cette machine ou son périphérique ou 362/282/222 Contrôleur réseau interne Contrôleur d'imprimante Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 Windows NT 4.0 Microsoft Windows 2000 Windows 2000 Microsoft Windows XP Windows XP Microsoft Windows Vista Windows Vista Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Windows Server 2003 Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Windows Server 2008 Quand les systèmes d'exploitation ci-dessus sont mentionnés tous ensemble Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP 1 Introduction 1-10 bizhub 362/282/222 Images présentées De manière générale, les écrans tactiles et les fenêtres d'application qui figurent dans ce manuel indiquent que seul le scanner optionnel a été installé. Précautions d'utilisation Veuillez suivre les précautions mentionnées ci-dessous lors de l'utilisation de ces fonctions. - Etant donné la restriction de la garantie du respect de la vie privée lors des émissions par Internet et Intranet, nous recommandons d'envoyer les documents importants directement au destinataire en utilisant une ligne téléphonique normale. - Les appareils téléphoniques connectés à un réseau local ne peuvent pas être utilisés. - L'envoi d'une émission peut prendre quelque temps en raison du trafic Internet/Intranet. - En fonction des serveurs de courrier électronique, il se peut que vous ne puissiez pas envoyer des documents avec un nombre important de pages ou d'images. Fonctions ne pouvant pas être utilisées Les fonctions suivantes peuvent être utilisées avec des émissions de télécopie normales en utilisant une ligne téléphonique ordinaire, mais elles ne peuvent pas être utilisées si seul le scanner est installé. - Emission par lots - Réception d'appel sélectif - Emission d'appel sélectif - Emission de numérisation rapide - Emission du mot de passe - Copie à distance - Emissions de boîtes confidentielles - Inscription au bulletin - Composition mains libres - Interrogation à distance du bulletin - Réglage "Pas de réduction" 2 Remarque L'émission du mot de passe et la copie à distance peuvent être spécifiées dans l'opération, toutefois elles ne fonctionneront pas. Introduction 1 bizhub 362/282/222 1-11 Les fonctions suivantes peuvent être utilisées. - Réglages de la qualité - Réglages de la densité - Réglage du Format Original - Rapport d'émission - 2en1 - Emission recto-verso - Tampon (en option) - Informations relatives à l'identifiant* - Emission prioritaire - Émission différée - Emission rotative* *Fonctions pouvant être utilisées avec une opération de télécopie par Internet et par adresse IP 1 Introduction 1-12 bizhub 362/282/222 1.4 Guides de l'utilisateur Les Guides de l'utilisateur suivants ont été préparés pour cette machine. Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Copie] Ce manuel contient des détails sur les opérations de base et les procédures d'exploitation des différentes fonctions de copie. - Consulter ce Guide de l'utilisateur pour obtenir des détails sur les procédures d'exploitation des fonctions de copie, ainsi que des précautions relatives à l'installation/l'utilisation, la mise sous tension et hors tension de la machine, le chargement du papier et les opérations de dépannage comme la résolution des problèmes de serrage papier. Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner réseau] Ce manuel contient des détails sur la définition des fonctions réseau pour l'équipement standard et sur l'utilisation des fonctions de numérisation. - Consulter ce Guide de l'utilisateur pour obtenir des détails sur les procédures d'exploitation relatives aux fonctions réseau et sur les opérations Scan vers E-mail, Scan vers FTP et Scan vers SMB et Fax Internet. Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Boîte] Ce manuel décrit en détail les procédures liées aux fonctions Boîte. - Consulter ce Guide de l'utilisateur pour obtenir des détails sur l'impression d'une épreuve ou d'un travail verrouillé et sur les options utilisant le disque dur en option, comme le routage et l'enregistrement des documents dans des boîtes. Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Impression] Ce Guide contient des détails sur les procédures d'exploitation utilisant le contrôleur d'imprimante intégré standard. - Pour plus de détails sur les fonctions d'impression, consulter le Guide de l'utilisateur (fichier PDF) sur le CD-ROM Utilisateur. Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Numérisation avancée] (le présent manuel) Ce Guide renferme les détails des procédures d'exécution des fonctions pouvant être utilisées lorsque le scanner optionnel est installé. - Consulter ce Guide de l'utilisateur pour plus de détails sur l'utilisation des opérations de la télécopie par adresse IP, relais IP et Scan vers PC et sur l'utilisation du scanner IP. Introduction 1 bizhub 362/282/222 1-13 Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Fax] Ce Guide décrit en détail les procédures liées aux fonctions Fax. - Consulter ce Guide de l'utilisateur pour obtenir des détails sur les procédures d'exploitation des fonctions Fax quand le kit Fax en option est installé. 1 Introduction 1-14 bizhub 362/282/222 1.5 Explication des conventions Les repères et mises en forme utilisés dans le présent manuel sont décrits ci-dessous. Recommandations de sécurité 6 DANGER Tout manquement au respect des instructions mises en évidence de cette manière risquent de causer des blessures graves voire mortelles dues à l'énergie électrique. % Observer tous les dangers afin de prévenir toute blessure. 7 AVERTISSEMENT Tout manquement au respect des instructions mises en valeur de cette manière peut entraîner des blessures graves ou des dommages matériels. % Observer tous les avertissements afin de prévenir toute blessure et garantir l'utilisation correcte du copieur. 7 ATTENTION Tout manquement au respect des instructions mises en valeur de cette manière peut entraîner des blessures légères ou des dommages matériels. % Observer toutes les mises en garde pour éviter les blessures et assurer l'utilisation en toute sécurité du copieur. Séquence d'actions 1 Le chiffre 1 ainsi formaté indique la première étape d'une séquence d'actions. 2 Les nombres suivants ainsi formatés indiquent les étapes successives d'une série d'actions. Une illustration insérée ici montre les opérations à exécuter. Introduction 1 bizhub 362/282/222 1-15 ? Le texte formaté de cette manière fournit une assistance supplémentaire. % Le texte formaté de cette manière décrit l'action censée garantir que les résultats souhaités sont atteints. Astuces 2 Remarque Le texte présenté de cette manière apporte des informations utiles pour l'utilisation en toute sécurité du copieur. 2 Rappel Le texte mis en évidence de cette manière contient des informations importantes (Rappel). ! Détails Le texte mis en évidence de cette manière contient des renvois à des informations plus détaillées. Repères de texte spéciaux Touche [Copie] Les noms des touches du panneau de contrôle apparaissent dans le format indiqué ci-dessus. REGLAGE MACHINE Les textes affichés se présentent sous la forme ci-dessus. 1 Introduction 1-16 bizhub 362/282/222 2 Fonctions Fonctions 2 bizhub 362/282/222 2-3 2 Fonctions 2.1 Télécopie par adresse IP Les données de numérisation sont envoyées par Intranet, sans passer par un serveur de courrier électronique réseau. Seule une machine de type identique à celui-ci est en mesure de recevoir les données et d'être réglée de manière à recevoir les fax émis par l'adresse IP. - Cette machine doit être raccordée à un réseau local et les paramètres réseau doivent être spécifiés. Pour plus de détails sur la spécification des paramètres réseau, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner réseau]. Pour plus de détails sur les réglages réseau liés à cette machine, voir "Paramètres disponibles" à la page 8-3. - Si une destination est enregistrée à l'aide d'un bouton de numérotation 1-Touche, un document à transmettre peut être envoyé en appuyant simplement sur le bouton de numérotation 1-Touche. - Pour plus de détails, voir chapitre 3, "Télécopie par adresse IP" à la page 3-3. Intranet AdresseIP Terminal Fax (Même type d’unité que cette machine) 2 Fonctions 2-4 bizhub 362/282/222 2.2 Scan vers PC Les données de numérisation sont envoyées à l'ordinateur spécifié sur le réseau et enregistrées dans un dossier déjà configuré. Cela permet d'enregistrer des documents papier sous la forme de données électroniques par une simple activation de touche, ce même dans un environnement dans lequel aucun serveur de courrier électronique n'est utilisé. Si vous utilisez le scanner IP inclus et les utilitaires ImageReceiver (récepteur d'images), le dossier dans lequel les données sont censées être enregistrées doit être spécifié à l'avance sur l'ordinateur qui reçoit les données. Qui plus est et en fonction des réglages spécifiés dans le scanner IP, il est possible de créer un dossier portant le nom du bouton à touche unique où les données peuvent être enregistrées. - Le document est envoyé comme fichier image TIFF ou PDF. - Les fichiers image TIFF peuvent être visualisés sur Windows à l'aide de la visionneuse d'images Tiff incluse. - Les fichiers image PDF peuvent être visualisés à l'aide de Adobe Reader. - Un câble croisé peut être utilisé même dans un environnement sans réseau local pour connecter directement cette machine à l'ordinateur afin de pouvoir utiliser la fonction Scan vers PC. - S'il existe un serveur DHCP faisant partie du réseau, il se peut que cette fonction soit perturbée étant donné que les adresses IP sont automatiquement assignées à chaque ordinateur. Si tel est le cas, spécifier une adresse IP fixe pour l'ordinateur, ou alors utiliser le scanner IP pour enregistrer les données. - Cette machine doit être raccordée à un réseau local et les paramètres réseau doivent être spécifiés. Pour plus de détails sur la spécification des paramètres réseau, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner réseau]. Pour plus de détails sur les réglages réseau liés à cette machine, voir "Paramètres disponibles" à la page 8-3. - Pour plus de détails, voir chapitre 4, "Opérations Scan vers PC" à la page 4-3. Fonctions 2 bizhub 362/282/222 2-5 Intranet Ordinateur client 2 Fonctions 2-6 bizhub 362/282/222 2.3 Scanner IP Les données de numérisation sont envoyées à l'ordinateur spécifié sur le réseau et les données sont enregistrées dans un dossier portant le même nom que le bouton de numérisation enregistré. Depuis l'ordinateur, enregistrer les paramètres de numérisation comme bouton de numérisation sur cette machine pour enregistrer les documents papier sous la forme de données électroniques en appuyant tout simplement sur le bouton de numérisation. - Le document est envoyé comme fichier image TIFF ou PDF. - Les fichiers image TIFF peuvent être visualisés sur Windows à l'aide de la visionneuse d'images Tiff incluse. - Les fichiers image PDF peuvent être visualisés à l'aide de Adobe Reader. - Un câble croisé peut être utilisé même dans un environnement sans réseau local pour connecter directement cette machine à l'ordinateur afin de pouvoir utiliser le scanner IP. - Cette machine doit être raccordée à un réseau local et les paramètres réseau doivent être spécifiés. Pour plus de détails sur la spécification des paramètres réseau, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner réseau]. Pour plus de détails sur les réglages réseau liés à cette machine, voir "Paramètres disponibles" à la page 8-3. - Pour plus de détails, voir chapitre 5, "Scanner IP" à la page 5-3. - Les documents envoyés comme émission fax ou fax Internet peuvent également être transférés vers l'ordinateur spécifié dans le scanner IP par l'administrateur. Paramètres Scanner Ordinateur client Fonctions 2 bizhub 362/282/222 2-7 2.4 Relais IP Un fax est envoyé par une machine de relais connectée au réseau local. Si une machine de relais est connectée à une ligne téléphonique dans un réseau intranet, spécifier la machine de relais depuis les machines (cette machine) connectées au réseau local pour envoyer un fax en utilisant la ligne téléphonique. Les résultats de l'émission de fax relayée peuvent être vérifiés dans la machine à partir de laquelle le fax a été émis. - Cette machine doit être raccordée à un réseau local et les paramètres réseau doivent être spécifiés. Pour plus de détails sur la spécification des paramètres réseau, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner réseau]. Pour plus de détails sur les réglages réseau liés à cette machine, voir "Paramètres disponibles" à la page 8-3. - Si une destination est enregistrée à l'aide d'un bouton de numérotation 1-touche, un document à transmettre peut être envoyé en appuyant simplement sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche. - Pour plus de détails, voir chapitre 6, "Opérations Relais IP" à la page 6-3. Terminal Transmission de télécopie de télécopie Ligne Téléphonique Machine de relais Machine d'où part la commande 2 Fonctions 2-8 bizhub 362/282/222 2.5 PageScope Web Connection L'ordinateur peut être utilisé pour vérifier l'état d'émission/d'impression de la machine et si oui ou non la télécopie est imprimée. Différents éléments peuvent en outre être enregistrés, à l'exemple de boutons à touche unique. PageScope Web Connection dispose d'un mode pour les opérations exécutées par les utilisateurs communs et d'un mode pour celles exécutées par l'administrateur. - Cette machine doit être raccordée à un réseau local et les paramètres réseau doivent être spécifiés. Pour plus de détails sur la spécification des paramètres réseau, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner réseau]. - Pour plus de détails, voir chapitre 7, "Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection" à la page 7-3. 3 Télécopie par adresse IP Télécopie par adresse IP 3 bizhub 362/282/222 3-3 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3.1 Spécifier un destinataire avec un bouton de numérotation 1-touche Si l'adresse IP d'un destinataire est enregistrée à l'aide d'un bouton de numérotation 1-touche, les données peuvent être envoyées en appuyant simplement sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche. Qui plus est, il est possible d'ajouter d'autres fonctions d'émission ou d'enregistrer un programme de courrier électronique. Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'un bouton de numérotation 1-touche ou un programme de courrier électronique, voir "Ajouter un destinataire" à la page 3-29. Sélectionner un bouton une touche Voici les différentes manières de sélectionner un bouton de numérotation 1-touche. Utilisez la méthode appropriée selon le nombre de destinataires et l'utilisation souhaitée. - Pression directe sur le bouton 1-touche - Saisir le numéro du bouton 1-touche - Chercher le nom d'un destinataire Spécifier un destinataire en appuyant sur un bouton de numérotation 1-touche 1 Placez les documents à numériser. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Fax/Scanner]. – L'écran qui s'affiche après l'activation de la touche [Fax/Scanner] peut être spécifié à l'aide du paramètre "Ecran par défaut" de l'écran Choix utilisateur. Pour plus de détails, consulter le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Copie]. 3 Appuyez sur [1-touche]. 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3-4 bizhub 362/282/222 4 Sélectionnez l'index contenant le destinataire souhaité et appuyez sur le bouton de numérotation 1-Touche. – Avec le même bouton de numérotation 1-touche, vous pouvez spécifier plusieurs destinataires pour une émission simultanée. Il est possible de spécifier 300 destinataires au maximum à l'aide d'un seul bouton de numérotation 1-touche. – Pour sélectionner un index, appuyer sur l'onglet de l'index souhaité ou appuyez sur ou pour sélectionner un autre onglet. – Si des paramètres de commutation logicielle avaient été spécifiés pour empêcher les radiodiffusions, un fax ne peut pas être envoyé à plusieurs destinataires. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres de commutation logicielle, voir "Spécifier les paramètres d'activation du logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil)" à la page 8-11. 5 Spécifier les paramètres appropriés dans l'onglet Qualité & réduc. conformément au document à envoyer. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier la qualité de numérisation et le taux zoom" à la page 3-12. 6 Spécifier les paramètres nécessaires dans l'onglet Menu. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, spécifiez les paramètres nécessaires sur l'onglet de Menu FAX. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier des fonctions supplémentaires." à la page 3-16. 7 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ]. Télécopie par adresse IP 3 bizhub 362/282/222 3-5 Saisir le numéro du bouton 1-touche Un numéro est assigné à chaque bouton de numérotation 1-touche, comme illustré ci-dessous. Au lieu d'appuyer sur un bouton de numérotation 1-touche, la spécification du numéro du bouton de numérotation 1-touche permet de sélectionner rapidement un destinataire. 1 Placez les documents à numériser. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Fax/Scanner]. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [#] sur le panneau de contrôle. Index 1 Index 36 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3-6 bizhub 362/282/222 4 Entrer le numéro du bouton de numérotation 1-touche sur le clavier numérique. – Le bouton 1-touche spécifié s'affiche en vidéo inverse. – Avec le même bouton de numérotation 1-touche, vous pouvez spécifier plusieurs destinataires pour une émission simultanée. Il est possible de spécifier 300 destinataires au maximum à l'aide d'un seul bouton de numérotation 1-touche. – Si des paramètres de commutation logicielle avaient été spécifiés pour empêcher les radiodiffusions, un fax ne peut pas être envoyé à plusieurs destinataires. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres de commutation logicielle, voir "Spécifier les paramètres d'activation du logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil)" à la page 8-11. 5 Spécifier les paramètres appropriés dans l'onglet Qualité & réduc. conformément au document à envoyer. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier la qualité de numérisation et le taux zoom" à la page 3-12. 6 Spécifier les paramètres nécessaires dans l'onglet Menu. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, spécifiez les paramètres nécessaires sur l'onglet de Menu FAX. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier des fonctions supplémentaires." à la page 3-16. 7 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ]. Télécopie par adresse IP 3 bizhub 362/282/222 3-7 Recherche d'un destinataire une touche Il est possible de rechercher le nom d'un destinataire enregistré à l'aide d'un bouton de numérotation 1-touche dans le but de sélectionner le bouton de numérotation 1-touche. 1 Placez les documents à numériser. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Fax/Scanner]. 3 Appuyez sur [Recherche]. – Si une recherche LDAP est possible, appuyez sur [Recherche LDAP] pour chercher plus loin. 4 Tapez le nom du destinataire, puis appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran qui s'affiche renferme la liste des boutons de numérotation 1-touche programmés avec le destinataire dont le nom commence par le nom entré. 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3-8 bizhub 362/282/222 5 Appuyer sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche souhaité pour le sélectionner. – Avec le même bouton de numérotation 1-touche, vous pouvez spécifier plusieurs destinataires pour une émission simultanée. Il est possible de spécifier 300 destinataires au maximum à l'aide d'un seul bouton de numérotation 1-touche. – Si des paramètres de commutation logicielle avaient été spécifiés pour empêcher les radiodiffusions, un fax ne peut pas être envoyé à plusieurs destinataires. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres de commutation logicielle, voir "Spécifier les paramètres d'activation du logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil)" à la page 8-11. 6 Spécifier les paramètres appropriés dans l'onglet Qualité & réduc. conformément au document à envoyer. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier la qualité de numérisation et le taux zoom" à la page 3-12. 7 Spécifier les paramètres nécessaires dans l'onglet Menu. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, spécifiez les paramètres nécessaires sur l'onglet de Menu FAX. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier des fonctions supplémentaires." à la page 3-16. 8 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ]. Télécopie par adresse IP 3 bizhub 362/282/222 3-9 3.2 Entrer une adresse L'adresse d'un destinataire non enregistré dans un bouton de numérotation 1-touche peut être entrée directement afin d'être spécifiée. 2 Remarque Si des paramètres de commutation logicielle avaient été spécifiés pour limiter la numérotation, il n'est pas possible d'envoyer un fax en tapant directement l'adresse. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres de commutation logicielle, voir "Spécifier les paramètres d'activation du logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil)" à la page 8-11. Pour entrer une adresse 1 Placez les documents à numériser. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Fax/Scanner]. 3 Appuyez sur [Entrée adresse]. 4 Sélectionnez le mode de communication. Appuyez sur [Changer mode comm.]. 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3-10 bizhub 362/282/222 5 Appuyez sur [FaxInternet], ensuite sur [IP-TX] et sur [Entrée]. 6 Tapez l'adresse IP de la machine du destinataire. – Si un serveur DNS est spécifié à l'écran Paramètres réseau, il est possible d'entrer le nom de l'hôte. Appuyez sur [Hôte], puis entrez le nom de l'hôte – Pour changer l'adresse qui a été entrée, appuyez sur la touche [C] (effacer), et entrez l'adresse correcte. 7 Pour sélectionner le volume d'émission maximum et la méthode de codage, appuyez sur [Mode email]. 8 Sur l'écran Mode email, les paramètres qui peuvent être spécifiés sont les suivants. Sélectionnez les paramètres souhaités, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Taille Emission (max.) : spécifiez le format de document maximum pouvant être émis. Sélectionnez "Letter/Legal" or "11 × 17". – Qualité Emission (max.) : sélectionnez la résolution maximum pouvant être envoyée. Sélectionnez "200 ppp", "400 ppp" ou "600 ppp". – Méthode de codage : sélectionnez la méthode de codage des données à envoyer. Sélectionnez "MH", "MR" ou "MMR". Le volume des données par ordre croissant est le suivant : MMR, MR, MH. Télécopie par adresse IP 3 bizhub 362/282/222 3-11 9 Pour changer le numéro de port, appuyez sur [Port]. – Pour changer le numéro de port, appuyez sur la touche [C] (effacer), puis tapez le numéro du port sur le clavier numérique et appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Pour restaurer le réglage précédent, [Par Défaut]. 10 Spécifier les paramètres appropriés dans l'onglet Qualité & réduc. conformément au document à envoyer. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier la qualité de numérisation et le taux zoom" à la page 3-12. 11 Spécifier les paramètres nécessaires dans l'onglet Menu. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, spécifiez les paramètres nécessaires sur l'onglet de Menu FAX. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier des fonctions supplémentaires." à la page 3-16. 12 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ]. 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3-12 bizhub 362/282/222 3.3 Spécifier la qualité de numérisation et le taux zoom Appuyez sur [Qualité & réduc.] à l'écran qui s'affiche lorsque la touche [Fax/Scanner] est activée pour spécifier la qualité de l'image numérisée et le taux zoom. ! Détails Une fois l'émission terminée, les paramètres d'émission reviennent à leurs valeurs par défaut. Qualité Sélectionner la définition de numérisation (quantité de détails). Parmi les paramètres de définition disponibles, sélectionnez la définition appropriée en fonction du type de document en cours de numérisation. ! Détails Si des données sont envoyées avec le réglage "Texte/Photo", des motifs moirés peuvent apparaître sur certaines photos. Ce n'est pas signe de mauvais fonctionnement. Pour réduire cet effet moiré, envoyez les données avec le réglage "Photo" ou "Super Photo". Si vous aviez sélectionné une haute résolution afin d'envoyer une image claire, il se peut que le format des données image envoyées s'agrandisse et que le fournisseur ou le serveur n'autorise pas l'envoi des données. Vérifiez tout d'abord les restrictions de format concernant les données pouvant être envoyées. Réglage Description Standard Pour les documents contenant du texte normal (comme l'écriture manuscrite) Fin Super Fin Texte 600 dpi Pour les documents comportant des parties imprimées en petits caractères, comme les journaux ou des documents contenant des illustrations détaillées Texte/Photo Texte/Photo 600 dpi Pour les documents contenant du texte et des images avec des nuances de couleur (comme les photos) Photo Super Photo Photo 600 dpi Pour les documents avec des nuances de couleur, comme les photos Télécopie par adresse IP 3 bizhub 362/282/222 3-13 Pour sélectionner un paramètre de qualité 1 Appuyez sur [Qualité & réduc.]. 2 Appuyez sur [Qualité] et ensuite sur le bouton du paramètre de qualité voulu. – Pour sélectionner une résolution plus élevée, appuyez sur [600 dpi]. 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3-14 bizhub 362/282/222 Densité Parmi les paramètres de définition disponibles, sélectionnez la définition appropriée en fonction du type de document en cours de numérisation. Pour sélectionner un paramètre Densité 1 Appuyez sur [Qualité & réduc.]. 2 Appuyez sur [Densité] et ensuite sur le bouton du paramètre de densité voulu. Réglage Description Clair Normal Foncé Pour les documents dont la couleur de fond est sombre, comme le journal et les bleus Pour les documents standard Pour les documents comportant du texte pâle ou de couleur Télécopie par adresse IP 3 bizhub 362/282/222 3-15 Réglage du Format Original Vous pouvez spécifier la zone numérisée comme format standard. De toutes manières, vous pouvez envoyer une portion d'un document grand format ou envoyer un document de format non standard comme format standard. 1 Appuyez sur [Qualité & réduc.]. 2 Appuyez sur [Réduction/Zone] et ensuite sur [Réglage format orig.]. 3 Sélectionnez le format de numérisation voulu et appuyez ensuite sur [Entrée]. – Appuyez sur [DétectAuto] pour sélectionner automatiquement le format le plus proche du format du document. Cependant, si le document est plus petit que le format Letter, c'est le format Letter qui sera sélectionné. 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3-16 bizhub 362/282/222 3.4 Spécifier des fonctions supplémentaires. Appuyez sur [Menu] sur l'écran qui s'affiche lorsque la touche [Fax/Scanner] est activée pour ajouter les fonctions suivantes. 2 Remarque Si le kit Fax en option est installé, le [Menu] passe à [Menu Fax]. Fonction Description Param. 1 *(onglet Param. 1) Identification Sélectionnez les informations, comme le nom, le numéro de fax ou l'adresse de cette machine ou le nom du destinataire, imprimés sur le bord de la page. Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement des informations relatives à l'identifiant, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner réseau]. Si un nom de destinataire est sélectionné, le nom du destinataire enregistré dans le bouton de numérotation 1-Touche est imprimé. Rapport Emission Sélectionnez les conditions d'impression du rapport d'émission. Par défaut : Sélectionnez ce réglage pour que le rapport soit imprimé dans les conditions fixées depuis l'écran Gestion Administrateur. OUI : sélectionnez ce paramètre pour imprimer le rapport quelque soit le résultat de l'émission. En cas d'échec de l'émission : Sélectionnez ce réglage pour n'imprimer le rapport qu'en cas d'échec de l'émission. NON : Sélectionnez ce paramètre pour ne pas imprimer le rapport quelque soit le résultat de l'émission. 2 en 1 Sélectionnez s'il faut ou non envoyer les données à l'aide de la fonction "2en1" (réduire de pages pour qu'elles passent sur une seule page). Emission Recto/Verso Sélectionnez s'il faut procéder ou non à une émission recto/verso. Vous pouvez aussi spécifier la position de la marge de reliure et l'orientation de la page. Emission Rotation Sélectionnez s'il faut oui ou non pivoter l'image numérisée conformément à l'orientation du papier de la machine de réception. Vous pouvez spécifier cette fonction lors de l'envoi dune image au format A4 avec une résolution de 200 dpi ou moins. Télécopie par adresse IP 3 bizhub 362/282/222 3-17 * Passe à ( ) si le kit Fax en option est installé. 2 Remarque Les paramètres et fonctions suivants sont sans effet, même si les réglages en ont été spécifiés. - "Sélection objet" sur l'onglet Réseau - "Adresse de réponse" sur l'onglet Réseau - "Nom fich." sur l'onglet Réseau - "Notification Email" sur l'onglet Réseau Param. 2 *(onglet Param. 2) Emission Priorité Sélectionnez si l'émission des données est ou non prioritaire sur les autres tâches. Param. TX horloge Spécifiez l'heure d'envoi du fax. Tampon Spécifiez si l'image numérisée est tamponnée pour indiquer qu'elle a été numérisée. Le document doit être chargé dans l'introducteur ADF. 2 Remarque Afin d'utiliser la fonction "Tampon", l'unité de pose de tampon en option doit être installée. Fonction Description 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3-18 bizhub 362/282/222 Spécifier les informations sur l'identifiant Sélectionnez les informations, comme le nom, le numéro de fax ou l'adresse de cette machine ou le nom du destinataire, imprimés sur le bord de la page. 1 Appuyez sur [Menu]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX]. 2 Appuyez sur [Identif. EM] sur l'onglet Param. 1. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Identif. EM] sur l'onglet Param. 1. 3 Sélectionnez le type d'impression pour les informations d'émission et appuyez ensuite sur [Sélection Identifiant]. 4 Sélectionnez l'identifiant, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. DE : NEWYORK Des données d'image ont été jointes à l'e-mail. Télécopie par adresse IP 3 bizhub 362/282/222 3-19 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3-20 bizhub 362/282/222 Spécifier la condition d'impression du rapport d'émission Vous pouvez spécifier le conditions d'impression du rapport du résultat d'émission. Les conditions d'impression du rapport du résultat d'émission sont prédéfinies par les réglages de "Paramètres de rapport" de l'écran de Gestion "Administrateur" 1. Suivez la procédure décrite ci-dessous pour changer ces conditions. 1 Appuyez sur [Menu]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX]. 2 Appuyez sur [Rapport EM] sur l'onglet Param. 1 – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Rapport EM] sur l'onglet Param. 1. 3 Spécifiez la condition d'impression souhaitée, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. Télécopie par adresse IP 3 bizhub 362/282/222 3-21 Spécifier une émission 2en1 1 Appuyez sur [Menu]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX]. 2 Appuyez sur [2en1] sur l'onglet Param. 1. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [2en1] sur l'onglet Param. 1. Le bouton s'affiche en vidéo inverse. Pour annuler la fonction, appuyez à nouveau sur le bouton pour le désélectionner. 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3-22 bizhub 362/282/222 Spécifier les paramètres d'émission recto-verso 1 Appuyez sur [Menu]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX]. 2 Appuyez sur [Emiss. R/V] sur l'onglet Param. 1. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Emiss. R/V] sur l'onglet Param. 1. 3 Sélectionnez la marge originale appropriée. – ReliéGauche : le document est numérisé avec une marge de reliure sur le côté gauche. – ReliéHaut : le document est numérisé avec une marge de reliure en haut. – Auto : La marge de reliure est réglée en fonction du sens de numérisation. 4 Appuyez sur [Sens Original]. 5 Sélectionnez l'orientation du document et appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Auto : Le bord long du document est automatiquement configuré comme position de reliure. 6 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Pour annuler la fonction, appuyez sur [Annul.]. ! Détails En cas de chargement d'un document recto-verso comportant des pages de différentes largeurs, nous recommandons de charger les pages d'orientation identique. Lors de la numérisation d'un document avec des pages d'orientations différentes, l'orientation des données d'image peut être erronée. Télécopie par adresse IP 3 bizhub 362/282/222 3-23 Spécifier la priorité d'émission 1 Appuyez sur [Menu]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX]. 2 Appuyez sur [Priorité EM] sur l'onglet Param. 2. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Priorité EM] sur l'onglet Param. 2. Le bouton s'affiche en vidéo inverse. Pour annuler la fonction, appuyez à nouveau sur le bouton pour le désélectionner. Spécifier les paramètres d'émission horloge 1 Appuyez sur [Menu]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX]. 2 Appuyez sur [Param. TX horloge] sur l'onglet Param. 2. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Param. TX horloge] sur l'onglet Param. 2. 3 Spécifiez l'heure d'envoi de l'émission. – Appuyez sur [Heure] ou [Minute], et tapez sur le clavier numérique l'heure désirée. 4 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Pour annuler la fonction, appuyez sur [NON]. 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3-24 bizhub 362/282/222 2 Remarque Il est possible de spécifier jusqu'à 200 documents avec une émission horloge. Télécopie par adresse IP 3 bizhub 362/282/222 3-25 Spécifier le paramètre Tampon 1 Appuyez sur [Menu]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX]. 2 Appuyez sur [Tampon] sur l'onglet Param. 2. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Tampon] sur l'onglet Param. 2. 3 Sélectionnez la position du tamponnage, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3-26 bizhub 362/282/222 3.5 Si l'émission n'est pas arrivée à son terme Si l'émission ne s'est pas achevée correctement, un rapport du résultat de l'émission est imprimé. ! Détails Vous pouvez modifier le paramètre d'impression du rapport d'émission. Pour plus de détails, voir le guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner Réseau]. Consulter le rapport d'émission No. Rubrique Description 1 Date d'émission du rapport Montre la date d'émission du rapport. 2 Nom de l'identifiant Indique le nom et l'adresse de l'identifiant. 3 Informa tion sur l'émission Montre le numéro du document émis, la durée requise et le mode de communication. 2 4 1 3 5 Rouleau Télécopie par adresse IP 3 bizhub 362/282/222 3-27 Réexpédition 20 documents au maximum n'ayant pas pu être envoyés sont enregistrés pour une nouvelle tentative. 1 Appuyez sur [Liste Tâches], puis [Type], et sélectionnez le document qui n'a pas pu être envoyé. – Si [Réessayer] ou [Changer Destination] apparaissent à l'écran, le document peut être envoyé une nouvelle fois sans qu'une nouvelle numérisation ne s'impose. 2 Pour envoyer le document au même destinataire, appuyez sur [Réessayer]. – Pour envoyer le document à un destinataire différent, appuyez sur [Changer Destination]. 4 Résultats d'émission Indique les résultats de l'émission. L'une des informations suivantes peut s'afficher. OK : l'émission s'est déroulée avec succès. INTERR : l'émission a été interrompue. F.MEM : la mémoire est pleine. NG : l'émission s'est soldée par un échec. PT.DEL : l'émission vers certains destinataires a échoué. F.DATA : le volume des données a dépassé la limite admissible. IMG NG : la résolution d'émission était incorrecte et l'émission a donc été interrompue. Code d'erreur : pour plus de détails, voir "Codes d'erreur" à la page 9-4. 5 Image transmise Reproduit une partie de l'image émise. No. Rubrique Description 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3-28 bizhub 362/282/222 3.6 Recevoir une télécopie par adresse IP Si une télécopie par adresse IP est envoyée à cette machine, la réception et l'impression en sont automatiques. Il faut tout d'abord spécifier l'adresse IP de cette machine sur l'écran Paramètres réseau. ! Détails La méthode de réception spécifiée sur l'écran Paramètres fax (affiché depuis l'écran Gestion administrateur 1) ne s'applique que si la télécopie est reçue par le biais d'une ligne téléphonique ordinaire. Ce paramètre ne s'applique pas dans le cas de la réception d'une télécopie par adresse IP. Télécopie par adresse IP 3 bizhub 362/282/222 3-29 3.7 Ajouter un destinataire Si un destinataire est enregistré avec un bouton de numérotation 1-touche, l'émission peut être envoyée facilement et avec précision. Deux types de destinataires peuvent être enregistrées sous un bouton de numérotation 1-touche : un destinataire principal et un destinataire secondaire, les données étant envoyées à cette dernière en cas d'échec de l'émission au destinataire principal. 2 Remarque Si le paramètre "Limiter Edition 1-Touche" de l'écran Mode Administrateur (affiché à partir de l'écran de Gestion administrateur 1) est réglé sur "Oui", si des paramètres de commutation logicielle avaient été spécifiés pour limiter l'enregistrement de boutons de numérotation 1-Touche à l'administrateur, ou si "Sécurité renforcée" est réglé sur "Oui", les boutons de numérotation 1-Touche peuvent seulement être enregistrés, édités ou supprimés en mode Administrateur. Pour plus de détails sur les réglages en mode Administrateur, se référer au guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Fax]. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres de commutation logicielle, voir "Spécifier les paramètres d'activation du logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil)" à la page 8-11. ! Détails Les modes de communication suivants peuvent être spécifiés pour la destination secondaire. - PC (E-mail) - PC (Scanner) - Internet FAX (Internet FAX) - Internet FAX (EM-IP) - Internet FAX (Relais IP) - FAX (G3) Le mode de communication peut être spécifié si le kit Fax, en option, est installé. 2 Remarque Certains modes de communication risquent de ne pas être disponibles, selon les réglages de la machine. Pour plus de détails, consultez l'administrateur. 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3-30 bizhub 362/282/222 Vous pouvez spécifier les paramètres suivants. 2 Rappel Si la touche [Utilitaire/Compteur] est actionnée pour enregistrer des éléments et spécifier des paramètres, n'oubliez pas d'appuyer sur la touche [Réinitialisation] sur le panneau de contrôle après être retourné à l'écran d'accueil. Rubrique Description Nom destination à distance Tapez le nom du destinataire censé figurer sur le bouton de numérotation 1-Touche. Ce champ peut comporter 12 caractères maximum. Destination Saisissez l'adresse IP ou le nom d'hôte du destinataire. Taille Emission (max.) Spécifiez la taille maximum du document qui peut être émis. Sélectionnez "Letter/Legal" ou "11 e 17". Qualité Emission (max.) Sélectionnez la résolution maximum pour l'émission. Sélectionnez "200 ppp", "400 ppp" ou "600 ppp". Méthode de codage Sélectionnez la méthode de codage des données à envoyer. Sélectionnez "MH", "MR" ou "MMR". Le volume des données par ordre croissant est le suivant : MMR, MR, MH. Port Entrez le numéro du port (entre 1 et 65535). Télécopie par adresse IP 3 bizhub 362/282/222 3-31 Pour programmer un bouton de numérotation 1-touche 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaire/Compteur]. 2 Appuyez sur [Paramètres Utilis.]. 3 Appuyez sur [Entrée E-mail]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [FAX]. 4 Appuyez sur [1-Touche]. 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3-32 bizhub 362/282/222 5 Appuyez sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche à programmer. – Appuyez sur un onglet d'index ou sur [Répertoire] et appuyez ensuite sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche souhaité. – Si l'appareil est réglé pour autoriser les recherches LDAP, un écran s'affiche pour permettre la définition du bouton 1-Touche pour interdire ou autoriser la possibilité de découverte de l'adresse par une recherche LDAP. Pour ce bouton, sélectionnez "Non". 6 Tapez le nom du destinataire qui apparaîtra sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche, et appuyez sur [Suite]. 7 Sélectionnez le mode de communication. Appuyez sur [FaxInternet], ensuite sur [IP-TX] et sur [Suite]. 8 Tapez l'adresse IP du destinataire. – Si un serveur DNS est spécifié à l'écran Paramètres réseau, il est possible d'entrer le nom de l'hôte. Appuyez sur [Nom Host], puis entrez le nom de l'hôte. – Pour changer l'adresse qui a été entrée, appuyez sur la touche [C] (effacer), et entrez l'adresse correcte. Télécopie par adresse IP 3 bizhub 362/282/222 3-33 9 Pour sélectionner le volume d'émission maximum et la méthode de codage, appuyez sur [Mode e-mail]. 10 Sur l'écran mode E-mail, les paramètres qui peuvent être spécifiés sont les suivants. Sélectionnez les paramètres souhaités, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Taille Emission (max.) : spécifiez le format de document maximum pouvant être émis. Sélectionnez "Letter/Legal" ou "11 e 17". – Qualité Emission (max.) : sélectionnez la résolution maximum pouvant être envoyée. Sélectionnez "200 ppp", "400 ppp" ou "600 ppp". – Méthode de codage : sélectionnez la méthode de codage des données à envoyer. Sélectionnez "MH", "MR" ou "MMR". Le volume des données par ordre croissant est le suivant : MMR, MR, MH. 11 Pour changer le numéro de port, appuyez sur [Port]. – Pour changer le numéro de port, appuyez sur la touche [C] (effacer), puis tapez le numéro du port sur le clavier numérique et appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Pour restaurer le réglage précédent, [Par Défaut]. 12 Appuyez sur [Suite]. 13 Vérifiez les informations à enregistrer, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. 14 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran d'accueil s'affiche. 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3-34 bizhub 362/282/222 Changer/supprimer un bouton de numérotation 1-touche 1 Exécutez les étapes 1 à 4 de la procédure décrite dans "Pour programmer un bouton 1-touche". 2 Appuyez sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche que vous voulez modifier ou supprimer. 3 Appuyez sur le bouton dont vous voulez changer le réglage, puis procédez à la modification. – Pour supprimer le bouton de numérotation 1-touche, appuyez sur la touche [Supprime]. 4 Vérifiez les informations à enregistrer, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. – En cas de suppression, un message de confirmation s'affiche. Appuyez sur [Oui]. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran d'accueil s'affiche. Télécopie par adresse IP 3 bizhub 362/282/222 3-35 Copier un bouton 1-touche 1 Exécutez les étapes 1 à 4 de la procédure décrite dans "Pour programmer un bouton 1-touche". 2 Appuyez sur le bouton du destinataire 1-Touche à copier. 3 Appuyez sur [1-Touche] et ensuite sur [Copie 1-Touche]. 4 Appuyez sur le bouton sous lequel les paramètres de bouton de numérotation 1-touche sont censés être copiés. – Sélectionnez un bouton de numérotation 1-touche ne comportant encore aucun paramètre enregistré. – Pour désélectionner le bouton 1-touche de destination pour la copie, il suffit d'appuyer une nouvelle fois sur le bouton sélectionné. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran d'accueil s'affiche. 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3-36 bizhub 362/282/222 Enregistrer/Editer/Supprimer le destinataire secondaire 1 Exécutez les étapes 1 à 4 de la procédure décrite dans "Pour programmer un bouton 1-touche". 2 Appuyez sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche sur lequel un destinataire secondaire est censé être programmé. 3 Appuyez sur [1-Touche], puis [Enregistrement adresse secondaire]. 4 Entrez les informations relatives au destinataire secondaire, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Si une destination secondaire est déjà enregistrée, vérifiez les paramètres qui s'affichent et appuyez ensuite sur [Changer Paramètres] ou sur [Supprime]. – En cas de suppression, un message de confirmation s'affiche. Appuyez sur [Oui]. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran d'accueil s'affiche. Télécopie par adresse IP 3 bizhub 362/282/222 3-37 Donner un nom à un index Pour faciliter la recherche du bouton de numérotation 1-touche désiré, vous pouvez classer les boutons de numérotation 1-touche dans des index que vous appellerez par exemple, "Bureaux" ou "Clients". ! Détails Le nom d'index entré peut contenir huit caractères au maximum. Il est possible d'enregistrer 36 index et 15 boutons de numérotation 1-touche au maximum dans chaque index. Pour nommer un index 1 Exécutez les étapes 1 à 3 de la procédure décrite dans "Pour programmer un bouton 1-touche". 2 Appuyez sur [Index]. 3 Appuyez sur le bouton d'index à programmer. 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3-38 bizhub 362/282/222 4 Tapez le nom d'index, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran d'accueil s'affiche. Télécopie par adresse IP 3 bizhub 362/282/222 3-39 Enregistrer un programme de courrier électronique Si les fonctions utilisées lors de l'émission sont enregistrées avec les informations relatives au destinataire, une émission peut avoir lieu avec les paramètres enregistrés en appuyant tout simplement sur un bouton. C'est ce que l'on appelle programmes de courrier électronique. Ceux-ci sont pratiques quand il s'agit d'envoyer une émission à un destinataire spécifique et avec des paramètres spécifiques. ! Détails Il est possible d'enregistrer jusqu'à 30 programmes mail. Cependant, le nombre total de boutons de numérotation 1-touche et de programmes de courrier électronique est limité à 540. Il est possible d'enregistrer jusqu'à 300 destinataires avec un seul programme de courrier électronique. Certaines fonctions ou paramètres enregistrés dans un programme de courrier électronique peuvent être sans effet en fonction de l'opération effectuée, comme l'illustre le tableau ci-dessous. Pour plus de détails sur chaque fonction et paramètre, voir la page appropriée. o : A un effet + : A un effet sous certaines conditions - : N'a aucun effet Fonctionnement Fonction/Paramètre Télécopie par adresse IP Scan vers PC Relais IP Qualité o o o Densité o o o Zoom - - - Réglage du Format Original o o o Sélection Identification o - o Rapport EM o o o 2en1 o o o Emiss. R/V o o o Emission Rotation + - + Priorité EM o o o Param. TX horloge o o o Tampon + + + Sélection Objet - - - Adresse E-mail de réponse - - - Nom du fichier - o - Notification email - - - 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3-40 bizhub 362/282/222 ! Détails Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres des opérations suivantes, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner réseau]. - Scan vers Email - Scan vers FTP - Scan vers SMB - Scan vers HDD - Fax Internet 2 Remarque Afin d'utiliser la fonction "Tampon", l'unité de pose de tampon en option doit être installée. 2 Rappel Si la touche [Utilitaire/Compteur] est actionnée pour enregistrer des éléments et spécifier des paramètres, n'oubliez pas d'appuyer sur la touche [Réinitialisation] sur le panneau de contrôle après être retourné à l'écran d'accueil. Télécopie par adresse IP 3 bizhub 362/282/222 3-41 Pour enregistrer une Programme E-mail 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaire/Compteur]. 2 Appuyez sur [Paramètres Utilis.]. 3 Appuyez sur [Entrée E-mail]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [FAX]. 4 Appuyez sur [Prog. Mail]. – Si le kit Fax en option, a été installé, appuyez sur [Prog. FAX]. 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3-42 bizhub 362/282/222 5 Appuyez sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche à programmer. – Appuyez sur un onglet d'index ou sur [Répertoire] et appuyez ensuite sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche souhaité. 6 Tapez le programme qui apparaîtra sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche, et appuyez sur [Suite]. – Le nom de programme peut comporter jusqu'à 12 caractères. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Suite] pour afficher un écran et y sélectionner un programme. Sélectionnez le programme désiré et appuyez sur [Suite]. 7 Spécifiez de destinataire. – Pour spécifier un destinataire avec un bouton de numérotation 1-touche, appuyez sur [1-Touche], appuyez sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche pour sélectionner un destinataire, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Pour rechercher un bouton 1-touche, appuyez sur [Recherche], spécifiez le destinataire, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Si aucun destinataire n'est à enregistrer, appuyez sur [Aucune destination]. 8 Appuyez sur [Suite]. Télécopie par adresse IP 3 bizhub 362/282/222 3-43 9 Appuyez sur [Param.Transmission]. 10 Spécifiez les fonctions à enregistrer. – Appuyez sur [Qualité] pour spécifier les paramètres de "Qualité", "Densité", "Zoom" et "Réglage format orig.". – Appuyez sur [Menu 1] pour spécifier les paramètres pour "Identif. EM", "Rapport EM", "Priorité EM", "Param. TX horloge", "2en1", "Emiss. R/V", "Rotation EM" et "Tampon". – Appuyez sur [Menu 2] pour spécifier les paramètres "Objet", "Adresse E-mail de réponse", "Nom fich.", et "Notification E-mail". 11 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. 12 Vérifiez les informations à enregistrer, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. 13 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran d'accueil s'affiche. 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3-44 bizhub 362/282/222 Changer/Effacer un Programme E-mail 1 Exécutez les étapes 1 à 4 de la procédure décrite dans "Enregistrer un programme de courrier électronique". 2 Appuyez sur le bouton 1-touche du programme de courrier électronique que vous voulez modifier ou supprimer. – Appuyez sur un onglet d'index ou sur [Répertoire] et appuyez ensuite sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche souhaité. 3 Appuyez sur le bouton dont vous voulez changer le réglage, puis procédez à la modification. Pour effacer le Programme E-mail, appuyez sur [Supprime]. 4 Vérifiez les informations à enregistrer, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. – En cas de suppression, un message de confirmation s'affiche. Appuyez sur [Oui]. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran d'accueil s'affiche. 4 Opérations Scan vers PC Opérations Scan vers PC 4 bizhub 362/282/222 4-3 4 Opérations Scan vers PC 4.1 Avant d'enregistrer Exécutez les opérations suivantes avant d'utiliser la fonction Scan vers PC. Installer Scanner IP Scanner sur l'ordinateur Lorsque Scanner IP est installé, deux utilitaires (scanner IP et ImageReceiver) sont installés. Lorsque vous redémarrez l'ordinateur après l'installation des utilitaires, ImageReceiver est lancé automatiquement et son icône s'affiche dans la barre des tâches de Windows. Lors de l'exécution d'une opération Scan vers PC, assurez-vous que ImageReceiver a démarré normalement. L'icône du ImageReceiver s'affiche dans la barre des tâches de Windows pendant son exécution. ! Détails Si ImageReceiver ne démarre pas, cliquez sur "Démarrer" pour le lancer, allez sur "Programmes" (ou "Tous les programmes"), ensuite "Scanner IP" et cliquez ensuite sur "ImageReceiver". Vérifier les paramètres réseau S'il existe un serveur DHCP faisant partie du réseau, il se peut que les données ne soient pas envoyées correctement étant donné que les adresses IP sont automatiquement assignées à chaque ordinateur. Si tel est le cas, spécifiez une adresse IP fixe pour l'ordinateur, ou alors utiliser Scanner IP. ! Détails Pour plus de détails sur l'installation et l'utilisation du scanner IP et la vérification de l'image numérisée, voir chapitre 5 "Scanner IP" à la page 5-3. 4 Opérations Scan vers PC 4-4 bizhub 362/282/222 4.2 Spécifier une destination avec un bouton de numérotation 1-touche Si l'adresse IP d'un ordinateur est enregistrée à l'aide d'un bouton de numérotation 1-touche, les données peuvent être enregistrées sur l'ordinateur en appuyant simplement sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche. Qui plus est, il est possible d'ajouter d'autres fonctions d'émission ou d'enregistrer un programme de courrier électronique. ! Détails Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'un bouton de numérotation 1-touche, voir "Enregistrer une destination" à la page 4-30. Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'un programme de courrier électronique, voir "Enregistrer un programme de courrier électronique" à la page 3-39. Sélectionner un bouton une touche Voici les différentes manières de sélectionner un bouton de numérotation 1-touche. Utilisez la méthode appropriée selon le nombre de destinations et l'utilisation souhaitée. - Pression directe sur le bouton 1-touche - Saisir le numéro du bouton 1-touche - Chercher le nom de la destination Opérations Scan vers PC 4 bizhub 362/282/222 4-5 Spécifier un destinataire en appuyant sur un bouton de numérotation 1-touche 1 Placez les documents à numériser. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Fax/Scanner]. – L'écran qui s'affiche après l'activation de la touche [Fax/Scanner] peut être spécifié à l'aide du paramètre "Ecran par défaut" de l'écran Choix utilisateur. Pour plus de détails, consulter le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Copie]. 3 Appuyez sur [1-touche]. 4 Sélectionnez l'index contenant le destinataire souhaité et appuyez sur le bouton de numérotation 1-Touche. – Pour sélectionner un index, appuyer sur l'onglet de l'index souhaité ou appuyez sur ou pour sélectionner un autre onglet. – Pour plus de détails sur la modification des noms d'index, voir "Donner un nom à un index" à la page 3-37. – Avec le même bouton de numérotation 1-touche, vous pouvez spécifier plusieurs destinataires pour une émission simultanée. Il est possible de spécifier 300 destinataires au maximum à l'aide d'un seul bouton de numérotation 1-touche. – Si des paramètres de commutation logicielle avaient été spécifiés pour empêcher les radiodiffusions, un fax ne peut pas être envoyé à plusieurs destinataires. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres de commutation logicielle, voir "Spécifier les paramètres d'activation du logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil)" à la page 8-11. 4 Opérations Scan vers PC 4-6 bizhub 362/282/222 5 Spécifier les paramètres appropriés dans l'onglet Qualité & réduc. conformément au document à envoyer. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier la qualité de numérisation et le taux zoom" à la page 4-14. 6 Spécifier les paramètres nécessaires dans l'onglet Menu. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, spécifiez les paramètres nécessaires sur l'onglet de Menu FAX. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier des fonctions supplémentaires." à la page 4-18. 7 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ]. Opérations Scan vers PC 4 bizhub 362/282/222 4-7 Saisir le numéro du bouton 1-touche Un numéro est assigné à chaque bouton de numérotation 1-touche, comme illustré ci-dessous. Au lieu d'appuyer sur un bouton de numérotation 1-touche, la spécification du numéro du bouton de numérotation 1-touche permet de sélectionner rapidement un destinataire. 1 Placez les documents à numériser. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Fax/Scanner]. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [#] sur le panneau de contrôle. Index 1 Index 36 4 Opérations Scan vers PC 4-8 bizhub 362/282/222 4 Entrer le numéro du bouton de numérotation 1-touche sur le clavier numérique. – Le bouton 1-touche spécifié s'affiche en vidéo inverse. – Avec le même bouton de numérotation 1-touche, vous pouvez spécifier plusieurs destinataires pour une émission simultanée. Il est possible de spécifier 300 destinataires au maximum à l'aide d'un seul bouton de numérotation 1-touche. – Si des paramètres de commutation logicielle avaient été spécifiés pour empêcher les radiodiffusions, un fax ne peut pas être envoyé à plusieurs destinataires. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres de commutation logicielle, voir "Spécifier les paramètres d'activation du logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil)" à la page 8-11. 5 Spécifier les paramètres appropriés dans l'onglet Qualité & réduc. conformément au document à envoyer. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier la qualité de numérisation et le taux zoom" à la page 4-14. 6 Spécifier les paramètres nécessaires dans l'onglet Menu. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, spécifiez les paramètres nécessaires sur l'onglet de Menu FAX. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier des fonctions supplémentaires." à la page 4-18. 7 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ]. Opérations Scan vers PC 4 bizhub 362/282/222 4-9 Recherche d'un destinataire une touche Il est possible de rechercher le nom d'un destinataire enregistré à l'aide d'un bouton de numérotation 1-touche dans le but de sélectionner le bouton de numérotation 1-touche. 1 Placez les documents à numériser. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Fax/Scanner]. 3 Appuyez sur [Recherche]. – Si une recherche LDAP est possible, appuyez sur [Recherche LDAP] pour chercher plus loin. 4 Tapez le nom du destinataire, puis appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran qui s'affiche renferme la liste des boutons de numérotation 1-touche programmés avec le destinataire dont le nom commence par le nom entré. 5 Appuyer sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche souhaité pour le sélectionner. – Avec le même bouton de numérotation 1-touche, vous pouvez spécifier plusieurs destinataires pour une émission simultanée. Il est possible de spécifier 300 destinataires au maximum à l'aide d'un seul bouton de numérotation 1-touche. 4 Opérations Scan vers PC 4-10 bizhub 362/282/222 – Si des paramètres de commutation logicielle avaient été spécifiés pour empêcher les radiodiffusions, un fax ne peut pas être envoyé à plusieurs destinataires. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres de commutation logicielle, voir "Spécifier les paramètres d'activation du logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil)" à la page 8-11. 6 Spécifier les paramètres appropriés dans l'onglet Qualité & réduc. conformément au document à envoyer. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier la qualité de numérisation et le taux zoom" à la page 4-14. 7 Spécifier les paramètres nécessaires dans l'onglet Menu. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, spécifiez les paramètres nécessaires sur l'onglet de Menu FAX. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier des fonctions supplémentaires." à la page 4-18. 8 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ]. Opérations Scan vers PC 4 bizhub 362/282/222 4-11 4.3 Entrer une adresse L'adresse d'un destinataire non enregistré dans un bouton de numérotation 1-touche peut être entrée directement afin d'être spécifiée. 2 Remarque Si des paramètres de commutation logicielle avaient été spécifiés pour limiter la numérotation, il n'est pas possible d'enregistrer des données en tapant directement l'adresse. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres de commutation logicielle, voir "Spécifier les paramètres d'activation du logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil)" à la page 8-11. Pour entrer une adresse 1 Placez les documents à numériser. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Fax/Scanner]. 3 Appuyez sur [Entrée adresse]. 4 Sélectionnez le mode de communication. Appuyez sur [Changer mode comm]. 4 Opérations Scan vers PC 4-12 bizhub 362/282/222 5 Appuyez sur [PC], ensuite sur [Scanner] et sur [Entrée]. 6 Tapez l'adresse IP de la machine où les données doivent être enregistrées. – Si un serveur DNS est spécifié à l'écran Paramètres réseau, il est possible d'entrer le nom de l'hôte. Appuyez sur [Hôte], puis entrez le nom de l'hôte – Pour changer l'adresse qui a été entrée, appuyez sur la touche [C] (effacer), et entrez l'adresse correcte. 7 Pour sélectionner le format de fichier et la méthode de codage, appuyez sur [Mode Scan]. 8 Sur l'écran Mode numérisation, les paramètres qui peuvent être spécifiés sont les suivants. Sélectionnez les paramètres souhaités, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Type de fichier: sélectionnez soit "TIFF" soit "PDF". – Méthode de codage Sélectionnez la méthode de codage ("MH", MR ou "MMR") des données à envoyer. La quantité des données est moindre avec la méthode de codage MMR qu'avec la méthode MH. Opérations Scan vers PC 4 bizhub 362/282/222 4-13 9 Pour changer le numéro de port, appuyez sur [Port]. – Pour changer le numéro de port, appuyez sur la touche [C] (effacer), puis tapez le numéro du port sur le clavier numérique et appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Pour restaurer le réglage précédent, [Par Défaut]. 10 Spécifier les paramètres appropriés dans l'onglet Qualité & réduc. conformément au document à envoyer. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier la qualité de numérisation et le taux zoom" à la page 4-14. 11 Spécifier les paramètres nécessaires dans l'onglet Menu. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, spécifiez les paramètres nécessaires sur l'onglet de Menu FAX. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier des fonctions supplémentaires." à la page 4-18. 12 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ]. 4 Opérations Scan vers PC 4-14 bizhub 362/282/222 4.4 Spécifier la qualité de numérisation et le taux zoom Appuyez sur [Qualité & réduc.] à l'écran qui s'affiche lorsque la touche [Fax/Scanner] est activée pour spécifier la qualité de l'image numérisée et le taux zoom. ! Détails Une fois l'émission terminée, les paramètres d'émission reviennent à leurs valeurs par défaut. Qualité Sélectionner la définition de numérisation (quantité de détails). Parmi les paramètres de définition disponibles, sélectionnez la définition appropriée en fonction du type de document en cours de numérisation. ! Détails Si des données sont envoyées avec le réglage "Texte/Photo", des motifs moirés peuvent apparaître sur certaines photos. Ce n'est pas signe de mauvais fonctionnement. Pour réduire cet effet moiré, envoyez les données avec le réglage "Photo" ou "Super Photo". Si vous aviez sélectionné une haute résolution afin d'envoyer une image claire, il se peut que le format des données image envoyées s'agrandisse et que le fournisseur ou le serveur n'autorise pas l'envoi des données. Vérifiez tout d'abord les restrictions de format concernant les données pouvant être envoyées. Réglage Description Standard Pour les documents contenant du texte normal (comme l'écriture manuscrite) Fin Super Fin Texte 600 dpi Pour les documents comportant des parties imprimées en petits caractères, comme les journaux ou des documents contenant des illustrations détaillées Texte/Photo Texte/Photo 600 dpi Pour les documents contenant du texte et des images avec des nuances de couleur (comme les photos) Photo Super Photo Photo 600 dpi Pour les documents avec des nuances de couleur, comme les photos Opérations Scan vers PC 4 bizhub 362/282/222 4-15 Pour sélectionner un paramètre de qualité 1 Appuyez sur [Qualité & réduc.]. 2 Appuyez sur [Qualité] et ensuite sur le bouton du paramètre de qualité voulu. – Pour sélectionner une résolution plus élevée, appuyez sur [600 dpi]. 4 Opérations Scan vers PC 4-16 bizhub 362/282/222 Densité Parmi les paramètres de définition disponibles, sélectionnez la définition appropriée en fonction du type de document en cours de numérisation. ! Détails Si vous sélectionnez "Texte 600 dpi" ou "Texte & Photo 600 dpi", vous pouvez régler la densité sur l'un des trois niveaux suivants : "Clair", "Normal", ou "Foncé". Pour sélectionner un paramètre Densité 1 Appuyez sur [Qualité & réduc.]. 2 Appuyez sur [Densité] et ensuite sur le bouton du paramètre de densité voulu. Réglage Description Clair Normal Foncé Pour les documents dont la couleur de fond est sombre, comme le journal et les bleus Pour les documents standard Pour les documents comportant du texte pâle ou de couleur Opérations Scan vers PC 4 bizhub 362/282/222 4-17 Réglage du Format Original Vous pouvez spécifier la zone numérisée comme format standard. De toutes manières, vous pouvez envoyer une portion d'un document grand format ou envoyer un document de format non standard comme format standard. 1 Appuyez sur [Qualité & réduc.]. 2 Appuyez sur [Réduction/Zone] et ensuite sur [Réglage format orig.]. 3 Sélectionnez le format de numérisation voulu et appuyez ensuite sur [Entrée]. – Appuyez sur [DétectAuto] pour sélectionner automatiquement le format le plus proche du format du document. Cependant, si le document est plus petit que le format Letter, c'est le format Letter qui sera sélectionné. 4 Opérations Scan vers PC 4-18 bizhub 362/282/222 4.5 Spécifier des fonctions supplémentaires. Appuyez sur [Menu] sur l'écran qui s'affiche lorsque la touche [Fax/Scanner] est activée pour ajouter les fonctions suivantes. 2 Remarque Si le kit Fax en option est installé, le [Menu] passe à [Menu Fax]. * Passe à ( ) si le kit Fax en option est installé. Fonction Description Param. 1 *(onglet Param. 1) Rapport Emission Sélectionnez les conditions d'impression du rapport d'émission. Par défaut : Sélectionnez ce réglage pour que le rapport soit imprimé dans les conditions fixées depuis l'écran Gestion Administrateur. OUI : sélectionnez ce paramètre pour imprimer le rapport quelque soit le résultat de l'émission. En cas d'échec de l'émission : Sélectionnez ce réglage pour n'imprimer le rapport qu'en cas d'échec de l'émission. NON : Sélectionnez ce paramètre pour ne pas imprimer le rapport quelque soit le résultat de l'émission. 2 en 1 Sélectionnez s'il faut ou non envoyer les données à l'aide de la fonction "2en1" (réduire de pages pour qu'elles passent sur une seule page). Emission Recto/Verso Sélectionnez s'il faut procéder ou non à une émission recto/verso. Vous pouvez aussi spécifier la position de la marge de reliure et l'orientation de la page. Param. 2 *(onglet Param. 2) Emission Priorité Sélectionnez si l'émission des données est ou non prioritaire sur les autres tâches. Param. TX horloge Spécifiez l'heure d'envoi du fax. Tampon Spécifiez si l'image numérisée est tamponnée pour indiquer qu'elle a été numérisée. Le document doit être chargé dans l'introducteur ADF. 2 Remarque Afin d'utiliser la fonction "Tampon", l'unité de pose de tampon en option doit être installée. Réseau *(Rés.) Nom du fichier Vous pouvez spécifier le nom du fichier de données enregistré. Ce champ peut comporter 16 caractères maximum. Opérations Scan vers PC 4 bizhub 362/282/222 4-19 2 Remarque Les paramètres et fonctions suivants sont sans effet, même si les réglages en ont été spécifiés. - "Identif. EM" sur l'onglet Param. 1 - "Rotation Em" sur l'onglet Param. 1 - "Sélection objet" sur l'onglet Réseau - "Adresse de réponse" sur l'onglet Réseau - "Notification Email" sur l'onglet Réseau 4 Opérations Scan vers PC 4-20 bizhub 362/282/222 Spécifier la condition d'impression du rapport d'émission Vous pouvez spécifier le conditions d'impression du rapport du résultat d'émission. Les conditions d'impression du rapport du résultat d'émission sont prédéfinies par les réglages de "Paramètres de rapport" de l'écran de Gestion "Administrateur" 1. Suivez la procédure décrite ci-dessous pour changer ces conditions. 1 Appuyez sur [Menu]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX]. 2 Appuyez sur [Rapport EM] sur l'onglet Param. 1 – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Rapport EM] sur l'onglet Param. 1. 3 Spécifiez la condition d'impression souhaitée, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. Opérations Scan vers PC 4 bizhub 362/282/222 4-21 Spécifier une émission 2en1 1 Appuyez sur [Menu]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX]. 2 Appuyez sur [2en1] sur l'onglet Param. 1. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [2en1] sur l'onglet Param. 1. Le bouton s'affiche en vidéo inverse. Pour annuler la fonction, appuyez à nouveau sur le bouton pour le désélectionner. 4 Opérations Scan vers PC 4-22 bizhub 362/282/222 Spécifier les paramètres d'émission recto-verso 1 Appuyez sur [Menu]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX]. 2 Appuyez sur [Emiss. R/V] sur l'onglet Param. 1. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Emiss. R/V] sur l'onglet Param. 1. 3 Sélectionnez la marge originale appropriée. – ReliéGauche : Le document est numérisé avec une marge de reliure sur le côté gauche. – ReliéHaut :Le document est numérisé avec une marge de reliure en haut. – Auto : La marge de reliure est réglée en fonction du sens de numérisation. 4 Appuyez sur [Sens Original]. 5 Sélectionnez l'orientation du document et appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Auto : Le bord long du document est automatiquement configuré comme position de reliure. 6 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Pour annuler la fonction, appuyez sur [NON]. Opérations Scan vers PC 4 bizhub 362/282/222 4-23 ! Détails En cas de chargement d'un document recto-verso comportant des pages de différentes largeurs, nous recommandons de charger les pages d'orientation identique. Lors de la numérisation d'un document avec des pages d'orientations différentes, l'orientation des données d'image peut être erronée. 4 Opérations Scan vers PC 4-24 bizhub 362/282/222 Spécifier la priorité d'émission 1 Appuyez sur [Menu]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX]. 2 Appuyez sur [Priorité EM] sur l'onglet Param. 2. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Priorité EM] sur l'onglet Param. 2. Le bouton s'affiche en vidéo inverse. Pour annuler la fonction, appuyez à nouveau sur le bouton pour le désélectionner. Opérations Scan vers PC 4 bizhub 362/282/222 4-25 Spécifier les paramètres d'émission horloge 1 Appuyez sur [Menu]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX]. 2 Appuyez sur [Param. TX horloge] sur l'onglet Param. 2. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Param TX horloge] sur l'onglet Param. 2 3 Spécifiez l'heure d'envoi de l'émission. – Appuyez sur [Heure] ou [Minute], et tapez sur le clavier numérique l'heure désirée. 4 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Pour annuler la fonction, appuyez sur [NON]. 2 Remarque Il est possible de spécifier jusqu'à 200 documents avec une émission horloge. 4 Opérations Scan vers PC 4-26 bizhub 362/282/222 Spécifier le paramètre Tampon 1 Appuyez sur [Menu]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX]. 2 Appuyez sur [Tampon] sur l'onglet Param. 2. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Tampon] sur l'onglet Param. 2. 3 Sélectionnez la position du tamponnage, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. Opérations Scan vers PC 4 bizhub 362/282/222 4-27 Spécifier le nom du fichier Vous pouvez spécifier le nom du fichier de données joint à un message électronique. Ce champ peut comporter 16 caractères maximum. 1 Appuyez sur [Menu]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX]. 2 Appuyez sur [Nom fich.] sur l'onglet Réseau. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Nom fich.] sur l'onglet Rés. 3 Tapez le Nom de fichier, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Ce n'est pas nécessaire de taper l'extension de fichier. – Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [NON]. 4 Opérations Scan vers PC 4-28 bizhub 362/282/222 4.6 Si les données n'ont pas pu être enregistrées Si l'émission ne s'est pas achevée correctement, un rapport du résultat de l'émission est imprimé. ! Détails Vous pouvez modifier le paramètre d'impression du rapport d'émission. Pour plus de détails, voir le guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner Réseau]. Consulter le rapport d'émission 2 4 1 3 5 Rouleau No. Rubrique Description 1 Date d'émission du rapport Montre la date d'émission du rapport. 2 Nom de l'identifiant Indique le nom et l'adresse de l'identifiant. 3 Information sur l'émission Montre le numéro du document émis, la durée requise et le mode de communication. Opérations Scan vers PC 4 bizhub 362/282/222 4-29 Réexpédition 20 documents au maximum n'ayant pas pu être envoyés sont enregistrés pour une nouvelle tentative. 1 Appuyez sur [Liste Tâches], puis [Type], et sélectionnez le document qui n'a pas pu être envoyé. – Si [Réessayer] ou [Changer Destination] apparaissent à l'écran, le document peut être envoyé une nouvelle fois sans qu'une nouvelle numérisation ne s'impose. 2 Pour envoyer le document au même destinataire, appuyez sur [Réessayer]. – Pour envoyer le document à un destinataire différent, appuyez sur [Changer Destination]. 4 Résultats d'émission Indique les résultats de l'émission. L'une des informations suivantes peut s'afficher. OK : l'émission s'est déroulée avec succès. INTERR : l'émission a été interrompue. F.MEM : la mémoire est pleine. NG : l'émission s'est soldée par un échec. PT.DEL : l'émission vers certains destinataires a échoué. F.DATA : Le volume des données a dépassé la limite admissible. IMG NG : La résolution d'émission était incorrecte et l'émission a donc été interrompue. Code d'erreur : Pour plus de détails, voir "Codes d'erreur" à la page 9-4. 5 Image transmise Reproduit une partie de l'image émise. No. Rubrique Description 4 Opérations Scan vers PC 4-30 bizhub 362/282/222 4.7 Enregistrer une destination Programmer un bouton 1-touche Si un destinataire est enregistré avec un bouton de numérotation 1-touche, l'émission peut être envoyée facilement et avec précision. Deux types de destinataires peuvent être enregistrées sous un bouton de numérotation 1-touche : un destinataire principal et un destinataire secondaire, les données étant envoyées à cette dernière en cas d'échec de l'émission au destinataire principal. 2 Remarque Si le paramètre "Limiter Edition 1-Touche" de l'écran Mode Administrateur (affiché à partir de l'écran de Gestion administrateur 1) est réglé sur "Oui", si des paramètres de commutation logicielle avaient été spécifiés pour limiter l'enregistrement de boutons de numérotation 1-Touche à l'administrateur, ou si "Sécurité renforcée" est réglé sur "Oui", les boutons de numérotation 1-Touche peuvent seulement être enregistrés, édités ou supprimés en mode Administrateur. Pour plus de détails sur les réglages en mode Administrateur, se référer au guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Fax]. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres de commutation logicielle, voir "Spécifier les paramètres d'activation du logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil)" à la page 8-11. ! Détails Les modes de communication suivants peuvent être spécifiés pour la destination secondaire. - PC (E-mail) - PC (Scanner) - Internet FAX (Internet FAX) - Internet FAX (EM-IP) - Internet FAX (Relais IP) - FAX (G3) Le mode de communication peut être spécifié si le kit Fax, en option, est installé. 2 Remarque Certains modes de communication risquent de ne pas être disponibles, selon les réglages de la machine. Pour plus de détails, consultez l'administrateur. Opérations Scan vers PC 4 bizhub 362/282/222 4-31 Vous pouvez spécifier les paramètres suivants. 2 Rappel Si la touche [Utilitaire/Compteur] est actionnée pour enregistrer des éléments et spécifier des paramètres, n'oubliez pas d'appuyer sur la touche [Réinitialisation] sur le panneau de contrôle après être retourné à l'écran d'accueil. Rubrique Description Nom destination à distance Tapez le nom du destinataire censé figurer sur le bouton de numérotation 1-Touche. Ce champ peut comporter 12 caractères maximum. Exemple : Tokyo br Destination Tapez l'adresse IP de l'ordinateur où les données doivent être enregistrées. Port Entrez le numéro du port (entre 1 et 65535). Type de fichier Sélectionnez le format "TIFF" ou "PDF") du fichier à envoyer. Méthode de codage Sélectionnez la méthode de codage des données à envoyer. Sélectionnez "MH" ou "MMR". La quantité des données est moindre avec la méthode de codage MMR qu'avec la méthode MH. 4 Opérations Scan vers PC 4-32 bizhub 362/282/222 Pour programmer un bouton 1-touche 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaire/Compteur]. 2 Appuyez sur [Paramètres Utilis.]. 3 Appuyez sur [Entrée E-mail]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [FAX]. 4 Appuyez sur [1-touche]. Opérations Scan vers PC 4 bizhub 362/282/222 4-33 5 Appuyez sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche à programmer. – Appuyez sur un onglet d'index ou sur [Répertoire] et appuyez ensuite sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche souhaité. – Si l'appareil est réglé pour autoriser les recherches LDAP, un écran s'affiche pour permettre la définition du bouton 1-Touche pour interdire ou autoriser la possibilité de découverte de l'adresse par une recherche LDAP. Pour ce bouton, sélectionnez "Non". 6 Tapez le nom du destinataire qui apparaîtra sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche, et appuyez sur [Suite]. 7 Sélectionnez le mode de communication. Appuyez sur [PC], ensuite sur [Scanner] et sur [Suite]. 8 Entrez l'adresse IP de la machine où les données sont censées être enregistrées, puis appuyez sur [Suivant]. – Si un serveur DNS est spécifié à l'écran Paramètres réseau, il est possible d'entrer le nom de l'hôte. Appuyez sur [Nom Host], puis entrez le nom de l'hôte. – Pour changer l'adresse qui a été entrée, appuyez sur la touche [C] (effacer), et entrez l'adresse correcte. 4 Opérations Scan vers PC 4-34 bizhub 362/282/222 9 Pour sélectionner le format de fichier et la méthode de codage, appuyez sur [Mode Scan]. 10 Sur l'écran Mode numérisation, les paramètres qui peuvent être spécifiés sont les suivants. Sélectionnez les paramètres souhaités, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Type de fichier: sélectionnez soit "TIFF" soit "PDF". – Méthode de codage : sélectionnez la méthode de codage ("MH", MR ou "MMR") des données à envoyer. La quantité des données est moindre avec la méthode de codage MMR qu'avec la méthode MH. 11 Pour changer le numéro de port, appuyez sur [Port]. – Pour changer le numéro de port, appuyez sur la touche [C] (effacer), puis tapez le numéro du port sur le clavier numérique et appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Pour restaurer le réglage précédent, [Par Défaut]. 12 Appuyez sur [Suite]. 13 Vérifiez les informations à enregistrer, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. 14 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran d'accueil s'affiche. Opérations Scan vers PC 4 bizhub 362/282/222 4-35 Changer/supprimer un bouton de numérotation 1-touche 1 Exécutez les étapes 1 à 4 de la procédure décrite dans "Pour programmer un bouton 1-touche". 2 Appuyez sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche que vous voulez modifier ou supprimer. 3 Appuyez sur le bouton dont vous voulez changer le réglage, puis procédez à la modification. – Pour supprimer le bouton de numérotation 1-touche, appuyez sur la touche [Supprimer]. 4 Vérifiez les informations à enregistrer, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. – En cas de suppression, un message de confirmation s'affiche. Appuyez sur [Oui]. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran d'accueil s'affiche. 4 Opérations Scan vers PC 4-36 bizhub 362/282/222 Copier un bouton 1-touche 1 Exécutez les étapes 1 à 4 de la procédure décrite dans "Pour programmer un bouton 1-touche". 2 Appuyez sur le bouton du destinataire 1-Touche à copier. 3 Appuyez sur [1-Touche] et ensuite sur [Copie 1-Touche]. 4 Appuyez sur le bouton sous lequel les paramètres de bouton de numérotation 1-touche sont censés être copiés. – Sélectionnez un bouton de numérotation 1-touche ne comportant encore aucun paramètre enregistré. – Pour désélectionner le bouton 1-touche de destination pour la copie, il suffit d'appuyer une nouvelle fois sur le bouton sélectionné. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran d'accueil s'affiche. Opérations Scan vers PC 4 bizhub 362/282/222 4-37 Enregistrer/Editer/Supprimer le destinataire secondaire 1 Exécutez les étapes 1 à 4 de la procédure décrite dans "Pour programmer un bouton 1-touche". 2 Appuyez sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche sur lequel un destinataire secondaire est censé être programmé. 3 Appuyez sur [1-Touche], puis [Enregistrement. adresse secondaire]. 4 Entrez les informations relatives au destinataire secondaire, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Si une destination secondaire est déjà enregistrée, vérifiez les paramètres qui s'affichent et appuyez ensuite sur [Changer Paramètres] ou sur [Supprime]. – En cas de suppression, un message de confirmation s'affiche. Appuyez sur [Oui]. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran d'accueil s'affiche. 4 Opérations Scan vers PC 4-38 bizhub 362/282/222 5 Scanner IP Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-3 5 Scanner IP 5.1 Avant d'utiliser Scanner IP Ce chapitre contient de nombreuses informations que vous devez vous assurer de comprendre avant d'utiliser Scanner IP. Scanner IP et ImageReceiver Scanner IP et ImageReceiver sont décrits dans les lignes suivantes. - Ces utilitaires sont disponibles uniquement lorsqu'un document est numérisé. Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'une télécopie reçue et transférée vers Scanner IP, voir "Transférer un document reçu vers Scanner IP" à la page 5-59. - Les données numérisées avec cette machine et envoyées vers un ordinateur sont reçues avec ImageReceiver et enregistrées comme fichier image avec Scanner IP. Avant d'utiliser Scanner IP, vous devez démarrer ImageReceiver. - L'icône du ImageReceiver s'affiche dans la barre des tâches de Windows pendant son exécution. Normalement, ImageReceiver démarre automatiquement avec le démarrage de Windows. - Si ImageReceiver ne démarre pas, cliquez sur "Démarrer" pour le lancer, allez sur "Programmes" (ou "Tous les programmes" sous Windows XP), ensuite "Scanner IP" et cliquez ensuite sur "ImageReceiver". - Lorsque ImageReceiver commence à recevoir les données image, son icône clignote dans la barre des tâches de Windows. - En fonction des paramètres ImageReceiver spécifiés, les données image peuvent être reçues avec ImageReceiver, même si Scanner IP n'a pas démarré. ! Détails Les fichiers TIFF codés JBIG ne peuvent pas être lus avec Scanner IP. 5 Scanner IP 5-4 bizhub 362/282/222 Utiliser un routeur téléphonique Avant d'utiliser un scanner IP, spécifiez l'adresse IP correcte de cette machine. Vous devez être particulièrement prudent au cas où Scanner IP est utilisé dans un environnement avec routeur téléphonique. Si vous spécifiez une adresse IP incorrecte dans un environnement avec routeur téléphonique, ce dernier risque de composer inutilement. En outre et en fonction des paramètres réseau spécifiés sur l'ordinateur, le routeur téléphonique risque de composer inutilement même si l'adresse IP spécifiée est correcte. Utiliser un modem ou un adaptateur de terminal Si vous utilisez un ordinateur avec modem (ou connecté à un adaptateur de terminal) le modem (ou l'adaptateur de terminal) risque de composer. Dans ce cas, sélectionnez "Ne jamais établir de connexion" or "Connecter à chaque fois qu'une connexion réseau n'est pas établie" sous "Paramètres accès modem et réseau privé virtuel" sur l'onglet Connexions de la boîte de dialogue Propriétés Internet. Pour plus de détails, consulter le manuel du système d'exploitation. Utiliser Windows XP Service Pack 2/Windows Vista Avec Windows XP Service Pack 2 avec Sécurité Avancée (SP2)/Windows Vista, la transmission effectuée par ImageReceiver risque d'être affectée par les fonctions de sécurité avancée (le pare-feu Windows est activé par défaut). Pour utiliser ImageReceiver, cliquez sur [Débloquer] dans le message d'alerte de sécurité Windows. Toutes les émissions effectuées par ImageReceiver passent, par défaut, par le pare-feu Windows, et toutes les fonctions ImageReceiver peuvent être utilisées normalement. Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-5 ! Détails Si vous avez cliqué sur [Keep Blocking] (Toujours bloquer), toutes les émissions effectuées par ImageReceiver sont bloquées par le pare-feu Windows, et les fonctions ImageReceiver ne peuvent plus être utilisées. Pour plus de détails sur la manière d'autoriser l'utilisation de ImageReceiver voir "Autoriser l'utilisation de ImageReceiver" à la page 5-6. ! Détails Le message d'alerte de sécurité Windows s'affiche lorsque ImageReceiver démarre sous les conditions suivantes. - Lorsque Windows XP SP2 ou Windows Vista est installé alors qu'ImageReceiver est déjà installé - Lorsqu'ImageReceiver est réinstallé sur un ordinateur équipé de Windows XP SP2 ou Windows Vista 5 Scanner IP 5-6 bizhub 362/282/222 Autoriser l'utilisation de ImageReceiver Si vous aviez cliqué sur [Keep Blocking] dans le message d'alerte de sécurité Windows, ImageReceiver ne peut plus être utilisé. Dans ce cas, suivez la procédure décrite ci-dessus pour autoriser l'utilisation de ImageReceiver. 1 Ouvrir le panneau de commande et double-cliquez sur "Centre de sécurité" installé avec Windows XP SP2. 2 Dans la boîte de dialogue Centre de sécurité Windows, cliquez sur "Pare-feu Windows". 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue Pare-feu Windows, cliquez sur l'onglet Exceptions. (Pour Windows Vista, sélectionnez "Autoriser un programme via le Pare-feu Windows".) 4 Dans la liste "Programmes et services", vérifier si "MGS" avec le nom du programme ImageReceiver est enregistré. 5 Cochez la case "MGS". 6 Cliquez sur [OK]. ! Détails Seul un utilisateur jouissant des privilèges de l'administrateur peut modifier les paramètres de pare-feu. Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-7 Conflits de ports ImageReceiver Si un serveur de courrier électronique est installé sur un ordinateur équipé d'un scanner IP, un message de confirmation s'affiche. Si Scanner IP (et ImageReceiver) et le serveur de courrier électronique sont utilisés sur le même ordinateur, cliquez sur [Change ImageReceiver port] (Changer port ImageReceiver). Toutefois, pour utiliser cette fonction, les paramètres doivent correspondre aux Paramètres port du bouton de numérotation 1-touche utilisé avec Scan vers PC. Le numéro du port peut être vérifié après la modification en cliquant sur "Help", ensuite sur "Computer Information" dans scanner IP. Lorsque vous utilisez Scanner IP (et ImageReceiver) sans avoir modifié le numéro du port, arrêtez le serveur de courrier électronique, puis redémarrez ImageReceiver. Si le numéro de port a été modifié par inadvertance, désinstallez et réinstallez Scanner IP. 5 Scanner IP 5-8 bizhub 362/282/222 Emissions SSL - Les émissions pour l'utilisation de Scanner IP pour programmer/supprimer des boutons de numérisation peuvent être cryptées. - Si cette machine est configurée pour les émissions SSL, la boîte de dialogue suivante apparaît. Si cette boîte de dialogue apparaît, cliquez sur [View Certificate] et installez un certificat. Une fois que le certificat est installé, ce boîte de dialogue ne doit pas s'afficher pendant la période de validité du certificat. A l'expiration du certificat, cette boîte de dialogue va réapparaître et il faudra réinstaller le certificat. Pour plus de détails sur l'installation des certificats, voir "Installation des certificats" à la page 5-10. - Utilisez PageScope Web Connection pour créer des certificats. Pour plus de détails sur la création de certificats, consulter le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner réseau]. - Si Scanner IP communique avec un périphérique utilisant SSL, l'icône d'un cadenas s'affiche dans le coin inférieur droit de la fenêtre. Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-9 ! Détails Pour que Scanner IP communique avec cette machine utilisant SSL, vous devez installer Internet Explorer 5.0 ou supérieur. Pour la communication SSL, il faut un niveau de cryptage Internet Explorer de 56 bits ou plus. Si le niveau de cryptage n'est pas de 56 bits ou plus, procurez-vous le pack de cryptage sur le site Internet Microsoft et installez-le. Pour activer les émissions SSL et utiliser Scanner IP, utilisez la version 1.55.x ou supérieure de Scanner IP. 5 Scanner IP 5-10 bizhub 362/282/222 Installation des certificats 1 Quand la boîte de dialogue Security Alert apparaît, cliquez sur [View Certificate]. 2 Cliquez sur [Install Certificate]. Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-11 3 Cliquez sur [Next]. 4 Sélectionnez la case "Automatically select the certificate store based on the type of certificate" et cliquez ensuite sur [Next]. 5 Scanner IP 5-12 bizhub 362/282/222 5 Cliquez sur [Finish]. 6 Cliquez sur [Yes]. Le certificat est installé. Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-13 5.2 Installer/désinstaller les utilitaires Scanner IP est disponible sur le disque utilitaires livré avec cette machine. Près de 35 Mo d'espace disque dur libre sont requis pour l'installation du scanner IP. Méthodes d'installation du ImageReceiver Utilisez l'une des méthodes d'installation de ImageReceiver suivantes, en fonction de votre environnement de travail. Méthode d'installation Description Installer comme application Cette méthode est la méthode d'installation normale. Les paramètres des données image enregistrées utilisées dans Scanner IP peuvent être utilisés Installer comme service Sélectionnez cette méthode lorsque vous travaillez sur un serveur ou un terminal partagé. L'utilitaire peut être installé sur des ordinateurs équipés de Windows Server 2003, XP, ou 2000. ImageReceiver peut être utilisé même dans le cas où l'utilisateur ne s'est pas connecté ; toutefois, les paramètres des données image enregistrées utilisées dans Scanner IP ne peuvent pas être utilisés. 5 Scanner IP 5-14 bizhub 362/282/222 Installer les utilitaires 1 Démarrer l'ordinateur et insérez ensuite le CD-ROM. L'installeur démarre. 2 Sélectionnez "Install IP Scanner". Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-15 3 Vérifiez le contenu de la boîte de dialogue, puis cliquez sur le bouton [Next]. 4 Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent pour terminer l'installation. 5 Dans la boîte de dialogue Terminer l'installation, cliquez sur [Finish]. 6 Redémarrez l'ordinateur. 5 Scanner IP 5-16 bizhub 362/282/222 2 Remarque La communication avec ImageReceiver est affectée dans un environnement dans lequel Windows XP Service Pack 2 avec Sécurité Avancée (SP2)/Windows Vista est utilisé avec les fonctions de sécurité avancée. Voir "Utiliser Windows XP Service Pack 2/Windows Vista" à la page 5-4. Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-17 Désinstaller les utilitaires (pour Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003) Avant de désinstaller Scanner IP, quittez ImageReceiver. 1 Sous Windows, sélectionnez "Démarrer" et ensuite "Panneau de configuration" pour ouvrir le Panneau de configuration. – Sous Windows 2000, sélectionnez "Démarrer", "Paramètres" et ensuite "Panneau de configuration" pour ouvrir le Panneau de configuration. 2 Double-cliquez sur "Ajouter ou supprimer des programmes". – Sous Windows 2000, double-cliquez sur "Ajout/Suppression de programmes". 3 Sélectionnez "Scanner IP" et cliquez ensuite sur [Changer/Supprimer]. – Sous Windows Vista, sélectionnez "Scanner IP" et cliquez ensuite sur [Désinstaller]. 5 Scanner IP 5-18 bizhub 362/282/222 4 Cliquez sur [Yes] (Oui). 5 Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent pour terminer la désinstallation. 6 Redémarrez l'ordinateur. Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-19 5.3 Opérations de scanner IP La fenêtre et le menu du scanner IP sont décrits ci-dessous. Fenêtre principale Cette fenêtre s'affiche au démarrage du scanner IP. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 No. Nom de l'élément Description 1 Bouton Fermer Cliquez sur ce bouton pour quitter Scanner IP. 2 Bouton Contrôler réception maintenant Cliquez sur ce bouton pour vérifier la réception des données numérisées. 3 Boutons Grandes icônes, Petites icônes, Liste et Détails Cliquez sur ces boutons pour modifier l'affichage des icônes. 4 Bouton Imagettes Cliquez sur ce bouton pour démarrer FenêtreVisionner et afficher une liste d'imagettes pour tous les fichiers TIFF, PDF et JPG dans le dossier ouvert. Pour plus de détails, voir "FenêtreVisionner" à la page 5-33. 5 Bouton [Scanner Key Registration] Cliquez sur ce bouton pour afficher la boîte de dialogue Scanner Settings pour programmer un bouton sur la machine afin de spécifier l'ordinateur de destination des données. Pour plus de détails, voir "Boîte de dialogue Scanner Settings" à la page 5-24. Si la case "Same as Previous" est sélectionnée, le bouton sera programmé avec les mêmes paramètres que le bouton précédemment programmé. Si une machine n'est pas connectée, son illustration est floue. 5 Scanner IP 5-20 bizhub 362/282/222 6 Bouton [Delete Scanner Key] Cliquez sur ce bouton pour effacer le bouton de numérisation programmé sur la machine. 7 Case "Save folder as a key" Si cette case est sélectionnée, un dossier portant le même nom que le bouton est automatiquement créé lorsqu'un bouton de numérisation est programmé. 8 Case "Delete the key after image is saved" Si cette case est sélectionnée, le bouton de numérisation est automatiquement effacé dès l'enregistrement de l'image numérisée dans un dossier. 9 Case "Delete the key on exit" Si cette case est sélectionnée, le bouton de numérisation est automatiquement effacé lorsque vous quittez Scanner IP. 10 Barre de menus Cliquez sur les commandes des menus pour spécifier divers paramètres. Pour plus de détails, voir "Commandes disponibles" à la page 5-21. 11 Barre d'état Affiche l'état de fonctionnement de l'application. No. Nom de l'élément Description Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-21 Commandes disponibles Les commandes des différents menus sont décrits ci-dessous. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 No. Menu Commande Description 1 File View file Sélectionnez cette commande pour visionner le fichier image sélectionné. New folder Sélectionnez cette commande pour créer un nouveau dossier dans le dossier affiché. Delete Sélectionnez cette commande pour supprimer le fichier ou le dossier sélectionné. Rename Sélectionnez cette commande pour changer le nom du fichier ou du dossier sélectionné. Exit Sélectionnez cette commande pour quitter Scanner IP. 2 Edit Cut Sélectionnez ces commandes pour sélectionner, déplacer ou copier les fichiers ou les Copy dossiers. Paste Select All 3 View Large Icons Sélectionnez ces commandes pour changer l'affichage des icônes. Small Icons List Details Thumbnails Sélectionnez cette commande pour afficher les imagettes des documents numérisés. Pour plus de détails, voir "FenêtreVisionner" à la page 5-33. Refresh Sélectionnez cette commande pour mettre à jour l'affichage des fichiers et des dossiers. 4 Go To Saving folder Sélectionnez cette commande pour afficher le dossier où les données ont été enregistrées. 5 Scanner IP 5-22 bizhub 362/282/222 5 Scanner Scanner Key Registration Sélectionnez cette commande pour programmer un bouton de numérisation sur la machine. Scanner Key Delete Sélectionnez cette commande pour effacer le bouton de numérisation programmé sur la machine. Reg. Same as Previous Sélectionnez cette commande pour programmer le bouton avec les même paramètre que le bouton précédemment programmé. 6 Image Check Check now Sélectionnez cette commande pour vérifier la réception des données numérisées. Automatic Sélectionnez cette commande pour activer le contrôle automatique de la réception des données numérisées. Manual Sélectionnez cette commande pour activer le contrôle manuel de la réception des données numérisées. No. Menu Commande Description Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-23 7 Settings Connection Setting Sélectionnez cette commande pour spécifier l'adresse IP de la machine. Image Folder Setting Sélectionnez cette commande pour changer le dossier dans lequel l'image est enregistrée. 2 Remarque Il est impossible de spécifier un disque amovible, un lecteur CD-ROM ou un disque réseau comme dossier de destination. Viewer Settings Sélectionnez cette commande pour changer la visionneuse ouverte depuis Scanner IP. Sort Settings Sélectionnez cette commande pour spécifier les paramètres de tri des documents numérisés. Pour plus de détails, voir "Boîte de dialogue Sort Settings (onglet RX document (Réception document))" à la page 5-27. Divided Settings Sélectionnez cette commande pour spécifier les paramètres de division de documents numérisés. Pour plus de détails, voir "Boîte de dialogue Divided Settings (Paramètres de division)" à la page 5-30. Receive Notify Settings Sélectionnez cette commande pour spécifier les paramètres de notification de l'émission des documents numérisés de l'ordinateur. Pour plus de détails, voir "Boîte de dialogue Receive Notify Settings" à la page 5-31. Selected folder as saving location Sélectionnez cette commande pour spécifier le dossier affiché comme destination pour l'enregistrement. Configure Arrival Notification Sélectionnez cette commande pour spécifier le dossier affiché comme dossier de notification pour la réception de notifications sur l'ordinateur. Show dialog after received Sélectionnez cette commande pour afficher un message de notification de la réception de l'image. Notify other PC after received Sélectionnez cette commande pour envoyer une notification informant un ordinateur différent de la réception de l'image 8 Aide Computer Information Sélectionnez cette commande pour afficher l'adresse IP de l'ordinateur et le port de ImageReceiver. Help Topics Sélectionnez cette commande pour afficher le menu Aide du scanner IP. About This Product Sélectionnez cette commande pour afficher les informations sur la version du scanner IP. No. Menu Commande Description 5 Scanner IP 5-24 bizhub 362/282/222 Boîte de dialogue Scanner Settings Cette boîte de dialogue s'affiche pour permettre d'enregistrer les paramètres de numérisation sur la machine. 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 12 7 9 10 14 15 11 13 No. Nom de l'élément Description 1 Champ "Scanner Key Name" Entrez le nom du bouton de numérisation qui s'affichera sur l'écran tactile de la machine. Si vous aviez coché la case "Save folder as a key" dans la fenêtre principale, un dossier portant le même nom que le bouton est créé sur l'ordinateur. 2 Champ "Scan Area" Sélectionnez la surface à numériser. Si "Auto Detect" est sélectionné, la zone de numérisation est automatiquement déterminée conformément au format du document. 3 Champ "Quality" Sélectionnez la résolution de numérisation. 4 Curseur "Contrast" Spécifiez la densité de la numérisation. 5 Case "Drop Out Color" Cette rubrique n'est pas disponible sur cette machine. Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-25 6 Champ "File Type" Sélectionnez "TIFF" ou "PDF" pour le format dans lequel le fichier est enregistré. 7 Paramètre "B/W Coding Method" Sélectionnez "MH" ou "MMR" comme méthode de codage pour l'enregistrement des fichiers. Certaines images ne peuvent pas être visionnées sur l'ordinateur ; cela dépend du codage. Dans ce cas, sélectionnez "MH" pour augmenter la possibilité de visionnage de l'image. La taille des données codées dépend des données image ; toutefois, les données MH sont généralement plus importantes que les MMR. 8 Paramètre "Specify File Name" "Yes" : sélectionnez ce paramètre pour enregistrer les données image avec le nom de fichier spécifié. "No" : sélectionnez ce paramètre pour enregistrer le fichier avec un nom composé du nom du périphérique et de la date de numérisation de l'image. 9 Champ "File Name" Entrez le nom avec lequel le fichier sera enregistré si "Specify File Name" est réglé sur "Yes". 10 Champ groupé "2in1" "Yes" : sélectionnez ce réglage pour enregistrer un document de deux pages sous la forme d'une image numérisée d'une page. Ce paramètre est disponible uniquement si un introducteur automatique de document est utilisé. 11 Champ groupé "Original" Sélectionnez si le document est recto ou recto-verso. Si vous sélectionnez "2 sided", l'emplacement de la marge de reliure et le sens du document peuvent être spécifiés. 12 Bouton [Scanner Key Registration] Cliquez sur ce bouton pour programmer un bouton sur la machine afin de spécifier l'emplacement pour l'enregistrement des données. 13 Champ groupé [Automatic Print] Si "Yes" est sélectionné, "Automatic Print Settings" devient disponible dans ImageReceiver. 14 Bouton [Printer Setting] Cliquez sur ce bouton pour afficher la boîte de dialogue Printer Setting. Ce bouton est disponible quand "Automatic Print" est réglé sur "Yes". 15 Bouton [Default] Si vous cliquez sur ce bouton, tous les paramètres retournent à leurs valeurs par défaut. No. Nom de l'élément Description 5 Scanner IP 5-26 bizhub 362/282/222 Boîte de dialogue Sort Settings (Paramètres de tri) (onglet Scanner) 2 1 No. Nom de l'élément Description 1 Case "Folder by key name" Si cette case est sélectionnée, un dossier portant le même nom que le bouton de numérisation programmé est automatiquement créé. Lors de l'envoi d'une émission Scan vers PC depuis cette machine, un dossier est automatiquement créé avec le même nom que la destination du bouton de numérotation 1-touche. Si une émission est envoyée avec l'adresse entrée directement, un dossier est automatiquement créé avec le nom "(Input)". Cette case est connectée à la case "Save folder as a key" de la fenêtre principale. 2 Case "Create new folder by Date" Si cette case est sélectionnée, les données sont enregistrées dans un dossier créé avec un nom à partir de la date d'envoi de l'image depuis cette machine. Il est possible de spécifier le format de la date. Exemple : pour le 24 décembre 2005 (Saturday) • aaaa.mm.jj : 2005.12.24 • aaaa.mm : 2005.12 • aaaa.mm.jj-jj : 2005.12.18-24 * Si "Start week on" était sur "Sun" (L'on considère qu'une semaine compte sept jours à partir du jour sélectionné. Toutefois, à la fin du mois, les mois ne se chevaucheront pas.) Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-27 Boîte de dialogue Sort Settings (onglet RX document (Réception document)) 1 2 3 5 4 No. Nom de l'élément Description 1 Case "Folder by key name" Si vous cochez cette case, un dossier est créé automatiquement avec le même nom que le bouton de numérotation 1-touche programmé lors du transfert d'un document reçu vers Scanner IP. Cette case n'est pas connectée à la case "Save folder as a key" de la fenêtre principale. 2 Case "Create new folder by Date" Si cette case est sélectionnée, les données sont enregistrées dans un dossier créé avec un nom à partir de la date d'envoi du document. Il est possible de spécifier le format de la date. Exemple : pour le 24 décembre 2005 (Saturday) • aaaa.mm.jj : 2005.12.24 • aaaa.mm : 2005.12 • aaaa.mm.jj-jj : 2005.12.18-24 * Si "Start week on" était sur "Sun" (L'on considère qu'une semaine compte sept jours à partir du jour sélectionné. Toutefois, à la fin du mois, les mois ne se chevaucheront pas.) 3 Case "Sort by FAX information" Si vous cochez cette case, les données sont triées, par exemple à l'aide des informations sur le destinataire du fax, puis enregistrées dans un dossier. 4 Liste "FAX Information" Cliquez sur [Up] ou [Down] pour sélectionner les informations fax à utiliser pour le tri. Lors du tri des données, les éléments placés en haut de la liste sont prioritaires. 5 Case "Create new folder" Si vous cochez cette case, le document (les données image) est enregistré dans un nouveau dossier créé à partir des informations de l'expéditeur s'il n'existe aucun dossier créé avec les informations de l'expéditeur du document reçu. 5 Scanner IP 5-28 bizhub 362/282/222 Boîte de dialogue Sort Settings (onglet TX document (Emission document)) 1 2 3 4 5 6 No. Nom de l'élément Description 1 Case "Folder by key name" Si vous cochez cette case, un dossier est créé automatiquement avec le même nom que le bouton de numérotation 1-touche programmé lors du transfert d'un document envoyé vers Scanner IP. Cette case n'est pas connectée à la case "Save folder as a key" de la fenêtre principale. 2 Case "Create new folder by Sender Information" Si vous cochez cette case, les données sont enregistrées dans un fichier créé avec un nom à partir des informations relatives à l'expéditeur (nom utilisateur ou nom de compte) du document envoyé. 3 Champ "Sender Information" Cliquez sur [Up] ou [Down] pour sélectionner les informations expéditeur à utiliser pour le tri. Lors du tri des données, les éléments placés en haut de la liste sont prioritaires. Si aucun compte ne doit être spécifié, définir "Group Name" "Public". 4 Case "Create new folder by Communication mode" Si cette case est sélectionnée, les données sont enregistrées dans un dossier créé avec le numéro correspondant au mode de communication du document envoyé. Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-29 5 Case "Create new folder by Date" Si cette case est sélectionnée, les données sont enregistrées dans un dossier créé avec un nom à partir de la date d'envoi du document. Il est possible de spécifier le format de la date. Exemple : pour le 24 décembre 2005 (Saturday) • aaaa.mm.jj : 2005.12.24 • aaaa.mm : 2005.12 • aaaa.mm.jj-jj : 2005.12.18-24 * Si "Start week on" était sur "Sun" (L'on considère qu'une semaine compte sept jours à partir du jour sélectionné. Toutefois, à la fin du mois, les mois ne se chevaucheront pas.) 6 Case "Create new folder by TX Destination Information" Si cette case est sélectionnée, les données sont enregistrées dans un dossier créé avec un nom à partir des informations relatives à l'expéditeur du document envoyé. No. Nom de l'élément Description 5 Scanner IP 5-30 bizhub 362/282/222 Boîte de dialogue Divided Settings (Paramètres de division) Cette boîte de dialogue s'affiche pour permettre de spécifier les paramètres de division et d'enregistrement de documents numérisés. 1 2 3 4 5 No. Nom de l'élément Description 1 Case "Divide a scanned document to save" Si vous cochez cette case, un document numérisé peut être divisé et enregistré dans des fichiers séparés. Un document à diviser et enregistrer peut être numérisé en une étape. 2 Paramètre "Divide by short separator" Si ce paramètre est sélectionné et un document aux pages de longueurs différentes numérisé, ces pages sont identifiées comme intercalaires, et le document est divisé par ces intercalaires et enregistré dans des fichiers différents. Lors du chargement d'un document dans l'ADF, chargez le document de sorte que les côtés gauches des pages (marges) soient alignés. Les formats des pages pouvant être mixées ne sont soumis à aucune restriction. Voir "Formats papier originaux mixtes". Ce paramètre est disponible uniquement si la case "Divide a scanned document to save" est cochée. 3 Case "Files separator" Si vous cochez cette case, les pages insérées comme intercalaires sont également enregistrées comme données image. 4 Paramètre "Divide by width" Si ce paramètre est sélectionné et un document aux pages de largeurs différentes numérisées, les pages de largeur identique sont enregistrées dans un fichier séparé. Lors du chargement d'un document dans l'ADF, chargez le document de sorte que les bords supérieurs des pages (bords orientés vers l'arrière de la machine) soient alignés. Ce paramètre est disponible uniquement si la case "Divide a scanned document to save" est cochée. 5 Paramètre "Divide document as single pages" Si ce paramètre est sélectionné, chaque page du document numérisé est enregistrée dans un fichier séparé. Ce paramètre est disponible uniquement si la case "Divide a scanned document to save" est cochée. Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-31 Boîte de dialogue Receive Notify Settings 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 No. Nom de l'élément Description 1 Destination de l'enregistrement Un ordinateur différent peut être notifié lors de la réception d'une image dans un dossier spécial. Dans le cas présent, sélectionnez le dossier de destination dans lequel l'image est reçue et l'autre ordinateur notifié. 2 "Notify List" Affiche les informations sur la destination de notification spécifiée pour le dossier sélectionné. Une icône floue à proximité du dossier indique la destination de notification est définie pour un dossier conteneur. 3 Bouton [Add] Cliquez sur ce bouton pour ajouter une destination de notification. Entrez l'adresse IP de l'ordinateur qui recevra la notification, puis cliquez sur [OK]. Si un numéro de port est spécifié, sélectionnez la case "Specify Port" et spécifiez ensuite le numéro de port. Spécifiez le numéro de port SMTP utilisé par ImageReceiver sur l'ordinateur pour recevoir la notification (normalement "25"). 5 Scanner IP 5-32 bizhub 362/282/222 4 Bouton [Edit] Cliquez sur ce bouton pour éditer ou changer la destination de notification sélectionnée. Si la destination de notification et définie pour un dossier conteneur (icône floue), [Edit] n'est pas disponible. 5 Bouton [Delete] Cliquez sur ce bouton pour supprimer la destination de notification sélectionnée. Si la destination de notification et définie pour un dossier conteneur (icône floue), [Delete] n'est pas disponible. 6 Case "Apply to Sub-Folders" Si vous cochez cette case, les mêmes paramètres de notification s'appliquent à tous les sous-dossiers contenus dans le dossier sélectionné. 7 Bouton [Test] Cliquez sur ce bouton pour envoyer une notification test à la destination de notification sélectionnée. Le message suivant s'affiche sur l'ordinateur spécifié comme destination de notification. ImageReceiver doit démarrer sur une ordinateur spécifié comme destination de notification. En outre, une notification de test ne peut pas être envoyée vers une destination de notification spécifiée comme dossier conteneur (icône floue). No. Nom de l'élément Description Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-33 FenêtreVisionner Si vous aviez cliqué sur l'affichage imagettes, une image réduite de toutes les images enregistrées dans le dossier sélectionné s'affiche. Cliquez sur une image pour visionner le fichier. 2 Remarque Les fichiers TIFF codés JBIG ne peuvent pas être affichés. Il se peut que les images créées avec un périphérique autre que cette machine (par ex. un ordinateur) ne s'affichent pas. No. Description 1 S'affiche lorsque le fichier contient plusieurs pages. Cliquez sur la barre pour changer de page. 1 5 Scanner IP 5-34 bizhub 362/282/222 Boîte de dialogue Printer Setting 1 2 3 No. Nom de l'élément Description 1 Champ "Printer Name" Parmi les imprimantes enregistrées dans le dossier Imprimantes de l'ordinateur, sélectionnez l'imprimante à utiliser pour l'impression automatique. 2 Bouton [Print Property] Cliquez sur ce bouton pour afficher la boîte de dialogue Print Property. 3 Case "Delete File After Printing" Si cette case est sélectionnée, les données image reçues seront supprimées après leur impression automatique. Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-35 Boîte de dialogue Print Property 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 No. Nom de l'élément Description 1 Champ "Paper Select Method" Spécifiez la méthode de sélection du papier pour l'impression automatique. Si vous sélectionnez "Print on Selected Paper", les données sont imprimées sur le papier et selon l'orientation spécifiée dans cette boîte de dialogue, sans tenir compte de la taille de l'image. Si vous sélectionnez "Print on Paper Same as Image Size", les données sont imprimées sur le papier et selon l'orientation correspondant à celle de l'image, sans tenir compte des paramètres spécifiés dans cette boîte de dialogue. Si vous sélectionnez "Select When Printing", la boîte de dialogue Print Select s'ouvre avant l'impression. "Select When Printing" n'apparaît pas si ImageReceiver avait été installé en tant que service. 2 Case "Adjust Image to Fit to Paper Size" Si vous sélectionnez cette case, l'image est imprimée agrandie/réduite pour s'adapter au format du papier. 3 Case "Minimal" Si vous sélectionnez cette case, l'image est imprimée en taille réduite pour ne perdre aucune partie de l'image. 5 Scanner IP 5-36 bizhub 362/282/222 4 Case "Automatically Rotates Image when Image Orientation is different from Paper Orientation." Si vous sélectionnez cette case, l'image est pivotée avant l'impression quand l'orientation de l'image diffère de cette du papier. 5 Paramètre "Position" Sélectionnez comment les images sont disposées sur le papier lors de l'impression. 6 Champ "Paper Size" Sélectionnez le format du papier. Les formats de papier utilisables avec l'imprimante sélectionnée sont regroupés sous forme de liste. 7 Paramètre "Orientation" Sélectionnez l'orientation de l'impression. 8 Champ "Paper Source" Sélectionnez la méthode d'alimentation du papier. Les méthodes d'alimentation papier utilisables avec l'imprimante sélectionnée sont regroupées sous forme de liste. 9 Champ "Copies" Spécifiez le nombre de copies à imprimer. Spécifiez un nombre ne dépassant pas le nombre maximal de copies que vous pouvez spécifier avec l'imprimante sélectionnée. 10 Bouton [Properties] Cliquez sur ce bouton pour afficher les propriétés de l'imprimante sélectionnée. 11 Champ "Resolution" Sélectionnez la résolution d'impression. Les résolutions utilisables avec l'imprimante sélectionnée sont regroupées sous forme de liste. No. Nom de l'élément Description Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-37 5.4 Opérations ImageReceiver Icône ImageReceiver Après l'installation du scanner IP, l'icône ImageReceiver s'affiche dans la barre des tâches de Windows au démarrage de l'ordinateur. Si cette icône ne s'affiche pas, l'ordinateur ne peur pas recevoir l'image numérisée. L'icône change comme illustré ci-dessous, en fonction des paramètres ImageReceiver. Icône Description Une image est ouverte dans Scanner IP. (verte) Une image est ouverte dans ImageReceiver. (bleue) Une image est ouverte dans ImageReceiver (si l'utilitaire a été installé comme service). (bleue) 5 Scanner IP 5-38 bizhub 362/282/222 Commandes ImageReceiver Avec le bouton droit de la souris, cliquez sur l'icône dans la barre des tâches pour afficher un menu. 1 2 3, 4, 5 6, 7 8, 9 10 No. Commande Description 1 Save received images Si cette commande est cochée, les données images sont ouvertes dans ImageReceiver au moment de la réception, même si Scanner IP n'a pas encore démarré. Si vous cliquez sur "Enregistrer les images reçues" un message permettant de confirmer si oui ou non le paramètre spécifié dans Scanner IP ou dans ImageReceiver doit être accepté s'affiche. Pour accepter le paramètre, cliquez sur [Oui]. 2 Automatic Print Settings Cliquez sur cette commande pour afficher la boîte de dialogue Automatic Print Settings. Pour plus de détails, voir "Boîte de dialogue Automatic Print Settings" à la page 5-41. 3 "Settings for saved images"–" Image Folder Setting" Cliquez sur cette commande pour changer le dossier dans lequel les données image sont enregistrées. Cette commande est disponible uniquement si "Save received images" est coché. Il est impossible de spécifier un disque amovible, un lecteur CD-ROM ou un disque réseau comme dossier de destination. 4 "Settings for saved images"–" Sort Settings" Sélectionnez cette commande pour spécifier les paramètres de tri des documents numérisés. Cette commande est disponible uniquement si "Save received images" est coché. Pour plus de détails, voir "Boîte de dialogue Sort Settings (Paramètres de tri) (onglet Scanner)" à la page 5-26. 5 "Settings for saved images"–" Divided Settings" Sélectionnez cette commande pour spécifier les paramètres de division de documents numérisés. Cette commande est disponible uniquement si "Save received images" est coché. Pour plus de détails, voir "Boîte de dialogue Divided Settings (Paramètres de division)" à la page 5-30. 6 "Notify Settings"–"Receive Notify Settings" Sélectionnez cette commande pour spécifier les paramètres de notification de l'émission des documents numérisés de l'ordinateur. Cette commande est disponible uniquement si "Save received images" est coché. Pour plus de détails, voir "Boîte de dialogue Receive Notify Settings" à la page 5-31. Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-39 7 "Notify Settings"–"Error Notify Settings" Sélectionnez cette commande pour afficher la boîte de dialogue Error Notify Settings. Pour envoyer des notifications d'erreur à un autre ordinateur, sélectionnez la case "Error notify to other PC", tapez l'adresse IP de l'ordinateur censé recevoir la notification et cliquez sur [OK]. Pour spécifier un numéro de port, sélectionnez la case "Specify Port" et spécifiez ensuite le numéro de port. Spécifiez le numéro du port SMTP utilisé par ImageReceiver sur l'ordinateur pour recevoir la notification (normalement "25"). Cliquez sur [Test]. Une notification test est envoyée au destinataire spécifié. 8 "Receive Settings"–"RX Display" Si cette commande est cochée, une boîte de dialogue s'affiche pour notifier l'utilisateur de la réception de données image. Il est possible de démarrer la visionneuse depuis la boîte de dialogue Confirmation de l'image et de voir le dossier spécifié comme destination d'enregistrement des images. Il est en outre possible de supprimer ou de renommer des fichiers de données image dans cette boîte de dialogue. No. Commande Description 5 Scanner IP 5-40 bizhub 362/282/222 9 "Receive Settings"– "Connection Filter" Cliquez sur cette commande pour afficher la boîte de dialogue Connection Filter (Filtre de connexion). Si vous cochez la case "Filter", vous pouvez restreindre la destination de la connexion en cliquant sur [Add] pour enregistrer une adresse IP. Sur la liste "Allowed IP Address", enregistrez l'adresse IP de l'ordinateur qui reçoit les notifications envoyées entre cette machine et l'ordinateur. Si vous cochez la case "Display Received Image Notify" la notification de réception de l'ordinateur est reçue à partir d'un ordinateur différent. Si la case "Display Error Notify" est sélectionnée, les notifications d'erreur informatiques provenant d'un autre ordinateur sont reçues. 10 Help Affiche le menu Aide de ImageReceiver, les informations relatives à sa version, le journal de réception et le journal d'erreurs. No. Commande Description Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-41 Boîte de dialogue Automatic Print Settings 6 2 3 4 5 1 No. Nom de l'élément Description 1 Liste "Folder For Printing" Cette liste montre le dossier spécifié pour l'impression automatique. Si la liste comporte plusieurs dossiers, les paramètres d'impression sont prioritaires, en commençant par le haut. Cliquez sur [Up] et [Down] pour spécifier la priorité des dossiers d'impression automatique. 2 [Add] Bouton Cliquez sur ce bouton pour afficher la boîte de dialogue Folder and Printer Settings. Vous pouvez ajouter des dossiers d'impression automatique. 3 Bouton [Edit] Cliquez sur ce bouton pour afficher la boîte de dialogue Folder and Printer Settings. Vous pouvez modifier les paramètres des dossiers d'impression automatique. 4 Bouton [Delete] Cliquez sur ce bouton pour supprimer le dossier d'impression automatique sélectionné. 5 Bouton [Copy] Cliquez sur ce bouton pour afficher la boîte de dialogue Folder and Printer Settings. Vous pouvez reproduire les paramètres pour le dossier d'impression automatique sélectionné. 6 Champ "Print Settings" Ce champ contient les paramètres du dossier figurant sur la liste "Folder For Printing". 5 Scanner IP 5-42 bizhub 362/282/222 Boîte de dialogue Folder and Printer Settings 1 2 3 4 5 No. Nom de l'élément Description 1 Champ "Folder" Ce champ montre le dossier spécifié pour l'impression automatique. Pour sélectionner un autre dossier, cliquez sur [Browse] et sélectionnez le dossier voulu. 2 Case "Apply to Sub- Folders" Si vous cochez cette case, les mêmes paramètres d'impression automatique s'appliquent à tous les sous-dossiers contenus dans le dossier sélectionné. 3 Champ "Printer Name" Parmi les imprimantes enregistrées dans le dossier Imprimantes de l'ordinateur, sélectionnez l'imprimante à utiliser pour l'impression automatique. 4 Bouton [Print Property] Cliquez sur ce bouton pour afficher la boîte de dialogue Print Property. Pour plus de détails, voir "Boîte de dialogue Print Property" à la page 5-35. 5 Case "Delete File After Printing" Si cette case est sélectionnée, les données image reçues seront supprimées après leur impression automatique. Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-43 5.5 Enregistrer les boutons et les opérations de numérisation Fonctionnement général Suivez la procédure décrite ci-dessous pour numériser à l'aide du scanner IP. 1 Démarrez Scanner IP. (depuis l'ordinateur) 2 Programmez un bouton de numérisation. (depuis l'ordinateur) 3 Numérisez le document. (depuis la machine) 4 Visionnez l'image numérisée. (depuis l'ordinateur) 5 Quittez Scanner IP. (depuis l'ordinateur) Démarrer Scanner IP 1 Cliquez sur "Démarrer", allez sur "Programmes" (ou "Tous les programmes" sous Windows XP), ensuite sur "Scanner IP" et cliquez ensuite sur "Scanner IP". 2 Entrez l'adresse IP de la machine, puis cliquez sur [OK]. – Si l'adresse IP de la machine est déjà spécifiée, vous pouvez sauter cette étape. La fenêtre principale s'affiche. 5 Scanner IP 5-44 bizhub 362/282/222 Enregistrer un bouton de numérisation Spécifiez les paramètres de numérisation machine à partir du scanner IP, transférez-les ensuite vers la machine et enregistrez-les comme bouton de numérisation. Assurez-vous que ImageReceiver est en marche. 0 Un seul bouton de numérisation peut être programmé à partir d'un ordinateur unique (même adresse IP). 0 Six boutons de numérisation maximum peuvent être programmés sur cette machine. Si six boutons ont déjà été programmés, sélectionnez un bouton sur l'écran tactile de la machine et appuyez ensuite sur [Delete] pour le supprimer. Dans ce cas, "Scanner Available" reste affiché dans Scanner IP. Cliquez sur [Delete Scanner Key] pour afficher "Scanner Key Registration". 1 Dans la fenêtre principale, cliquez sur [Scanner Key Registration]. Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-45 2 Spécifiez les paramètres de numérisation dans la boîte de dialogue Scanner Settings. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Boîte de dialogue Scanner Settings" à la page 5-24. 5 Scanner IP 5-46 bizhub 362/282/222 3 Cliquez sur [Scanner Key Registration]. 4 Cliquez sur [OK]. – Pour vérifier l'adresse IP de l'ordinateur, cliquez sur "Help", puis sur "Computer Information". Le bouton de numérisation machine est programmé. Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-47 Numériser un document à l'aide des paramètres enregistrés 1 Placez les documents à numériser. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Scanner Plus] sur le panneau de commande. 3 Appuyez sur le bouton de numérisation programmé. 5 Scanner IP 5-48 bizhub 362/282/222 4 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ]. Le document est numérisé et envoyé à l'ordinateur spécifié. Si vous aviez spécifié "Show dialogue after received", une boîte de dialogue indiquant que les données ont été reçues s'affiche à l'ordinateur. Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-49 Visionner l'image numérisée 1 Démarrez Scanner IP. 2 Dans la fenêtre principale, sélectionnez le dossier dans lequel les données sont enregistrées, puis double-cliquez sur le fichier image. Le logiciel relié au fichier démarre et l'image est affichée. ! Détails Si vous aviez coché la case "Save folder as a key" dans la fenêtre principale, le fichier image est enregistré dans un dossier créé avec le même nom que le bouton. Si vous aviez sélectionné [Thumbnails], une image réduite des fichiers TIFF et PDF enregistrés dans le dossier ouvert peut être visionnée. Cliquez sur une imagette pour ouvrir la FenêtreVisionner et pour visionner les images. 5 Scanner IP 5-50 bizhub 362/282/222 Spécifier l'impression automatique avec IP Scanner 1 Démarrez Scanner IP. 2 Dans la fenêtre principale, cliquez sur [Scanner Key Registration]. Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-51 3 Spécifiez le nom de la touche Scanner dans la boîte de dialogue Scanner Settings. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Boîte de dialogue Scanner Settings" à la page 5-24. 4 Spécifiez les paramètres "Scan Area", "Quality" et "Contrast". 5 Sélectionnez "Yes" à côté de "Automatic Print" et cliquez ensuite sur [Printer Setting]. 5 Scanner IP 5-52 bizhub 362/282/222 6 Sélectionnez une imprimante et cliquez ensuite sur [Print Property]. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Boîte de dialogue Printer Setting" à la page 5-34. 7 Spécifiez les paramètres nécessaires aux champs groupés "Page Settings" et "Printer Settings" et cliquez ensuite sur [OK]. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Boîte de dialogue Print Property" à la page 5-35. 8 Cliquez sur [OK]. Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-53 9 Cliquez sur [Scanner Key Registration]. Le bouton de numérisation machine est programmé. 5 Scanner IP 5-54 bizhub 362/282/222 Imprimer automatiquement avec Scanner IP 1 Placez les documents à numériser. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Scanner Plus]. 3 Appuyez sur le bouton de numérisation programmé pour l'impression automatique. – Appuyez sur le bouton du même nom que celui enregistré à partir de l'ordinateur. – Un seul bouton de numérisation peut être programmé à partir d'un ordinateur unique (même adresse IP). Le bouton apparaît en évidence. 4 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ]. L'émission vers l'ordinateur commence et, après la réception par l'ordinateur des données image, elles sont imprimées conformément aux paramètres d'impression automatique spécifiés. ! Détails Six boutons de numérisation maximum peuvent être programmés sur cette machine. Si le nombre maximal de boutons de numérisation est déjà programmé, sélectionnez un bouton sur l'écran tactile de la machine et appuyez ensuite sur [Delete] pour le supprimer. Dans ce cas, "Scanner Available" reste affiché dans Scanner IP. Si cette situation survient, cliquez sur [Delete Scanner Key] et suivez les instructions qui s'affichent à l'écran jusqu'à ce que [Scanner Key Registration] s'affiche. Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-55 Spécifier l'impression automatique avec ImageReceiver 1 Effectuez un clic droit sur l'icône ImageReceiver et cliquez ensuite sur "Automatic Print Settings". – Pour plus de détails, voir "Opérations ImageReceiver" à la page 5-37. 2 Cliquez sur [Add] dans la boîte de dialogue Automatic Print Settings. 5 Scanner IP 5-56 bizhub 362/282/222 3 Spécifiez les paramètres nécessaires au champ groupé "Folder Setting" de la boîte de dialogue Folder and Printer Settings. – Assurez-vous que les paramètres de dossier spécifiés ici correspondent aux paramètres de tri. 4 Sélectionnez une imprimante et cliquez ensuite sur [Print Property]. Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-57 5 Spécifiez les paramètres nécessaires aux champs groupés "Page Settings" et "Printer Settings" et cliquez ensuite sur [OK]. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Boîte de dialogue Print Property" à la page 5-35. 6 Cliquez sur [OK] dans la boîte de dialogue Folder and Printer Settings. 7 Cliquez sur [OK] dans la boîte de dialogue Automatic Print Settings. 5 Scanner IP 5-58 bizhub 362/282/222 Imprimer automatiquement avec un bouton de numérotation 1-Touche 1 Placez les documents à numériser. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Fax/Scanner]. 3 Sélectionnez l'ordinateur spécifié pour l'impression automatique. – Pour plus de détails sur l'utilisation des boutons de numérotation 1-Touche, voir "Spécifier une destination avec un bouton de numérotation 1-touche" à la page 4-4. – Pour plus de détails sur la programmation des boutons de numérotation 1-Touche, voir "Programmer un bouton 1-touche" à la page 4-30. 4 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ]. L'émission vers l'ordinateur commence et, après la réception par l'ordinateur des données image, elles sont imprimées conformément aux paramètres d'impression automatique spécifiés. Quitter Scanner IP % Dans le menu "Fichier", cliquez sur "Sortie". Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-59 5.6 Autres opérations Transférer un document reçu vers Scanner IP Les données image reçues peuvent être converties vers des fichiers image TIFF ou PDF pour ensuite être transférées vers Scanner IP sur l'ordinateur. Les étapes suivantes doivent être spécifiées si vous voulez transférer un document reçu vers Scanner IP. Si vous cochez la case "Sort by FAX information" dans l'onglet Réception document de la boîte de dialogue qui s'affiche lorsque vous cliquez sur "Sort Settings" dans le menu "Settings" du scanner IP, le fichier image est enregistré dans un dossier créé avec un nom à partir de l'identifiant (numéro de téléphone, etc.) pour le document fax reçu. Si les informations sur le destinataire contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être utilisés dans des noms de dossier (\ / : * ? " < > or |), aucun dossier n'est créé à l'aide des informations sur le destinataire. Dans ce cas, le fichier image est enregistré dans un dossier créé avec le nom du bouton ou la date. (Si des caractères ne pouvant être utilisés dans un nom de fichier sont utilisés pour enregistrer le nom du bouton, les caractères sont remplacés par "_" (souligner).) Toutefois, si vous ne cochez pas la case "Folder by key name" ou la case "Create new folder by Date", les données sont enregistrées dans le dossier "My Images". Si l'ordinateur de destination du transfert n'est pas en marche ou si ImageReceiver n'a pas encore démarré, le document transféré ne peut pas être reçu. Dans ce cas, le document reçu est imprimé et le fichier image est supprimé après l'impression. S'il est difficile d'identifier le destinataire à partir d'un nom de dossier créé uniquement avec les informations sur le destinataire, par exemple, si les informations sur le destinataire (identifiant) contiennent seulement un numéro de téléphone, il est possible d'ajouter un nom plus facilement identifiable devant les informations sur le destinataire. Pour changer le nom du dossier, cliquez sur "Renommer" dans Windows. Exemple : "Ventes $ 123456789" Entrez le nom comme suit : $ (Assurez-vous d'entrer.) Paramètre Référence de page Pour la gestion de documents F-Code Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Fax] Port Traitement Doc. reçus Destination pour faire suivre Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner réseau] Pour enregistrer l'adresse IP d'une destination de distribution à l'aide d'un bouton de numérotation 1-touche "Enregistrer une destination" (p. 4-30) 5 Scanner IP 5-60 bizhub 362/282/222 2 Remarque Les données d'un même destinataire peuvent être enregistrées dans le même dossier, même si le nom du dossier est changé après. Transférer vers Scanner IP Spécifiez les paramètres suivants pour enregistrer les données de document reçues dans le dossier ordinateur spécifié. 1 Dans un bouton de numérotation 1-touche, enregistrez l'adresse IP de l'ordinateur vers lequel les données seront transférées. – Sélectionnez Scan vers PC comme mode d'émission. 2 Spécifiez les paramètres de transfert de l'écran Gestion de document (affiché depuis l'écran Gestion administrateur 1). – Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres de gestion de document, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner réseau]. 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue Paramètres de tri (onglet Réception document) du scanner IP, spécifiez le dossier dans lequel les données sont censées être enregistrées. 6 Opérations Relais IP Opérations Relais IP 6 bizhub 362/282/222 6-3 6 Opérations Relais IP 6.1 Avant l'émission Exécutez les opérations suivantes avant d'utiliser la fonction relais IP. Spécifiez les paramètres suivants si vous voulez utiliser cette machine pour envoyer la commande d'émission d'une télécopie relayée par une autre machine. Définir "Restreindre" sous "Passerelle émission" Réglez "Passerelle TX" sur l'écran Paramètres Réseau (affiché en appuyant sur [Admin. 2] – [Paramètres réseau] – [Paramètres réseau 1]) sur "Restreindre". ! Détails Si vous voulez utiliser cette machine comme machine de relais, définir "Autoriser" sous "Passerelle émission". Pour plus de détails sur l'utilisation de cette machine comme machine de relais, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Fax]. Vous pouvez empêcher les émissions incorrectes vers des destinataires non visés. Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier les paramètres d'activation du logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil)" à la page 8-11. Spécifier les paramètres des stations de relais Spécifiez l'adresse IP et le nom de domaine des machines de relais. Sélectionnez les machines de relais connectées à la ligne téléphonique normale. Pour plus de détails, voir les pages qui suivent. Pour spécifier les paramètres depuis le panneau de commande de cette machine, voir "Paramètres relais IP" à la page 8-6. Pour spécifier les paramètres depuis PageScope Web Connection, voir "Paramètres relais IP (mode Administrateur)" à la page 7-29. 6 Opérations Relais IP 6-4 bizhub 362/282/222 6.2 Spécifier un destinataire avec un bouton de numérotation 1-touche Si un destinataire est enregistré à l'aide d'un bouton de numérotation 1-touche, les données peuvent être envoyées en appuyant simplement sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche. Qui plus est, il est possible d'ajouter d'autres fonctions d'émission ou d'enregistrer un programme de courrier électronique. ! Détails Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'un bouton de numérotation 1-touche, voir "Enregistrer un destinataire" à la page 6-30. Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'un programme de courrier électronique, voir "Enregistrer un programme de courrier électronique" à la page 3-39. Sélectionner un bouton une touche Voici les différentes manières de sélectionner un bouton une touche. Utilisez la méthode appropriée selon le nombre de destinataires et l'utilisation souhaitée. - Pression directe sur le bouton 1-touche - Saisir le numéro du bouton 1-touche - Chercher le nom d'un destinataire - Spécifier la chaîne de numérotation Opérations Relais IP 6 bizhub 362/282/222 6-5 Spécifier un destinataire en appuyant sur un bouton de numérotation 1-touche 1 Placez les documents à numériser. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Fax/Scanner]. – L'écran qui s'affiche après l'activation de la touche [Fax/Scanner] peut être spécifié à l'aide du paramètre "Ecran par défaut" de l'écran Choix utilisateur. Pour plus de détails, consulter le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Copie]. 3 Appuyez sur [1-touche]. 4 Sélectionnez l'index contenant le destinataire souhaité et appuyez sur le bouton de numérotation 1-Touche. – Avec le même bouton de numérotation 1-touche, vous pouvez spécifier plusieurs destinataires pour une émission simultanée. Il est possible de spécifier 300 destinataires au maximum à l'aide d'un seul bouton de numérotation 1-touche. – Pour sélectionner un index, appuyer sur l'onglet de l'index souhaité ou appuyez sur ou pour sélectionner un autre onglet. – Pour plus de détails sur la modification des noms d'index, voir "Donner un nom à un index" à la page 3-37. – Si des paramètres de commutation logicielle avaient été spécifiés pour empêcher les radiodiffusions, un fax ne peut pas être envoyé à plusieurs destinataires. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres de commutation logicielle, voir "Spécifier les paramètres d'activation du logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil)" à la page 8-11. 6 Opérations Relais IP 6-6 bizhub 362/282/222 5 Spécifier les paramètres appropriés dans l'onglet Qualité & réduc. conformément au document à envoyer. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier la qualité de numérisation et le taux zoom" à la page 6-15. 6 Spécifier les paramètres nécessaires dans l'onglet Menu. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, spécifiez les paramètres nécessaires sur l'onglet de Menu FAX. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier des fonctions supplémentaires." à la page 6-19. 7 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ]. Opérations Relais IP 6 bizhub 362/282/222 6-7 Saisir le numéro du bouton 1-touche Un numéro est assigné à chaque bouton de numérotation 1-touche, comme illustré ci-dessous. Au lieu d'appuyer sur un bouton de numérotation 1-touche, la spécification du numéro du bouton de numérotation 1-touche permet de sélectionner rapidement un destinataire. 1 Placez les documents à numériser. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Fax/Scanner]. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [#] sur le panneau de contrôle. Index 1 Index 36 6 Opérations Relais IP 6-8 bizhub 362/282/222 4 Entrer le numéro du bouton de numérotation 1-touche sur le clavier numérique. – Le bouton 1-touche spécifié s'affiche en vidéo inverse. – Avec le même bouton de numérotation 1-touche, vous pouvez spécifier plusieurs destinataires pour une émission simultanée. Il est possible de spécifier 300 destinataires au maximum à l'aide d'un seul bouton de numérotation 1-touche. – Si des paramètres de commutation logicielle avaient été spécifiés pour empêcher les radiodiffusions, un fax ne peut pas être envoyé à plusieurs destinataires. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres de commutation logicielle, voir "Spécifier les paramètres d'activation du logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil)" à la page 8-11. 5 Spécifier les paramètres appropriés dans l'onglet Qualité & réduc. conformément au document à envoyer. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier la qualité de numérisation et le taux zoom" à la page 6-15. 6 Spécifier les paramètres nécessaires dans l'onglet Menu. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, spécifiez les paramètres nécessaires sur l'onglet de Menu FAX. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier des fonctions supplémentaires." à la page 6-19. 7 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ]. Opérations Relais IP 6 bizhub 362/282/222 6-9 Recherche d'un destinataire une touche Il est possible de rechercher le nom d'un destinataire enregistré à l'aide d'un bouton de numérotation 1-touche dans le but de sélectionner le bouton de numérotation 1-touche. 1 Placez les documents à numériser. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Fax/Scanner]. 3 Appuyez sur [Recherche]. – Si une recherche LDAP est possible, appuyez sur [Recherche LDAP] pour chercher plus loin. 4 Tapez le nom du destinataire, puis appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran qui s'affiche renferme la liste des boutons de numérotation 1-touche programmés avec le destinataire dont le nom commence par le nom entré. 5 Appuyer sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche souhaité pour le sélectionner. – Avec le même bouton de numérotation 1-touche, vous pouvez spécifier plusieurs destinataires pour une émission simultanée. Il est possible de spécifier 300 destinataires au maximum à l'aide d'un seul bouton de numérotation 1-touche. 6 Opérations Relais IP 6-10 bizhub 362/282/222 – Si des paramètres de commutation logicielle avaient été spécifiés pour empêcher les radiodiffusions, un fax ne peut pas être envoyé à plusieurs destinataires. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres de commutation logicielle, voir "Spécifier les paramètres d'activation du logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil)" à la page 8-11. 6 Spécifier les paramètres appropriés dans l'onglet Qualité & réduc. conformément au document à envoyer. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier la qualité de numérisation et le taux zoom" à la page 6-15. 7 Spécifier les paramètres nécessaires dans l'onglet Menu. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, spécifiez les paramètres nécessaires sur l'onglet de Menu FAX. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier des fonctions supplémentaires." à la page 6-19. 8 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ]. Opérations Relais IP 6 bizhub 362/282/222 6-11 Spécifier la chaîne de numérotation Si l'adresse du destinataire compte plus de 64 caractères, on peut spécifier l'adresse en combinant des adresses enregistrées sous des boutons 1-touche et une adresse introduite manuellement. Appuyez sur [Num. en Chaîne], et sélectionnez des boutons 1-touche ou entrez une adresse. ! Détails La chaîne de numérotation ne peut servir qu'à un seul destinataire par émission. Dans le cadre de la chaîne de numérotation, l'adresse peut comporter jusqu'à 192 caractères (64 caractères d'un bouton 1-touche + 64 caractères d'un bouton 1-touche + 64 caractères d'une adresse introduite manuellement). 2 Remarque Les boutons 1-touche à utiliser dans la chaîne de numérotation doivent être programmés à l'avance. 6 Opérations Relais IP 6-12 bizhub 362/282/222 6.3 Entrer un numéro de fax Le numéro de fax d'un destinataire non enregistré dans un bouton de numérotation 1-touche peut être entrée directement afin d'être spécifiée. 2 Remarque Si des paramètres de commutation logicielle avaient été spécifiés pour limiter la numérotation, il n'est pas possible d'envoyer un fax en tapant directement le numéro de fax. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres de commutation logicielle, voir "Spécifier les paramètres d'activation du logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil)" à la page 8-11. Pour entrer un numéro de fax 1 Placez les documents à numériser. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Fax/Scanner]. 3 Appuyez sur [Entrée adresse]. 4 Sélectionnez le mode de communication. Appuyez sur [Changer mode comm]. Opérations Relais IP 6 bizhub 362/282/222 6-13 5 Appuyez sur [FaxInternet], ensuite sur [Relais IP] et sur [Entrée]. 6 Entrez le numéro de fax du destinataire. – Pour changer le numéro de fax qui a été entré, appuyez sur la touche [C] (effacer), et entrez le numéro de fax correct. – Le numéro entré peut comporter jusqu'à 64 caractères. 7 Pour changer la machine de relais, appuyez sur [Station relais], puis sélectionnez la station de relais souhaitée. – Cliquez sur "Paramètres relais IP" (page 8-6) à l'écran Paramètres réseau pour enregistrer la machine de relais d'avance. 8 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. 9 Spécifier les paramètres appropriés dans l'onglet Qualité & réduc. conformément au document à envoyer. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier la qualité de numérisation et le taux zoom" à la page 6-15. 6 Opérations Relais IP 6-14 bizhub 362/282/222 10 Spécifier les paramètres nécessaires dans l'onglet Menu. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, spécifiez les paramètres nécessaires sur l'onglet de Menu FAX. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier des fonctions supplémentaires." à la page 6-19. 11 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ]. Opérations Relais IP 6 bizhub 362/282/222 6-15 6.4 Spécifier la qualité de numérisation et le taux zoom Appuyez sur [Qualité & réduc.] à l'écran qui s'affiche lorsque la touche [Fax/Scanner] est activée pour spécifier la qualité de l'image numérisée et le taux zoom. ! Détails Une fois l'émission terminée, les paramètres d'émission reviennent à leurs valeurs par défaut. Qualité Sélectionner la définition de numérisation (quantité de détails). Parmi les paramètres de définition disponibles, sélectionnez la définition appropriée en fonction du type de document en cours de numérisation. ! Détails Si des données sont envoyées avec le réglage "Texte/Photo", des motifs moirés peuvent apparaître sur certaines photos. Ce n'est pas signe de mauvais fonctionnement. Pour réduire cet effet moiré, envoyez les données avec le réglage "Photo" ou "Super Photo". Si vous aviez sélectionné une haute résolution afin d'envoyer une image claire, il se peut que le format des données image envoyées s'agrandisse et que le fournisseur ou le serveur n'autorise pas l'envoi des données. Vérifiez tout d'abord les restrictions de format concernant les données pouvant être envoyées. Réglage Description Standard Pour les documents contenant du texte normal (comme l'écriture manuscrite) Fin Super Fin Texte 600 dpi Pour les documents comportant des parties imprimées en petits caractères, comme les journaux ou des documents contenant des illustrations détaillées Texte/Photo Texte/Photo 600 dpi Pour les documents contenant du texte et des images avec des nuances de couleur (comme les photos) Photo Super Photo Photo 600 dpi Pour les documents avec des nuances de couleur, comme les photos 6 Opérations Relais IP 6-16 bizhub 362/282/222 Pour sélectionner un paramètre de qualité 1 Appuyez sur [Qualité & réduc.]. 2 Appuyez sur [Qualité] et ensuite sur le bouton du paramètre de qualité voulu. – Pour sélectionner une résolution plus élevée, appuyez sur [600 dpi]. Opérations Relais IP 6 bizhub 362/282/222 6-17 Densité Parmi les paramètres de définition disponibles, sélectionnez la définition appropriée en fonction du type de document en cours de numérisation. ! Détails Si vous sélectionnez "Texte 600 dpi" ou "Texte & Photo 600 dpi", vous pouvez régler la densité sur l'un des trois niveaux suivants : "Clair", "Normal", ou "Foncé". Pour sélectionner un paramètre Densité 1 Appuyez sur [Qualité & réduc.]. 2 Appuyez sur [Densité] et ensuite sur le bouton du paramètre de densité voulu. Réglage Description Clair Normal Foncé Pour les documents dont la couleur de fond est sombre, comme le journal et les bleus Pour les documents standard Pour les documents comportant du texte pâle ou de couleur 6 Opérations Relais IP 6-18 bizhub 362/282/222 Réglage du Format Original Vous pouvez spécifier la zone numérisée comme format standard. De toutes manières, vous pouvez envoyer une portion d'un document grand format ou envoyer un document de format non standard comme format standard. 1 Appuyez sur [Qualité & réduc.]. 2 Appuyez sur [Réduction/Zone] et ensuite sur [Réglage format orig.]. 3 Sélectionnez le format de numérisation voulu et appuyez ensuite sur [Entrée]. – Appuyez sur [DétectAuto] pour sélectionner automatiquement le format le plus proche du format du document. Cependant, si le document est plus petit que le format Letter, c'est le format Letter qui sera sélectionné. Opérations Relais IP 6 bizhub 362/282/222 6-19 6.5 Spécifier des fonctions supplémentaires. Appuyez sur [Menu] sur l'écran qui s'affiche lorsque la touche [Fax/Scanner] est activée pour ajouter les fonctions suivantes. 2 Remarque Si le kit Fax en option est installé, le [Menu] passe à [Menu Fax]. Fonction Description Param. 1 *(Param. 1) Identification Sélectionnez les informations, comme le nom, le numéro de fax ou l'adresse de cette machine ou le nom du destinataire, imprimés sur le bord de la page. Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement des informations relatives à l'identifiant, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner réseau]. Si un nom de destinataire est sélectionné, le nom du destinataire enregistré dans le bouton de numérotation 1-Touche est imprimé. Rapport Emission Sélectionnez les conditions d'impression du rapport d'émission. Par défaut : Sélectionnez ce réglage pour que le rapport soit imprimé dans les conditions fixées depuis l'écran Gestion Administrateur. OUI : sélectionnez ce paramètre pour imprimer le rapport quelque soit le résultat de l'émission. En cas d'échec de l'émission : Sélectionnez ce réglage pour n'imprimer le rapport qu'en cas d'échec de l'émission. NON : Sélectionnez ce paramètre pour ne pas imprimer le rapport quelque soit le résultat de l'émission. 2 en 1 Sélectionnez s'il faut ou non envoyer les données à l'aide de la fonction "2en1" (réduire de pages pour qu'elles passent sur une seule page). Emission Recto/Verso Sélectionnez s'il faut procéder ou non à une émission recto/verso. Vous pouvez aussi spécifier la position de la marge de reliure et l'orientation de la page. Emission Rotation Sélectionnez s'il faut oui ou non pivoter l'image numérisée conformément à l'orientation du papier de la machine de réception. Vous pouvez spécifier cette fonction lors de l'envoi dune image au format A4 avec une résolution de 200 dpi ou moins. 6 Opérations Relais IP 6-20 bizhub 362/282/222 * Passe à ( ) si le kit Fax en option est installé. 2 Remarque Les paramètres suivants sont sans effet, même si les réglages en ont été spécifiés. - "Sélection objet" sur l'onglet Réseau - "Adresse de réponse" sur l'onglet Réseau - "Nom fich." sur l'onglet Réseau - "Notification Email" sur l'onglet Réseau Param. 2 *(Param. 2) Emission Priorité Sélectionnez si l'émission des données est ou non prioritaire sur les autres tâches. Param. TX horloge Spécifiez l'heure d'envoi du fax. Tampon Spécifiez si l'image numérisée est tamponnée pour indiquer qu'elle a été numérisée. Le document doit être chargé dans l'introducteur ADF. 2 Remarque Afin d'utiliser la fonction "Tampon", l'unité de pose de tampon en option doit être installée. Fonction Description Opérations Relais IP 6 bizhub 362/282/222 6-21 Spécifier la condition d'impression du rapport d'émission Vous pouvez spécifier le conditions d'impression du rapport du résultat d'émission. Les conditions d'impression du rapport du résultat d'émission sont prédéfinies par les réglages de "Paramètres de rapport" de l'écran de Gestion "Administrateur" 1. Suivez la procédure décrite ci-dessous pour changer ces conditions. 1 Appuyez sur [Menu]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX]. 2 Appuyez sur [Rapport EM] sur l'onglet Param. 1 – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Rapport EM] sur l'onglet Param. 1. 3 Spécifiez la condition d'impression souhaitée, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. 6 Opérations Relais IP 6-22 bizhub 362/282/222 Spécifier une émission 2en1 1 Appuyez sur [Menu]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX]. 2 Appuyez sur [2en1] sur l'onglet Param. 1. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [2en1] sur l'onglet Param. 1. Le bouton s'affiche en vidéo inverse. Pour annuler la fonction, appuyez à nouveau sur le bouton pour le désélectionner. Opérations Relais IP 6 bizhub 362/282/222 6-23 Spécifier les paramètres d'émission recto-verso 1 Appuyez sur [Menu]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX]. 2 Appuyez sur [Emiss. R/V] sur l'onglet Param. 1. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Emis. R/V] sur l'onglet Param. 1. 3 Sélectionnez la marge originale appropriée. – ReliéGauche : Le document est numérisé avec une marge de reliure sur le côté gauche. – ReliéHaut : Le document est numérisé avec une marge de reliure en haut. – Auto : La marge de reliure est réglée en fonction du sens de numérisation. 4 Appuyez sur [Sens Original]. 5 Sélectionnez l'orientation du document et appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Auto : Le bord long du document est automatiquement configuré comme position de reliure. 6 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Pour annuler la fonction, appuyez sur [NON]. 6 Opérations Relais IP 6-24 bizhub 362/282/222 ! Détails En cas de chargement d'un document recto-verso comportant des pages de différentes largeurs, nous recommandons de charger les pages d'orientation identique. Lors de la numérisation d'un document avec des pages d'orientations différentes, l'orientation des données d'image peut être erronée. Opérations Relais IP 6 bizhub 362/282/222 6-25 Spécifier le paramètre Priorité émission 1 Appuyez sur [Menu]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX]. 2 Appuyez sur [Priorité EM] sur l'onglet Param. 2. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Priorité EM] sur l'onglet Param. 2. Le bouton s'affiche en vidéo inverse. Pour annuler la fonction, appuyez à nouveau sur le bouton pour le désélectionner. 6 Opérations Relais IP 6-26 bizhub 362/282/222 Spécifier les paramètres d'émission horloge 1 Appuyez sur [Menu]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX]. 2 Appuyez sur [Param. TX horloge] sur l'onglet Param. 2. – Si le kit Fax en option est installez, appuyez sur [Param TX horloge] sur l'onglet Param. 2 3 Spécifiez l'heure d'envoi de l'émission. – Appuyez sur [Heure] ou [Minute], et tapez sur le clavier numérique l'heure désirée. 4 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Pour annuler la fonction, appuyez sur [NON]. 2 Remarque Il est possible de spécifier jusqu'à 200 documents avec une émission horloge. Opérations Relais IP 6 bizhub 362/282/222 6-27 Spécifier le paramètre Tampon 1 Appuyez sur [Menu]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX]. 2 Appuyez sur [Tampon] sur l'onglet Param. 2. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Tampon] sur l'onglet Param. 2. 3 Sélectionnez la position du tamponnage, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. 6 Opérations Relais IP 6-28 bizhub 362/282/222 6.6 Si l'émission n'est pas arrivée à son terme Si l'émission ne s'est pas achevée correctement, un rapport du résultat de l'émission est imprimé. ! Détails Vous pouvez modifier le paramètre d'impression du rapport d'émission. Pour plus de détails, voir le guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner Réseau]. Consulter le rapport d'émission No. Rubrique Description 1 Date d'émission du rapport Montre la date d'émission du rapport. 2 Nom de l'identifiant Indique le nom de l'identifiant. 3 Informa tion sur l'émission Montre le numéro du document émis, la durée requise et le mode de communication. Rouleau 2 1 3 5 4 Opérations Relais IP 6 bizhub 362/282/222 6-29 Réexpédition 20 documents au maximum n'ayant pas pu être envoyés sont enregistrés pour une nouvelle tentative. 1 Appuyez sur [Liste Tâches], puis [Type], et sélectionnez le document qui n'a pas pu être envoyé. – Si [Réessayer] ou [Changer Destination] apparaissent à l'écran, le document peut être envoyé une nouvelle fois sans qu'une nouvelle numérisation ne s'impose. 2 Pour envoyer le document au même destinataire, appuyez sur [Réessayer]. – Pour envoyer le document à un destinataire différent, appuyez sur [Changer Destination]. 4 Résultats d'émission Indique les résultats de l'émission. L'une des informations suivantes peut s'afficher. OK : l'émission s'est déroulée avec succès. INTERR : l'émission a été interrompue. F.MEM : la mémoire est pleine. NG : l'émission s'est soldée par un échec. PT.DEL : l'émission vers certains destinataires a échoué. F.DATA : Le volume des données a dépassé la limite admissible. IMG NG : La résolution d'émission était incorrecte et l'émission a donc été interrompue. Code d'erreur : Pour plus de détails, voir "Codes d'erreur" à la page 9-4. 5 Image transmise Reproduit une partie de l'image émise. No. Rubrique Description 6 Opérations Relais IP 6-30 bizhub 362/282/222 6.7 Enregistrer un destinataire Programmer un bouton 1-touche Si un destinataire est enregistré avec un bouton de numérotation 1-touche, l'émission peut être envoyée facilement et avec précision. Deux types de destinataires peuvent être enregistrées sous un bouton de numérotation 1-touche : un destinataire principal et un destinataire secondaire, les données étant envoyées à cette dernière en cas d'échec de l'émission au destinataire principal. 2 Remarque Si le paramètre "Limiter Edition 1-Touche" de l'écran Mode Administrateur (affiché à partir de l'écran de Gestion administrateur 1) est réglé sur "Oui", si des paramètres de commutation logicielle avaient été spécifiés pour limiter l'enregistrement de boutons de numérotation 1-Touche à l'administrateur, ou si "Sécurité renforcée" est réglé sur "Oui", les boutons de numérotation 1-Touche peuvent seulement être enregistrés, édités ou supprimés en mode Administrateur. Pour plus de détails sur les réglages en mode Administrateur, se référer au guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Fax]. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres de commutation logicielle, voir "Spécifier les paramètres d'activation du logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil)" à la page 8-11. ! Détails Les modes de communication suivants peuvent être spécifiés pour la destination secondaire. - PC (E-mail) - PC (Scanner) - Internet FAX (Internet FAX) - Internet FAX (EM-IP) - Internet FAX (Relais IP) - FAX (G3) Le mode de communication peut être spécifié si le kit Fax, en option, est installé. 2 Remarque Certains modes de communication risquent de ne pas être disponibles, selon les réglages de la machine. Pour plus de détails, consultez l'administrateur. Opérations Relais IP 6 bizhub 362/282/222 6-31 Vous pouvez spécifier les paramètres suivants. 2 Rappel Si la touche [Utilitaire/Compteur] est actionnée pour enregistrer des éléments et spécifier des paramètres, n'oubliez pas d'appuyer sur la touche [Réinitialisation] sur le panneau de contrôle après être retourné à l'écran d'accueil. Rubrique Description Nom destination à distance Tapez le nom du destinataire censé figurer sur le bouton de numérotation 1-Touche. Ce champ peut comporter 12 caractères maximum. Exemple : Tokyo br Destination Entrez le numéro de fax du destinataire. Le numéro entré peut comporter jusqu'à 64 caractères. Paramètres station de relais IP Sélectionnez la station de relais. 6 Opérations Relais IP 6-32 bizhub 362/282/222 Pour programmer un bouton 1-touche 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaire/Compteur]. 2 Appuyez sur [Paramètres Utilis.]. 3 Appuyez sur [Entrée E-mail]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [FAX]. 4 Appuyez sur [1-Touche]. Opérations Relais IP 6 bizhub 362/282/222 6-33 5 Appuyez sur le bouton du destinataire 1-Touche à enregistrer. – Appuyez sur un onglet d'index ou sur [Répertoire] et appuyez ensuite sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche souhaité. – Si l'appareil est réglé pour autoriser les recherches LDAP, un écran s'affiche pour permettre la définition du bouton 1-Touche pour interdire ou autoriser la possibilité de découverte de l'adresse par une recherche LDAP. Pour ce bouton, sélectionnez "Non". 6 Tapez le nom du destinataire qui apparaîtra sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche, et appuyez sur [Suite]. 7 Sélectionnez le mode de communication. Appuyez sur [FaxInternet], ensuite sur [Relais IP] et sur [Entrée]. 8 Entrez le numéro de fax du destinataire. – Le numéro entré peut comporter jusqu'à 64 caractères. – Pour changer le numéro de fax qui a été entré, appuyez sur la touche [C] (effacer), et entrez le numéro de fax correct. 6 Opérations Relais IP 6-34 bizhub 362/282/222 9 Pour changer la machine de relais, appuyez sur [Station relais], puis sélectionnez la station de relais souhaitée. 10 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. 11 Appuyez sur [Suite]. 12 Vérifiez les informations à enregistrer, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. 13 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran d'accueil s'affiche. Opérations Relais IP 6 bizhub 362/282/222 6-35 Changer/supprimer un bouton de numérotation 1-touche 1 Exécutez les étapes 1 à 4 de la procédure décrite dans "Pour programmer un bouton 1-touche". 2 Appuyez sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche que vous voulez modifier ou supprimer. 3 Appuyez sur le bouton dont vous voulez changer le réglage, puis procédez à la modification. – Pour supprimer le bouton de numérotation 1-touche, appuyez sur la touche [Supprime]. 4 Vérifiez les informations à enregistrer, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran d'accueil s'affiche. 6 Opérations Relais IP 6-36 bizhub 362/282/222 Copier un bouton 1-touche 1 Exécutez les étapes 1 à 4 de la procédure décrite dans "Pour programmer un bouton 1-touche". 2 Appuyez sur le bouton du destinataire 1-Touche à copier. 3 Appuyez sur [1-Touche] et ensuite sur [Copie 1-Touche]. 4 Appuyez sur le bouton sous lequel les paramètres de bouton de numérotation 1-touche sont censés être copiés. – Sélectionnez un bouton de numérotation 1-touche ne comportant encore aucun paramètre enregistré. – Pour désélectionner le bouton 1-touche de destination pour la copie, il suffit d'appuyer une nouvelle fois sur le bouton sélectionné. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran d'accueil s'affiche. Opérations Relais IP 6 bizhub 362/282/222 6-37 Enregistrer/Editer/Supprimer le destinataire secondaire 1 Exécutez les étapes 1 à 4 de la procédure décrite dans "Pour programmer un bouton 1-touche". 2 Appuyez sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche sur lequel un destinataire secondaire est censé être programmé. 3 Appuyez sur [1-Touche], puis [Enregistrement adresse secondaire]. 4 Entrez les informations relatives au destinataire secondaire, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Si une destination secondaire est déjà enregistrée, vérifiez les paramètres qui s'affichent et appuyez ensuite sur [Changer Paramètres] ou sur [Supprime]. – En cas de suppression, un message de confirmation s'affiche. Appuyez sur [Oui]. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran d'accueil s'affiche. 6 Opérations Relais IP 6-38 bizhub 362/282/222 7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7 bizhub 362/282/222 7-3 7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7.1 Paramètres que vous pouvez définir avec PageScope Web Connection PageScope Web Connection est un utilitaire de gestion de périphériques pris en charge par le serveur HTTP intégré à la machine. À partir d'un navigateur Internet installé sur un ordinateur relié au réseau, vous pouvez définir des paramètres de machine avec PageScope Web Connection. Il est commode de spécifier les paramètres avec l'utilitaire parce que le texte peut ainsi être facilement saisi depuis votre ordinateur au lieu du panneau de commande de la machine. Vous pouvez spécifier les paramètres de fonction de réseau et de numérisation suivante. PageScope Web Connection propose un mode Utilisateur, accessible à tous les utilisateurs, et un mode Administrateur, accessible seulement après introduction du code d'accès Administrateur approprié. Les paramètres suivants peuvent être spécifiés dans chaque mode. Onglet Lecture (mode Utilisateur) 2 Remarque Si le kit Fax en option est installé, l'onglet Lecture se transforme en Fax/Lecture. Paramètre Description Enregistrement adresse 1-touche Programmez les enregistrements 1-touche pour les destinataires du document envoyé en utilisant la fonction de télécopie par adresse IP et les opérations Scan vers PC et relais IP. Il est possible de modifier ou effacer les données enregistrées. Il est également possible de changer le nom d'index. Enregistrement d'un Programme FAX Enregistrer des programmes fax comme enregistrements 1-touche. Contrairement aux enregistrements 1-touche où seuls les destinataires sont enregistrés, il est possible d'enregistrer les paramètres de numérisation et plusieurs destinataires. Il est possible de modifier ou effacer les données enregistrées. Pour plus de détails, voir le guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner Réseau]. 7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7-4 bizhub 362/282/222 2 Remarque Si le paramètre "Limiter Edition 1-Touche" de l'écran Mode Administrateur (affiché à partir de l'écran de Gestion Administrateur) est réglé sur "Oui", l'onglet Scan (2) est ajouté à la page du mode Administrateur pour que les destinataires 1-Touche puissent être enregistrés, modifiés et supprimés. L'onglet Lecture n'apparaît pas sur la page du mode Utilisateur. Onglet Réseau (Mode Administrateur) Pour plus de détails sur les autres paramètres réseau requis pour l'utilisation de cette machine, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner réseau]. Paramètre Description Paramètres relais IP Lorsque vous envoyez une télécopie en relais IP, spécifiez l'adresse IP et le nom de domaine des machines de relais. En outre, il est possible de sélectionner les principales stations de relais à utiliser. Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7 bizhub 362/282/222 7-5 7.2 Utiliser PageScope Web Connection Configuration minimale requise ! Détails PageScope Web Connection est un utilitaire de gestion de périphériques supporté par le serveur HTTP intégré au périphérique. À l'aide d'un navigateur Internet sur un ordinateur connecté au réseau, vous pouvez définir des paramètres de machine avec PageScope Web Connection. 2 Rappel Ne pas utiliser de serveur proxy en cas d'accès à partir de PageScope Web Connection. 2 Remarque Si cette machine a été réglée pour interdire l'utilisation de TCP/IP, vous ne pourrez pas utiliser PageScope Web Connection. Rubrique Environnement Réseau Ethernet (TCP/IP) Applications informatiques Pour Windows NT 4.0 : Microsoft Internet Explorer 4 ou ultérieur, ou Netscape Navigator 4.73 ou 7.0 Pour Windows 2000 : Microsoft Internet Explorer 5 ou ultérieur, ou Netscape Navigator 7.0 Pour Windows XP/Server 2003 : Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 ou ultérieur, ou Netscape Navigator 7.0 Pour Windows Vista/Server 2008 : Microsoft Internet Explorer 7 ou ultérieur, ou Netscape Navigator 7.0 * Avec Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5, il se peut que les boutons 1-touche ne soient correctement exportés. Utilisez Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 Service Pack 1 ou ultérieur. 7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7-6 bizhub 362/282/222 Accéder à PageScope Web Connection Vous pouvez accéder à PageScope Web Connection à partir d'un navigateur Internet. 1 Lancez le navigateur Internet. 2 Dans la barre d'adresses, tapez l'adresse IP de cette machine et appuyez ensuite sur la touche [Entrée]. – http:/// Exemple : si l'adresse IP de cet appareil est 192.168.1.20 http://192.168.1.20/ ! Détails Si SSL/TLS est activé, l'URL devient : https:/// Même si "http://" est saisi, l'accès à l'URL sur "https://" est automatique. (Si "Sécurité renforcée" est réglé sur "Oui", SSL est activé de manière forcée.) Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7 bizhub 362/282/222 7-7 Si les réglages Authentification Utilisateur ont été appliqués. Si les paramètres d'Authentification Utilisateur ou d'Authentification serveur externe ont été appliqués, la page suivante apparaît. Tapez le Nom Utilisateur et le mot de passe et cliquez ensuite sur [Connexion]. ! Détails Pour plus de détails sur l'authentification utilisateur, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Copie]. Pour obtenir un nom d'utilisateur et un mot de passe, contactez l'Administrateur réseau. Lorsque vous êtes connecté en mode Authentification Utilisateur, la connexion est soumise à un délai ; vous serez automatiquement déconnecté du mode Administrateur si aucune opération n'est effectuée pendant 10 minutes. Si "Sécurité renforcée" est réglé sur "Oui" ou si des verrouillages d'accès sont spécifiés par l'intermédiaire des paramètres de commutation logicielle, la saisie incorrecte trois fois de suite d'un mot de passe verrouille la machine pour empêcher toute opération. Si cette machine est verrouillée, contactez l'administrateur de la machine. Pour vous déconnecter, cliquez sur [Déconnexion] dans le coin supérieur droit de la page. Si les paramètres Authentification Groupe ont été appliqués Si les paramètres Authentification Groupe ont été appliqués, il n'est pas nécessaire d'entrer le numéro de compte pour accéder à PageScope Web Connection. 7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7-8 bizhub 362/282/222 Structure des pages La page qui apparaît immédiatement après l'accès à PageScope Web Connection est la page du mode Utilisateur. Tous les utilisateurs peuvent voir cette page. ! Détails Si vous saisissez le mot de passe dans le champ "Mot de passe administrateur", vous pouvez afficher la page administrateur. Pour plus de détails, voir "Connexion en mode Administrateur" à la page 7-10. Les pages de PageScope Web Connection sont structurées comme illustré ci-dessous. 7 3 4 5 6 1 8 9 10 2 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7 bizhub 362/282/222 7-9 2 Remarque Pour restaurer l'afficheur d'état et des messages, cliquez sur [Actualiser] dans le navigateur. No. Rubrique Description 1 Logo Konica Minolta Cliquez sur le logo pour accéder au site Konica Minolta Web à l'adresse suivante. http://konicaminolta.com 2 Logo PageScope Web Connection Cliquez sur le logo PageScope Web Connection pour afficher les informations de version. 3 Champ de connexion mode administrateur Entrez le mot de passe pour vous connecter au mode administrateur. 4 Affichage des états Les états des sections Imprimante et scanner de la machine s'affichent sous forme d'icônes. 5 Affichage des messages Si une erreur survient sur la machine, l'état du défaut/de l'erreur et d'autres informations d'erreur s'affichent. 6 Nom périphérique Affiche le nom du périphérique en cours d'accès. 7 Bouton [Déconnexion] Ce bouton apparaît une fois que vous êtes connecté lorsque les paramètres Authentification Utilisateur ont été appliqués. Cliquez sur ce bouton pour vous déconnecter. 8 Onglets Sélectionnez la catégorie des pages à afficher. Les onglets suivants s'affichent en mode Utilisateur. • Système • Tâche • Impression • Lecture 2 Remarque Si le kit Fax, en option, a été installé, l'onglet Fax/Lecture apparaît. 9 Menu Liste des informations et paramètres de l'onglet sélectionné. Le menu qui s'affiche varie en fonction de l'onglet sélectionné. 10 Informations et paramètres Affiche des détails du point de menu sélectionné. 7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7-10 bizhub 362/282/222 Connexion en mode Administrateur Vous pouvez passer du mode utilisateur au mode administrateur. Mais, pour définir des paramètres système ou réseau, vous devez être connecté en mode administrateur. 0 Quand vous êtes connecté en mode administrateur, le panneau de contrôle de cet appareil est verrouillé et ne peut pas être utilisé. 0 En fonction de l'état de la machine, vous pouvez ne pas pouvoir vous connecter en mode administrateur. 0 Quand vous êtes connecté en mode administrateur, si aucune opération n'est effectuée pendant une durée de 10 minutes, une temporisation survient et vous serez automatiquement déconnecté du mode administrateur. 1 Tapez le code d'accès administrateur et cliquez ensuite sur [Connexion]. Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7 bizhub 362/282/222 7-11 La page du mode administrateur s'affiche. 2 Pour retourner au mode Utilisateur, cliquez sur [Déconnexion]. 7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7-12 bizhub 362/282/222 Cache du navigateur Internet Les informations toutes récentes peuvent ne pas apparaître sur les pages de PageScope Web Connection parce que d'anciennes versions des pages sont enregistrées dans le cache du navigateur Internet. En outre, les problèmes suivants risquent de survenir lors de l'utilisation du cache. Quand vous utilisez PageScope Web Connection, désactivez le cache du navigateur Internet. ! Détails Si vous utilisez le programme avec le cache activé et que le mode administrateur a été désactivé, la page de désactivation risque d'apparaître même si vous réaccédez à PageScope Web Connection. En outre, comme le panneau de contrôle de la machine reste verrouillé et qu'il est inutilisable, il faut redémarrer la machine. Pour éviter ce problème, désactivez le cache. 2 Remarque Les menus et les commandes peuvent varier en fonction de la version du navigateur Internet. Pour plus de détails, voir l'Aide du navigateur Internet. Avec Internet Explorer 1 Dans le menu "Outils", cliquez sur "Options Internet". 2 Sur l'onglet Général, cliquez sur [Paramètres] sous "Fichiers Internet temporaires". 3 Sélectionnez "A chaque visite de la page" et cliquez ensuite sur [OK]. Avec Netscape 1 Dans le menu "Edition", cliquez sur "Préférences". 2 Dans le champ "Catégorie" sur la gauche de la boîte de dialogue, cliquez sur "Avancées", puis sur "Cache". 3 Sous "Comparer la page du cache à la page sur le réseau", sélectionnez "A chaque fois que je visite la page". Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7 bizhub 362/282/222 7-13 7.3 Enregistrement adresse 1-touche (mode Utilisateur) Enregistrer les destinataires de données numérisées comme enregistrements 1-touche. Il est également possible de spécifier le nom d'index. ! Détails Cette machine accepte l'enregistrement de 36 index, chacun pouvant contenir un maximum de 15 boutons 1-touche et Programmes Fax. Vous pouvez enregistrer les types de destinataires suivants. Type Description Emission : PC (Scanner) Permet d'enregistrer un destinataire pour une opération Scan vers PC. Vous pouvez également enregistrer un destinataire secondaire en cas d'échec de l'émission. Emission : FaxInternet (Réception IP) Enregistre un destinataire d'une télécopie par adresse IP. Vous pouvez enregistrer un destinataire secondaire en cas d'échec de l'émission. Emission : FaxInternet (Relais IP) Enregistre un destinataire d'une émission par relais IP. Vous pouvez enregistrer un destinataire secondaire en cas d'échec de l'émission. 7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7-14 bizhub 362/282/222 Les paramètres suivants sont disponibles sur la page de chaque mode de communication. Si vous aviez sélectionné "Emission : PC (Scanner)" Paramètre Description Nom destination à distance Introduisez le nom du destinataire tel qu'il apparaîtra sur le bouton de d'enregistrement 1-touche. Ce champ peut comporter 12 caractères maximum. Exemple : Tokyo br Adresse destination Saisissez l'adresse IP ou le nom d'hôte du destinataire. 2 Remarque Vous pouvez saisir un nom d'hôte si la "Configuration DNS" (spécifié depuis l'écran Paramètres réseau) est réglé sur "OUI". No de port Entrez le numéro du port (entre 1 et 65535). Type de fichier Sélectionnez le format "TIFF" ou "PDF") du fichier à envoyer. Méthode de codage Sélectionnez la méthode de codage des données à envoyer. Sélectionnez "MH" ou "MMR". La quantité des données est moindre avec la méthode de codage MMR qu'avec la méthode MH. Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7 bizhub 362/282/222 7-15 Si vous aviez sélectionné "Emission : IFAX (IP-TX)" Paramètre Description Nom destination à distance Introduisez le nom du destinataire tel qu'il apparaîtra sur le bouton de d'enregistrement 1-touche. Ce champ peut comporter 12 caractères maximum. Exemple : Tokyo br Adresse destination Saisissez l'adresse IP ou le nom d'hôte du destinataire. 2 Remarque Vous pouvez saisir un nom d'hôte si la "Configuration DNS" (spécifié depuis l'écran Paramètres réseau) est réglé sur "OUI". No de port Entrez le numéro du port (entre 1 et 65535). Taille Emission (Max.) Spécifiez la taille maximum du document qui peut être émis. Sélectionnez "Letter/Legal" ou "11 e 17". Qualité Emission (Max.) Sélectionnez la résolution maximum pour l'émission. Sélectionnez "200 ppp", "400 ppp" ou "600 ppp". Méthode de codage Sélectionnez la méthode de codage des données à envoyer. Sélectionnez "MH", "MR" ou "MMR". Le volume des données par ordre croissant est le suivant : MMR, MR, MH. 7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7-16 bizhub 362/282/222 Si vous aviez sélectionné "TX : Internet FAX (relais IP)" Paramètre Description Nom destination à distance Introduisez le nom du destinataire tel qu'il apparaîtra sur le bouton de d'enregistrement 1-touche. Ce champ peut comporter 12 caractères maximum. Exemple : Tokyo br Numéro de destination Entrez le numéro de fax du destinataire. Le numéro entré peut comporter jusqu'à 64 caractères. STA relai (Station de relais) Sélectionnez la station de relais. Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7 bizhub 362/282/222 7-17 Donner un nom à un index 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Lecture. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, cliquez sur l'onglet Fax/Lecture. 2 Cliquez sur [Enregistrement adresse une-touche]. 3 Dans la liste "Index", cliquez sur un nom d'index (centre du tableau). Les destinataires 1-touche enregistrés dans l'index sélectionné apparaissent en bas de la page. 7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7-18 bizhub 362/282/222 4 Tapez le nom de l'index, puis appuyez sur [Appliquer]. – Ce champ peut comporter 8 caractères maximum. Une liste des index s'affiche en haut de la page. Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7 bizhub 362/282/222 7-19 Enregistrer un destinataire 1-touche 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Lecture. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, cliquez sur l'onglet Fax/Lecture. 2 Cliquez sur [Enregistrement adresse une-touche]. 3 Dans la liste "Index", cliquez sur l'index où le destinataire 1-touche est censé être enregistré. Les destinataires 1-touche enregistrés dans l'index sélectionné apparaissent en bas de la page. 4 Cliquez sur un enregistrement 1-touche pas encore programmé. – Les enregistrement 1-touche qui ne sont pas encore programmés s'affichent comme "---". 7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7-20 bizhub 362/282/222 5 Sélectionnez le mode communication à enregistrer, puis cliquez sur [Suivant]. – Certains modes de communication risquent de ne pas être disponibles, selon les réglages de la machine. Pour plus de détails, consultez l'administrateur. 6 Spécifiez les paramètres dans la page du mode de communication sélectionné. 7 Cliquez sur [Appliquer]. Le destinataire 1-touche est désormais enregistré. Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7 bizhub 362/282/222 7-21 Enregistrer une adresse secondaire Si vous aviez sélectionné "Emission : PC (Scanner)", "Emission : IFAX (IP-TX)" ou "Emission : Internet FAX (Relais IP)", vous pouvez spécifier un destinataire secondaire en cas d'échec de l'émission. ! Détails Les modes de communication suivants peuvent être spécifiés pour la destination secondaire. - Emission : PC (E-mail) - Emission : PC (Scanner) - Emission : FaxInternet (Emission IP) - Emission : FaxInternet (E-mail) - Emission : FaxInternet (Relais IP) - FAX (G3)* * Vous pouvez spécifier le mode de communication si le kit Fax en option est installé. 2 Remarque Certains modes de communication risquent de ne pas être disponibles, selon les réglages de la machine. Pour plus de détails, consultez l'administrateur. 7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7-22 bizhub 362/282/222 Pour enregistrer un destinataire secondaire 1 Cliquez sur le champ du destinataire 1-touche à programmer avec une adresse secondaire. 2 Cliquez sur [Suivant]. 3 Cliquez sur [Enreg. adr. 2ndaire]. Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7 bizhub 362/282/222 7-23 4 Sélectionnez le mode de communication pour le destinataire secondaire, et cliquez sur [Suivant]. – Certains modes de communication risquent de ne pas être disponibles, selon les réglages de la machine. Pour plus de détails, consultez l'administrateur. 7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7-24 bizhub 362/282/222 5 Spécifiez les divers paramètres, et cliquez sur [Appliquer]. – Pour plus de détails sur les différents paramètres, voir "Enregistrer un destinataire 1-touche" à la page 7-19. 2 Remarque Le nom qui apparaît à côté de "Nom 1-touche" est le même que celui qui a été spécifié pour le destinataire principal. Vous avez la possibilité de spécifier tous les autres paramètres. Pour supprimer le destinataire secondaire enregistré, cliquez sur [Effacer adr. 2ndaire]. Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7 bizhub 362/282/222 7-25 Modifier les paramètres d'un destinataire 1-touche 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Lecture. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, cliquez sur l'onglet Fax/Lecture. 2 Cliquez sur [Enregistrement adresse une-touche]. 3 Dans la liste "Index", cliquez sur l'index qui contient le destinataire 1-touche à modifier. Les destinataires 1-touche enregistrés dans l'index sélectionné apparaissent en bas de la page. 4 Cliquez sur le destinataire 1-touche dont les valeurs sont à modifier. – Ceci est normal, car il n'est pas possible de sélectionner un Programme Fax, même par un clic. 7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7-26 bizhub 362/282/222 5 Pour changer le mode de communication, sélectionnez celui qui convient et cliquez sur [Suivant]. – Certains modes de communication risquent de ne pas être disponibles, selon les réglages de la machine. Pour plus de détails, consultez l'administrateur. – Si une destination secondaire est déjà enregistrée, "Emission : PC (Serveur FTP)" et "Emission : PC (SMB)" n'apparaissent pas. 6 Spécifiez les paramètres dans la page du mode de communication sélectionné. – Pour plus de détails sur les différents paramètres, voir "Enregistrer un destinataire 1-touche" à la page 7-19. Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7 bizhub 362/282/222 7-27 Supprimer un destinataire 1-touche 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Lecture. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, cliquez sur l'onglet Fax/Lecture. 2 Cliquez sur [Enregistrement adresse une-touche]. 3 Dans la liste "Index", cliquez sur l'index qui contient le destinataire 1-touche à modifier. Les destinataires 1-touche enregistrés dans l'index sélectionné apparaissent en bas de la page. 7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7-28 bizhub 362/282/222 4 Sélectionnez la case du destinataire une touche à supprimer. 5 Cliquez sur [Effacer]. Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7 bizhub 362/282/222 7-29 7.4 Paramètres relais IP (mode Administrateur) Lorsque vous envoyez une télécopie en relais IP, spécifiez l'adresse IP et le nom de domaine des machines de relais. En outre, il est possible de sélectionner les principales stations de relais à utiliser. Sélectionner la station de relais IP à utiliser Sélectionner une station de relais IP depuis les machines de relais IP enregistrées au préalable. Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'une station de relais IP, voir "Enregistrer une station de relais IP" à la page 7-32. Vous pouvez spécifier les paramètres suivants. Paramètre Description Destination de relais IP L'adresse IP de la station de relais actuellement sélectionnée s'affiche. Pour changer la station de relais, cliquez sur [Sélectionner]. Port de résultat de relais Entrez le numéro du port qui recevra les résultas. Si vous changez ce numéro, il sera appliqué après l'arrêt et le redémarrage de la machine. 7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7-30 bizhub 362/282/222 Pour sélectionner une station de relais 1 En mode Administrateur, cliquez sur l'onglet Réseau. 2 Cliquez sur [Paramètres relais IP], ensuite sur [Paramètres relais IP]. 3 Pour changer la station de relais, cliquez sur [Select]. Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7 bizhub 362/282/222 7-31 4 Sélectionnez une station de relais enregistrée et cliquez ensuite sur [Appliquer]. 5 Modifiez les Paramètres de port si cela s'avère nécessaire. 6 Cliquez sur [Appliquer]. 2 Rappel Si vous modifiez le numéro du port, veillez à éteindre la machine et à la remettre en marche après la spécification des paramètres. Lorsque la machine est arrêtée puis remise en marche à l'aide de l'interrupteur général, attendre environ 10 secondes pour mettre la machine sous tension après l'avoir arrêtée. La machine risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement si vous la rallumez immédiatement après l'avoir arrêtée. 7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7-32 bizhub 362/282/222 Enregistrer une station de relais IP Il est possible d'enregistrer une station de relais IP ou de modifier ses paramètres. Vous pouvez enregistrer jusqu'à 8 stations de relais. Vous pouvez spécifier les paramètres suivants. Paramètre Description Adresse relais IP Saisissez l'adresse IP ou le nom d'hôte de la machine de relais. 2 Remarque Vous pouvez saisir un nom d'hôte si la "Configuration DNS" (spécifié depuis l'écran Paramètres réseau) est réglé sur "OUI". Port Entrez le numéro du port (entre 1 et 65535). Nom de domaine Tapez le nom de domaine de la station de relais. Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7 bizhub 362/282/222 7-33 Pour enregistrer une station de relais IP 1 En mode Administrateur, cliquez sur l'onglet Réseau. 2 Cliquez sur [Paramètres relais IP], ensuite sur [Enregistrement destination relais IP]. 3 Pour enregistrer une nouvelle station de relais, cliquez dans un champ dans lequel aucune adresse de station de relais n'a encore été enregistrée ("---"). – Pour modifier les paramètres enregistrés, cliquez sur une adresse IP qui s'affiche. – Pour supprimer une station de relais, sélectionnez la case de la station IP à supprimer et cliquez ensuite sur [Effacer]. 7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7-34 bizhub 362/282/222 4 Spécifiez les paramètres de la station de relais, puis cliquez sur [Appliquer]. 8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8 bizhub 362/282/222 8-3 8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8.1 Paramètres disponibles Paramètres pouvant être spécifiés depuis l'écran Gestion administrateur Les paramètres Gestion Administrateur suivants se rapportent aux informations contenues dans ce manuel. 2 Rappel Si la touche [Utilitaire/Compteur] est actionnée pour enregistrer des éléments et spécifier des paramètres, n'oubliez pas d'appuyer sur la touche [Réinitialisation] sur le panneau de contrôle après être retourné à l'écran d'accueil. Liste des paramètres réseau requis Il est recommandé de spécifier les paramètres réseau comme indiqué cidessous afin de pouvoir utiliser les opérations décrites dans le présent manuel. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres réseau autres que ceux disponibles sur l'écran Paramètres relais IP, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner réseau]. o : Requis / : Disponible + : Nécessaire en fonction de l'environnement - : Pas disponible avec l'opération Paramètre Description Paramètres relais IP Lorsque vous envoyez une télécopie en relais IP, spécifiez l'adresse IP et le nom de domaine des machines de relais. En outre, il est possible de sélectionner les principales stations de relais à utiliser. Commutation logicielle A utiliser pour spécifier les paramètres de l'appareil. 8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8-4 bizhub 362/282/222 ! Détails Lorsque vous utilisez les opérations de télécopie par adresse IP et de relais IP, ne spécifiez pas de paramètre pour "Nom de domaine propre". Fonctionnement Paramètre Télécopie par adresse IP Scan vers PC Scanner IP Relais IP Paramètres de base DHCP + + + + Paramètre adresse IP o o o o Masque Sous-Réseau o o o o Passerelle + + + + Nom Domaine Propre - - - - Paramètres Carte réseau + + + + Configuration DNS OUI/NON + + - + Nom hôte + + - + Nom de domaine + + - + Adresse serveur DNS + + - + Nom Equipement Nom Equipement / / / - Configuration SMTP Adresse du serveur SMTP - - - - Adresse E-mail - - - - Nom Utilisateur Authentification SMTP - - - - Mot de passe Authentification SMTP - - - - Configuration POP3 Adresse serveur POP3 - - - - Nom d'utilisateur POP3 - - - - Mot de passe POP3 - - - - Contrôle Réception Auto - - - - Niveau compression prioritaire Mode E-mail / - - - Mode Numérisation - / - - Scanner Settings (Paramètres Scanner) Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8 bizhub 362/282/222 8-5 Rapport d'activité - - - - Impr.En-tête Doc. Reçu - - - - Texte En-tête E-mail - - - - Passerelle Emission - - - + Objet - - - - Paramètres Fractionnement - - - - Ping : spécifiez selon les besoins. Définir le type de cadre : spécifier un type de cadre pour la connexion au serveur NetWare et l'utilisation de la fonction d'impression PC. Paramètres LDAP : spécifier pour effectuer une recherche LDAP. Filtrage IP : spécifier quand vous utilisez la fonction de filtrage IP. Paramètres relais IP Enregistrement station de relais IP - - - o Paramètres station de relais IP - - - o Port de résultat de relais - - - o Fonctionnement Paramètre Télécopie par adresse IP Scan vers PC Scanner IP Relais IP 8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8-6 bizhub 362/282/222 8.2 Paramètres relais IP Enregistrer une station de relais IP Il est possible d'enregistrer une station de relais IP. Vous pouvez enregistrer jusqu'à 8 stations de relais. Vous pouvez spécifier les paramètres suivants. Pour enregistrer une station de relais IP 1 Après avoir accédé au mode Administrateur, appuyez sur [Gestion Admin. 2]. 2 Appuyez sur [Paramètres Réseau], [Paramètres Réseau 2] et ensuite sur [Paramètres relais IP]. 3 Appuyez sur [Enregistrement Station relais IP]. Paramètre Description Adresse relais IP Saisissez l'adresse IP ou le nom d'hôte de la machine de relais. Port Entrez le numéro du port (entre 1 et 65535). Nom de domaine Tapez le nom de domaine de la station de relais. Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8 bizhub 362/282/222 8-7 4 Appuyez sur le bouton du numéro de l'emplacement pour l'enregistrement de la station de relais. 5 Appuyez sur [Adresse relais IP]. 6 Tapez l'adresse IP de la station de relais. – Pour enregistrer la station de relais en utilisant le nom d'hôte, appuyez sur [Nom Host] et tapez ensuite le nom d'hôte. [Nom Host] s'affiche uniquement si "Paramètres DNS" est sur "OUI". 7 Pour modifier le numéro de port, appuyez sur [Port], puis entrez le numéro de port souhaité. 8 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. 8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8-8 bizhub 362/282/222 9 Appuyez sur [Nom Domaine]. 10 Tapez le nom de domaine de la station de relais IP, et appuyez ensuite sur [Entrée]. 11 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran d'accueil s'affiche. Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8 bizhub 362/282/222 8-9 Sélectionner une station de relais IP 1 Après avoir accédé au mode Administrateur, appuyez sur [Gestion Admin. 2]. 2 Appuyez sur [Paramètres Réseau], [Paramètres Réseau 2] et ensuite sur [Paramètres relais IP]. 3 Appuyez sur [STA relais IP définie]. 4 Appuyez sur le bouton de la station de relais à utiliser et appuyez ensuite sur [Entrée]. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran d'accueil s'affiche. 8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8-10 bizhub 362/282/222 Spécifier le port de résultat de relais 1 Après avoir accédé au mode Administrateur, appuyez sur [Gestion Admin. 2]. 2 Appuyez sur [Paramètres Réseau], [Paramètres Réseau 2] et ensuite sur [Paramètres relais IP]. 3 Appuyez sur [Port résultat relais]. 4 Entrez le numéro de port où le résultat est censé être reçu, puis appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Pour changer le paramètre actuel, appuyez sur la touche [C] (effacer), et entrez le paramètre souhaité. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran d'accueil s'affiche. Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8 bizhub 362/282/222 8-11 8.3 Spécifier les paramètres d'activation du logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil) La spécification des paramètres de logiciel ("Sélection Mode", "Sélection Bit" et "Sélection HEXA") permet de modifier différentes fonctions de l'appareil en fonction de vos besoins spécifiques. 2 Rappel Ne changez aucun mode ou aucun bit qui n'est pas indiqué dans ce manuel. 2 Remarque Quand "Sécurité renforcée" est réglé sur "OUI", vous ne pouvez pas modifier les paramètres de commutation logicielle. Paramètres de logiciel SW Paramètre Description Sélection Mode Le paramètre à spécifier est exprimé par un nombre à trois chiffres. Utilisez le clavier pour saisir la valeur. Sélection Bit Les bits sont des nombres à 8 chiffres qui construisent l'état du mode. Vous pouvez spécifier une valeur pour chaque paramètre en attribuant un nombre binaire (0 ou 1) à chacun des bits (0 à 7). Sélection HEXA Spécifiez un paramètre pour chaque mode sous forme d'un nombre hexadécimal (0 à 9 et A à F). Le réglage de bit "0011 0000" est exprimé comme paramètre hexadécimal "30". Spécifiez un paramètre de mode en utilisant soit des bits soit des valeurs hexadécimales. 8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8-12 bizhub 362/282/222 Vous trouverez ci-dessous des exemples de paramètres pour "Sélection Bit" (nombre binaires) et "Sélection HEXA" (nombres hexadécimaux). Nombre décimal Paramètre "Sélection Bit" (nombre binaire) Paramètre "Sélection HEXA" (nombre hexadécimal) 0 0000 0000 00 1 0000 0001 01 2 0000 0010 02 3 0000 0011 03 4 0000 0100 04 5 0000 0101 05 6 0000 0110 06 7 0000 0111 07 8 0000 1000 08 9 0000 1001 09 10 0000 1010 0A 11 0000 1011 0B 12 0000 1100 0C 13 0000 1101 0D 14 0000 1110 0E 15 0000 1111 0F 16 0001 0000 10 17 0001 0001 11 18 0001 0010 12 19 0001 0011 13 20 0001 0100 14 ··· ··· ··· 252 1111 1100 FC 253 1111 1101 FD 254 1111 1110 FE 255 1111 1111 FF Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8 bizhub 362/282/222 8-13 Pour spécifier un paramètre de commutation logicielle 1 Après avoir accédé au mode Administrateur, appuyez sur [Gestion Admin. 2]. 2 Appuyez sur [Logiciel SW]. 3 Appuyez sur [Sélection Mode] et servez-vous ensuite du clavier pour taper le numéro du mode. 4 Spécifiez un paramètre de mode en utilisant soit des bits soit des valeurs hexadécimales. – Pour spécifier les bits, appuyez sur [Sélection Bit], puis sur [ ] ou [ ] pour déplacer le curseur sur le bit à changer, spécifiez le bit sur le clavier numérique, et appuyez ensuite sur [Entrée]. – Pour spécifier la valeur hexadécimale, appuyez sur [Sélection HEXA], spécifiez la valeur en vous servant du clavier numérique ou en appuyant sur les touches [A] à [F] et appuyez ensuite sur [Entrée]. 8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8-14 bizhub 362/282/222 5 Pour modifier le paramètre pour un mode différent, répétez les étapes 3 et 4. 6 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran d'accueil s'affiche. 7 Éteignez puis rallumez la machine. 2 Rappel Lorsque la machine est arrêtée puis remise en marche à l'aide de l'interrupteur général, attendre environ 10 secondes pour mettre la machine sous tension après l'avoir arrêtée. La machine risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement si vous la rallumez immédiatement après l'avoir arrêtée. Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8 bizhub 362/282/222 8-15 Spécifier les réglages pour limiter la numérotation et les émissions de radiodiffusion (mode 018) Spécifiez si les émissions de radiodiffusion et la numérotation pour spécifier les destinations sont limitées ou non. Réglages d'usine Spécifier le paramètre Pendant la production de cette unité, les paramètres des cellules estompées ont été sélectionnées. Les nombres de droite indiquent les numéros de page et les descriptions de la fonction correspondante. *1 Interdit quand le bit 6 du mode 477 de commutation logicielle est réglé de manière à ce que les paramètres ne puissent être modifiés qu'en mode Administrateur Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Réglage 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 (HEXA : 01) Bit Description Réglage Description Page de référence 7, 6, 5, 4 ---------------------- 0000 *Ne pas modifier ces bits lors de la spécification des paramètres de cette fonction. ---------- 3 Spécifie si oui ou non la numérotation pour spécifier une destination est interdite. *1 0 Permis ---------- 1 Interdit 2 Spécifie si oui ou non les émissions de radiodiffusion sont interdites. 0 Permis ---------- 1 Interdit 1, 0 ---------------------- 01 *Ne pas modifier ces bits lors de la spécification des paramètres de cette fonction. ---------- 8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8-16 bizhub 362/282/222 Spécifier les réglages de l'image sur le rapport de résultats (mode 023) Spécifiez si oui ou non une image du document transmis est ajoutée au rapport de résultats. Réglages d'usine Spécifier le paramètre Pendant la production de cette unité, les paramètres des cellules estompées ont été sélectionnées. Les nombres de droite indiquent les numéros de page et les descriptions de la fonction correspondante. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Réglage 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 (HEXA : F8) Bit Description Réglage Description Page de référence 7, 6, 5, 4 ----------------------- 1111 *Ne pas modifier ces bits lors de la spécification des paramètres de cette fonction. ---------- 3 Spécifie si oui ou non une image du document transmis est ajoutée au rapport de résultats. 0 N'est pas ajoutée p. 3-20, p. 4-20, p. 6-21 1 Est ajoutée 2, 1, 0 ----------------------- 000 *Ne pas modifier ces bits lors de la spécification des paramètres de cette fonction. ---------- Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8 bizhub 362/282/222 8-17 Spécifier les paramètres pour les émissions de récepteur vérifiées (mode 200) Spécifiez si oui ou non l'émission fax est envoyée après avoir vérifié le signal CSI (ID de l'abonné appelé) de la machine du destinataire. Réglages d'usine Spécifier le paramètre Pendant la production de cette unité, les paramètres des cellules estompées ont été sélectionnées. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Réglage 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 (HEX : 04) Bit Description Réglage Description Page de référence 7, 6, 5 ----------------------- 000 *Ne pas modifier ces bits lors de la spécification des paramètres de cette fonction. ---------- 4 Spécifie si oui ou non la machine effectue une émission de récepteur vérifiée si le numéro appelé ne contient pas de caractères spéciaux pour une émission de récepteur vérifié. 0 N'effectue pas d'émission de récepteur vérifiée ---------- 1 Effectue une émission de récepteur vérifiée 3, 2, 1, 0 Spécifie le nombre de chiffres du signal CSI qui sera comparé lors de l'exécution d'une émission de récepteur vérifiée. (Si le numéro appelé ne comporte pas le nombre de chiffres spécifiés ici, une comparaison sera faite avec tous les chiffres du numéro appelé. En cas de comparaison avec un numéro de comparaison utilisant des caractères spéciaux, la comparaison est faite avec tous les chiffres du numéro de comparaison, sans tenir compte du nombre de chiffres spécifié pour ce paramètre.) 0000 Annuler ---------- 0001 1 chiffre 0010 2 chiffres 0011 3 chiffres 0100 4 chiffres 0101 5 chiffres 0110 6 chiffres 0111 7 chiffres 1000 8 chiffres 1001 9 chiffres 1010 10 chiffres 1011-1111 *Ne pas spécifier ce réglage pour cette fonction. 8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8-18 bizhub 362/282/222 Elément comparé et réglage du nombre de chiffres comparé dans le signal CSI Exemple : quand le nombre de chiffres à comparer dans le signal CSI est réglé sur 6 et qu'un signal CSI de 10 chiffres est reçu Elément comparé Relation de comparaison Fonctionnement Numéro de téléphone du destinataire Quand le numéro de téléphone du destinataire comporte plus de chiffres que le nombre de chiffres à comparer dans le signal CSI La comparaison s'effectue en fonction du réglage de nombre de chiffres comparé au signal CSI. (avec un numéro appelé de 10 chiffres, le chiffre 6 à compter de la fin est comparé.) Quand le numéro de téléphone du destinataire comporte moins de chiffres que le nombre de chiffres à comparer dans le signal CSI La comparaison s'effectue uniquement avec le nombre de chiffres du numéro appelé. (avec un numéro appelé de 4 chiffres, le chiffre 4 à compter de la fin est comparé.) Numéro de comparaison Quand le numéro de comparaison comporte moins de chiffres que le nombre de chiffres dans le signal CSI La comparaison s'effectue uniquement avec le nombre de chiffres du numéro de comparaison. (avec un numéro de comparaison de 10 chiffres, le chiffre 10 à compter de la fin est comparé.) Quand le numéro de comparaison comporte plus de chiffres que le nombre de chiffres dans le signal CSI La comparaison s'effectue uniquement avec le nombre de chiffres du numéro de comparaison. (avec un numéro de comparaison de 11 chiffres ou plus, le chiffre 11 à compter de la fin est comparé.) Par conséquent, comme le signal CSI ne contient que 10 chiffres, il ne coïncidera pas, ce qui provoquera une erreur d'émission.) Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8 bizhub 362/282/222 8-19 Spécifier l'identification de la télécopie directe et la télécopie par adresse IP (mode 351) Spécifiez l'identification de la télécopie directe ou le transfert de documents fax reçus par adresse IP. Réglages d'usine Spécifier le paramètre Pendant la production de cette unité, les paramètres des cellules estompées ont été sélectionnées. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Réglage 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 (HEXA : 18) Bit Description Réglage Description Page de référence 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2 -------------------------- 000110 *Ne pas modifier ces bits lors de la spécification des paramètres de cette fonction. ---------- 1 Spécifie si le nom du périphérique de l'identifiant ou l'adresse IP est ajouté à la ligne Objet lors du transfert d'un document fax reçu par adresse IP. 0 Le nom du périphérique est prioritaire ---------- 1 L'adresse IP est prioritaire ---------- 0 -------------------------- 0 *Ne pas modifier ce bit lors de la spécification des paramètres de cette fonction. ---------- 8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8-20 bizhub 362/282/222 Spécifier si les informations de l'identifiant sont ajoutées en cas de télécopie directe, d'exécution d'une opération de relais IP ou de transfert de documents reçus (mode 352) Spécifier comment les informations de l'identifiant sont ajoutées en cas de télécopie directe, d'exécution d'une opération de relais IP ou de transfert de documents reçus. Réglages d'usine Spécifier le paramètre Pendant la production de cette unité, les paramètres des cellules estompées ont été sélectionnées. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Réglage 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 (HEXA : D0) Bit Description Réglage Description Page de référence 7 -------------------------- 1 *Ne pas modifier ce bit lors de la spécification des paramètres de cette fonction. ---------- 6 Spécifie où les informations de l'identifiant sont ajoutées en cas de télécopie directe et d'opérations de relais IP. 0 Hors du document ---------- 1 Sur le document 5 Pour spécifier si oui ou non des informations d'identification sont ajoutées aux documents reçus transférés. 0 Pas d'insertion ---------- 1 Insertion 4 Pour spécifier le mode d'ajout des informations d'identification dans le cas du transfert d'un document reçu. 0 Hors du document ---------- 1 Sur le document 3, 2, 1, 0 -------------------------- 0000 *Ne pas modifier ces bits lors de la spécification des paramètres de cette fonction. ---------- Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8 bizhub 362/282/222 8-21 Spécifier l'écran par défaut pour l'introduction d'adresses (mode 366) Spécifier l'écran par défaut des opérations de télécopie par adresse IP et Scan vers PC. Réglages d'usine Spécifier le paramètre Pendant la production de cette unité, les paramètres des cellules estompées ont été sélectionnées. Les nombres de droite indiquent les numéros de page et les descriptions de la fonction correspondante. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Réglage 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 (HEXA : 08) Bit Description Réglage Description Page de référence 7 -------------------------- 0 *Ne pas modifier ce bit lors de la spécification des paramètres de cette fonction. ---------- 6 Spécifier l'écran de saisie de l'adresse par défaut des opérations de télécopie par adresse IP et Scan vers PC. 0 Priorité à l'introduction de l'adresse IP p. 4-30 1 Priorité à l'introduction du nom d'hôte 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, 0 -------------------------- 001000 *Ne pas modifier ces bits lors de la spécification des paramètres de cette fonction. ---------- 8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8-22 bizhub 362/282/222 Spécifier les paramètres des informations censées figurer sur le rapport pour la télécopie directe/les émissions par relais IP (mode 368) Spécifiez si oui ou non les résultats d'émission de télécopie directe ou par relais IP figurent sur le rapport de réception. Réglages d'usine Spécifier le paramètre Pendant la production de cette unité, les paramètres des cellules estompées ont été sélectionnées. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Réglage 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 (HEXA : C2) Bit Description Réglage Description Page de référence 7 -------------------------- 1 *Ne pas modifier ce bit lors de la spécification des paramètres de cette fonction. ---------- 6 Spécifie la plage valide des mots de passe administrateur. *Sans tenir compte du réglage spécifié pour ce bit, cette machine est configurée pour demander le mot de passe administrateur pour la machine et avec PageScope Web Connection. 1 Le mot de passe administrateur est demandé pour la machine et avec Pagescope Web Connection. ---------- 5, 4, 3, 2 -------------------------- 0000 *Ne pas modifier ces bits lors de la spécification des paramètres de cette fonction. ---------- 1 Spécifie si oui ou non les résultats des émissions de document numérisé doivent figurer sur le rapport d'émission. 0 Aucune indication ---------- 1 Indication 0 Pour spécifier si oui ou non les résultats d'émission de télécopie directe ou par relais IP sont indiqués dans le rapport de réception. 0 Aucune indication ---------- 1 Indication Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8 bizhub 362/282/222 8-23 Spécifier la méthode de codage des émissions par relais IP (mode 381) Spécifiez les paramètres par défaut de la méthode de codage des émissions par relais IP. Réglages d'usine Spécifier le paramètre Pendant la production de cette unité, les paramètres des cellules estompées ont été sélectionnées. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Réglage 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (HEXA : 80) Bit Description Réglage Description Page de référence 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, -------------------------- 10000 *Ne pas modifier ces bits lors de la spécification des paramètres de cette fonction. ---------- 2, 1, 0 Pour spécifier la méthode de codage des émissions par relais IP. 000 MH ---------- 001 MR 010 MMR 011 JBIG Autres *Ne pas spécifier d'autres paramètres que ceux mentionnés ci-dessus lors du paramétrage de cette fonction. 8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8-24 bizhub 362/282/222 Spécifier les paramètres relatifs aux résultats d'émission des émissions par relais IP (mode 382) Spécifiez le délai des résultats d'émission dans le cas d'une émission par relais IP et l'opération exécutée lorsque le délai se produit. Réglages d'usine Spécifier le paramètre Pendant la production de cette unité, les paramètres des cellules estompées ont été sélectionnées. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Réglage 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 (HEXA : 40) Bit Description Réglage Description Page de référence 7 Pour spécifier l'opération exécuté en cas de délai du retour des résultats d'émission d'une émission par relais IP. 0 Erreur d'émission ---------- 1 Emission normale 6, 5, 4, 3 Pour spécifier le délais des résultats d'émission dans le cas d'une émission par relais IP.* 0000 0 minute ---------- 0001 5 minutes 0010 10 minutes 0011 15 minutes 0100 20 minutes 0101 30 minutes 0110 40 minutes 0111 50 minutes 1000 1 heure 1001 2 heures 1010 3 heures 1011 4 heures 1100 5 heures 1101 6 heures 1110 7 heures 1111 8 heures 2, 1, 0 -------------------------- 000 *Ne pas modifier ces bits lors de la spécification des paramètres de cette fonction. ---------- Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8 bizhub 362/282/222 8-25 * Si le délai spécifié est court, par exemple 5 ou 10 minutes, l'état d'un document en attente d'envoi à partir d'une machine de relais ou l'heure d'émission G3 de la machine de relais et du destinataire risquent de provoquer un délai (erreur d'émission). 8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8-26 bizhub 362/282/222 Spécifier des paramètres pour limiter l'utilisation des modes de communication–1 (mode 475) Spécifiez s'il faut interdire ou autoriser l'utilisation des modes de communication individuels. Les modes de communication interdits n'apparaissent pas sur les écrans de sélection. 2 Remarque Vous pouvez utiliser des boutons de numérotation 1-Touche programmés pour l'émission même si un mode de communication interdit est spécifié. Si tous les modes de communication sont interdits (modes 475 à 477), certains écrans, comme ceux dédiés à la spécification des paramètres d'émission ne s'afficheront peut-être pas normalement. Réglages d'usine Spécifier le paramètre Pendant la production de cette unité, les paramètres des cellules estompées ont été sélectionnées. Les nombres de droite indiquent les numéros de page et les descriptions de la fonction correspondante. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Réglage 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (HEXA : 00) Bit Description Réglage Description Page de référence 7 Spécifie si oui ou non l'utilisation de TCP/IP est interdite. 0 Permis ---------- 1 Interdit 6 Spécifie si oui ou non l'utilisation de LPD est interdite. 0 Permis ---------- 1 Interdit 5 Spécifie si oui ou non l'utilisation d'un port RAW est interdite. 0 Permis ---------- 1 Interdit 4 Spécifie si oui ou non l'utilisation de SLP est interdite. 0 Permis ---------- 1 Interdit 3 Spécifie si oui ou non l'utilisation de Scan vers FTP est interdite. 0 Permis ---------- 1 Interdit Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8 bizhub 362/282/222 8-27 2 Spécifie si oui ou non l'utilisation d'un serveur FTP est interdite. 0 Permis ---------- 1 Interdit 1 Spécifie si oui ou non l'utilisation de SNMP est interdite. 0 Permis ---------- 1 Interdit 0 ---------------------- 0 *Ne pas modifier ce bit lors de la spécification des paramètres de cette fonction. ---------- Bit Description Réglage Description Page de référence 8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8-28 bizhub 362/282/222 Spécifier des paramètres pour limiter l'utilisation des modes de communication–2 (mode 476) Spécifiez s'il faut interdire ou autoriser l'utilisation des modes de communication individuels. Les modes de communication interdits n'apparaissent pas sur les écrans de sélection. 2 Remarque Vous pouvez utiliser des boutons de numérotation 1-Touche programmés pour l'émission même si un mode de communication interdit est spécifié. Si tous les modes de communication sont interdits (modes 475 à 477), certains écrans, comme ceux dédiés à la spécification des paramètres d'émission ne s'afficheront peut-être pas normalement. Réglages d'usine Spécifier le paramètre Pendant la production de cette unité, les paramètres des cellules estompées ont été sélectionnées. Les nombres de droite indiquent les numéros de page et les descriptions de la fonction correspondante. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Réglage 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (HEXA : 00) Bit Description Réglage Description Page de référence 7 Spécifie si oui ou non l'utilisation de l'opération de Scan vers SMB est interdite. 0 Permis ---------- 1 Interdit 6 Spécifie si oui ou non l'utilisation de l'impression SMB est interdite. 0 Permis ---------- 1 Interdit 5 Spécifie si oui ou non l'utilisation de la télécopie G3 est interdite. 0 Permis ---------- 1 Interdit 4 Spécifie si oui ou non l'utilisation de l'opération de Scan vers HDD est interdite. 0 Permis ---------- 1 Interdit Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8 bizhub 362/282/222 8-29 3 Spécifie si oui ou non l'utilisation de l'opération de Scan vers E-Mail est interdite. 0 Permis ---------- 1 Interdit 2 Spécifie si oui ou non l'utilisation de l'opération de Fax Internet est interdite. 0 Permis ---------- 1 Interdit 1 Spécifie si oui ou non l'utilisation de relais IP est interdite. 0 Permis ---------- 1 Interdit 0 Spécifie si oui ou non l'utilisation de l'opération de Fax par adresse IP est interdite. 0 Permis ---------- 1 Interdit Bit Description Réglage Description Page de référence 8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8-30 bizhub 362/282/222 Spécifier des paramètres pour limiter l'utilisation des modes de communication–3/Spécifier des restrictions pour l'enregistrement des adresses Fax et l'impression de rapports et spécifier le mode d'affichage des destinataires 1-Touche (mode 477) Spécifiez s'il faut interdire ou autoriser l'utilisation des modes de communication individuels. Les modes de communication interdits n'apparaissent pas sur les écrans de sélection. Spécifiez si oui ou non les adresses Fax peuvent être enregistrées et si les rapports peuvent être imprimés par des utilisateurs et spécifiez si les informations de numérotation 1-Touche doivent figurer sur les écrans et les rapports. 2 Remarque Vous pouvez utiliser des boutons de numérotation 1-Touche programmés pour l'émission même si un mode de communication interdit est spécifié. Si tous les modes de communication sont interdits (modes 475 à 477), certains écrans, comme ceux dédiés à la spécification des paramètres d'émission ne s'afficheront peut-être pas normalement. Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8 bizhub 362/282/222 8-31 Réglages d'usine Spécifier le paramètre Pendant la production de cette unité, les paramètres des cellules estompées ont été sélectionnées. Les nombres de droite indiquent les numéros de page et les descriptions de la fonction correspondante. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Réglage 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (HEXA : 00) Bit Description Réglage Description Page de référence 7 Spécifie si oui ou non l'utilisation de l'ordinateur (Scanner) est interdite. 0 Permis ---------- 1 Interdit 6 Spécifie si les paramètres d'enregistrement des adresses Fax ou d'impression des rapports peuvent être spécifiés par l'utilisateur ou uniquement par l'administrateur. 0 Les utilisateurs peuvent aussi spécifier les paramètres. ---------- 1 Les paramètres peuvent uniquement être spécifiés en mode Administrateur. 5 Spécifie si oui ou non les noms de destinataire sont affichés (sans affichage du numéro de fax ou de l'adresse) sur les rapports et les écrans de Liste Travaux et lors de la pression sur un bouton de numérotation 1-Touche. *1, *2 0 Affichés ---------- 1 Non affichés 4 ----------------------- 0 *Ne pas modifier ce bit lors de la spécification des paramètres de cette fonction. ---------- 3 Spécifie si oui ou non l'utilisation de TCPSocket est interdite. 0 Permis ---------- 1 Interdit 2, 1, 0 ----------------------- 000 *Ne pas modifier ces bits lors de la spécification des paramètres de cette fonction. ---------- 8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8-32 bizhub 362/282/222 *1 Si le bit 6 est réglé sur "1", les paramètres ne s'appliqueront pas si le bit 5 est réglé sur "1" (non affichés). Si vous ne voulez pas afficher le numéro de fax ni l'adresse du destinataire, il faut aussi régler le bit 6 sur "1" (paramètres uniquement réglables en mode Administrateur). *2 Si le destinataire est spécifié directement depuis l'onglet Entrée adresse, le destinataire s'affichera, même si vous sélectionnez "1" (non affichés). Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8 bizhub 362/282/222 8-33 Spécifier la méthode de suppression pour [Supp] dans les écrans de saisie (mode 478) Spécifiez la méthode de suppression pour [Supp.] dans les écrans de saisie. Sélectionnez s'il faut supprimer ou non le caractère à l'emplacement du curseur ou le caractère à la gauche du curseur. Réglages d'usine Spécifier le paramètre Les cellules grises représentent le réglage en sortie d'usine. 2 Remarque Réglage par défaut : 0 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Réglage 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (HEXA : 00) Bit Description Réglage Description Page de référence 7 Spécifiez la méthode de suppression pour [Supp.] dans les écrans de saisie. 0 Supprime le caractère à l'emplacement du curseur p. 10-5 1 Supprime le caractère à la gauche du curseur 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, 0 ---------------------- 0000000 *Ne pas modifier ces bits lors de la spécification des paramètres de cette fonction. ---------- 8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8-34 bizhub 362/282/222 Spécifier les paramètres de limitation de l'authentification utilisateur aux seules fonctions de Numérisation (mode 479) Spécifiez s'il faut ou non procéder à l'authentification utilisateur seulement en cas de pression sur la touche [Fax/Scanner] ou [Scanner plus]. Réglages d'usine Spécifier le réglage Pendant la production de cette unité, les paramètres des cellules estompées ont été sélectionnées. Les nombres de droite indiquent les numéros de page et les descriptions de la fonction correspondante. 2 Rappel Ne pas spécifier de réglages pour le mode 479 autres que ceux décrits dans "Spécifier le réglage". ! Détails Si l'authentification utilisateur se limite aux fonctions de Numérisation, appuyez sur [Authentif. cpte/utilis] dans l'écran Gestion Administrateur 1 et sélectionnez ensuite "Serveur externe" comme méthode d'authentification utilisateur. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres d'authentification serveur externe, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Copie]. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Réglage 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (HEXA : 00) Bit Description Réglage Description Page de référence 7, 6, 5 ---------------------- 000 *Ne pas modifier ces bits lors de la spécification des paramètres de cette fonction. ---------- 4, 3, 2, 1, 0 Spécifie s'il faut ou non limiter l'authentification aux fonctions de Fax et de Numérisation. 11001 Limitée ---------- 00000 Illimitée 9 Localisation de pannes Localisation de pannes 9 bizhub 362/282/222 9-3 9 Localisation de pannes 9.1 A l'apparition d'un certain écran Si l'écran suivant apparaît, procéder à l'opération décrite ci-dessous. L'administrateur est connecté sur l'appareil à partir d'un ordinateur du réseau. Attendez que l'administrateur ait terminé son opération et se soit déconnecté. Si l'administrateur quitte le navigateur sans se déconnecter, l'administrateur doit se connecter à nouveau avant de se déconnecter. 9 Localisation de pannes 9-4 bizhub 362/282/222 9.2 Codes d'erreur Si une erreur s'est produite au cours de l'émission, un code d'erreur s'affiche dans la Liste des tâches ou dans un rapport. Procédez aux opérations décrites ci-dessous. Opérations Scan vers PC Code d'erreur Origine Remède EAXXXX L'adresse IP spécifiée par le destinataire est incorrecte. Rectifiez l'adresse IP du destinataire. ImageReceiver n'avait pas démarré. Démarrez ImageReceiver. L'adresse IP du destinataire n'est pas correctement spécifiée dans la boîte de dialogue après l'activation de "Paramètres de réception", puis de "Filtre de connexion" dans ImageReceiver. Cliquez sur "Paramètres de réception", puis sur "Filtre de connexion" dans ImageReceiver, spécifiez l'adresse IP correcte, puis redémarrez ImageReceiver. ImageReceiver ne fonctionne pas correctement. Redémarrez l'ordinateur. Réinstallez Scanner IP. Vérifiez les paramètres TCP/IP de l'ordinateur. Le câble LAN n'est pas connecté. Vérifiez si le câble LAN est correctement connecté. Les paramètres réseau de l'ordinateur ne sont pas correctement spécifiés. Vérifiez les paramètres TCP/IP de l'ordinateur. La charge réseau de l'ordinateur du destinataire est trop élevée. Vérifiez si des messages électroniques de taille importante ne sont pas reçus sur l'ordinateur du destinataire et si des fichiers de taille importante ne sont pas téléchargés à partir d'Internet. Trop de données sont envoyées. Si vous avez spécifié une haute résolution de numérisation, réduisez le nombre de pages numérisées en une fois et procédez à une nouvelle numérisation du document. Accès bloqué par le paramètre de pare-feu de l'ordinateur (pare-feu Windows) spécifié pour la connexion à Internet. Modifiez le paramètre de pare-feu de l'ordinateur (pare-feu Windows) pour la connexion à Internet conformément aux instructions de votre administrateur réseau. Localisation de pannes 9 bizhub 362/282/222 9-5 Opérations de scanner IP Code d'erreur Origine Remède EAXXXX ImageReceiver n'avait pas démarré. Démarrez ImageReceiver. L'adresse IP du destinataire n'est pas correctement spécifiée dans la boîte de dialogue après l'activation de "Paramètres de réception", puis de "Filtre de connexion". Cliquez sur "Paramètres de réception", puis sur "Filtre de connexion", spécifiez l'adresse IP correcte, puis redémarrez ImageReceiver. ImageReceiver ne fonctionne pas correctement. Redémarrez l'ordinateur. Réinstallez Scanner IP. Vérifiez les paramètres TCP/IP de l'ordinateur. Le câble LAN n'est pas connecté. Vérifiez si le câble LAN est correctement connecté. Les paramètres réseau de l'ordinateur ne sont pas correctement spécifiés. Vérifiez les paramètres TCP/IP de l'ordinateur. La charge réseau de l'ordinateur du destinataire est trop élevée. Vérifiez si des messages électroniques de taille importante ne sont pas reçus sur l'ordinateur du destinataire et si des fichiers de taille importante ne sont pas téléchargés à partir d'Internet. Trop de données sont envoyées. Si vous avez spécifié une haute résolution de numérisation, réduisez la résolution ou le nombre de pages numérisées en une fois et procédez ensuite à une nouvelle numérisation du document. Accès bloqué par le paramètre de pare-feu de l'ordinateur (pare-feu Windows) spécifié pour la connexion à Internet. Modifiez le paramètre de pare-feu de l'ordinateur (pare-feu Windows) pour la connexion à Internet conformément aux instructions de votre administrateur réseau. 9 Localisation de pannes 9-6 bizhub 362/282/222 Opérations relais IP Code d'erreur Origine Remède E53XXX Emission impossible parce que le destinataire spécifié pour l'émission passerelle est incorrect. Vérifiez auprès de l'expéditeur. E65XXX Une tentative d'envoi de données ne pouvant pas être envoyées dans le cadre d'une émission passerelle a été faite. Une tentative d'envoi de message électronique avec un fichier joint dans un format autre que TIFF-F ou contenant du texte dont une ligne comporte plus de 1000 caractères, a été faite. Vérifiez auprès de l'expéditeur. EBXXXX Impossible de recevoir les données envoyées dans le cadre d'une émission passerelle. Vérifiez si le serveur de courrier électronique est en mesure d'émettre et si les paramètres réseau sont corrects. Localisation de pannes 9 bizhub 362/282/222 9-7 9.3 Localisation de pannes Ci-après la description de quelques problèmes possibles et leurs solutions. Télécopie par adresse IP Problème Origine Remède L'émission n'est pas possible. Les connexions sont incorrectes. Vérifiez le témoin LED sur le hub et contrôlez les raccordements. Un temps mort s'est produit en fin de réception en raison de la taille trop importante des données image. • Augmenter la valeur de temps mort en fin de réception. • Réduire la taille des données image et procédez une nouvelle fois à l'émission. Les paramètres nécessaires au périphérique ne sont pas enregistrés. Spécifiez les paramètres réseaux nécessaires. Le câble LAN est endommagé. Remplacez le câble LAN. IP a été limité avec le filtrage IP. Consultez l'administrateur de la machine. Autres origines Vérifiez la liste d'émissions sur l'écran Liste des tâches pour afficher les détails de l'erreur d'émission, puis consultez le tableau des codes d'erreur. 9 Localisation de pannes 9-8 bizhub 362/282/222 Opérations Scan vers PC Problème Origine Remède L'émission n'est pas possible. -------- Vérifiez la liste d'émissions sur l'écran Liste des tâches pour afficher les détails de l'erreur d'émission, puis consultez le tableau des codes d'erreur. Le câble LAN est endommagé. Remplacez le câble LAN. IP a été limité avec le filtrage IP. Consultez l'administrateur de la machine. L'ordinateur ne reçoit pas les données. -------- Vérifiez la liste d'émissions sur l'écran Liste des tâches pour afficher les détails de l'erreur d'émission, puis consultez le tableau des codes d'erreur. Les données ont été reçues, mais il est impossible de visionner l'image. Scanner IP n'a pas démarré. Démarrez Scanner IP, vérifiez les nouvelles émissions, puis replacez le fichier des données reçues avec le fichier image. Une application permettant de visionner les images n'est pas installée, ou alors l'application est installée, mais pas reliée aux images. Installez la visionneuse. Reliez le fichier à une visionneuse qui vous permet de visionner les fichiers TIFF et PDF. Une erreur s'est produite lors de la conversion de l'image par le scanner ou alors le fichier n'a pas été correctement créé. Ce fichier est inutilisable. Quittez ImageReceiver, puis procédez à nouveau à la numérisation. Si vous avez spécifié une haute résolution de numérisation, réduisez la résolution ou le nombre de pages numérisées en une fois et procédez ensuite à une nouvelle numérisation du document. Impossible d'interrompre l'émission d'un terminal ou d'une réception vers un ordinateur. L'interruption de l'opération n'est pas immédiate. Attendez l'interruption de l'opération. Pour interrompre rapidement l'opération, quittez ImageReceiver. Les données déjà reçues par l'ordinateur mais pas encore traitées à l'aide du scanner IP seront toutefois supprimées. Localisation de pannes 9 bizhub 362/282/222 9-9 Opérations de scanner IP Problème Origine Remède L'émission n'est pas possible. -------- Vérifiez la liste d'émissions sur l'écran Liste des tâches pour afficher les détails de l'erreur d'émission, puis consultez le tableau des codes d'erreur. Les paramètres ne sont pas spécifiés correctement dans la boîte de dialogue qui s'affiche après avoir cliqué sur "Paramètres de réception", puis sur "Filtre de connexion". Vérifiez les paramètres dans la boîte de dialogue qui s'affiche après avoir cliqué sur "Paramètres de réception", puis sur "Filtre de connexion". Le câble LAN est endommagé. Remplacez le câble LAN. Deux cartes LAN sont installées. Cette configuration ne peut pas être utilisée si deux cartes LAN sont installées. Changez l'ordre de priorité dans les paramètres réseau de l'ordinateur (Windows). L'ordinateur ne reçoit pas les données. -------- Vérifiez la liste d'émissions sur l'écran Liste des tâches pour afficher les détails de l'erreur d'émission, puis consultez le tableau des codes d'erreur. Un autre programme de courrier électronique a été lancé. Quittez le programme de courrier électronique. Les données ont été reçues, mais il est impossible de visionner l'image. Scanner IP n'a pas démarré. Démarrez Scanner IP, vérifiez les nouvelles émissions, puis replacez le fichier des données reçues avec le fichier image. Une application permettant de visionner les images n'est pas installée, ou alors l'application est installée, mais pas reliée aux images. Installez la visionneuse. Reliez le fichier à une visionneuse qui vous permet de visionner les fichiers TIFF et PDF. Une erreur s'est produite lors de la conversion de l'image par le scanner ou alors le fichier n'a pas été correctement créé. Ce fichier est inutilisable. Quittez ImageReceiver, puis procédez à nouveau à la numérisation. Si la résolution de l'image est haute, réduisez la résolution ou le nombre de pages avant de procéder à la numérisation. Impossible d'interrompre l'émission d'un terminal ou d'une réception vers un ordinateur. L'interruption de l'opération n'est pas immédiate. Attendez l'interruption de l'opération. Pour interrompre rapidement l'opération, quittez ImageReceiver. Les données déjà reçues par l'ordinateur mais pas encore traitées à l'aide du scanner IP seront toutefois supprimées. 9 Localisation de pannes 9-10 bizhub 362/282/222 Le message "Erreur de connexion à la machine" s'affiche. La machine n'est pas en marche. Mettez la machine en marche. L'adresse IP du périphérique entrée dans Scanner IP est incorrecte. Rectifiez l'adresse IP. Le paramètre TCP/IP de l'ordinateur est incorrect. Vérifiez les paramètres réseau de l'ordinateur. L'utilisation de TCP/IP à partir de cette machine est interdite. Consultez l'administrateur de la machine. L'ordinateur n'est pas connecté à un réseau. Vérifiez les connexions réseau de l'ordinateur. Le câble LAN n'est pas connecté Vérifiez si le câble LAN est correctement connecté. Même si les paramètres SSL sont activés, aucun certificat n'est installé. Installez un certificat. Pour plus de détails, voir le guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner Réseau]. Même si les paramètres SSL sont activés, vous utilisez une version d'Internet Explorer antérieure à 5.0. Utilisez une version d'Internet Explorer 5.0 ou supérieure. Même si les paramètres SSL sont activés, le niveau de cryptage pour Internet Explorer est inférieur à 56 bits. Procurez-vous le pack de cryptage sur le site de Microsoft et installez-le. Un message Security Alert s'affiche. Installez un certificat. Le message "Erreur de connexion à ImageReceiver. Voulez- vous démarrer ImageReceiver ?" s'affiche. ImageReceiver n'avait pas démarré. Démarrez ImageReceiver. ImageReceiver ne fonctionne pas correctement. Redémarrez l'ordinateur. 2 Rappel Lorsque la machine est arrêtée puis remise en marche à l'aide de l'interrupteur général, attendre environ 10 secondes pour mettre la machine sous tension après l'avoir arrêtée. La machine risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement si vous la rallumez immédiatement après l'avoir arrêtée. Problème Origine Remède Localisation de pannes 9 bizhub 362/282/222 9-11 Le message "ImageReceiver détecté par XXX" s'affiche. Un autre logiciel utilise ce port. • Le serveur de courrier électronique et Scanner IP ne peuvent pas être utilisés simultanément. Ne démarrez pas le serveur de courrier électronique. En outre, si un autre logiciel en est la cause, quittez le logiciel qui est la source du problème. • suivez les instructions pour le changement de port. Le message "Erreur de connexion à ImageReceiver." s'affiche. Scanner IP ou ImageReceiver ne fonctionne pas correctement. Redémarrez l'ordinateur. Si le problème persiste, désinstallez Scanner IP et réinstallez-le ensuite. Le message "Erreur de création de fichiers image." s'affiche. Les données reçues sont inutilisables. Quittez ImageReceiver, redémarrez-le, puis procédez à nouveau à la numérisation. Lorsque vous quittez ImageReceiver, les données reçues n'ayant pas encore été traitées avec Scanner IP sont supprimées. L'ordinateur a été provisoirement soumis à une charge élevée. L'ordinateur n'est pas en mesure d'exécuter des processus complexes lors de la réception de l'image numérisée. Le format du fichier des données reçues est important. Les données reçues ont peut-être dépassé la taille utilisable par cet ordinateur. Réduisez la résolution ou le nombre de pages avant une nouvelle numérisation et émission. Il n'existe pas de répertoire de stockage. Créez un répertoire. Le répertoire est à mémoire morte. Activez la fonction d'écriture du répertoire. Le message "Impossible de trouver la clé scanner sélectionnée." s'affiche. Le bouton a déjà été supprimé de la machine. Vérifiez si le bouton a déjà été supprimé de la machine et reprogrammez un bouton de numérisation. Bien que le bouton ait été supprimé de la machine, l'icône indiquant que l'émission peut être effectuée s'est transformée en une icône de programmation d'un bouton de numérisation. Supprimez le bouton de numérisation de la machine. Sinon, éteignez et rallumez la machine. Cliquez sur le bouton [Supprimer clé scanner]. Même si vous aviez cliqué sur [Check now] rien ne s'est produit. Aucun fichier n'a été reçu. Procédez à une nouvelle numérisation. Impossible d'ouvrir les fichiers image. Le fichier n'est pas un fichier image reçu depuis le périphérique. Utilisez une visionneuse compatible avec les fichiers TIFF et PDF. Problème Origine Remède 9 Localisation de pannes 9-12 bizhub 362/282/222 L'image du fichier image n'est pas affichée correctement. Affichez l'image dans la visionneuse dans un format réduit. Visionnez l'image avec un taux zoom de 100%. Les données reçues sont inutilisables. Numérisez le document à nouveau. Impossible de démarrer Scanner IP. TCP/IP n'est pas prêt. Ouvrez les Connexions réseau et d'accès dans Windows, ajoutez le protocole Microsoft TCP/IP et redémarrez ensuite l'ordinateur. Scanner IP a déjà démarré. Il est impossible d'utiliser simultanément deux copies de l'utilitaire. ImageReceiver n'avait pas démarré. TCP/IP n'est pas prêt. Ouvrez les Connexions réseau et d'accès dans Windows, ajoutez le protocole Microsoft TCP/IP et redémarrez ensuite l'ordinateur. Puisque vous avez démarré ImageReceiver pendant la désinstallation précédente, pour ensuite le réinstaller alors que vous n'aviez pas redémarré l'ordinateur, il se peut que ImageReceiver ait été supprimé après le redémarrage. Désinstallez Scanner IP et réinstallezle ensuite. Le message "Le nombre de clés scanner a atteint le maximum." s'affiche. Six boutons de numérisation par Scanner IP ont déjà été programmés. Supprimez tous les boutons inutiles. Le message "Le nom de la clé scanner comporte des caractères invalides." s'affiche. Des caractères autres que les caractères standard ne peuvent pas être utilisés dans les noms de boutons. Spécifiez un nom de bouton qui ne comporte que des caractères standard. Le message "Adresse IP incorrecte" s'affiche. Des lettres sont saisies dans l'adresse IP. Spécifiez l'adresse IP dans le format xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx. Le message "Cette commande n'est pas acceptée actuellement." s'affiche. L'émission suivante est exécutée pendant la communication avec le copieur, par exemple, pendant la programmation ou la suppression d'un bouton. Attendre que la connexion actuelle soit coupée (jusqu'à ce que le message "Cette fonction n'est pas disponible actuellement. Réessayez plus tard." disparaisse de la barre des tâches au bas de la fenêtre) avant d'exécuter l'opération suivante. Le message "Erreur d'écriture du fichier image" s'affiche. Il n'y pas assez d'espace dans la destination d'enregistrement. Changez la destination d'enregistrement ou bien créez plus d'espace libre sur le disque. Il y a un problème de disque ou de destination d'enregistrement. Changez la destination d'enregistrement. Problème Origine Remède Localisation de pannes 9 bizhub 362/282/222 9-13 Le message "Impossible de trouver le dossier image" s'affiche. Le dossier spécifié n'existe pas. • Vérifiez le nom du dossier de stockage. • Changez le nom du dossier de stockage. Le message "Correspondance de l'imprimante illicite" apparaît. Vous utilisez une ancienne version de Scanner IP. Installez la version la plus récente de Scanner IP. Les données ne s'impriment pas automatiquement. Le réglage de l'impression automatique n'est pas spécifié dans la boîte de dialogue Scanner Settings. Pour imprimer automatiquement par numérisation avec un bouton de Scanner IP, sélectionnez "Yes" à côté de "Automatic Print" dans la boîte de dialogue Scanner Settings. Les données ne sont pas triées dans le dossier spécifié pour l'impression automatique. Pour imprimer automatiquement avec un bouton de numérotation 1-Touche, vérifiez que les données sont triées dans le dossier spécifié pour l'impression automatique. Le réglage d'ouverture de fichiers dans ImageReceiver n'est pas spécifié. Sélectionnez "Save received images" dans ImageReceiver. Le message "-impossible d'imprimer la page" apparaît. L'espace mémoire disponible est insuffisant sur l'ordinateur. • Fermez toutes les applications non utilisées et essayez de nouveau d'imprimer automatiquement. • Changez la taille de la mémoire virtuelle de l'ordinateur et essayez de nouveau d'imprimer automatiquement. • Diminuez la résolution et essayez de nouveau d'imprimer automatiquement. Le format de papier spécifié n'est pas supporté par l'ordinateur. Vérifiez les paramètres spécifiés au champ "Paper Select Method" et au champ groupé "Paper Settings". Le message "Echec de l'impression parce que l'imprimante sélectionnée est introuvable" apparaît. L'imprimante spécifiée pour l'impression automatique n'est pas enregistrée. Vérifiez que l'imprimante spécifiée au champ "Printer Name" est bien enregistrée (installée). Vous utilisez la mauvaise imprimante pour l'impression. D'autres paramètres ont un caractère prioritaire plus élevé. Vérifiez la priorité sur la liste "Folder For Printing" dans la boîte de dialogue Automatic Print Settings. Problème Origine Remède 9 Localisation de pannes 9-14 bizhub 362/282/222 Vous utilisez un format de papier non valide pour l'impression. Le réglage au champ "Paper Select Method" n'est pas spécifié correctement. Vérifiez le réglage spécifié au champ "Paper Select Method". Les paramètres du champ groupé "Paper Settings" ne sont pas spécifiés correctement. Vérifiez les paramètres spécifiés au champ "Paper Settings". Vous utilisez un format de papier non valide pour la numérisation. Spécifiez un réglage à côté de "Scan Area" et essayez de nouveau d'imprimer automatiquement. Le réglage de rotation automatique de l'image n'est pas spécifié. Sélectionnez la case "Automatically Rotates Image when Image Orientation is different from Paper Orientation." dans la boîte de dialogue Print Property. Il y a une perte au niveau des bords sur le résultat de l'impression. Le réglage dédié à la zone imprimable de l'imprimante n'est pas sélectionné. En cas de légère perte au niveau des bords, sélectionnez la case "Minimal" dans la boîte de dialogue Print Property. "Top Left" est sélectionné à côté de "Position". En cas de légère perte au niveau des bords supérieur et gauche, sélectionnez "Center" à côté de "Position" dans la boîte de dialogue Print Property. Le résultat d'impression ne s'imprime pas entièrement sur le papier. Le réglage de réduction de l'image pour s'ajuster au format du papier n'est pas sélectionné. Sélectionnez la case "Adjust Image to Fit to Paper Size" dans la boîte de dialogue Print Property. Le résultat de l'impression n'est pas au même format que l'image d'origine. Vous avez sélectionné un papier différent. Sélectionnez "Print on Paper Same as Image Size" à côté de "Paper Select Method" dans la boîte de dialogue Print Property. La case "Minimal" est cochée. Décochez la case "Minimal" dans la boîte de dialogue Print Property. "Center" est sélectionné à côté de "Position". Sélectionnez "Top Left" à côté de "Position" dans la boîte de dialogue Print Property. Il y a un motif (motifs moiré) sur le résultat d'impression. Un motif peut apparaître avec certaines imprimantes. Changez la résolution et essayez de nouveau d'imprimer automatiquement. L'opération d'impression automatique est lente. Les données d'image sont volumineuses. Diminuez la résolution et essayez de nouveau d'imprimer automatiquement. Problème Origine Remède Localisation de pannes 9 bizhub 362/282/222 9-15 Opérations de relais IP et autres Problème Origine Remède Impossible d'envoyer un fax à partir de cette machine. Le mode de communication pour les émissions par passerelle n'est pas correctement spécifié. Vérifiez les paramètres des émissions passerelle. [Paramètres réseau] n'apparaît pas à l'écran Gestion Administrateur. Le périphérique ne fonctionne pas correctement. Veuillez contacter le S.A.V. 9 Localisation de pannes 9-16 bizhub 362/282/222 10 Annexe Annexe 10 bizhub 362/282/222 10-3 10 Annexe 10.1 Caractéristiques Caractéristiques de télécopie par adresse IP Caractéristiques Scan vers PC Rubrique Caractéristiques Protocole de transmission Emission d'e-mail : SMTP (IETF RFC2821 et RFC2822) et TCP/IP Formats des documents émis Letter w/v, Legal w, 11 e 17 w, A4 w/v, B4 w, A3 w Résolution 200 e 100 dpi, 200 e 200 dpi, 400 e 400 dpi, 600 e 600 dpi Format des données TIFF-F Méthode de codage MH, MR, MMR Lignes compatibles Ethernet LAN (connexions 100BASE-TX et 10BASE-T) Enregistrement de la destination Enregistrement de l'adresse IP d'un destinataire ou du nom de l'hôte : 540 enregistrements maximum Rubrique Caractéristiques Protocole de transmission TCP/IP Formats des documents émis Letter w/v, Legal w, 11 e 17 w, A4 w/v, B4 w, A3 w Résolution 200 e 100 dpi, 200 e 200 dpi, 400 e 400 dpi, 600 e 600 dpi Format des données TIFF, PDF Méthode de codage MH, MMR Lignes compatibles Ethernet LAN (connexions 100BASE-TX et 10BASE-T) Enregistrement de la destination Enregistrement de l'adresse IP de l'ordinateur ou du nom de l'hôte : 540 enregistrements maximum Caractéristique de dossier Spécifiez un dossier sur l'ordinateur. Les sous-dossiers spécifiés sur l'ordinateur peuvent être créés pour chaque type de données. 10 Annexe 10-4 bizhub 362/282/222 Caractéristiques scanner IP Caractéristiques de relais IP Rubrique Caractéristiques Protocole de transmission TCP/IP Formats des documents émis Letter w/v, Legal w, 11 e 17 w, A4 w/v, B4 w, A3 w Résolution 200 e 200 dpi, 400 e 400 dpi, 600 e 600 dpi Format des données TIFF, PDF Méthode de codage MH, MMR Lignes compatibles Ethernet LAN (connexions 100BASE-TX et 10BASE-T) Enregistrement de la destination Enregistrement de la destination inutile (notification automatique de l'adresse IP envoyée depuis l'ordinateur lors de l'attente de numérisation) : spécifiez les dossiers pour six boutons maximum Caractéristique de dossier Spécifiez un dossier sur l'ordinateur. Les sous-dossiers spécifiés sur l'ordinateur peuvent être créés pour chaque type de données. Rubrique Caractéristiques Stations de relais Huit stations de relais maximum Destinataire Fax Annexe 10 bizhub 362/282/222 10-5 10.2 Saisir du texte Cette section apporte des détails sur l'utilisation du clavier qui apparaît sur l'écran tactile pour permettre la saisie des mots de passe et l'introduction du texte pour l'enregistrement des destinations 1-touche. Vous pouvez aussi utiliser le clavier pour taper des chiffres. La procédure suivante décrit comment entrer les caractères sur l'écran Nom Utilisateur lors de l'enregistrement des utilisateurs pour l'Authentification Utilisateur. Pour taper du texte % Sur le clavier qui s'affiche, appuyez sur le bouton correspondant au caractère désiré. – Vous pouvez aussi taper des chiffres avec le clavier. – Pour taper des caractères en majuscules, appuyez sur [Caps.]. – Pour annuler le mode majuscule, appuyez de nouveau sur [Caps]. 2 Remarque Pour annuler le texte saisi, appuyez sur [Annul.]. Pour effacer tout le texte saisi, appuyez sur la touche [C] (correction). ! Détails Pour passer de la saisie de lettres à celle de symboles, appuyez sur le bouton de changement de mode. Pour modifier un caractère du texte saisi, appuyez sur et pour déplacer le curseur au niveau du caractère à modifier, appuyez sur [Supp] et tapez ensuite la lettre ou le chiffre voulu. Vous pouvez utiliser les paramètres de commutation logicielle pour changer le mode de suppression des caractères. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres de commutation logicielle, voir "Spécifier les paramètres d'activation du logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil)" à la page 8-11. Si le nombre de caractères dépasse la limite autorisée, le dernier caractère est remplacé par le dernier caractère saisi. 10 Annexe 10-6 bizhub 362/282/222 Liste des caractères disponibles Type Caractères Caractères alphanumériques/symboles Annexe 10 bizhub 362/282/222 10-7 10.3 Glossaire Terme Définition 10Base-T/100Base- TX/1000Base-T Une norme pour Ethernet, connecté via un câble constitué de paires de fils de cuivre torsadés. La vitesse de transmission de 10Base-T est de 10 Mo, celle de 100Base-TX est de 100 Mo et celle de 1000Base-T est de 1000 Mo. Active Directory Un service qui gère toutes les informations comme les ressources matérielles pour les serveurs, les clients et les imprimantes sur un réseau supporté par Microsoft ainsi que les attributs et les droits d'accès des utilisateurs Adresse IP Un code (une adresse) utilisé pour identifier les différents périphériques réseau sur Internet. Comprend au maximum trois chiffres pour quatre nombres, comme 192.168.1.10. Les adresses IP sont attribuées à des périphériques (ordinateurs compris) connectés à Internet. Aperçu Fonction permettant de visionner une image avant d'effectuer une opération d'impression ou de numérisation APOP Abréviation de Authenticated Post Office Protocol. Une méthode d'authentification par mots de passe cryptés, entraînant une plus grande sécurité, comparé aux mots de passe non cryptés habituels utilisé par POP pour récupérer les messages électroniques Auto IP Une fonction d'acquisition automatique de l'adresse IP. En cas d'échec de l'acquisition de l'adresse IP avec DHCP, une adresse IP est acquise à partir de l'adresse 169.254.0.0. Bit Abréviation pour Binary Digit. La plus petite unité d'information (quantité de données) sur un ordinateur ou une imprimante. Affiche les données à l'aide de 0 ou 1. BMP Abréviation pour Bitmap. Un format de fichier pour sauvegarder les données d'image et utilisant l'extension .bmp. Généralement utilisé sur les plates-formes Windows. Vous pouvez spécifier l'intensité de couleur de monochrome (2 valeurs) à couleur (16 777 216 couleurs). Généralement, les images ne sont pas comprimées lors de la sauvegarde. Client Un ordinateur utilisant les services fournis par un serveur par l'intermédiaire d'un réseau Contraste Différence d'intensité entre les parties claires et foncées de l'image (variation clair/foncé). On dit qu'une image possédant peu de variations clair/foncé possède un faible contraste et qu'une image possédant de fortes variations clair/foncé possède un contraste élevé. Demi-teinte Méthode de production des parties claires et foncées d'une image en variant les tailles des points noirs et blancs Densité Une indication de la quantité de noircissement dans l'image. Désinstaller Supprimer un logiciel installé sur un ordinateur DHCP Abréviation pour Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. Protocole permettant à un ordinateur client sur un réseau TCP/IP de spécifier automatiquement les paramètres de réseau à partir du serveur. Grâce à la gestion collective de l'adresse IP pour les clients DHCP sur le serveur DHCP, vous pouvez éviter la duplication d'une adresse et construire aisément un réseau. 10 Annexe 10-8 bizhub 362/282/222 Disque dur Périphérique de stockage grande capacité pour sauvegarder des données. Les données peuvent être sauvegardées même en cas de mise hors tension. DNS Abréviation pour Domain Name System. Un système d'acquisition des adresses IP supportées à partir de noms d'hôtes dans un environnement réseau. DNS permet à l'utilisateur d'accéder à d'autres ordinateurs sur un réseau en spécifiant des noms d'hôte à la place d'adresses IP difficiles à mémoriser et à comprendre. DPI (dpi) Abréviation pour Dots Per Inch. (points par pouce). Une résolution utilisée par les imprimantes et les scanners. Indique combien de points par pouce sont représentés dans une image. Plus la valeur est élevée, plus la résolution est importante. Ethernet Norme de ligne de transmission LAN Extension de fichier Les caractères ajoutés au nom de fichier pour différentier les formats de fichier. L'extension de fichier est ajoutée après un point, par exemple, ".bmp" ou ".jpg". Fréquence d'écran Indique la densité des points utilisée pour créer l'image Gradation Les niveaux clairs et foncés d'une image. Plus le nombre augmente, plus la reproduction des variations de luminosité est douce. GSS-SPNEGO/Simple/ Digest MD5 Méthodes d'authentification pour se connecter sur le serveur LDAP. La méthode d'authentification (GSS-SPENGO, SIMPLE or Digest MD5) pour le serveur LDAP diffère en fonction du serveur utilisé et des paramètres du serveur. HTTP Abréviation pour HyperText Transfer Protocol. Protocole utilisé pour envoyer et recevoir des données entre un serveur Internet et un client (Navigateur Internet). Vous pouvez échanger des documents contenant des images, des enregistrements et des clips vidéo avec les informations de forme expressive. IMAP Abréviation pour Internet Message Access Protocol. Protocole de récupération des messages électroniques avec la fonction de gestions des boîtes électroniques sur le serveur. Actuellement, on utilise le plus souvent IMAP4 (la quatrième version de IMAP). Installer Installer du matériel, des systèmes d'exploitation, des applications, des pilotes d'imprimante sur un ordinateur. IPP Abréviation pour Internet Printing Protocol. Protocole d'envoi et de réception de données d'impression et contrôlant des imprimantes sur Internet dans le cadre d'un réseau TCP/IP. Vous pouvez aussi envoyer des données à des imprimantes dans des zones distantes pour imprimer via Internet. LAN Abréviation pour Local Area Network. C'est un réseau qui connecte des ordinateurs sur le même étage, dans le même bâtiment, dans les bâtiments avoisinants. LDAP Abréviation pour Lightweight Directory Access Protocol. Sur un réseau TCP/IP, comme l’Internet ou un réseau Intranet, ce protocole sert à accéder à une base de données de gestion des informations d'environnement et des adresses électroniques des utilisateurs du réseau. Masque Sous-Réseau Unité utilisée pour diviser un réseau TCP/IP en plusieurs petits réseaux (sous-réseaux). Il sert à identifier les bits d'une adresse réseau supérieurs à l'adresse IP. Terme Définition Annexe 10 bizhub 362/282/222 10-9 Mémoire Périphérique de stockage pour sauvegarder temporairement les données. Lors de la mise hors tension, les données peuvent être effacées ou non. MH Abréviation pour Modified Huffman. Une méthode de codage de compression des données pour l'émission des télécopies. Les documents contenant essentiellement du texte sont comprimés à environ 1/10 de leur taille d'origine. MIB Abréviation pour Management Information Base. Lors d'une émission TCP/IP, elle utilise SNMP pour définir le format des informations de gestion pour un groupe de périphériques réseau. Il existe deux formats : le MIB spécifique au fabricant et le MIB normalisé. MMR Abréviation pour Modified Modified Read. Une méthode de codage de compression des données pour l'émission des télécopies. Les documents contenant essentiellement du texte sont comprimés à environ 1/20 de leur taille d'origine. Navigateur Internet Logiciel comme Internet Explorer et Netscape Navigator utilisé pour afficher les pages Internet NetWare Système d'exploitation réseau développé par Novell. NetWare IPX/SPX est utilisé comme protocole de communication. Niveaux de gris Forme monochrome d'expression de l'image utilisant les informations de dégradé du blanc et du noir Nom hôte Nom affiché d'un périphérique sur un réseau Numérisation L'opération de numérisation d'un scanner permet de lire une image pendant le déplacement progressif d'une rangée de capteurs. La direction dans laquelle les capteurs d'image se déplacement s'appelle le sens de lecture principal et la direction selon laquelle sont disposés les capteurs d'image s'appelle le sens de lecture auxiliaire. Numéro de port Le numéro identifiant le port d'émission pour chaque processus exécuté sur un ordinateur sur le réseau. Le même port ne peut pas être utilisé par plusieurs processus. Octet Unité d'information (quantité de données) sur un ordinateur ou une imprimante. Configurée comme 1 octet étant égal à 8 bits. OS Abréviation pour Operating System (système d'exploitation). Logiciel de base contrôlant le système d'un ordinateur. Par défaut Les paramètres par défaut. Les paramètres premièrement sélectionnés lors de la mise sous tension de la machine ou les paramètres premièrement spécifiés lors de la sélection de la fonction. Passerelle Matériel et logiciel utilisé comme point de connexion d'un réseau à un autre réseau. Une passerelle modifie également les formats de données, les adresses et les protocoles en fonction du réseau connecté. Passerelle par défaut Périphérique tel qu'un ordinateur ou un routeur, utilisé comme "passerelle" pour accéder à des ordinateurs ne se trouvant sur le même réseau LAN PDF Abréviation de Portable Document Format. Un document formaté électroniquement et utilisant l'extension .pdf. Sur base du format PostScript, vous pouvez utiliser le logiciel gratuit Adobe Acrobat Reader pour afficher des documents. Terme Définition 10 Annexe 10-10 bizhub 362/282/222 Pïlote Logiciel fonctionnant comme une passerelle entre un ordinateur et un périphérique. Pixel Un pixel d'image. La plus petite unité d'image. POP Abréviation de Post Office Protocol. Protocole de récupération des messages électroniques sur un serveur de messagerie. Actuellement, on utilise le plus souvent POP3 (la troisième version de POP). Propriété Informations d'attribut Lors de l'utilisation d'un pilote d'imprimante, vous pouvez spécifier diverses fonctions dans les propriétés du fichier. Dans les propriétés de fichier, vous pouvez vérifier les informations d'attribut du fichier. Protocole Règles permettant aux ordinateurs de communiquer avec d'autres ordinateurs ou périphériques Résolution Affiche la possibilité de reproduire correctement les détails des images et des documents imprimés. Serveur Proxy Serveur installé pour agir en tant que connexion intermédiaire entre chaque client et les différents serveurs pour assurer la sécurité de manière efficace sur tout le système pour les connexions Internet SMTP Abréviation pour Simple Mail Transfer Protocol. Protocole d'envoi et de transfert de messages électroniques. SNMP Abréviation pour Simple Network Management Protocol. Protocole de gestion dans un environnement réseau sous TCP/IP. SSL/TLS Abréviation pour Secure Socket Layer/Transport Layer Security. Méthode de codage de transfert en toute sécurité de données entre le serveur Internet et le navigateur. TCP/IP Abréviation de Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. Le protocole standard par défaut utilisé par Internet et utilisant des adresses IP pour identifier chaque périphérique réseau. TIFF Abréviation de Tagged Image File Format. L'un des formats de fichier pour enregistrer les données image. (L'extension de fichier est ".tif".) En fonction du tag indiquant le type de données, les informations de différents formats d'image peuvent être enregistrés dans une seule donnée d'image. TIFF simple page Un seul fichier TIFF file ne contenant qu'une seule page Terme Définition Annexe 10 bizhub 362/282/222 10-11 10.4 Index 2en1 3-16, 3-21, 4-18, 4-21, 6-19, 6-22 A Accès 7-6 Adresse destination 3-30, 4-31, 7-14, 7-15 Authentification Groupe 7-7 Authentification Utilisateur 7-7 B Boîte de dialogue Automatic Print Settings 5-41 Boîte de dialogue Divided Settings 5-30 Boîte de dialogue Folder and Printer Settings 5-42 Boîte de dialogue Print Property 5-35 Boîte de dialogue Printer Setting 5-34 Boîte de dialogue Receive Notify Settings 5-31 Boîte de dialogue Scanner settings 5-24 Boîte de dialogue Sort Settings 5-26, 5-27, 5-28 Bouton de numérotation 1-touche 3-3, 4-4, 6-4 Boutons de numérisation 5-43 C Cache 7-12 Chaîne de numérotation 6-11 Check RX now 5-19 Codes d'erreur 9-4 Configuration requise 7-5 Conflits de ports 5-7 Connection setting 5-23 D Delete scanner key 5-20 Densité 3-14, 4-16, 6-17 Destinataire 3-29, 6-30 Destinataire secondaire 3-36, 4-37, 6-37, 7-21 Destination relais IP 8-6 Désinstallation 5-17 Divided settings 5-23 E Emiss. R/V 3-16, 3-22, 4-18, 4-22, 6-19, 6-23 Emission SSL 5-8 Enregistrement des Programmes Fax 7-3 Enregistrer des destinataires 1-Touche 7-3, 7-13 Entrer des adresses 3-9, 4-11 F FenêtreVisionner 5-33 Fermer 5-19 I Identifiant 3-16, 3-18, 6-19 Image folder setting 5-23 ImageReceiver 5-3, 5-37 Impression automatique 5-54, 5-58 Index 3-37, 7-17 Installation 4-3, 5-14 10 Annexe 10-12 bizhub 362/282/222 M Méthode de codage 3-10, 3-30, 3-33, 4-12, 4-31, 7-14, 7-15 Mode Administrateur 7-10 Modem/adaptateur de terminal 5-4 N Nom de destination 3-30, 4-31, 6-31, 7-14, 7-15, 7-16 Nom du fichier 4-18, 4-27 Notify settings 5-23 Numéro bouton de numérotation 1-touche 3-5, 4-7, 6-7 Numéro de destination 6-31, 7-16 Numéro de fax 6-12 Numéro de port 3-30, 4-31, 7-14, 7-15 P PageScope Web Connection 2-8, 7-3 Param. TX horloge 3-17, 3-23, 4-18, 4-25, 6-20, 6-26 Paramètres de commutation logicielle 8-3, 8-11 Paramètres relais IP 8-6 Paramètres relais IP 7-4, 7-29, 8-3 Paramètres réseau 8-3 Passerelle Emission 6-3 Port de résultat de relais 8-10 Priorité EM 3-17, 3-23, 4-18, 4-24, 6-20, 6-25 Programme de courrier électronique 3-39 Programmer les boutons de numérotation 1-touche 3-31, 4-30, 6-30 Q Qualité 3-12, 4-14, 6-15 Qualité Emission (Max.) 3-10, 3-30, 3-33, 7-15 R Rapport d'émission 3-16, 3-20, 3-26, 4-18, 4-20, 4-28, 6-19, 6-21, 6-28 Recevoir une télécopie par adresse IP 3-28 Recherche de boutons de numérotation 1-touche 3-7, 4-9, 6-9 Relais IP 2-7 Réglage de l'impression automatique 5-50, 5-55 Réglage du Format Original 3-15, 4-17, 6-18 Routeur téléphonique 5-4 S Scan vers PC 2-4 Scanner IP 2-6, 4-3, 5-3 Scanner Key Registration 5-19 Sélectionner les stations de relais 6-31 Sort settings 5-23 Station relais IP 8-9 Stations de relais 6-3, 7-16 T Taille Emission (Max.) 3-10, 3-30, 3-33, 7-15 Tampon 3-17, 3-25, 4-18, 4-26, 6-20, 6-27 Télécopie par adresse IP 2-3 Thumbnails 5-19 Transférer 5-59 Type de fichier 4-12, 4-31, 7-14 Annexe 10 bizhub 362/282/222 10-13 V Viewer settings 5-23 10 Annexe 10-14 bizhub 362/282/222 163/211 GDI User Manual GDI Printer Controller Contents-1 Contents 1 Introduction Copyright ....................................................................................... 1-4 1.1 Software end user license agreement............................................ 1-5 1.2 Explanation of manual conventions................................................ 1-8 Safety advices................................................................................ 1-8 Sequence of action ........................................................................ 1-8 Tips ................................................................................................ 1-9 Special text markings..................................................................... 1-9 1.3 Operating environment .................................................................. 1-10 System requirements ................................................................... 1-10 Recommended operating environment ....................................... 1-10 1.4 Installing the printer driver ............................................................ 1-10 2 Specifying printer driver settings 2.1 Printer driver settings dialog box.................................................... 2-3 Displaying the settings dialog box ................................................. 2-3 Printing Preferences dialog box..................................................... 2-5 Properties dialog box..................................................................... 2-7 2.2 Device Options tab ........................................................................... 2-9 Device Options............................................................................. 2-10 Memory ........................................................................................ 2-10 2.3 Common operations....................................................................... 2-11 Common items............................................................................. 2-11 Easy Set ....................................................................................... 2-12 2.4 Setup tab ......................................................................................... 2-14 Orientation.................................................................................... 2-14 Original Size ................................................................................. 2-15 Edit Custom ................................................................................. 2-17 Output Size .................................................................................. 2-20 Zoom............................................................................................ 2-21 Copy............................................................................................. 2-21 Collate .......................................................................................... 2-22 Paper Source ............................................................................... 2-23 Paper Type................................................................................... 2-24 Contents-2 GDI Printer Controller Output Method.............................................................................. 2-24 Using secure printing .................................................................... 2-25 Specifying secure printing from the printer driver ........................ 2-25 Printing from the machine............................................................. 2-26 2.5 Layout tab ........................................................................................ 2-28 Combination ................................................................................. 2-29 Combination Details...................................................................... 2-30 Double-sided printing ................................................................... 2-31 2.6 Per Page Setting tab ....................................................................... 2-32 Front Cover Page.......................................................................... 2-33 Front Cover Paper Source ............................................................ 2-33 Media Type ................................................................................... 2-33 2.7 Watermark tab ................................................................................. 2-34 Watermark Select ......................................................................... 2-34 Creating a new watermark............................................................ 2-35 Editing a watermark ...................................................................... 2-37 2.8 Quality tab ........................................................................................ 2-40 Resolution ..................................................................................... 2-40 Adjustment.................................................................................... 2-41 3 Control panel operations 3.1 Printing operations............................................................................ 3-3 Control panel .................................................................................. 3-3 Printer indicator .............................................................................. 3-5 Starting the print operation............................................................. 3-5 Canceling a print job....................................................................... 3-6 Using the manual bypass tray ........................................................ 3-8 Power Save mode......................................................................... 3-10 4 Troubleshooting 4.1 Checking error messages ................................................................ 4-3 4.2 Main error messages ........................................................................ 4-4 4.3 Print data when an error occurs ...................................................... 4-5 With a "MACHINE TROUBLE" error ............................................... 4-5 Temporary errors ............................................................................ 4-5 5 Specifications 1 Introduction Introduction 1 GDI Printer Controller 1-3 1 Introduction Thank you for purchasing this machine. This manual provides the information required to use this machine as a GDI printer. Be sure to read this manual before performing any operations. For precautions concerning the use and safety of the machine, refer to the User manual provided with the machine. Store the CD-ROM and User manual provided with the machine in a safe place. Trademarks and copyright - KONICA MINOLTA, the KONICA MINOLTA logo, and The essentials of imaging are registered trademarks of KONICA MINOLTA HOLDINGS, INC. - PageScope and bizhub are registered trademarks or trademarks of KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES INC. - Netscape is a registered trademark of Netscape Communications Corporation in the United States and other countries. - Novell and Novell NetWare are registered trademarks of Novell, Inc. in the United States and other countries. - Microsoft, Windows, and Windows NT are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. - Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat and PostScript are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries. - Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation. - PCL is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company Limited. - All other product and brand names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies or organizations. 1 Introduction 1-4 GDI Printer Controller Copyright © 2007 Konica Minolta Business Technologies, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Note - This User manual may not be reproduced in part or in full without permission. - Konica Minolta Business Technologies, Inc. will not be held liable for any incidents caused by using this printing system or User manual. - Information included in this User manual is subject to change without notice. - Konica Minolta Business Technologies, Inc. maintains the copyright of the printer drivers. Introduction 1 GDI Printer Controller 1-5 1.1 Software end user license agreement PLEASE READ CAREFULLY THE LICENSE AGREEMENT BELOW BEFORE OPENING THE PACKAGE OF THIS SOFTWARE ("SOFTWARE"), DOWNLOADING, INSTALLING OR USING THE SOFTWARE. OPENING THE PACKAGE, OR DOWNLOADING, INSTALLING OR USING THE SOFTWARE SHALL BE DEEMED YOUR LAWFUL ACCEPTANCE OF THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS BELOW. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THEM, DO NOT DOWNLOAD, INSTALL, USE THE SOFTWARE, NOR OPEN THE PACKAGE. 1. COPYRIGHT AND INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS This is a license agreement and not an agreement for sale. Konica Minolta Business Technologies, Inc.("Konica Minolta") owns, or has been licensed from other owners ("Konica Minolta Licensor"), copyrights and other intellectual property rights of the Software, and any and all rights and title to the Software and any copy made from it are retained by Konica Minolta or Konica Minolta Licensor. In no event, this Agreement shall be deemed to assign any copyright and/or any intellectual property rights of the Software from Konica Minolta or Konica Minolta Licensor to you. The Software is protected by copyright laws and international treaty provisions. 2. LICENSE Konica Minolta hereby grant to you a non-exclusive and limited license, and you may: (i) install and use the Software only on your computer(s) connected with Konica Minolta product for which this Software is designed; (ii) allow users of the computers described above to use the Software, provided that you assure that all such users comply with the terms of this Agreement; (iii) use the Software only for your own customary business or personal purpose; (iv) make one copy of the Software only for backup purpose in the support of the normal and intended use of the Software. (v) transfer the Software to other party by transferring a copy of this Agreement and all documentation along with the Software, provided that (a) you must, at the same time, either transfer to such other party or destroy all your other copies of the Software, (b) such transfer of possession terminates your license from Konica Minolta, and (c) you must assure that such other party has agreed to accept the terms and conditions of this Agreement. If such other party does not accept such terms and conditions then you shall not transfer any copy of the Software. 1 Introduction 1-6 GDI Printer Controller 3. RESTRICTIONS (1) You shall not without the written consent of Konica Minolta: (i) use, copy, modify, merge or transfer copies of the Software except as provided herein; (ii) reverse engineer, reverse assemble, reverse compile or any other way analyze the Software; or (iii) sublicense, rent, lease or distribute the Software or any copy thereof. (iv) remove, use, or alter any trademark, logo, copyright or other proprietary notices, legends, symbols or labels in the Software. (2) You agree that you will not export the Software in any form in violation of any applicable laws and regulations regarding export control of any country. 4. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES (1) If the Software is furnished on CD-ROM(s) or other tangible object that is used for storage of digital data (hereinafter collectively "Storage Medium"), Konica Minolta warrants the Storage Medium to be free from the defects in material and workmanship under normal use, for a period of ninety (90) days from the date of delivery to you. WITH THE EXCEPTION OF THE FOREGOING EXPRESS WARRANTIES APPLICABLE TO STORAGE MEDIUM ONLY, THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED TO YOU "AS IS" WITHOUT ANY WARRANTIES WHATSOEVER. KONICA MINOLTA, ITS AFFILIATE COMPANIES AND KONICA MINOLTA LICENSOR DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THE SOFTWARE, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. (2) IN NO EVENT WILL KONICA MINOLTA, ITS AFFILIATE COMPANIES NOR KONICA MINOLTA LICENSOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOST PROFITS, LOST DATA, OR ANY OTHER INDIRECT, SPECIAL, PUNITIVE, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES THAT RESULT FROM USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL, COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION OR ANY AND ALL OTHER COMMERCIAL OR OTHER DAMAGES OR LOSSES, EVEN IF KONICA MINOLTA, ITS AFFILIATE COMPANIES OR KONICA MINOLTA LICENSOR HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES OR FOR ANY CLAIM BY YOU BASED ON A THIRD PARTY CLAIM. (3) The disclaimer of warranty hereunder does not affect your statutory rights. In case of the disclaimer is not allowed by applicable law, the disclaimer shall only apply to you to the maximum extent permitted by the law. Introduction 1 GDI Printer Controller 1-7 5. TERMINATION You may terminate this license at any time by destroying the Software and all your copies of it. This Agreement shall also terminate if you fail to comply with any terms hereof. Upon such termination, you must immediately destroy all copies of the Software in your possession. 6. GOVERNING LAW This Agreement shall be governed by the laws of Japan. 7. SEVERABILITY In the event that any part or parts of this agreement shall be held illegal or null and void by any court or administrative body of competent jurisdiction, such determination shall not effect the remaining parts of this agreement and they shall remain in full force and effect as if such part or parts determined illegal or void had not been included. 8. NOTICE TO US GOVERNMENT END USERS The Software is a "commercial item," as that term is defined at 48 C.F.R. 2.101 (October 1995), consisting of "commercial computer software" and "commercial computer software documentation," as such terms are used in 48 C.F.R. 12.212 (September 1995). Consistent with 48 C.F.R. 12.212 and 48 C.F.R. 227.7202-1 through 227.7202-4 (June 1995), all U.S. Government End Users shall acquire the Software with only those rights set forth herein. YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT YOU HAVE READ THIS AGREEMENT, UNDERSTAND IT, AND AGREE TO BE BOUND BY ITS TERMS AND CONDITIONS. NEITHER PARTY SHALL BE BOUND BY ANY OTHER STATEMENTS OR REPRESENTATIONS THAT ARE INCONSISTENT WITH THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT. NO AMENDMENT TO THIS AGREEMENT IS EFFECTIVE UNLESS WRITTEN AND SIGNED BY PROPERLY AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVES OF EACH PARTY. BY OPENING THE PACKAGE, DOWNLOADING, INSTALLING OR USING THE SOFTWARE YOU AGREE TO ACCEPT THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT. 1 Introduction 1-8 GDI Printer Controller 1.2 Explanation of manual conventions The marks and text formats used in this manual are described below. Safety advices 6 DANGER Failure to observe instructions highlighted in this manner may result in fatal or critical injuries in fact of electrical power. % Observe all dangers in order to prevent injuries. 7 WARNING Failure to observe instructions highlighted in this manner may result in serious injuries or property damage. % Observe all warnings in order to prevent injuries and to ensure safe use of the machine. 7 CAUTION Failure to observe instructions highlighted in this manner may result in slight injuries or property damage. % Observe all cautions in order to prevent injuries and to ensure safe use of the machine. Sequence of action 1 The number 1 as formatted here indicates the first step of a sequence of actions. 2 Subsequent numbers as formatted here indicate subsequent steps of a sequence of actions. ? Text formatted in this style provides additional assistance. % Text formatted in this style describes the action that will ensure the desired results are achieved. An illustration inserted here shows what operations must be performed. Introduction 1 GDI Printer Controller 1-9 Tips 2 Note Text highlighted in this manner contains useful information and tips to ensure safe use of the machine. 2 Reminder Text highlighted in this manner contains information that should be reminded. ! Detail Text highlighted in this manner contains references for more detailed information. Special text markings [Stop] key The names of keys on the control panel are written as shown above. MACHINE SETTING Display texts are written as shown above. 1 Introduction 1-10 GDI Printer Controller 1.3 Operating environment System requirements The following environment is required so that the printer driver can be used. - Intel Pentium 200 MHz - Windows Vista, Windows Server 2003, Windows XP (Service Pack 2 or later), Windows 2000 (Service Pack 4 or later), Windows Me, or Windows 98 SE, Windows Vista x64 Edition, Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition, Windows XP Professional x64 Edition - 128 MB RAM (Windows XP/Server 2003), 64 MB RAM (Windows 2000/Me/98 SE) - USB port compliant with USB Revision 2.0 - CD-ROM/DVD drive 2 Note The printer driver is not compatible with Windows 95/98/NT 4.0. Recommended operating environment Pentium 4/1.6 GHz 256 MB RAM 1.4 Installing the printer driver % Please refer to the folder "Installation" of the CD. 2 Specifying printer driver settings Specifying printer driver settings 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-3 2 Specifying printer driver settings Descriptions on the printer driver settings available when printing from a computer are provided below. 2.1 Printer driver settings dialog box Displaying the settings dialog box Select the printer in the Printers and Faxes window (the Printers window in Windows Vista/2000/Me/98 SE), and then display the printer driver settings dialog box. The settings specified in this dialog box are applied to all applications. 1 Open the Printers and Faxes window (or the Printers window). – For Windows XP/Server 2003, click the [Start] button, and then click "Printers and Faxes". – For Windows Vista, click the [Start] button, click "Control Panel", click "Hardware and Sound", and then click "Printers". – For Windows 2000/Me/98 SE, click the [Start] button, point to "Settings", and then click "Printers". 2 In the Printers and Faxes window (or the Printers window), select the printer icon for this machine. 3 Select the command for displaying the printer driver settings dialog box. – With Windows XP/Server 2003/Vista/2000, right-click the icon for the installed printer, and then click "Printing Preferences". – With Windows Me/98 SE, click "Properties" on the "File" menu. 2 Specifying printer driver settings 2-4 GDI Printer Controller The following printer driver settings dialog box appears. 2 Note To change the settings for each job to be printed, click the [Properties] button (or the [Preferences] button) in the Print dialog box, which appears when "Print" is clicked in the application. The settings specified in the dialog box displayed from the Print dialog box are only applied temporarily, and the settings return to those in the printer driver settings dialog box when the application is exited. A program containing specified driver settings can be registered and recalled when needed by using the Easy Set function. For details on the Easy Set function, refer to "Easy Set" on page 2-12. To display the Device Options tab in Windows XP/Server 2003/Vista/ 2000, right-click the icon for the installed printer in the Printers and Faxes window (or the Printers window), and then click "Properties". Specifying printer driver settings 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-5 Printing Preferences dialog box Printing settings can be specified from the printer driver settings dialog box. 2 Note To display the Printing Preferences dialog box in Windows XP/ Server 2003/Vista/2000, right-click the icon for the installed printer in the Printers and Faxes window (or the Printers window), and then click "Printing Preferences". To display the Printing Preferences dialog box in Windows Me/98 SE, click "Properties" on the "File" menu of the Printers window. 2 Specifying printer driver settings 2-6 GDI Printer Controller Tab Item Description Setup Orientation Select the paper orientation of the document. Original Size Specify the paper size for the document. [Edit Custom] button Specify a user-defined paper size. Output Size Specify the size of paper to be printed on. If this size is different from the original document size, the image will automatically be enlarged or reduced. Zoom Specify the enlargement or reduction ratio. Copy Specify the number of copies to be printed. Collate Select whether multiple copies of a multi-page document is to be printed by set or by page. Paper Source Select the paper drawer that is to be used. Paper Type Select the type of paper that is to be used. Output Method Select the output method. Layout Combination Multiple document pages can be printed together on a single sheet of paper. [Combination Details] button Settings such as the number of pages printed on a single sheet of paper and the printing order can be specified as combination details. Double Sides Select whether pages are printed double-sided. Binding Position Select the binding position. Per Page Setting Front Cover Page Select whether a document page is printed on the front cover. Front Cover Paper Source Select the paper drawer loaded with paper for the front cover. Media Type Select the type of paper used for the front cover. Watermark Watermark Select Select whether the document is printed overlapping a watermark (text stamp). 1st Page Only Select if the watermark is printed only on the first page. [New] button Create new watermarks. [Edit] button Change the watermarks. [Delete] button Delete a watermark. Quality Resolution Specify the print resolution. [Adjustment] button Specify the brightness and contrast. About - Shows the software version information. Specifying printer driver settings 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-7 Properties dialog box Installed options can be selected from the Properties dialog box for the printer driver. 2 Reminder If the options installed on the machine are not specified from the Device Options tab, the functions available with the option cannot be used from the printer driver. Be sure to specify the corresponding settings when options are installed. 2 Specifying printer driver settings 2-8 GDI Printer Controller 2 Note To display the Device Options tab, right-click the icon for the installed printer in the Printers and Faxes window (or the Printers window), and then click "Properties". Tab Item Description Device Options Device Options Specify the settings for the installed paper drawers. Memory Specify the size of the installed memory. Specifying printer driver settings 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-9 2.2 Device Options tab % Specify whether or not options are installed so that the options installed on the machine can be used from the printer driver. 2 Reminder If the options installed on the machine are not specified from the Device Options tab, the functions available with the option cannot be used from the printer driver. Be sure to specify the corresponding settings when options are installed. 2 Note To display the Device Options tab, right-click the icon for the installed printer in the Printers and Faxes window (or the Printers window), and then click "Properties". 2 Specifying printer driver settings 2-10 GDI Printer Controller Device Options % Specify the settings for the installed paper drawers. – From the "Device Options" list, double-click the names of installed paper drawers to specify that it is installed. Double-click the name again to return the setting to "Not Installed". Memory % Specify the size of the installed memory. – Click [,] on the right side of the "Memory" box, and then select the size of the installed memory. Specifying printer driver settings 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-11 2.3 Common operations This section contains descriptions of buttons and functions common to all tabs of the dialog box. The actual buttons may appear differently depending on the operating system. Common items Button Description [OK] button Click this button to apply the specified settings and close the dialog box. [Cancel] button Click this button to cancel the specified settings (not apply them) and close the dialog box. [Apply] button Click this button to apply the specified settings without closing the dialog box. This button is not displayed on the setting screen that appears when the [Properties] button (or the [Preferences] button) is clicked in the Print dialog box of the application. [Help] button When this button is clicked, help information for the currently displayed settings appears. Preview Shows a preview of the specified paper settings or shows the printer status. Click the button in the lower-left corner of the preview to change it between [Paper View] and [Printer View] and to select the preview display. When the [Paper View] preview is selected, a sample page layout for the currently selected settings is displayed so that an image of the print result can be checked. When the [Printer View] preview is selected, an image of the printer configuration, including the options, such as the paper drawers, currently installed on the machine, is displayed. The paper drawers selected in the "Paper Source" list on the Setup tab appear in light blue. Easy Set The currently specified settings can be registered as a program to be recalled later. Paper View Printer View 2 Specifying printer driver settings 2-12 GDI Printer Controller Easy Set The currently specified settings can be registered as a program to be recalled later when you wish to use those settings again. 1 Change the driver settings on the Setup and Layout tabs. 2 In the "Easy Set" box, type the name of the program. 3 Click the [Save] button. The settings program is registered. Specifying printer driver settings 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-13 2 Note To recall a registered program, select it from the list. To change the name of the registered program, select the program from the list, and then type in the new program name. The button changes to the [Rename] button. To change the program name, click the [Rename] button. To delete a registered program, select the program from the list. The button changes to the [Delete] button. To delete the program name, click the [Delete] button. If "Factory Default" is selected from the list, all settings return to their defaults. A maximum of 20 characters can be entered for the registered name. A maximum of 31 programs can be registered. 2 Specifying printer driver settings 2-14 GDI Printer Controller 2.4 Setup tab From the Setup tab, settings can be specified for the document and paper to be printed on. The number of copies to be printed and the orientation of the printed image can also be specified. Orientation % Select whether to print the document in the portrait or landscape orientation. Portrait Landscape Specifying printer driver settings 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-15 Original Size % From the drop-down list, click the paper size for the document to select it. The following standard paper sizes are available. Setting Actual size Letter 8 1/2 e 11 in. Legal 8 1/2 e 14 in. 11 e 17 11 e 17 in. A3 297 e 420 mm A4 210 e 297 mm A5 148 e 210 mm B4 257 e 364 mm B5 182 e 257 mm Env.Com10 4 1/8 e 9 1/2 in. Env.DL 110 e 220 mm Env.C6Envelope 114 e 162 mm FLS 8 1/4 e 13 210 e 330 mm FLS 8 1/2 e 13 216 e 330 mm FLS 220 e 330 mm FLS 8 1/8 e 13 1/4 206 e 337 mm FLS 8 e 13 203 e 330 mm 11 e 14 11 e 14 in. Invoice 5 1/2 e 8 1/2 in. Env.You-1 120 e 176 mm Env.You-4 105 e 235 mm Env.You-6 98 e 190 mm 8K 270 e 390 mm 16K 195 e 270 mm Hagaki 100 e 148 mm Env.C6 3/4 3 5/8 e 6 1/2 in. 2 Specifying printer driver settings 2-16 GDI Printer Controller 2 Note If "Hagaki" is selected, select the "Hagaki" paper setting for Tray 1 from the control panel of the machine. "Hagaki" and the envelope and non-standard sizes can be selected when "Paper Source" is set to "Auto", "Tray 1" or "Bypass". When "Paper Type" is set to "OHP", only "Letter" and "A4" are available. Specifying printer driver settings 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-17 Edit Custom A paper size that does not appear in the list can be registered as a custom size. 1 Click the [Edit Custom] button on the Setup tab. The Custom Size Settings dialog box appears. 2 Click the [New] button. The Custom Size Settings dialog box enlarges to display settings for specifying the paper size. 2 Specifying printer driver settings 2-18 GDI Printer Controller 3 In the "Name" box, type the name of the paper size. 4 In the "Dimensions" group box, specify the width and length of the paper. – To change the units for specifying the paper size, select the desired setting in the "Unit" group box. 5 Click the [OK] button in the lower-right corner of the Custom Size Settings dialog box. The paper size settings in the Custom Size Settings dialog box are hidden. 6 Click the [OK] button in the Custom Size Settings dialog box. The non-standard size is registered and can be selected from the list of paper sizes. Specifying printer driver settings 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-19 2 Note To change the width and length of a registered non-standard size, select the paper size in the Custom Size Settings dialog box, click the [Edit] button, and then change the settings. The name cannot be changed. To delete a registered non-standard size, select the paper size in the Custom Size Settings dialog box, and then click the [Delete] button. A maximum of 20 characters can be entered for the registered name. A maximum of 32 sizes can be registered. 2 Specifying printer driver settings 2-20 GDI Printer Controller Output Size % Select the size of paper that is to be used for printing. – The available standard paper sizes are same as those available in the "Original Size" list. – If the paper size is different from the size selected in the Original Size list, the document image will be printed enlarged or reduced so that it fits in the selected paper size. – The enlargement/reduction ratio to be used for printing can be checked in the Paper preview. 2 Note If "Manual" is selected in the "Zoom" group box, a setting cannot be selected from the "Output Size" list. If any setting other than "Off" is selected in the "Combination" list on the Layout tab, a setting cannot be selected from the "Output Size" list. Specifying printer driver settings 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-21 Zoom 1 Specify the enlargement or reduction ratio to be used for printing. 2 Select "Manual", and then type in a number between 25% and 400%, or click the arrows to specify a setting. 2 Note If any setting other than "Same as Original Size" is selected in the "Output Size" list, "Manual" cannot be selected. Copy 1 Specify the number of copies to be printed. 2 Type in a number between 1 and 99, or click the arrows to specify a setting. Reduced Original Enlarged 2 Specifying printer driver settings 2-22 GDI Printer Controller Collate % When printing multiple copies of the same document, select whether the entire document is printed one copy at a time or whether the specified number of copies are printed one page at a time. – When the "Collate" check box is selected, the entire document is printed one copy at a time. For example, if "Copy" is set to "5", the entire document (from the first page to the last page) is printed five times. – When the "Collate" check box is cleared, the specified number of copies are printed one page at a time. For example, if "Copy" is set to "5", the first page of the document is printed five times, and then the second page is printed five times. Printing continues until the last page is printed five times. 2 Note Depending on the application being used, the Collate setting may not be applied. If Collate is specified from the printer driver, Collate cannot be used in the application. If "1" is specified in the "Copy" box, Collate is not available. Check box selected Check box cleared Specifying printer driver settings 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-23 Paper Source % Select the paper drawer loaded with the paper. – If "Auto" is selected, the paper drawer loaded with paper of the size specified in the "Output Size" list is used. – The available settings differ depending on the options that are installed. – Settings: Tray 1, Tray 2 through Tray 5 (options), Bypass 2 Note If "Hagaki" or an envelope or non-standard size is selected in the "Original Size" list, only "Tray 1" and "Bypass" are available. Only "Tray 1" and "Bypass" are available when "Paper Type" is set to "OHP", "Thick Paper" or "Envelope". Tray Bypass tray 2 Specifying printer driver settings 2-24 GDI Printer Controller Paper Type % Select the type of paper to be printed on. – Settings: Plain Paper, OHP, Thick Paper, Envelope 2 Note A setting can be selected only when "Paper Source" is set to "Tray 1" or "Bypass". "OHP" can be selected only when "Original Size" is set to "Letter" or "A4". Output Method % Select the printing method. – Not only can data be printed directly, but "Secure Print" is also available, which requires a password for printing from this machine. – Settings: Print, Secure Print 2 Note "Secure Print" is available only if the optional expanded memory unit is installed. Specifying printer driver settings 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-25 Using secure printing A password can be specified for a document. The document printed from a computer is temporarily saved in the machine’s memory and is printed when the password is entered with the machine’s control panel. Select this setting when printing highly confidential documents. Specifying secure printing from the printer driver 1 Click the Setup tab. 2 From the "Output Method" drop-down list, select "Secure Print". A screen appears, allowing you to type in the password. 3 Type in the password, and then click the [OK] button. – Specify the 4-digit password between 0000 and 9999. 4 The print job is sent. – Normal printing is performed when printing is specified from an application. Entering the password 2 Specifying printer driver settings 2-26 GDI Printer Controller Printing from the machine The password must be entered from the control panel of the machine in order to print a document with a password specified when "Secure Print" is selected in the printer driver. 1 Check that the "Printer" indicator is flashing or is lit, and then press the [Printer] key. The Print mode screen appears. 2 Check that the key icon appears in the upper-right corner of the screen. – The key icon appears if the memory contains a secure print document. 3 Press the [Access] key. PRINTER MODE PRINT WAITING Specifying printer driver settings 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-27 4 When "PASSWORD: – – – –" appears, type in the password. – Type in the same numbers specified as the password from the printer driver. 5 Check that the document can be printed. If the password is correct, the following screen appears, and the job is printed. 2 Note If there are multiple secure print jobs with the same password, all of those secure print jobs are printed. PRINTER MODE PASSWORD:---- ______ACCEPTED_____ PASSWORD:**** 2 Specifying printer driver settings 2-28 GDI Printer Controller 2.5 Layout tab % From the Layout tab, select the number of document pages to be printed on a single sheet of paper. Specifying printer driver settings 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-29 Combination Multiple document pages can be printed together on a single sheet of paper. Use combined printing to economize on the number of printed pages. % From the drop-down list, select the number of pages to be printed on a single sheet of paper. – For example, if "2 in 1" is selected, two pages will be printed on a single sheet of paper. If "Off" is selected, one page is printed on a single sheet of paper. – Settings: Off, 2 in 1, 4 in 1, 6 in 1, 9 in 1, 16 in 1 2 in 1 4 in 1 6 in 1 9 in 1 16 in 1 2 Specifying printer driver settings 2-30 GDI Printer Controller Combination Details % Click the [Combination Details] button to specify the printing order and whether or not to print page outlines. Item Description Combination Select the number of pages to be printed on a single sheet of paper. This is the same setting selected in the "Combination" list on the Layout tab. Order When multiple pages are printed on a single sheet of paper, select the direction and order for printing the pages. Settings: Border Line Select this check box to print an outline around each page when multiple pages are printed on a single sheet of paper. Upper Left- Columns Upper Right- Columns Upper Left- Rows Upper Right- Rows Specifying printer driver settings 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-31 Double-sided printing Document pages can be printed on both sides of the paper. Print on both sides when binding a multi-page document. 1 Click the Layout tab. 2 From the "Double Sides" drop-down list, select "Double Sided". 2 Note From the "Binding Position" drop-down list, select the desired binding position. 2 Note Double sided printing is available only when the optional automatic duplex unit is installed. 2 Specifying printer driver settings 2-32 GDI Printer Controller 2.6 Per Page Setting tab % From the Per Page Setting tab, specify whether or not a cover page is added. Specifying printer driver settings 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-33 Front Cover Page % Select whether or not a cover page is added and whether or not a document page is printed on the cover page. – Settings: Front Cover Paper Source % Select the paper drawer loaded with the paper for the cover pages. – Settings: Tray 1, Tray 2 through Tray 5 (options), Bypass Media Type % Select the type of paper to be used for the cover page. – Settings: Plain Paper, OHP, Thick Paper, Envelope Item Description None No cover page is added, and the entire document is printed on paper from the same paper drawer. Blank A blank sheet of paper from the paper drawer specified in the "Front Cover Paper Source" list is added as a cover page. Printed The first page of the document is printed on paper from the paper drawer specified in the "Front Cover Paper Source" list and is added as a cover page. 2 Specifying printer driver settings 2-34 GDI Printer Controller 2.7 Watermark tab From the Watermark tab, specific text can be printed in the background as a watermark. Watermark Select 1 Click the Watermark tab. 2 From the Watermark Select list, select the watermark to be printed. – Settings: No Watermark, CONFIDENTIAL, COPY, DO NOT COPY, DRAFT, FINAL, PROOF, TOP SECRET 3 To print the watermark only on the first page, select the "1st Page Only" check box. – To print the watermark on all pages, clear the check box. Specifying printer driver settings 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-35 Creating a new watermark A new watermark can be registered. 1 Click the Watermark tab. 2 Click the [New] button. The New dialog box appears. 3 In the "Watermark Text" box, type in the text to be used as the watermark. – A maximum of 20 characters can be entered for the text. – A maximum of 32 watermarks can be registered (including "No Watermark"). 2 Specifying printer driver settings 2-36 GDI Printer Controller 4 Specify the desired settings. – Font: Select the font for the watermark. Any font installed on the computer can be selected. – Bold: Select to use bold text. – Italic: Select to use italic text. – Size: Specify a character size between 7 and 300 points. – Angle: Specify the angle that the text is printed on the paper. A setting between 0° and 359° can be specified. – Darkness: Specify the density of the text. A setting between 10% and 100% can be specified. – Offset from Center: Specify the horizontal and vertical positions for the location where the text is to be printed. Settings between -100 and 100 can be specified. – The position can also be changed by using the sliders below and to the right of the preview image. 5 Click the [Add] button. The watermark is added to the "Watermark Select" list. Horizontal direction: Reducing the number moves the text to the left. Vertical direction: Increasing the number moves the text up. Specifying printer driver settings 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-37 Editing a watermark A registered watermark can be edited to change the text, size and position. 1 Click the Watermark tab. 2 From the list, select the watermark to be edited. 3 Click the [Edit] button. The Edit dialog box appears. 4 Specify the desired settings. – Watermark Text: Type in the watermark text. – Font: Select the font for the watermark. Any font installed on the computer can be selected. – Bold: Select to use bold text. – Italic: Select to use italic text. – Size: Specify a character size between 7 and 300 points. – Angle: Specify the angle that the text is printed on the paper. A setting between 0° and 359° can be specified. – Darkness: Specify the density of the text. A setting between 10% and 100% can be specified. 2 Specifying printer driver settings 2-38 GDI Printer Controller – Offset from Center: Specify the horizontal and vertical positions for the location where the text is to be printed. Settings between -100 and 100 can be specified. – A maximum of 20 characters can be entered for the text. Specifying printer driver settings 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-39 – The position can also be changed by using the sliders below and to the right of the preview image. 5 Click the [OK] button. The watermark is changed. 2 Note To delete a registered watermark, select the watermark from the list, and then click the [Delete] button. Horizontal direction: Reducing the number moves the text to the left. Vertical direction: Increasing the number moves the text up. 2 Specifying printer driver settings 2-40 GDI Printer Controller 2.8 Quality tab From the Quality tab, settings for the print quality can be specified. Resolution % From the drop-down list, select "600 e 600 dpi" or "300 e 300 dpi" as the print resolution. 2 Note When "600 × 600 dpi" is selected, the print quality is increased, but the printing time is longer than if "300 × 300 dpi" is selected. Specifying printer driver settings 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-41 Adjustment % Click the [Adjustment] button to specify the brightness and contrast. Item Description Brightness Adjust the brightness of the printed image. A setting between -50 and 50 can be specified. The larger the number, the higher the contrast and the more distinct the image. Contrast Adjust the contrast of the printed image. A setting between -50 and 50 can be specified. The larger the number, the brighter the image. 2 Specifying printer driver settings 2-42 GDI Printer Controller 3 Control panel operations Control panel operations 3 GDI Printer Controller 3-3 3 Control panel operations Descriptions on the printing operations that can be performed from the control panel of the machine are provided below. 3.1 Printing operations The default mode of the machine is the Copy mode. Normally, when printing is performed from a connected computer, printing begins automatically. For details, refer to "Starting the print operation" on page 3-5. To print with "Bypass" selected in the "Paper Source" list on the Setup tab, refer to "Using the manual bypass tray" on page 3-8. Control panel 1 2 3 4 5 8 7 6 No. Item Description 1 Display • While print data is being received, ">>PRINTER:Printing" appears in the display. • In addition, if the [Printer] key is pressed while the machine is receiving print data (the Printer indicator is lit), the paper source and paper size settings and the user name for the current print job appear. 2 [OK] key • Press this key to select the function shown in the display. 3 [+], [,], [*] and [)] keys • Press these keys to change the menu shown in the display. 3 Control panel operations 3-4 GDI Printer Controller 2 Note The [Fax] key and the fax function keys can be used only if the optional fax kit is installed on the machine. The [Scan] key can be used only if the optional fax kit and optional network interface card NC-503 or image controller IC-206 are installed on the machine. 4 Printer indicator • This indicator flashes when the machine is receiving print data. • This indicator lights up when the machine is printing the print data. (The indicator lights up if data is being received at the same time.) • This indicator goes off if there is no print data. • Refer to "Printer indicator" on page 3-5. 5 [Printer] key • Press this key when the machine is receiving print data (Printer indicator is lit) to display the Printer mode screen. • To return to the mode before entering Printer mode, press this key while the Printer mode screen is displayed. • If there is no print data in the machine’s memory, the Printer mode screen does not appear, even if the [Printer] key is pressed. 6 [Clear/Stop] key • To cancel the current print job while print data is being received, press the [Printer] key, and then press this key when the Printer mode screen appears. Refer to "Canceling a print job" on page 3-6. 7 Start indicator • This indicator lights up in orange when the machine is receiving print data. 8 Caution indicator • This indicator lights up when an error or malfunction has occurred. No. Item Description Control panel operations 3 GDI Printer Controller 3-5 Printer indicator The "Printer" indicator shows the status of the printer data sent from the computer. Starting the print operation Normally, printing begins when printing is performed from a connected computer. - Normally, when printing is performed from a connected computer, printing begins automatically. - If a print operation is performed from a connected computer while the machine is copying, printing begins automatically when no copy operation is performed for 30 seconds. - When using the optional fax kit: If print data is received while fax data is being received, the printing of print data has priority. After the reception job is completed in Fax mode, the print data is printed, and then the fax is printed. - While printing, copy settings can be specified and fax operations can be performed. (Copies and faxes are printed after printouts are printed.) Printer indicator Printing status Flashing • The machine is receiving print data. The indicator also flashes in other modes. • An error has occurred in the machine. Lit • Print data is being printed. Instead of flashing, the indicator remains lit when data is being received during printing. Off • There is no print data in the machine’s memory. 3 Control panel operations 3-6 GDI Printer Controller Canceling a print job Printing of a print job can be canceled from the control panel of the machine’s control panel. However, a print job can only be canceled from the control panel while the machine is in Printer mode. 1 Check that the Printer indicator is flashing or is lit, and then press the [Printer] key. 2 Check that "PRINTER MODE PRINTING" appears in the machine’s display. – The message that appears differs depending on the status of the machine. 3 Press the [Clear/Stop] key. The confirmation message "JOB CANCEL" appears. PRINTER MODE User01 PRINTING LTR JOB CANCEL NO YES Control panel operations 3 GDI Printer Controller 3-7 4 Press the [+] or [,] key to select "YES", and then press the [OK] key. – To continue printing, select "No". – If no key is pressed within five seconds, printing continues. "ACCEPTED" appears in the display and the print job is canceled. If any of the following messages appear in the display, the print job can also be canceled by repeating steps 2 and 3 from the procedure described above. - PAPER EMPTY - PAPER JAM - PAPER SIZE ERROR - RESET PAPER - NO SUITABLE PAPER - UPPER TRAY FULL - REMOVE PAPER IN BYPASS TRAY - LOAD PAPER - INCORRECT PAPER SIZE - MEDIA TYPE ERROR - *RECEIVING* - FRONT COVER OPEN - 1st SIDE COVER OPEN - DUPLEX COVER OPEN - TONER EMPTY ______ACCEPTED______ NO YES 3 Control panel operations 3-8 GDI Printer Controller Using the manual bypass tray Follow the procedure described below when using the manual bypass tray to print one page at a time. 1 From the computer, display the Setup tab for the printer driver, and then select "Bypass" in the "Paper Source" list (page 2-23). 2 Perform the print operation from the computer. 3 When the message "PRINTER MODE LOAD PAPER" appears, load paper into the manual bypass tray. – Insert one sheet of paper with the front side facing down, lightly sliding the paper as much as possible into the feed slot. – Slide the paper guides to fit the size of paper being loaded. PRINTER MODE User01 LOAD PAPER( ) Control panel operations 3 GDI Printer Controller 3-9 4 Repeat step 3 as often as necessary until printing of the document is finished. 2 Note Be sure to load the paper into the manual bypass tray after the print operation is performed from the computer. Follow the procedure described below if the paper is loaded into the manual bypass tray before the print operation is performed from the computer. Remove the paper from the manual bypass tray. Press the [Reset] key. Press the [Printer] key. Perform step 3 of the procedure. Load the paper into the manual bypass tray one sheet at a time. If the multi bypass tray (optional) is installed, printing from it can be performed in the same way as with any other paper drawer since the multi bypass tray can be loaded with 100 sheets of paper. The multi bypass tray can be loaded with 10 envelopes, 20 OHP transparencies, 20 postcards, 20 label sheets or 100 sheets of plain paper. 3 Control panel operations 3-10 GDI Printer Controller Power Save mode If print data is received while the machine is in Power Save mode, the mode is canceled. When print data is received, the data is printed after the machine has finished warming up. 4 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting 4 GDI Printer Controller 4-3 4 Troubleshooting Descriptions of the errors that may occur while printing from a computer and the procedures for correcting the error are provided below. If a problem occurs during computer printing, check the following. 4.1 Checking error messages If a computer printing error occurs while any screen other than the Printer mode screen is displayed, the Caution indicator lights up and the message "Check Printer Mode" appears in the machine’s display. In this case, perform the following procedure. 1 Press the [Printer] key. The Print mode screen appears. 2 Check the error message that currently appears in the display, and then perform the desired operation to correct the error. PAPER: TEXT/PHOTO ZOOM :100% Check Printer Mode LTR ______CAUTION_______ LOAD PAPER( ) NO SUITABLE PAPER 4 Troubleshooting 4-4 GDI Printer Controller 4.2 Main error messages The main error messages that appear in the Printer mode screen are described below. Error message Cause Remedy PAPER SIZE ERROR The size of paper specified with the printer driver is different from the size of paper loaded in the paper drawer. Pull open the paper drawer with the size error, and then close it again. Check if a custom paper size has been entered, and correct the paper size from Utility mode. NO SUITABLE PAPER "Auto" is selected in the "Paper Source" list in the printer driver, but paper of the specified size is not loaded. Load paper of the specified size into a paper drawer. INCORRECT PAPER SIZE Paper of the size specified in the printer driver is not loaded in the specified paper drawer. Change the paper size from Utility mode, and then load paper of the appropriate size into a paper drawer. If the multi bypass tray (optional) is used for printing, printing begins when the appropriate paper is loaded. PAPER EMPTY Either no paper is loaded in the specified paper drawer or the specified paper drawer is not installed on the machine. Load paper of the specified size into the specified paper drawer. MEDIA TYPE ERROR Paper of the type specified in the printer driver is not loaded in the specified paper drawer. Load the appropriate paper into a paper drawer, and then change the paper type from Utility mode. If the multi bypass tray (optional) is used for printing, printing begins when the appropriate paper is loaded. MEMORY NEAR FULL The image data received from the computer has exceeded the capacity of the memory. Press any key. Turn the machine off, then on again. SECURE PRINT IS NOT AVAILABLE Since the expanded memory unit is not installed, the "Secure Print" setting cannot be selected. The job is cancelled. NOT ACCEPTED PASSWORD Since the secure print password is incorrect, the document cannot be printed. Type in the correct password. Troubleshooting 4 GDI Printer Controller 4-5 4.3 Print data when an error occurs The operation performed with the print data when an error occurs differs depending on the type of error that occurred. With a "MACHINE TROUBLE" error This error indicates that a severe operating malfunction occurred. When this error message appears in the display, the machine cannot receive any print data. Contact your technical representative. Temporary errors When the following easily corrected errors occur, the print data currently in the memory is saved. Printing automatically restarts as soon as the error is corrected. - PAPER JAM - INCORRECT PAPER SIZE - PAPER SIZE ERROR - FRONT COVER OPEN - 1st SIDE COVER OPEN - DUPLEX COVER OPEN - NO SUITABLE PAPER - PAPER EMPTY - MEDIA TYPE ERROR 2 Note If any of the errors listed above appears, the print job in the memory can be canceled. For details, refer to "Canceling a print job" on page 3-6. 4 Troubleshooting 4-6 GDI Printer Controller 5 Specifications Specifications 5 GDI Printer Controller 5-3 5 Specifications * The print speed is measured under the following printing conditions. Paper is fed from Tray 1. Specification Print speed* bizhub 163: 16 ppm (when printing on A4/Letter v paper at 300 e 300 dpi) 12 ppm (when printing on A4/Letter v paper at 600 e 600 dpi) bizhub 211: 21 ppm (when printing on A4 v paper at 300 e 300 dpi) 20 ppm (when printing on Letter v paper at 300 e 300 dpi) 12 ppm (when printing on A4/Letter v paper at 600 e 600 dpi) Memory Shared with machine Interface port Compliant with USB Revision 2.0 Printer language GDI Font Windows Supported operating systems Windows Vista, Windows Server 2003, Windows XP (Service Pack 2 or later), Windows 2000 (Service Pack 4 or later), Windows Me, Windows 98 SE, Windows Vista x64 Edition, Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition, Windows XP Professional x64 Edition or Windows Terminal Server (Windows 2000 Server/ Windows Server 2003) 5 Specifications 5-4 GDI Printer Controller Instruction booklet 252988361A_ENG LFF/LFFn Dear customer Dear customer For your security and comfort, we urge you to carefully read the chapter Security, page 1 before attempting use. In buying this multifunction machine, you have opted for a quality product. Your device satisfies all of the different needs of a modern office automation tool. This machine allows you to scan and fax in color and black and white, to print and copy in black and white. You can connect the multifunction device to your PC (Microsoft Windows 98SE/ME/2000/XP/Vista 32-bit). Install the software included to use the multifunction device as a printer. Besides, you can scan, edit and save documents through your PC. If you have a WLAN adaptor (optional) you can communicate with a personal computer wirelessly. WLAN is an optional working only with a specific adaptor that you can obtain from your retailer. Thanks to its navigator and its multitask access, it is powerful, user-friendly and easy to use. The multifunction machines, come with a 600 dpi scanner and a black and white laser printer offering a printing speed of 16 ppm. The Companion Suite Pro LL software provided allows you to use your multifunction machine as a scanner and a printer from a personal computer. It also gives you the ability to manage your multifunction machine. - I - Contents Contents Dear customer I Security 1 Security directives 1 Positions of Safety labels on the machine 2 Symbols for the main power switch 2 Declaration of conformity 2 Notice to Users in EU Countries 2 Environment 3 The packaging 3 Batteries and rechargeable batteries 3 The product 3 Software use license 4 Definition 4 License 4 Property 4 Duration 4 Warranty 4 Responsibility 4 Development 4 Applicable law 5 Registered trademarks 5 Prohibited reproductions 5 Installation 6 Location conditions 6 Cautions of use 6 Paper recommendations 7 Loading paper in the main unit tray 7 Handling of paper 7 Humidity control 7 Use of envelopes 7 EP Cartridge recommendations 7 Terminal description 8 Command panel 9 Accessing terminal menus 9 Packaging contents 10 Device installation (depending on model) 10 Installing the document feeder 10 Feed cassette paper insertion 10 Cartridge installation 11 Paper delivery stop 12 Starting your device 12 Device connection 12 Paper insertion in the manual input tray 13 Copy 14 Simple copy 14 ECO mode copy 14 Advanced copying 14 Special setup for the copying 15 Resolution setup 15 Zoom setup 15 Assembled copy setup 15 Analysis origin setup 15 Contrast setup 15 Brightness setup 15 Paper type setup 16 Paper tray selection 16 Sheet-feed analysis margins setup 16 Analysis margins setup 16 Left and right printing margins setup 16 Top and bottom printing margins setup 16 Format paper setup 16 Fax 17 Fax transmission 17 Print a header page (depending on model) 17 Immediate transmission 17 Delayed transmission 17 Transmission with auto redial 18 Fax reception 18 Relay broadcast 18 Fax answering machine 19 Saving an access code 19 Activating / Deactivating the answering machine 19 Printing fax messages stored in the memory 19 Fax rerouting 19 Activating rerouting 19 Setting the re-direction contact 19 Printing rerouted documents 19 Rerouting fax messages to a USB memory key 20 Activating rerouting 20 Printing rerouted documents 20 Transmission waiting queue 20 Performing immediate transmission from the waiting queue 20 Consulting or modifying the waiting queue 20 Deleting a transmission on hold 20 Printing a document in waiting or in deposit 20 Printing the waiting queue 20 Cancelling a transmission in progress 21 MailBoxes (MBX Fax) 21 Creating an MBX 21 Modifying the features of a MBX 21 Printing the contents of a MBX 21 Deleting a MBX 22 Printing the MBX list 22 MBX deposit in your fax 22 MBX deposit in a remote fax 22 MBX polling from a remote fax 22 Deposit and Polling 22 Placing a document in deposit 22 Polling a deposited document 23 SMS 24 SMS Parameters 24 Presentation of the sender 24 SMS Center transmission number 24 Sending an SMS 24 Parameters/Setup 25 Date/Time 25 Your fax number/Your name 25 Type of network 25 Geographical settings 25 Country 25 Network 25 Language 26 Local prefix 26 Prefix 26 Transmission report 26 Document feed type 26 Economy period 26 Reception Mode 27 Reception without paper 27 - II - Contents Number of copies 27 Fax or PC reception 27 Received faxes reduction mode 27 Technical Parameters 28 Printing the functions guide 30 Printing the logs 30 Print the list of setups 30 Font printing 30 Lock the machine 30 Lock the keyboard 30 Lock the numbers 31 Lock the SMS service 31 Read the counters 31 Sent pages counter 31 Received pages counter 31 Scanned pages counter 31 Printed pages counter 31 Display the consumables status 31 Calibrate your scanner 31 Directory 32 Creating subscribers record 32 Creating subscribers list 32 Modifying a record 32 Deleting a record or a list 33 Printing the directory 33 Games and entertainment 34 Sudoku (depending on the model) 34 Print a grid 34 Print the solution to a grid 34 Local network settings 35 Selecting the type of your local network 35 Ethernet network settings (model network) 35 Automatic configuration 35 Manual configuration 35 IP address 35 Sub-network mask 35 Gateway address 35 IEEE Address (or Ethernet address) or MAC address 35 NetBIOS names 35 Name servers 35 WLAN network 36 Type of radio network 36 Radio infrastructure network 36 Radio ad-hoc network 36 Radio networks (WLAN) 36 Connect your WLAN adaptor 36 Configure your network 37 Creating or rejoining a network 37 Referring to or changing your network parameters 37 An example of how an AD-HOC network may be set up 39 Setting up a multifunction machine 39 Setting up the PC 39 Message service (model network) 40 Information required to set up message service 40 Configuring initialisation parameters 40 Access to servers parameters 40 Access to SMTP authentification parameters 40 Sending an E-Mail 40 Sending an E-mail text 40 Scan to FTP 41 Simply put the file in an FTP server 41 Connection configuration 41 Standard settings 41 Selecting the connection type 41 Selecting the transmission type 41 Modifying the connection period (Periodic type) 41 Modifying the connection time(s) (Set Times type) 42 Selecting the print mode for the deposit notice 42 Printing the Internet settings 42 Mail sorting 42 F@X Only mode 42 PC Only mode 42 PC share mode 42 USB memory key 43 Use of the USB memory key 43 Print your documents 43 Print the list of files located in the key 43 Print the files located in the key 43 Delete your files located in the key 44 Analyse the USB memory key content 44 Save a document on a USB memory key 44 Activate/deactivate file automatic deletion on a USB memory key 45 PC Features 46 Introduction 46 Configuration requirements 46 Installation 46 Install the software on your PC 46 Connections 48 USB Connection 48 Network connection 48 Uninstall the software from your PC 49 Multifunction Terminal's Supervision 50 Checking the connection between the PC and the multifunction machine 50 MF Director 50 Graphical presentation 50 Utilities and applications activation 50 MF Monitor 51 Graphical presentation 51 Display the consumable status 51 Scan To 51 Companion Suite Pro LL functionalities 51 Document analysis 51 Analysis with Scan To 52 Analysis from a TWAIN compatible software 52 Character recognition software (OCR) 52 Printing 52 Printing with the multifunction machine 52 Address book 53 Add a contact to the terminal address book 53 Add a group to the terminal address book 53 Manage the address book 54 Modify the information related to a contact 54 Modify a group 54 Delete a contact or a group from the address book 54 Print the address book 54 Import or export a directory 54 Import a directory 54 Save your address book 54 Fax communications 54 - III - Contents Presentation of the Fax window 54 Send a fax 55 Send a fax from the hard disk or the terminal 55 Send a fax from application 55 Receive a fax 56 Follow-up of fax communications 56 The outbox 56 The send memory (items sent) 56 The outbox log 56 The inbox log 57 Fax parameters 57 Access to fax parameters 57 Description of the tab Log and Report 57 Description of the tab Fax Parameters 57 Cover sheet 58 Creating a cover sheet 58 Description of the tab Cover page 59 Creating a cover page template 59 SMS Communication 60 Presentation of the SMS window 60 Send an SMS 61 Follow-up of SMS 61 The outbox 61 The outbox log 62 The sent item memory (items sent) 62 SMS Parameters 62 Access to SMS parameters 62 Description of the tab Logs and reports 62 Maintenance 63 Service 63 General information 63 Toner cartridge replacement 63 Issues with smart cards 63 Cleaning 64 Scanner reading system cleaning 64 Printer cleaning 64 Printer external cleaning 64 Printer issues 64 Error messages 64 Paper jam 64 Scanner issues 65 Miscellaneous issues 65 Communication errors 65 Transmission from the feeder 66 Transmission from memory 66 Communication error codes 66 General codes 66 Specifications 67 Physical specifications 67 Electrical specifications 67 Environmental specifications 67 Peripheral specifications 67 Consumable specifications 68 - 1 - 1 - Security - Declaration of conformity - Environment - Licence Security Security directives Before turning on your device, check that the outlet that you are going to plug it into conforms to the indications shown on the information plate (voltage, current, power network frequency) located on your device. This device shall be connected to a single phase power network. The device shall not be installed on bare ground. Batteries and rechargeable batteries, packaging and electric and electronic equipment (EEE), shall be thrown away, as specified by the Instructions of the ENVIRONMENT chapter of this manual. Because of the device model, the power connector is the only way to disconnecting the device from the power network, that is why it is imperative to apply the following safety measures: your device shall be connected to a power outlet located nearby. The outlet shall be easily accessible. Your device is delivered with a grounded power cord. It is imperative to connect a grounded connector to a grounded outlet connected to the building earthing. For installation conditions and safe use precautions, refer to chapter Installation, page 6. Repairs-maintenance: Repairs and maintenance should only be carried out by a qualified technician. No user serviceable parts inside the machine. To reduce the risk of electrical shock, you shall not proceed with these operations yourself, because by opening or removing the lids, you could expose yourself to two hazards: - The laser beam can cause irreversible eye damage. - Avoid contact with powered parts because it can lead to electrical shock with unfortunate consequences. APPAREIL A RAYONNEMENT LASER DE CLASSE 1 CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT LASER KLASSE 1 PRODUKT PRODUCTO LASER DE CLASE 1 APARECCHIO LASER DI CLASSE 1 - 2 - 1 - Security - Declaration of conformity - Environment - Licence Positions of Safety labels on the machine The device has warning labels at the positions shown below. For your safety, you must never touch these surfaces when you remove a paper jam or when you replace the EP cartridge. Symbols for the main power switch In accordance with IEC 60417, this machine uses the following symbols for the main power switch: - means POWER ON. - means POWER OFF. Declaration of conformity Notice to Users in EU Countries The tagging attests to the product's compliance with the demands of the R&TTE 1999/5/CE directive. For users security, in accordance with the 73/23/CE directive. For electromagnetic disturbances, in accordance with the 89/336/CE directive. The manufacturer declares that the products are manufactured in accordance with the APPENDIX II of the R&TTE 1999/5/CE directive. - 3 - 1 - Security - Declaration of conformity - Environment - Licence Environment The preservation of the environment is of importance to the manufacturer. The manufacturer wishes to service the installations with respect to the environment and has chosen to integrate the environmental performance in the whole lifecycle of its products, throughout manufacturing, release, use and disposal. The packaging The (green point) logo indicates that a contribution is given to an approved national organization to improve the packaging salvage and recycling infrastructures. To make recycling easier, follow local rules and regulations concerning sorting and disposal of such waste. Batteries and rechargeable batteries If your product contains batteries or rechargeable batteries, these shall be disposed of at the designated collecting centers. The product The crossed bin symbol on the product indicates that it belongs to the electric and electronic equipment family. Therefore, according to European regulations you are requested to dispose of it at the selected collection areas: - to distribution centers in case of equivalent equipment purchase, - to the available local collecting centers (dump, selective collection, etc.). In doing so, you will participate in the "Waste of Electric and Electronic Equipment reuse and development scheme" which will help prevent potential effects on the environment and human health. The purpose of the International ENERGY STAR® Program is to promote the development and popularization of energy-efficient office equipment. As an ENERGY STAR® Partner, the manufacturer has determined that this product meets the ENERGY STAR® guidelines for energy efficiency. - 4 - 1 - Security - Declaration of conformity - Environment - Licence Software use license CAREFULLY READ ALL THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE PRESENT LICENSE BEFORE OPENING THE SEALED ENVELOPE CONTAINING THE SOFTWARE. OPENING THIS ENVELOPE INDICATES THAT YOU ACCEPT THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS. In case you should not accept the terms of this license, the CD-ROM packaging should be returned to the retailer unopened, along with the other components of the product. The purchase price of this product will be refunded. No refunds will be made for products if the CD-ROM packaging have been opened, if components are missing or if the reimbursement request is made after ten (10) days from the purchase date, your receipt is the proof of purchase. Definition The Software designates programs and associated documentation. License - This license allows you to use this Software on personal computers on a local network. You only have permission to use this Software to print on one multifunction machine; you can not lend the Software or authorize anyone to use it. - You are allowed to make a back up copy. - This license is non-exclusive and non-transferable. Property The manufacturer or its providers hold the Software property right. You only become the owner of the CD-ROM. You shall not modify, adapt, decompile, translate, create any derived piece, rent or sell the Software or the documentation. Any rights not explicitly approved are reserved by the manufacturer or its providers. Duration This license remains valid until cancelled. You can cancel it by destroying the program and the documentation as well as any other copies of them. This license will automatically be canceled in case you do not respect the terms of this license. If the license is rendered invalid, you agree to destroy all copies of the program and the associate documentation. Warranty The Software is provided "as is" with no warranties what so ever, whether expressed or implied, including without limitation, any warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose; all the risks concerning the results and performance of this Software are assumed by the buyer. In case the program should appear defective, all the repair and service expenses will be covered by the buyer. Nevertheless, the license holder benefits from the following warranty: we guarantee that the CD-ROM on which the Software is recorded is free from hardware or manufacturing faults if used in normal conditions, the guarantee is valid for ninety (90) days from the delivery date, the copy of the receipt being the proof of purchase. In case of a CD-ROM fault that due to accident or misuse, the CD-ROM will not be replaced as per the warranty. Responsibility If the CD-ROM is not working properly, send it to the retailer together with a copy of the receipt. It is the retailer's sole responsibility to replace the CD-ROM. Nobody, not even the manufacturer who is involved in the creation, realization, merchantability and delivery of this program would be responsible for direct, indirect or immaterial damages, such as, but not limited to, loss of information, loss of time, execution loss, loss of revenue, loss of customers, due to the use or inability to use the program. Development With a constant concern for improvement, the manufacturer reserves the right to modify the Software specifications without any notice. In case of modification, your user right does not give you access to free updates. - 5 - 1 - Security - Declaration of conformity - Environment - Licence Applicable law This license is under the French law. Any dispute following the interpretation or execution of this license will be submitted to the Paris Court. Given the continuous technology development, the manufacturer reserves the right to modify the technical specifications indicated for this product, at any time, without prior notice, and/or to stop manufacturing of the product. All the names of the products and brands that could be trademarks registered by their respective owners are recognized in the present document. Registered trademarks Given the technical evolution, the manufacturer reserves the right to modify the technical specifications of this product and/or to stop its manufacturing at any time and without notice. Companion Suite Pro is a registered trademark of Sagem Communication. Adobe® and the Adobe® products referred to here are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated. PaperPort11SE is a registered trademark of ScanSoft. Microsoft® Windows® 98, Microsoft® Windows® Millennium®, Microsoft® Windows NT®, Microsoft® Windows 2000®, Microsoft® Windows XP®, Microsoft® Windows Vista® and any other Microsoft® product referred to here are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation registered and/or used in the United States and/or in other countries. All the other brands or products referred to as examples or in order to give additional information are registered trademarks of their respective owners. The informations contents of this user manual are subject to change without notice. Prohibited reproductions Do not copy or print any item for which reproduction is prohibited by law. Copying or printing the following items is generally prohibited by local law : - bank notes; - checks; - bonds; - stock certificates; - bank drafts; - passports; - driver's licenses. The preceding list is meant as a guide only and is not inclusive. If you have any questions concerning the legality of copying or printing certain items, consult with your legal advisor. - 6 - 2 - Installation Installation Location conditions By choosing an appropriate location, you preserve the longevity of the machine. Check that the selected location has the following characteristics: - Choose a well ventilated location. - Make sure not to obstruct the ventilation grids located on the left and right sides of the device. During the installation, make sure to place the machine thirty centimeters away from the surrounding objects so all the lids can be easily opened. - Make sure that this location does not present any ammonia nor any other organic gasses emission hazard. - The ground outlet (refer to the security notices presented in the Security chapter) to which you plan to connect the machine must be located close to this one and have an easy access. - Make sure that the machine is not directly exposed to sun light. - Make sure not to place the machine in an area exposed to an air flow generated by an air conditioning, heating or ventilation system, nor in an area subject to large temperature or humidity variations. - Choose a solid and horizontal surface on which the machine will not be exposed to intense vibrations. - Keep the machine away from any object that could obstruct its ventilation ports. - Do not place the machine close to hangings or any other flammable objects. - Choose a location where splashes of the water and other liquids are limited. - Make sure that this location is dry, clean and dust free. Cautions of use Take into account the important precautions below when using the machine. Running environment: - Temperature: 10 °C to 32 °C with a maximum amplitude of 10 °C per hour. - Humidity: 15 to 80 % of ambient humidity (without condensation), with a maximum amplitude of 20 % per hour. Terminal: The section below describes the precautions to be taken when using the machine: - Never turn the machine off and never open the lids while printing. - Never use gas or flammable liquids, or objects generating magnetic field close to the machine. - When you unplug the power cord, always hold the connector without pulling the cord. A damaged cord presents a potential fire hazard or an electric shock hazard. - Never touch the power cord with wet hands. You risk getting an electric shock. - Always unplug the power cord before moving the machine. Otherwise, you could risk having the cord damaged and create a fire hazard or an electric shock hazard. - Always unplug the power cord when you plan not to use the machine for a long period of time. - Never put objects on the power cord, never pull it and never fold it. This could cause a fire hazard or an electric shock hazard. - Always make sure that the machine is not sitting on the power cord or any other electric device communication cables. Make sure also that neither cord nor cable is introduced to the machine inner mechanism. This would expose you to a machine malfunction risk or to a fire hazard. - Make sure that the printer is unplugged from the power outlet before connecting or disconnecting an interface cable to the printer (use a shielded interface cable). - Never try to remove any fixed pane or hood. The machine contains high voltage circuits. Any contact with these circuits can cause an electric shock risk. Make sure to place the machine in well ventilated premises. When in operation, the printer generates a small amount of ozone. An unpleasant smell can come from the printer if it is used intensively in poorly ventilated premises. For a secure use, make sure you place the machine in well ventilated premises. - 7 - 2 - Installation - Never try to modify the machine. This could cause a fire hazard or an electric shock hazard. - Always make sure that paper clips, staples or other small metallic items do not get inside the machine via the ventilation ports or other ports. Such items create fire hazards or electric shock hazards. - Prevent water and any other liquid from spilling on the machine or near to it. Any contact of the machine with water or liquid can cause a fire hazard or an electric shock hazard. - If liquid or metallic item gets accidentally inside the machine, turn it off immediately, unplug the power cord and contact your retailer. Otherwise, you will face a fire hazard or an electric shock hazard. - In case of heat, smoke, unusual smell or abnormal noise emissions, turn the machine off, unplug the power cord immediately and contact your retailer. Otherwise, you will face a fire hazard or an electric shock hazard. - Avoid using the machine during an "electric storm", this can cause an electric shock hazard due to lightning. - Never move the terminal during printing. - Always lift the terminal when you wish to move it. Paper recommendations Loading paper in the main unit tray - Insert paper with the face down, and adjust paper guides to the paper format to avoid feed failure, skewing, and paper jams. - Amount of loaded paper must not exceed the loading mark. If the loading mark is exceeded, this may cause feed failure, skewing, and paper jams. - Adding paper in the pile must be avoided because it may cause double feeding. - When withdrawing the cassette from the main unit, always support it with both hands to avoid doing drop it. - If you use paper already printed by your machine or another printer, the printing quality may not be optimal. Handling of paper - Curling must be corrected before printing. Curls must not exceed 10 mm. - Care must be taken with storage to prevent feed faults and image defects due to leaving the paper in conditions of high humidity. Humidity control - Paper which has become damp, or paper which has been left unused for a very long time. - After opening the paper, it must be kept in a plastic bag. - Paper with waved ends, paper which is creased, paper with crumples, and any other non-normal paper must not be used. Use of envelopes - Feeding can be done only through the manual feed. - Recommended area should be the area which excludes 15 mm from the leading edge, 10 mm from and both the left and right edges, and the rear edge. - A few lines may be given in solid print at the part of being overlapped. - Envelopes which are not recommended may lead to improper printing (refer to the paragraph Peripheral specifications, page 67). - Curled envelope after printing should be fixed manually. - Small crumples on the edge of the wide side of envelopes. Smearing, or less clear printing may appear on the reverse side. - Set envelope by pressing the folding line of four edges properly after releasing air inside. Set envelope in a proper position after aligning in case it is bent or warped. EP Cartridge recommendations - Must not be stood on the side, or held upside down. - 8 - 2 - Installation Terminal description Front side Back side Control panel Document feeder Paper output Manual Paper tray Master USB Cartridge access cover Manual paper feed setup guides input tray (USB key) Smart card insertion point Fold-down stop for paper delivery connection Slave USB connection (for PC) On/Off switch Power supply cord connection Paper jam cover Telephone cable socket Additional telephone cable socket Master USB connection (USB key) (model network) LAN Connection (model standard) - 9 - 2 - Installation Command panel Accessing terminal menus All terminal functions and settings are available via the menu and are associated to a specific menu command. For example, the menu command 51 launches the printing of the functions list (the functions list stores the list of all terminal menus, sub-menus and their identification number). Two methods are available to access menu items : the step by step method or the shortcut method. To print the functions list whitch details the Step by step method: 1 Press 􀀙. 2 Use the 􀀙 or 􀀘 button to browse the menu and select 5 - PRINT. Confirm with OK. 3 Use the 􀀙 or 􀀘 button to browse the menu PRINT and select 51-FUNCTIONS LIST. Confirm with OK. To print the functions list with with the shortcut method: 1 Press on 􀀙. 2 Enter 51 with the numerical keypad to directly print the functions list. COL 1 2 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 3 23 24 25 4 5 6 7 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 1. Screen. 2. Digital keypad. 3. Alphabetical keypad. 4. Key 􀃍: deletes the character to the left of the cursor. 5. Key : input or line feed. 6. Key : access to special characters. 7. Key : Shift. 8. Key SCAN: document analysis to the PC or a media (USB key). 9. Key COPY: local copy. 10. Key STOP PRINT: stops the current PC printing. 11. Key : sending of an SMS (Short Message Service). 12. Key : sending of a fax. 13.Key : access to directory and quick dial numbers. 14. Key : line manual connection, listen for tone during fax sending. 15. Key : multiple contact sending (fax, e-mail or SMS). 16. Key : Validation. 17. Key OK: confirms the displayed selection. 18. Key 􀀙: menu access and navigation down the menus. 19. Key C: back to the previous menu and input correction. 20. Key 􀀘: navigation up the menus. 21. Key : stops the current operation. 22. Key ECO: sets up the activation delay. 23. Key : color analysis mode selection. 24. Key : analysis resolution setup. 25. Key : contrast setup. 26. Icon : Superfin resolution. 27. Icon : Photo resolution. 28. Icon : Fin resolution. 29. Icon : colour mode. 30. Icon : activity on the telephone line. 31. Icon : Fax mode. 32. Icon : external answering machine mode. - 10 - 2 - Installation Packaging contents The packaging contains the items listed below: Multifunction device Control panel (depending on model) 1 toner cartridge 1 installation guide and 1 PC installation CD ROM 1 power cord 1 telephone cord 1 initialisation card (depending on model) Device installation (depending on model) 1 Unpack the device. 2 Install the device respecting the security notices stated at the beginning of this booklet. 3 Remove all stickers from the machine. 4 Remove the plastic protection film from the screen. 5 Place the control panel in front of the machine, insert the control panel in its back slots (A). 6 Push the front side of the control panel (B) to clip it. Installing the document feeder 1 Secure the document feeder by fitting the two clips (B) in the notches (A) provided for this purpose. Feed cassette paper insertion Your device accepts a number of formats and types of papers (refer to the paragraph Consumable specifications, page 68). Before inserting paper, refer to the paragraph Paper recommendations, page 7. A B B A B - 11 - 2 - Installation 1 Remove the paper feed cassette completely. 2 Push the lower panel down until it clicks. 3 Setup the back side feed cassette stop by pushing the "PUSH" lever (A). Then adjust the lateral paper guides to the paper format by pushing lever (B) located on the left guide. Adjust the length paper guide to the paper format by pushing lever (C). 4 Take a paper stack, pull the paper off and align it on a flat surface. 5 Put the paper stack in the feed cassette (ex: 200 sheets of 80 g/m² paper). 6 Put the feed cassette back in its location. Cartridge installation 1 Stand in front of the machine. 2 Push the left and right sides of the cover and pull it towards you at the same time. 3 Unpack the new cartridge. Gently roll the cartridge 5 or 6 times to distribute the toner evenly inside the cartridge. Thoroughly rolling the cartridge will assure the maximum copies per cartridge. 4 Insert the cartridge in its slot by pushing it until it clicks (last move down) as shown on the picture below. 5 Close the cover. You can use paper weighing between 60 and 105 g/m2. PUSH B A C - 12 - 2 - Installation Paper delivery stop Adjust the paper delivery stop, depending on the format of the document to be printed. Do not forget to raise the flap to prevent the sheets from falling down. Starting your device Device connection 1 Plug the end of the telephone line into the terminal socket and the other end into the wall telephone socket. 2 For the model network, plug end of the LAN cord (as provided by your network administrator) into port of your fax machine and the other end into your local network port dedicated to your fax machine. 3 Make sure that the On/Off switch is on Off (O position). 4 Connect the power cord to the device. Plug the power cord to outlet on the wall 5 Press the On/Off button to turn on the device (I position). 6 (*) After initialisation, "WAITING FOR INIT CARD" appears on the screen. Insert the initialisation card provided in the card reader as indicated on the picture. 7 (*) After an analysis phase, "INIT. OK - REMOVE CARD" appears on the screen. Remove the initialisation card from the drive. Before plugging the power cord, it is imperative to refer to the Security directives, page 1. - 13 - 2 - Installation 8 By default, the machine is set to operate in the UK in English. To modify this parameter, refer to Country, page 25. 9 Set the date and time, refer to Date/Time, page 25. (*) depending on model Paper insertion in the manual input tray The manual input tray allows you to use various paper formats with greater weightings than the one used in the paper feed cassette (refer to the paragraph Consumable specifications, page 68). Only one sheet or envelope can be fed at a time. 1 Spread the manual feed guides to the maximum. 2 Insert a sheet or an envelope in the manual input tray. 3 Adjust the paper guides against the right and left edges of the sheet or the envelope. Before inserting paper, refer to the paragraph Paper recommendations, page 7. You can use paper, which weights between 52 and 160 g/m². Before printing, check that the paper format you are using matches the paper format set on the printer (refer to Copy, page 14). - 14 - 3 - Copy Copy Your machine has the function to make one or more copies. You can also setup several parameters in order to make copies at your will. Simple copy In this case, the default parameters are applied. 1 Place the document to be copied in the automatic document feeder, printed face on the top. or Place the document to be copied face down on the glass, respecting the indications around the glass. 2 Press the button twice. The copy is made using the default parameters. ECO mode copy The ECO mode enables you to reduce the amount of toner consumed on the page so as to save your printing costs. When the ECO mode is used, the toner consumption is reduced and the print density becomes lighter. 1 Place the document to be copied in the automatic document feeder, printed face on the top. or Place the document to be copied face down on the glass, respecting the indications around the glass. 2 Press the button. 3 Press the button. Advanced copying The sophisticated copy allows to do custom setups for the current copy. 1 Place the document to be copied in the automatic document feeder, face printed on the top. or Place the document to be copied face down on the glass, respecting the indications around the glass. 2 Press the button. 3 Enter the number of copies that you want and confirm with the OK button. 4 Choose the paper tray AUTOMATIC or MANUAL with the buttons 􀀘 or 􀀙, then confirm with the OK button. 5 Choose with the buttons 􀀘 or 􀀙 the printing option (see examples below) depending on the copy mode that you want: - Combined mode (document feeder): 1 Page onto 1, 2 Pages onto 1, or 4 Pages onto 1. - Poster mode (flat-bed scanner): 1 Page to 1, 1 Page to 4 or 1 page to 9. Confirm with the OK button. 6 Adjust the desired zoom level, from 25% TO 400% with the buttons 􀀘 or 􀀙, confirm with the OK button (only available in 1 Page to 1 copy mode). 7 Adjust the desired origin values with the digital keyboard buttons 􀀘 or 􀀙 then confirm with the OK button. 8 Choose the resolution depending on the printing quality that you want DRAFT, AUTO, QUALITY TEXT or PHOTO with the buttons 􀀘 or 􀀙, then confirm with the OK button. After step 1, you can directly enter the number of copies with the numerical keypad and press the OK button to validate. Then refer to step 4. COPY COPY ECO COPY Analyzed sheets 1 2 1 3 2 4 2 pages to 1 4 pages to 1 MOSAÏC Copy mode 1 2 1 2 3 4 1 1 page to 1 1 Output POSTER Copy mode Analyzed sheets 1 page to 4 1 page to 9 1 page to 1 Output A A A A - 15 - 3 - Copy 9 Adjust the contrast level with the buttons 􀀘 or 􀀙, then confirm with the OK button. 10 Adjust the desired brightness level with the buttons 􀀘 or 􀀙, then confirm with the OK button. 11 Choose the paper type NORMAL, THICK with the buttons 􀀘 or 􀀙, then confirm with the OK button. Special setup for the copying Setups done through this menu become the device default setups after you confirm. Resolution setup The RESOLUTION parameter allows you to setup the photocopy resolution. 􀀙 841 - ADVANCED FCT/COPY/RESOLUTION 1 Choose the resolution with the buttons 􀀘 or 􀀙 according to the following table: 2 Confirm your choice by pressing the OK button. Zoom setup The ZOOM parameter allows you to reduce or enlarge an area of a document by choosing the origin and the zoom level to apply to the document, from 25 to 400 %. 􀀙 842 - ADVANCED FCT/COPY/ZOOMING 1 Enter the desired zoom level with the Alpanumerical keyboard or choose among predefined values with the buttons 􀀘 and 􀀙. 2 Confirm your choice by pressing the OK button. Assembled copy setup 􀀙 843 - ADVANCED FCT/COPY/ASSEMBLED The ASSEMBLED parameter allows you to assemble or disassemble your copies. Enter the desired setting and confirm your choice by pressing the OK button. Analysis origin setup If you want, you can change the origin of the scanner. By entering new values for X and Y in mm (X < 209 and Y < 280), you move the analysed area as shown on the diagram below. 􀀙 844 - ADVANCED FCT/COPY/ORIGIN 1 Select the X and Y coordinates with the buttons 􀀘 or 􀀙. 2 Setup the desired coordinates with the digital keyboard or the buttons 􀀘 and 􀀙, confirm your choice by pressing on the OK button. Contrast setup The CONTRAST parameter allows to choose the photocopy contrast. 􀀙 845 - ADVANCED FCT/COPY/CONTRAST 1 Setup the desired level of contrast with the buttons 􀀘 and 􀀙, confirm by pressing the OK button. 2 You can also directly setup the desired contrast with the button, press several times on this button until the desired setup without using the Menu 845. 3 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Brightness setup The BRIGHTNESS parameter allows to lighten or darken your original document. 􀀙 846 - ADVANCED FCT/COPY/LUMINOSITY 1 Setup the desired brightness with the buttons 􀀘 and 􀀙. 2 Confirm your choice by pressing the OK button. 3 Quit this menu by pressing the button. When the quality of the printing is not satisfying, you can proceed to a calibration (see Calibrate your scanner, page 31). Parameter Signification DRAFT Low resolution. AUTO Standard resolution for documents containing text and graphics. QUALITY TEXT Optimal resolution for documents containing text. PHOTO Optimal resolution for documents containing photographies. You can also change the resolution by pressing the button. y DEBUT FEUILLE FIN FEUILLE x Analysed area BEGIN. OF SHEET END OF SHEET - 16 - 3 - Copy Paper type setup 􀀙 851 - ADVANCED FCT/SCAN. & PRINT/PAPER TYPE 1 Select the paper NORMAL or THICK that you use with the buttons 􀀘 and 􀀙. 2 Confirm your setup by pressing the OK button. 3 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Paper tray selection The Automatic selection can have two meanings depending on the paper format defined on the paper trays. The following table describes the different cases. 􀀙 852 - ADVANCED FCT/SCAN. & PRINT/TRAY PAPER 1 Select the default paper tray to use, AUTOMATIC or MANUAL, with the buttons 􀀘 and 􀀙. 2 Confirm by pressing the OK button. 3 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Sheet-feed analysis margins setup If you want to, you can offset the lateral margins of the document to the left or right during the analysis with your sheet-feed scanner. 􀀙 853 - ADVANCED FCT/SCAN. & PRINT/ S.F. MARGINS 1 Setup the left / right margins offsets (by 0.5 mm steps) with the buttons 􀀘 and 􀀙. 2 Confirm by pressing the OK button. 3 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Analysis margins setup If you want to, you can offset the lateral margins of the document to the left or right during the analysis with your flat-bed scanner. 􀀙 854 - ADVANCED FCT/SCAN. & PRINT/ FLATBED MARG 1 Setup the left / right margins offsets (by 0.5 mm steps) with the buttons 􀀘 and 􀀙. 2 Confirm by pressing the OK button. 3 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Left and right printing margins setup If you want to, you can offset the lateral margins of the document to the left or right during printing. 􀀙 855 - ADVANCED FCT/SCAN. & PRINT/ PRINTER MARG 1 Setup the left / right margins offsets (by 0.5 mm steps) with the buttons 􀀘 and 􀀙. 2 Confirm by pressing the OK button. 3 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Top and bottom printing margins setup If you want to, you can offset the lateral margins of the document towards the top or the bottom during printing. 􀀙 856 - ADVANCED FCT/SCAN. & PRINT/TOP PRINT. 1 Setup the top / bottom margins offsets (by 0.5 mm steps) with the buttons 􀀘 and 􀀙. 2 Confirm by pressing the OK button. 3 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Format paper setup This menu allows you to define the default paper format of the manual tray and the main tray. You can also setup the default scanning width. 􀀙 857 - ADVANCED FCT/SCAN. & PRINT/ PAPER FORMAT 1 Select the paper tray for which you want to define a default paper format with the buttons 􀀘 and 􀀙. 2 Confirm by pressing the OK button. 3 Choose the paper format with the buttons 􀀘 or 􀀙 according to the following table: 4 Confirm by pressing the OK button. 5 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Default tray Tray used for copy Same paper format in the trays AUTOMATIC Selection between the main tray and the manual tray. MANUAL The manual tray is used. Different paper format in the trays AUTOMATIC The main tray is used MANUAL The manual tray is used. Paper tray Available paper format MAN. TRAY A5, A4, Legal and Letter AUTO. TRAY A5, A4, Legal and Letter SCANNER LTR/LGL and A4 - 17 - 4 - Fax Fax This chapter describes all the fax processing and configuration functions. You will also find a section describing fax mailboxes. Fax transmission Print a header page (depending on model) A header page is stored in your terminal. To send your fax using this header page, you can print it at any time and fill in your details. 1 Select 􀀙30 - FAX /HEADER PAGE. 2 Select : 301 - LOCAL, to print a header page according to the country configured on the terminal, 302 - INTERNAT, to print a bilingual header page, the language of the country configured on the terminal and English. The separator between the two languages is "/". Example of the international header page: Immediate transmission 1 Place the document to be copied in the automatic document feeder, face printed on the top. or Place the document to be copied face down on the glass, respecting the indications around the glass. 2 Enter the fax number or choose your dialling mode then press . The icon flashes during the call phase, it stays lit when both faxes are in communication. 3 At the end of transmission the initial screen is displayed. Delayed transmission This function allows you to transmit a document at a later time. To program a postponed transmission you need to identify the subscriber number, transmission time, feeder type and number of pages. To delay the transmission time of your document : 1 Place the document to be copied in the automatic document feeder, face printed on the top. or Place the document to be copied face down on the glass, respecting the indications around the glass. 2 Select 􀀙31 - FAX / TRANSMISSION. 3 Enter the subscriber number you wish to program at a different time or choose your dialling mode and confirm with OK. 4 Next to the current time, enter the new time and confirm with OK. 5 Choose B & W SCAN or COLOR SCAN. 6 Adjust the contrast and confirm with OK. 7 Select the feed type, FEEDER or MEMORY and confirm with OK. 8 You may enter the number of pages before transmission and confirm with OK. 9 Confirm postponed transmission by pressing key . Your document is stored and will be sent at the new time. If English is the language configured on the terminal. The header page will only be printed in English. When sending in "Deferred Send" mode, make sure that the document is located in the right direction. - 18 - 4 - Fax Transmission with auto redial This function allows you to monitor the dialling operation during a fax transmission. In this case, the maximum transmission rate will be 14400 bps. This function allows for example: • to hear if the subscriber’s fax is engaged and if so, choose the moment when the line is clear to start the document transmission. • to control the communication progress in case of uncertain numbers, etc. To take the line manually: 1 Place the document in the fax feeder. 2 Press . 3 If necessary, set the sound level with navigator 􀀘 or 􀀙 keys. 4 If not already done, enter the subscriber number. As soon as you hear the remote fax tone, the line is clear and you can start the transmission. 5 Press to start the document transmission. Fax reception Fax reception depends on the parameter settings of your machine. The following parameters let you customize the printing of received faxes : - Reception Mode, page 27; - Reception without paper, page 27; - Number of copies, page 27; - Fax or PC reception, page 27; - Received faxes reduction mode, page 27; - Technical Parameters, page 28. The following tables gives which tray is used to print received fax depending on the default tray and the paper format in both trays. Default tray set to Manual: Default tray set to Automatic: Relay broadcast Your fax machine (initiator) can relay a document, in other words, transmit a document to your subscribers via a remote fax and with a precise relay list. To do this the initiator fax and the remote fax must both have the relay function. To relay you need to supply the remote fax with the document and the relay list number. The remote fax will then transmit this document to all subscribers on the list. Once the relay is activated by your fax and as soon as the document is received by the remote fax, the document is printed before relaying to all subcribers on the list. To activate relay from your fax machine: 1 Insert the document to relay. 2 Select 􀀙37 - FAX / BROADCAST. 3 Enter the remote fax number where you will relay to or choose your dialling mode and press OK. 4 Enter the relay list number used by the remote fax and press OK. If your machine is set in order to print a transmission report (Transmission report, page 26), the reduced copy of the document first page will not be printed and it notifies you that the communication is manual. The printing is not possible on A5 paper format. Manual tray paper format Main tray paper format Action A4,Letter and Legal A4,Letter and Legal The fax is printed on manual tray. A4,Letter and Legal A5 The fax is printed on manual tray. A5 A4,Letter and Legal An error message is displayed on the screen. The paper on manual tray is incompatible. A5 A5 An error message is displayed on the screen. The paper on manual tray is incompatible. Manual tray paper format Main tray paper format Action A4,Letter and Legal A4,Letter and Legal The fax is printed with an automatic selection of tray. A4,Letter and Legal A5 An error message is displayed on the screen. The paper on automatic tray is incompatible. A5 A4,Letter and Legal The fax is printed on the main tray. A5 A5 An error message is displayed on the screen. The paper on automatic tray is incompatible. - 19 - 4 - Fax 5 You may enter the time you wish to transmit the document next to the current time and press OK. 6 If you wish to modify the document feed type, select one of the options FEEDER or MEMORY, then press OK. 7 If you wish, you may enter the number of pages of your documents before transmitting. 8 Activate relay by pressing key . The document in the feeder will be relayed either immediately or at a later time (according to your choice) to the remote fax which will relay the document. Fax answering machine The Fax answering machine allows you to keep confidential documents in storage and to avoid printing them as you receive them. The indicator light lets you know the state of your Fax answering machine: • Light on: the answering machine is on. • Blinking: your fax has documents in storage or is in the process of receiving faxes. • Light off: memory full, the terminal cannot receive any more documents. You can assure document confidentiality by using the 4 digit access code. Once saved, you will require this access code for: • printing fax messages in memory, • activating or deactivating the fax answering machine. Saving an access code 􀀙383 - FAX / FAX ANSW. / ANSWER CODE 1 Enter the code (4 digits) and confirm with OK. 2 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Activating / Deactivating the answering machine 􀀙382 - FAX / FAX ANSW. / ACTIVATION 1 If you saved an access code for your fax answering machine, enter it and validate with OK. 2 Select the required option WITH or WITHOUT answering machine and confirm you choice with OK. 3 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Printing fax messages stored in the memory 􀀙381 - FAX / FAX ANSW. / PRINT 1 If you have defined an access code for your fax answering machine, enter it and press OK. Documents received and stored in the memory are printed. Fax rerouting This function is used to reroute faxes received to a directory contact. To use this function, you have to perform two operations: 1 Activate rerouting. 2 Set the rerouting address of the fax. Activating rerouting 􀀙391 - FAX / REROUTING / ACTIVATION 1 Using the keys 􀀙 and 􀀘 within the navigator, select option WITH. 2 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Setting the re-direction contact 􀀙392 - FAX / REROUTING / CALL NUMBER 1 Using the keys 􀀙 and 􀀘 within the navigator, select the subscriber from the directory. 2 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Printing rerouted documents 􀀙393 - FAX / REROUTING / COPY 1 Using the keys 􀀙 and 􀀘 within the navigator, select the COPY option (local printout of the information relayed to your device) either WITH or WITHOUT. 2 Confirm with OK. 3 Quit this menu by pressing the button. The printing is not possible on A5 paper format. If the function WITHOUT is selected, the menus 392 and 393 will not be included in the functions overview, when it is printed out (see Setting the re-direction contact, page 19, Printing rerouted documents, page 19 and Printing the functions guide, page 30). Make sure that the subscriber exists in the directory (Directory, page 32 ). - 20 - 4 - Fax Rerouting fax messages to a USB memory key This function allows you to reroute received fax messages to a USB memory key connected to your terminal. The USB memory key then becomes the terminal reception memory. Fax messages that are rerouted are therefore saved on the USB memory key with format Tiff and are named as follows : "FAXYYMMDDHHMMSS" where YYMMDDHHMMSS corresponds to the fax reception date and time. You can also print fax messages rerouted to your USB memory key automatically by activating menu 052 PRINT. Activating rerouting 􀀙051 - MEDIA / FAX ARCHIVING / ACTIVATION 1 Using the keys 􀀙 and 􀀘 within the navigator, select option WITH and confirm your choice with OK. 2 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Printing rerouted documents 􀀙052 - MEDIA / FAX ARCHIVING / PRINT 1 Using the keys 􀀙 and 􀀘, select the copy option WITH to print all rerouted documents automatically. 2 Confirm your choice with OK. 3 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Transmission waiting queue This function lets you obtain a recap of all documents queuing, for transmission, including those in deposit or in delayed transmission, etc. It allows you to: • Consult or modify the waiting queue. In this waiting queue the documents are coded the following way: Order number in the queue / document status / subscriber’s telephone number. Documents may have the following status: - TX: transmission - REL: relay - DOC: in deposit - POL: polling - MBX: send to mailbox - PMB: mailbox polling - TR: ongoing commands - SMS: SMS transmission • Immediately perform a transmission from the waiting queue, • Print a document in storage, waiting to be transmitted or in deposit, • Print the waiting queue, in order to get the status of each document in the queue, by either: - queue order number, - document name or number, - scheduled transmission time (fax), - operation type regarding the document: transmission from memory, delayed transmission, deposit, - number of pages of the document, - document size (percentage of space stored in memory) • Cancel a transmission request in the waiting queue. Performing immediate transmission from the waiting queue 􀀙 61 - COMMANDS / PERFORM 1 Select the document in the waiting queue and confirm your choice with OK or to immediately perform the selected transmission. Consulting or modifying the waiting queue 􀀙 62 - COMMANDS / MODIFY 1 In the waiting queue select the required document and confirm your choice with OK. 2 You may now modify the parameters of the given document then confirm your modifications by pressing . Deleting a transmission on hold 􀀙 63 - COMMANDS / CANCEL 1 In the waiting queue select the desired document and confirm your choice with OK. Printing a document in waiting or in deposit 􀀙 64 - COMMANDS / PRINT 1 In the waiting queue select the desired document and confirm your choice with OK. Printing the waiting queue 􀀙65 - COMMANDS / PRINT LIST A document called ** COMMAND LIST ** is printed. Before activating this function, connect the USB memory key to the terminal. The printing is not possible on A5 paper format. - 21 - 4 - Fax Cancelling a transmission in progress Cancelling a transmission in progress is possible no matter what the type of transmission but varies depending on whether the transmission is a single call number or a multi-call number. • For a single call number from the memory, the document is erased from the memory. • For a multi-call number, only the call number in progress at the time of the cancellation is erased from the transmission queue. To cancel transmission in progress: 1 Press . A message will ask you to confirm cancellation by pressing a second time. 2 Press to confirm cancellation in progress. If your machine is set to print a transmission report, it will print that the communication was cancelled by the user. MailBoxes (MBX Fax) There are 32 mailboxes (MBX), enabling you to transmit documents in complete confidence using an access code (named MBX code), to all subscribers equipped with a fax compatible to yours. MBX 00 is public. It is handled directly by the terminal to record the messages of the fax TAD as soon as this is put into service. MBX’s 01 to 31 are private. Each is password-protected. They can be used to receive documents confidentially. The use and access to MBX 01 - 31 are conditioned by the initialisation, defined by a MBX code (if needed) and a mnenonic (its S.I.D.). Later you may: • modify the features of an MBX, • print the contents of an MBX, only possible if the MBX contains one or more documents (with a star next to the MBX). When the contents of an MBX have been printed it becomes empty, • delete an MBX, only if the MBX is initialised and empty, • print the the list of your fax machine’s MBX’s. You may receive and send through an MBX in complete confidentiality. When depositing a document into your MBX, the access code is not needed. All documents deposited in a MBX are added to the ones already present. In polling, the MBX’s are only accessible with an MBX code. You may perform MBX deposits or polls by: • depositing a document in a fax MBX, • transmitting to deposit a document in a remote fax MBX, • performing document poll from a remote fax. Creating an MBX 􀀙 71 - MAILBOXES / CREATE MBX 1 Select a free MBX out of the 31 MBX or directly enter the number of a free MBX and confirm with OK. 2 Select option MAILBOX CODE and press OK. Value 0000 is always displayed. 3 Enter the code of your choice, if needed, and press OK. 4 Select option MAILBOX NAME and press OK. 5 Enter this MBX’s S.I.D. (20 characters max.) and press OK. The MBX is initialised. If you wish to initialise another, press C and repeat the same procedure. 6 To exit the MBX, press . Modifying the features of a MBX 􀀙 71 - MAILBOXES / CREATE MBX 1 Select the desired MBX out of the 31 MBX’s, or enter the number of the MBX directly and press OK. 2 Enter the code of this MBX, if there is one, and confirm with OK. 3 Select the menu MAILBOX CODE or MAILBOX NAME, then confirm your choice with OK. 4 Perform data modification of the menu and confirm with OK. If needed, repeat the last two steps for the other menu. Printing the contents of a MBX 􀀙 73 - MAILBOXES / PRINT MBX 1 Select the desired MBX out of the 31 MBX’s, or enter the number of the MBX directly and press OK. 2 Enter the code of this MBX, if there is one, and confirm with OK. All documents found in the MBX are printed and the MBX is emptied. - 22 - 4 - Fax Deleting a MBX Before deleting an MBX, you need to make sure it is empty, by printing its content. 􀀙 74 - MAILBOXES / DELETE MBX 1 Select the desired MBX out of the 31 MBX’s, or enter the number of the MBX directly and press OK. 2 Enter the code of this MBX, if there is one, and confirm with OK. 3 Press OK to confirm the MBX deletion. The MBX is deleted and will appear as a free MBX in the list. Printing the MBX list 􀀙75 - MAILBOXES / PRT MBX LIST The list gives the status of each MBX. MBX deposit in your fax 1 Insert the document in the fax machine’s feeder. 2 Select 􀀙72 - MAILBOXES / DEPOSIT MBX and confirm with OK. 3 Select the desired MBX out of the 31 MBX’s, or enter the number of the MBX directly and press OK. The document is placed in the feeder and saved in the selected MBX. MBX deposit in a remote fax 1 Insert the document in the fax machine’s feeder. 2 Select 􀀙35 - FAX / MBX SENDING and confirm with OK. 3 Enter your subscriber’s number for MBX deposit or choose your dialling mode and validate with OK. 4 Enter the subscriber’s MBX number and confirm with OK. 5 If you wish to delay transmission, enter the new transmission time next to the current time and press OK. 6 If you wish to modify the document feed type, select one of the options FEEDER or MEMORY, and press OK. 7 If you wish, you may enter the number of pages of your document before transmitting and confirm with OK. 8 Confirm the transmission request to a remote MBX fax by pressing key . In the case of an immediate transmission, the document is sent immediately. If the document is set for a postponed transmission, the document will be stored in the memory and sent at the requested time. MBX polling from a remote fax 􀀙36 - FAX / MBX POLLING 1 Enter your subscriber’s number for MBX polling or choose your dialling mode and confirm with OK. 2 Enter the subscriber MBX number and press OK. 3 Enter this MBX access code and press OK. 4 If you wish to delay the poll time, enter the departure time next to the current time and press OK. 5 Confirm the MBX poll request by pressing . As soon as the remote fax is subscribed, either immediately or later, the document(s) in the remote fax MBX are receveid in your fax. Deposit and Polling You may deposit a document in your fax and keep it available to one or more subscribers who can obtain a fax of this document by calling your fax with the POLL function. Setting the machine for document deposits, you must define the type: • SIMPLE- it may be polled only once from the memory or feeder, • MULTIPLE- it may be polled as many times as necessary from the memory. Setting the machine for polled documents, you must define the poll number, then depending on the type of poll you may: • launch an immediate poll, • program a delayed poll with a chosen time, • launch a multi-poll, either immediately or later. Placing a document in deposit 1 Insert the document to deposit in the feeder. 2 Select 􀀙34 - FAX / POLLING TX and confirm with OK. 3 Choose the deposit type, according to the table below: Please check for remote fax compatibility. - 23 - 4 - Fax 3 Confirm deposit by pressing OK. Polling a deposited document 􀀙33 - FAX / POLLING RX 1 Enter the number of the party whose document you want to poll or choose your dialling mode. You can poll several documents using the key . 2 Depending on the type of poll, you should: Menu Procedure Simple 1 Select FEEDER or MEMORY. 2 If necessary, adjust the contrast and confirm with OK. 3 Enter the number of pages that you wish to deposit. Multiple 1 If necessary, adjust the contrast and confirm with OK. 2 Enter the number of pages that you wish to deposit. Menu Procedure Immediate poll 1 Press . Delayed poll 1 Press OK. 2 Next to the current time, enter the time you wish to poll the document and press . - 24 - 5 - SMS SMS Thanks to the SMS button, you can send an SMS to subscribers all over the world. An SMS (Short Message Service) is a service which permits short written messages to be sent to mobile phones or other SMScompatible devices. The number of characters you can send per message is dependent upon the service provider and the country you are sending your SMS from (e.g. France 160 characters, Italy 640 characters). The SMS service is dependent upon the country and the service provider. SMS Parameters Presentation of the sender This setting allows you to show the name or the number of the sender when sending an SMS. 􀀙 41 - SMS SERVICE / SENDER 1 Select the option WITH or WITHOUT presentation of the sender using the 􀀘 or 􀀙 keys. 2 Validate with OK. SMS Center transmission number This setting allows you to enter the transmission number for the SMS Server. Your Internet provider will provide you with this number. 􀀙 421 - SMS SERVICE / INIT. SMS / SERVER 1 Enter the number of the transmission server using the digital keypad. 2 Validate with OK. Sending an SMS 1 Press the key. 2 Write your SMS using the alphabetical keypad. To do so, an editor is at your disposal: • for upper case letters, use the 􀃏 key, • to move inside the data entry field, use 􀀙 and 􀀘, • to move in the text from one word to another, press CTRL and one of the navigator keys (􀀙 or 􀀘). • to go to the next line, use , • to delete a character (by moving the cursor to the left), use 􀃍 or C. 3 Validate with OK. 4 Dial the number of the recipient (mobile phone or any other SMS-compatible device) in one of the following ways: • dial the number using the digital keypad, • enter the first letters of the recipient name, • press the key until the required name appears (names are classified in alphabetical order). Your SMS may be sent to only one person or to several people. To send an SMS: • to only one person, press OK to confirm, • to several people: 5 Press the key and enter the next recipient's number. 6 Repeat the operations as many times as required (10 persons max.). Press OK to validate the last recipient; "SENDING SMS" is displayed as the SMS is being sent. • If SMS appears, then the SMS has been put on hold and a further attempt will take place a couple of minutes later. To immediately execute or cancel transmission, refer to paragraph Transmission waiting queue, page 20. • To check the SMS has been sent properly, you may print the transmission/reception log (refer to paragraph Printing the logs, page 30). There is a special scale of charges for the SMS service. - 25 - 6 - Parameters/Setup Parameters/Setup You can setup your machine as you like depending on the use. You will find in this chapter description of the functions. You can print the functions guide and the available setup of your multifunction machine. Date/Time At any moment you may change the date and time on your multifunction machine. 􀀙21 - SETUP / DATE/TIME 1 Press 􀀙, enter 21 using the keypad. Confirm with OK. 2 Enter the numbers of the required time and date one after another (for example November 8 2004 at 9h33, press 0 8 1 1 0 4 0 9 3 3) and press OK to confirm. 3 To exit this menu, press . Your fax number/Your name Your multifunction machine will print out your fax number and your name on each document it transmits if you save these settings. 􀀙22 - SETUP / NUMBER/NAME 1 Press 􀀙, enter 22 using the keypad. Confirm with OK. 2 Enter your fax number (20 digits max.) and press OK to confirm. 3 Enter your name (20 characters max) then press OK to confirm. For example, if you want to type the letter C, press the key C until it appears on the screen. 4 To exit this menu, press . Type of network You can connect your fax to either a PSTN or a private network such as private automatic branch exchange (PABX). You must select the network which is in use. To select the type of network: 􀀙251 - SETUP / TEL. NETWORK / NETWORK TYPE 1 Select option PABX or PSTN then confirm your choice with OK. 2 To exit this menu, press . Geographical settings These settings will enable you to use your machine in different preset countries using different languages. Country By choosing a country, you initialise: • the settings for the public telephone network, • the language by default. To select the country: 􀀙201 - SETUP / GEOGRAPHICAL / COUNTRY 1 Select the required option and press the OK key to confirm. 2 To exit this menu, press . Network This setting enables you to manually set the type of public telephone network (PSTN) for a country, so that your machine can communicate over the public telephone network in compliance with the applicable standards. By default, setting a country using the 􀀙201 OK command automatically sets the type of PSTN to use in the selected country. To manually select the type of public telephone network: 􀀙202 - SETUP / GEOGRAPHICAL / NETWORK 1 Select the required option and press the OK key to confirm. 2 To exit this menu, press . To benefit from this feature, you must set SENDING HEADER to WITH (Technical Parameters, page 28). If none of the options in the list is suitable, select the "OTHER" option. These settings are different from the NETWORK TYPE, which allows you to choose between public and private network. - 26 - 6 - Parameters/Setup Language This setting enables you to choose the menu language of your choice. By default, the multifunction machine is set to English. 􀀙203 - SETUP / GEOGRAPHICAL / LANGUAGE 1 Select the required language using 􀀙 and 􀀘, then press the OK key to confirm. 2 To exit this menu, press . Local prefix This function is used when your fax is installed with a private network, behind a company’s PABX. It allows you to program an additional automatic local prefix (to be defined), enabling you to automatically exit the company’s telephone network system, but only under certain conditions: • the company’s internal numbers, where a prefix is not required, must be short numbers less than the minimal size (to be defined, for example France has 10 digits), • the outside numbers requiring a prefix, must be long numbers greater or equal to the minimal size (to be defined, for example France has 10 digits). Programming your fax with the local prefix consists of two steps: 1 defining the minimal size (or equal) of the company’s outside numbers, 2 defining the outgoing local prefix of the company’s telephone network. This prefix will automatically be added as soon as an external number is dialled. Prefix 􀀙252 - SETUP / TEL. NETWORK / PREFIX 1 You can change the default value for the minimal size of the company’s outside numbers and validate with OK. The minimal size will range between 1 and 30. 2 Enter the outgoing local prefix of the company’s telephone network (maximum 5 characters) and validate with OK. 3 To exit this menu, press . Transmission report You may print a transmission report for all communications over the telephone network (PSTN). You may choose between more than one criteria for printing reports: • WITH: a report is given when the transmission was properly performed or when it is completely abandoned (but there is only one report per request), • WITHOUT: no transmission report, however, your fax will note all transmissions that took place in its log, • ALWAYS: a report is printed with each transmission, • ON ERROR: a report is printed only if the transmission failed or is abandoned. With each transmission report from memory, a reduced version of the first page is automatically reproduced. To select the report type: 􀀙231 - SETUP / SEND / SEND REPORT 1 Select the required option WITH, WITHOUT, ALWAYS or ON ERROR and confirm your choice with OK. 2 To exit this menu, press . Document feed type You may choose the way you want to feed your documents: • from memory, transmission will take place only after memory storage of the document and dialling. It allows you to get your originals back quickly to free up the machine. • from the feeder of the sheet-feed scanner, transmission will occur after dialling and paper scanning. It allows transmission of larger documents. To select the way you want to feed your documents: 􀀙232 - SETUP / SEND / MEMORY SEND. 1 Select the option MEMORY or FEEDER and validate your choice with OK. In feeder mode, reduced images will not appear on the transmission report. 2 To exit this menu, press . Economy period This function allows you to defer a fax transmission to "offpeak hours" and thus reduce the cost of your communications. The economy period, via the telephone network (at offpeak hours), is preset by default from 7.00 pm to 7.30 am. Nevertheless you may change this time slot. If none of the options in the list is suitable, select the "OTHER" option. If you define a local prefix, do not add it to the numbers stored in the directory, it will be automatically dialled with each number. - 27 - 6 - Parameters/Setup To modify the economy period: 􀀙233 - SETUP / SEND / ECO PER. 1 Enter the hours of the new economy period and confirm your selection with the key OK. To use the economy period: 􀀙32 - FAX / ECO TRANS. 1 Enter the call number and confirm with OK. 2 Choose SCAN B & W or COLOR SCAN. 3 Adjust the contrast and confirm with OK. 4 Select the feed type, FEEDER or MEMORY and confirm with OK. 5 You may enter the number of pages before transmission and confirm with OK. Reception Mode This function enables you, if you have an external device (telephone, answering machine) plugged in to the EXT socket on your terminal or to the telephone plug adapter, to select the device receiving faxes and/or voice messages. You may choose between the following reception modes : • MANUAL : the terminal does not receive any documents automatically. When you answer your telephone and realise that you are receiving a fax, you should press the button on the terminal to receive the fax. • FAX : the Fax reception mode is launched on the terminal systematically. • FAX-ANSWER. : the terminal handles reception of fax messages automatically, the external device handles reception of telephone communications automatically. Press the #0 buttons on your telephone to cancel fax detection. To set the reception mode: 􀀙241 - SETUP / RECEPTION / MODE 1 Select the required option and confirm with OK. 2 To exit this menu, press . Reception without paper Your fax offers you the possibility to either accept or refuse document reception if your printer is unavailable (no paper...). If your fax printer is unavailable, you may choose between two modes of reception: • reception mode WITHOUT PAPER, your fax saves the incoming messages in the memory, • reception mode WITH PAPER, your fax refuses all incoming subscribers. To select the reception mode: 􀀙242 - SETUP / RECEPTION / REC. PAPER 1 Select the option WITH PAPER or WITHOUT PAPER and confirm your choice with OK. Number of copies You may print incoming documents more than once (1 to 99). To set the number of each document received: 􀀙243 - SETUP / RECEPTION / NBR OF COPIES 1 Enter the wanted number of copies and confirm with OK. At each document reception, your fax will print the number of copies requested. Fax or PC reception This menu, combined with a software program installed on your PC will enable you to select the machine you wish to receive the documents on: • fax, • PC, • PC if available, fax otherwise. 􀀙244 - SETUP / RECEPTION / PC RECEPT. For more details, please refer to PC Features, page 46. Received faxes reduction mode This menu allows you to reduce received faxes for printing. This adjustment can be automatic or manual. Automatic mode: This mode automatically resizes received faxes. If you have connected a telephone to the EXT socket on your terminal or to a telephone plug adaptor, we recommend that you set the reception mode to MANUAL. When you receive a call, you pick up using this telephone and you hear the particular fax tone. You can: - press the button on your terminal or buttons #7 on your telephone to receive the fax Paper out is indicated by a beep and a message on the screen. Received faxes are then stored in memory (icon flashing) to be printed as soon as you add paper into the feeder. - 28 - 6 - Parameters/Setup To set automatic mode: 􀀙246 - SETUP / RECEPTION / REDUCTION 1 Select Automatic and confirm with OK. 2 To exit this menu, press . Manual mode: The machine proposes a 70 to 100 % reduction. Outside these values, the machine beeps for error. This fixed reduction will be used when printing received documents, regardless of the used paper format. To set the manual mode: 􀀙246 - SETUP / RECEPTION / REDUCTION 1 Select FIXED and confirm with OK. 2 Enter the reduction value (between 70 and 100) and confirm with OK. 3 To exit this menu, press . Technical Parameters As delivered your machine is preset by default. However, you may adjust it to meet your requirements by resetting the technical parameters. To set the technical parameters: 􀀙29 - SETUP / TECHNICALS 1 Select the desired parameter and confirm with OK. 2 With the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘, modify the parameter settings by following the table below and press OK. Parameter Signification 1 - Scanning mode Default value of the scan mode resolution for the documents to be transmitted. 2 - TX header If this parameter is on, your header will appear on all documents sent to your subscribers with your name, number, date and number of pages. Warning: If you send a fax from the document loader, the transmission header will not appear on the document your correspondent receives. 3 - TX speed Transmission speed for outgoing documents. For a quality telephone line (compatible, no echo), communications occur at maximum speed. However, it may be necessary to restrict the transmission speed for some calls. 4 - Echo protect If this parameter is on, the on-line echo will be reduced during long distance calls. 6 - EPT mode For some long distance calls (satellite), the on-line echo may disturb the call. 7 - COM. display Choice between transmission speed displayed or number of the page in progress. 8 - Eco energy Choosing the printer standby delay: the printer will switch to standby after a delay (in minutes) of NONoperation or during the period of time of your choice. 10 - RX header If this parameter is on, all documents received by your fax will include the subscriber’s header with his name, number (if available) fax print date and the page number. 11 - RX speed Transmission speed for incoming documents. For a quality telephone line (compatible, no echo), communications occur at maximum speed. However, it may be necessary to restrict the transmission speed for some calls. 12 - Rings Number of rings to automatically start your machine. 13 - Discard size The Discard Size parameter only defines the printing of received faxes . The number of lines of a document can be too high for the printing paper format. This parameter defines the threshold beyond which the extra lines are printed on a second page. Bellow this threshold, extras lines are deleted. If you choose With, the threshold is set on 3 centimeters. If you choose Without, the threshold is set on 1 centimeter. Parameter Signification - 29 - 6 - Parameters/Setup 20 - E.C.M. This parameter helps correct the calls made on disturbed telephone lines. It is used when the lines are weak or too noisy. Transmission times may be longer. 25 - TEL Impedance This parameter lets you choose between a complex impedance and a 600 Ohm impedance, depending on the telephone network your terminal is connected to. 73 - Improve rep @ This parameter lets you automatically register the Internet address of your subscribers fax during a call (if available). 74 - Erase mailbox When the fax machine receives an e-mail with an attachment and cannot open it, it erases the message from the ISP MBX, prints and transmits with a notice of uncomprehension to the message sender. At E-mail reception, the fax does not destroy the MBX message, it prints a notice of uncomprehension asking you to recuperate this message with your computer equipment. This parameter is useful only if you have PC equipment. The memory capacity is limited, you need to empty your MBX or else new messages may not be received. 75 - Text Attchmt. Editing YES / NO and printing the received Internet documents. 76 - Attchmt format Default format of document sent on the Internet: PDF : monochrome or colour IMAGE : monochrome (TIFF) or colour (JPEG) 77 - LAN speed To define the communication speed of the peripheral units in relation to the implemented Local Area Network (LAN). 80 - Toner save Makes printing lighter to save toner cartridge ink. 81 - Font number Starts the printing of the log list. This parameter lets you set the default PCL font. The possible values are included between 5 and 128 inclus. The default value is 0 (Courier). Parameter Signification 82 - Form lines This parameter lets you set the number of lines per page. This variable is linked to the PJL variables: PAPER and ORIENTATION. If you modify one of these variables, the Form Lines variable is automatically updated (only for the print job in progress) to respect the same spacing. The possible values are included between 5 and 128 inclus. The default value is 60. 83 - Font pitch This parameter lets you set the default font spacing, in characters per inch (the default font must be of type non-proportional). The possible values are included between 0,44 and 99,99 inclus. The default value is 10,00. 84 - Ptsize This parameter lets you set the default font height, in points (the default font must be of type proportional). The possible values are included between 4,00 and 999,75 (by step of 0,25). The default value is 12,00. 85 Line termin. This parameter lets you define line breaks conversion: , and . The possible values are included between 0 and 3. The default value is 0. 86 Orientation This parameter lets you set the page orientation: portrait or landscape. The default value is "portrait". 90 - RAW Port RAW network print port connection. 91 - Printer error timeout Time-out before document being printed is deleted following a print error in PC print mode. 92 - Printer wait timeout Wait time-out for data from PC before the task is deleted in PC print. 93 - Replace format Page format change. This parameter allows you to print a LETTER format document on A4 pages using the LETTER/A4 setting. 94 - Printer class Printing in PCL-/Postscript Mode Printing in GDI mode Parameter Signification - 30 - 6 - Parameters/Setup Printing the functions guide 􀀙 51 - PRINT / FUNCTIONS LIST 1 Press on 􀀙 and enter 51 with the digital keypad. The printing of the functions guide starts. Printing the logs The incoming and outgoing logs list the last 30 transmissions (incoming and outgoing) made by your machine. An automatic print out will take place after every 30 transmissions. However, you may request a print out at any time. Each log (incoming or outgoing) contains a table with the following information: • date and time of the incoming or outgoing document, • subscriber’s number or E-mail address, • transmission mode (Normal, Fine, SFine or Photo), • number of pages sent or received, • call duration, • incoming or outgoing results: noted CORRECT if properly transmitted, or information codes for special calls (polling, manual subscribers, etc.) • reason for call error (example: your subscriber does not answer) To print the logs: 􀀙52 - PRINT / LOGS 1 Press on 􀀙 and enter 52 with the digital keypad. The printing of the logs starts. Print the list of setups To print the list of setups: 􀀙54 - PRINT / SETUP 1 Press on 􀀙, enter 54 with the digital keypad. The printing of the list of setups starts. Font printing You can print the list of fonts installed on your terminal at any time. To print PCL fonts: 􀀙57 - PRINT / PCL FONTS To print SG Script fonts: 􀀙58 - PRINT / SGSCRIPT FONTS Lock the machine This function prevents non-authorized people from accessing the machine. An access code will be required every time someone wants to use the device. After each use, the device will lock automatically. Before that you have to enter a lock code. 􀀙811 - ADVANCED FCT / LOCK / LOCKING CODE 1 Press on 􀀙, enter 811 with the digital keyboard. 2 Enter your lock code (4 digits) with the keyboard, confirm with OK. 3 Enter again your lock code (4 digits) with the keyboard, confirm with OK. 4 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Lock the keyboard Everytime you use your machine, you will have to enter your code. 􀀙812 - ADVANCED FCT / LOCK / LOCK KEYBD. 1 Press on 􀀙, enter 812 with the keyboard. 2 Enter the lock code and confirm with OK. 3 With the buttons 􀀙 or 􀀘, choose WITH and confirm with OK. 4 Quit this menu by pressing the button. 95 - Symbol set This parameter lets you set the default character set. The possible values are included between CS1 and CS30 inclus. The default value is CS1 (Roman8). 96 - NBR. WEP Keys Number of WEP keys allowed (from 1 to 4). The printing is not possible on A5 paper format. The printing is not possible on A5 paper format. The incoming and outgoing logs are printed on the same page. Parameter Signification The printing is not possible on A5 paper format. If a code is already registered, enter the old code before typing the new one. - 31 - 6 - Parameters/Setup Lock the numbers This function locks dialling and the numerical keypad is disabled. Transmissions are only possible from numbers included in the directory. To access the number interlocking option: 􀀙813 - ADVANCED FCT / LOCK / LOCK NUMBER 1 Enter the four-digit interlock code with the keypad. 2 Press key OK to confirm. 3 With keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 of the navigator, select the option DIRECT ONLY. 4 Press key OK to confirm. 5 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Lock the SMS service This function prevents access to the SMS service. To access the SMS service locking menu: 􀀙815 - ADVANCED FCT / LOCK / LOCK SMS 1 Enter the four-digit locking code with the numerical keypad. 2 Press key OK to confirm. 3 Enter the four-digit locking code again to confirm it. 4 Press key OK to confirm. When a code is already registered in the machine, you will have to enter this registered code first before you can type and register a new one. Read the counters This function allows you to view the activity counters for your machine at any time. According to your needs, you can read the counters for: • sent pages, • received pages, • scanned pages, • printed pages. Sent pages counter To view the number of pages sent from your machine: 􀀙821 - ADVANCED FCT / COUNTERS / SENT PAGES 1 Press on 􀀙, enter 821 with the keyboard. 2 The number of sent pages appears on the screen. 3 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Received pages counter To view the number of pages received on your machine: 􀀙822 - ADVANCED FCT / COUNTERS / RECEIVED PG 1 Press on 􀀙, enter 822 with the keyboard. 2 The number of received pages appears on the screen. 3 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Scanned pages counter To view the number of pages scanned on your machine: 􀀙823 - ADVANCED FCT / COUNTERS / SCANNED PAGE 1 Press on 􀀙, enter 823 with the keyboard. 2 The number of scanned pages appears on the screen. 3 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Printed pages counter To view the number of pages printed on your machine: 􀀙824 - ADVANCED FCT / COUNTERS / PRINTED PG 1 Press on 􀀙, enter 824 with the keyboard. 2 The number of printed pages appears on the screen. 3 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Display the consumables status You can read at any time the remaining toner in the cartridge. This level appears in percentage. 􀀙86 - ADVANCED FCT / CONSUMABLES 1 Press on 􀀙, enter 86 with the keyboard. 2 The available toner percentage appears on the screen. 3 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Calibrate your scanner You can do this operation when the quality of photocopied documents is not satisfactory anymore. 􀀙80 - ADVANCED FCT / CALIBRATION 1 Press on 􀀙, enter 80 with the keyboard, confirm with OK. 2 The scanner is triggered and a calibration is done automatically. 3 At the end of the calibration, the machine comes back to the screen saver. - 32 - 7 - Directory Directory Your multifunction machine lets you create a directory by memorising subscriber records and subscriber lists. Your machine can store up to 250 subscriber records, which you can group in 20 subscriber lists. For all subscriber records or subscriber lists you may create, consult, modify or delete contents. You can also print the directory. Furthermore, your machine lets you create and manage your phone directory from your PC Kit. For more information on this feature, refer to chapter PC Features. Creating subscribers record To create subscribers record: 􀀙 11 - DIRECTORY / NEW CONTACT 1 Press on 􀀙, enter 11 with the digital keypad. 2 Enter the NAME of your contact with the alphanumerical keypad (20 characters maximum), confirm with OK. 3 Enter the TEL number of your contact with the digital keypad (30 digits maximum), confirm with OK. 4 Choose the RECORD NO from your directory with the digital keypad or accept the displayed number, and confirm with OK. At this stage, you may associate an e-mail address or an FTP address to your subscriber. If you do not wish to do so, confirm with OK and refer to step 5. To associate an e-mail address: • Enter the E-Mail address of your subscriber and confirm with OK. • Define the attachment format (Image or PDF) then confirm with OK. • Refer to step 5. Or to associate an FTP address : • Do not enter the e-mail address and confirm with OK. • Enter the FTP address of the contact (for example: 134.1.22.9), then confirm with OK. • Enter the FTP user name (for example: Durand) then confirm with OK. • Enter the password of the FTP user, then confirm with OK.. • If necessary, enter the file destination directory (when this field is not completed, the files are stored directly under the root) of the FTP server (for example: server name / Durand). Confirm with OK. • Define the attachment format (Image or PDF) then confirm with OK. • Refer to step 5. 5 Select W. ASSOC. KEY if you want to assign a shortcut key (letter) to your subscriber record. The first available letter appears, use 􀀙 or 􀀘 to choose another letter. Confirm with OK. 6 Select the appropriate transmission RATE to send faxes among the values 2400, 4800, 7200, 9600, 12000, 14400 and 33600 using 􀀙 or 􀀘. Confirm with OK. The maximum speed can be used if the telephone line is of good quality, meaning appropriate, without echo. Creating subscribers list To create subscribers list: 􀀙 12 - DIRECTORY / NEW GROUP 1 Press on 􀀙, enter 12 with the digital keypad. 2 Enter the LIST NAME with the alphanumerical keypad (20 characters maximum), confirm with OK. 3 CALLED NUMBER: use 􀀙 ou 􀀘 to select from existing records the contacts of your list and confirm with OK. Repeat this operation for each subscriber you want to add to your list. 4 Enter the GROUP NUMBER assigned to your list with the digital keypad or accept the displayed number, and confirm with OK. Modifying a record To modify a subscribers record or list: 􀀙 13 - DIRECTORY / MODIFY 1 Press 􀀙, enter 13 with the digital keypad. 2 With 􀀙 or 􀀘, browse the directory and select the record or list you want to modify by pressing OK. 3 With 􀀙 or 􀀘, browse the entries of the selected record or list. Press on OK when the entry you want to modify appears on screen. 4 The cursor appears at the end of the line. Press on C to delete characters. 5 Enter the new entry and confirm with OK. 6 Repeat the operations for each line you want to modify. If your multifunction machine is connected to a PABX, you may insert a pause for dial tone after the outgoing local prefix dialling. To do so, insert the character "/" after the local prefix. In the directory, the letter G placed next to a name identifies a subscribers group. - 33 - 7 - Directory Deleting a record or a list To delete a subscribers record or list: 􀀙 14 - DIRECTORY / CANCEL 1 Press on 􀀙, enter 14 with the keypad. 2 With 􀀙 or 􀀘, browse the directory and select the record or list you want to delete by pressing OK. 3 Press on OK to confirm the deletion. 4 Repeat the operations for each record or list you want to delete. Printing the directory To print the directory: 􀀙 15 - DIRECTORY / PRINT 1 Press on 􀀙, enter 15 with the keypad. The printing of the directory starts, in alphabetical order. The printing is not possible on A5 paper format. - 34 - 8 - Games and entertainment Games and entertainment Sudoku (depending on the model) Sudoku is a Japanese puzzle. The game is in a grid format of three squares by three squares to be distributed in fields in zones of 3 × 3. Depending on the level of difficulty, more or fewer numbers are already entered at the start of the game. The aim of the game is to distribute the numbers 1 to 9 between the boxes in such a way that each number appears only once in each row, column and in each of the nine grids. There is only one solution. Print a grid 1 Press 􀀙, 5 and OK. 2 Select SUDOKU using the 􀀙 or 􀀘 button. 3 Confirm with OK. 4 Select PRINT GRID using the 􀀙 or 􀀘 button. 5 Select the level of difficulty EASY LEVEL, INTERMEDIATE LEVEL, DIFFICULT LEVEL, EVIL LEVEL using the 􀀙 or 􀀘 button 6 Confirm with OK. 7 Choose the grid you want by entering the number on the numeric keypad (1 to 100). 8 Confirm with OK. 9 Choose the number of copies you want by entering a number from 1 to 9 on the numeric keypad. 10 Confirm with OK. 11 The number of copies of the grid requested is printed. Print the solution to a grid 1 Press 􀀙, 5 and OK. 2 Select SUDOKU using the 􀀙 or 􀀘 button 3 Confirm withOK. 4 Select PRT SOLUT using the 􀀙 ou 􀀘. 5 Select the level of difficulty EASY LEVEL, INTERMEDIATE LEVEL, DIFFICULT LEVEL, EVIL LEVEL using the 􀀙 or 􀀘 button. 6 Confirm with OK. 7 Choose the grid you want by entering the number on the numeric keypad (1 to 100). 8 Confirm with OK. 9 Choose the number of copies you want by entering a number from 1 to 9 on the numeric keypad. 10 Confirm with OK. 11 The number of copies of the solution to the grid requested is printed. - 35 - 9 - WLAN network Local network settings You may connect your multifunction terminal to an Ethernet or a wireless network. However, practical knowledge of your computer configuration is required to set up a network. Selecting the type of your local network This parameter allows you to configure your terminal accordingly to the type of network you will install it in. 􀀙 26 - SETUP/LOCAL NETWORK 1 Select the desired network type using the 􀀙 or 􀀘 buttons - WLAN if using a wireless network - LAN ETHERNET if using a wired network 2 Confirm with OK. Ethernet network settings (model network) Automatic configuration We recommend that you carry out a manual configuration of your terminal. The automatic configuration of the local network settings may be considered, if your local network features a DHCP or BOOTP server that can dynamically assign addresses to the peripheral devices present on the LAN. To automatically configure the local network settings: 􀀙 271 - SETUP/LAN ETHER/IP CONFIG. 1 Choose Automatic and press OK to confirm. The terminal scans the local network for a DHCP or BOOTP server that can assign it its settings dynamically (the message Self-conf is displayed). 2 Once the message Self-conf has disappeared, check for the IP Address, Sub-network mask and Gateway address. If these are missing, you should carry out a manual configuration (see below). Manual configuration To configure your terminal manually, you should obtain the usual information used to set a peripheral device (IP address, sub-network mask, network and gateway address). To configure the local network setting manually: 􀀙 271 - SETUP/LAN ETHER/IP CONFIG. 3 Choose Manual and press OK to confirm. IP address 􀀙 272 - SETUP/LAN ETHER/IP ADDRESS 1 Enter the IP address of your terminal and press OK to confirm. Sub-network mask 􀀙 273 - SETUP/LAN ETHER/SUBNET MASK 1 Enter the sub-network mask of your terminal and press OK to confirm. Gateway address 􀀙 274 - SETUP/LAN ETHER/GATEWAY 1 Enter the IP address of the network gateway and press OK to confirm. IEEE Address (or Ethernet address) or MAC address 􀀙 275 - SETUP/LAN ETHER/IEEE ADDRESS The Ethernet card of your terminal already has an unmodifiable, yet consultable, IEEE address. NetBIOS names These names, which can be used with the network options, are used to identify your terminal machine from a PC connected to a local network (for instance with the name "IMP-NETWORK-1"). 􀀙 276 - SETUP/LAN ETHER/NETBIOS 1 􀀙 277 - SETUP/LAN ETHER/NETBIOS 2 1 Enter the selected name (15 characters max) and press OK to confirm. Name servers The WINS1 and WINS2 servers, used with the network options, allow access to terminals on other sub-networks by means of their NetBIOS name. 􀀙 278 - SETUP/LAN ETHER/WINS SRV. 1 􀀙 279 - SETUP/LAN ETHER/WINS SRV. 2 1 Enter the IP address of each server, then validate with OK. If the terminal is set up in Automatic configuration mode (menu 􀀙271), these addresses can be filled in automatically by certain DHCP servers. - 36 - 8 - WLAN network WLAN network You can connect your machine to a PC using a USB cable or make a wireless connection (via radio) with a PC or network. If you have a WLAN adaptor, you can incorporate your machine as a network printer into a radio network. Type of radio network A radio network or WLAN (Wireless Local Area Network) is created when at least two computers, printers or other peripheral devices communicate with each other in a network via radio waves (high frequency waves). The transmission of data in the radio network is based on the standards 802.11b and 802.11g. According to how the network is set up, it may be described as an infrastructure network or an ad-hoc network. Radio infrastructure network In an infrastructure network, several devices communicate via a central access point (a gateway or router). All data is sent to the access point (gateway or router) from where it is re-distributed. Radio ad-hoc network In an ad-hoc network, the devices communicate directly with each other without passing through an access point. The speed of communication across the whole radio network is as fast as the weakest connection in the network. The speed of communication is also dependent on spatial distance between transmitter and receiver, as well as the number of barriers, such as walls or ceilings. Radio networks (WLAN) Three steps are necessary to incorprate your machine into a radio network (WLAN): 1 Configure the network to your PC. 2 Set up the parameters for your machine so that it can function in a network. 3 Having set up the parameters your device, install the Companion Suite LL software onto your PC with the necessary printer drivers. Connect your WLAN adaptor Your machine belongs to a new generation of terminals that you can incorporate into a WLAN network using a WLAN USB key. Beware, when you are using a wireless connection, that certain items of medical equipment, sensitive or security systems may be affected by the radio transmissions of your device; in all cases, please follow safety guidelines closely. The PC and all other devices must have their parameters set up to the same network as the multifunction machine. All the details needed for setting up the device, such as the network names (SSID), type of radio network, WEP key, IP address or subnetwork mask, must match the specifications of the network. You will find these details on your PC or on the Access Point. To find out how to set up the parameters for your PC, please consult the users’ manual for your WLAN adaptor. For large networks, please seek the advice of your network administrator. - 37 - 9 - WLAN network 1 Plug your WLAN USB key into the USB port of your machine. Configure your network Creating or rejoining a network Before attempting to use a WLAN adaptor on your machine, you must enter the parameters that will allow a WLAN network to recognise your machine. On your machine you will find simple instructions that guide you step by step through the set-up of your network. Just follow them! 􀀙 281 - SETUP / WLAN / CONFIG. ASS. 1 Type in 􀀙, select the menu SETUP using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 2 Select WLAN using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 3 Select CONFIG. ASS. using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 4 Select NEW NETWORK using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 5 SSID appears on the screen, enter the name of your network using the numerical keypad, pressing the keys one after the other until you obtain the name you want (32 characters maximum) and confirm with OK. 6 AD-HOC MODE or INFRA. MODE appear on the screen. Go back to the beginning of the chapter and make your choice. Select one of these modes and confirm with OK. - If you choose AD-HOC mode, the sub-menu CHANNEL appears, enter a figure between 1 and 13 and confirm with OK. 7 WITHOUT SECURITY or WITH SECURITY appear on the screen. Select the option you want and confirm with OK. - If you choose WITH SECURITY the sub-menu WEP KEY 1 appears, enter the key number (1 to 4 maximum) that you are using on your network. 8 IP CONF.: MANU or IP CONF.: AUTO appear on the screen. If you choose to set up the system manually, go to the next paragraph and enter the parameters IP ADDRESS, SUBNET MASK and GATEWAY. 9 At the end of this procedure, you return to the main menu of CONFIG. ASS. 10 Exit this menu by pressing the key. Referring to or changing your network parameters Each of the parameters of your network may be changed as your network develops. 􀀙 2822 - SETUP / WLAN / PARAMETERS / IP ADDRESS 1 Type in 􀀙, select the menu SETUP using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 2 Select WLAN using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 3 Select PARAMETERS using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 4 Select IP ADDRESS using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. Your machine’s network radio adaptor transmits data using the radio protocol IEEE 802.11g; it can also be incorporated into an existing IEEE 802.11b network. When connecting to your machine, only use the approved adaptor. Other transmitting or receiving adaptors may damage your device. Irrespective of whether you use your machine in an infrastructure or ad-hoc network, you must set up certain network and security parameters (for example, the Service-Set-ID (SSID) and the WEP key). These must match the network’s specifications. We recommend that the settings of your WLAN network should only be changed by a person with a good knowledge of the configuration of your computer. If you choose and exisiting network, steps 5 and 6 ( and possibly 7) are carried out automatically. The WEP key number may be configured in the menu: 􀀙 29 - SETUP / TECHNICALS / WEP KEYS NBR - 38 - 8 - WLAN network 5 The dumber of your IP address will appear in the format 000.000.000.000. Enter the new IP address for your machine in the format displayed and confirm with OK. 6 Exit this menu by pressing the key. 􀀙 2823 - SETUP / WLAN / PARAMETERS / SUBNET MASK 1 Type in 􀀙, select the menu SETUP using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 2 Select WLAN using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 3 Select PARAMETERS using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 4 Select SUBNET MASK using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 5 The number of your subnet mask will appear in the format 000.000.000.000. Enter the new submask of your machine in the format displayed and confirm with OK. 6 Exit this menu by pressing the key. 􀀙 2824 - SETUP / WLAN / PARAMETERS / GATEWAY 1 Type in 􀀙, select the menu SETUP using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 2 Select WLAN using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 3 Select PARAMETERS using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 4 Select GATEWAY using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 5 The number of your gateway will appear in the format 000.000.000.000. Enter the new gateway for your machine in the format displayed and confirm with OK. 6 Exit this menu by pressing the key. 􀀙 2825 - SETUP /WLAN / PARAMETERS / SSID 1 Type in 􀀙, select the menu SETUP using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 2 Select WLAN using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 3 Select PARAMETERS using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 4 Select SSID using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 5 The name of your network will appear on the screen. Enter the new name of your network and confirm with OK. 6 Exit this menu by pressing the key. 􀀙 2826 - SETUP / WLAN / PARAMETERS / MODE 1 Type in 􀀙, select the menu SETUP using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 2 Select WLAN using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 3 Select PARAMETERS using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 4 Select MODE using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 5 The symbol >>, tells you that your network is in active mode. 6 Select one of the modes and confirm with OK. - If you choose the AD-HOC MODE, the submenu CHANNEL will appear; enter a number between 1 and 13 and confirm with OK. 7 Exit this menu by pressing the key. 􀀙 2827 - SETUP / WLAN / PARAMETERS / SECURITY This parameter allows you to make your network secure. 1 Type in 􀀙, select the menu SETUP using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 2 Select WLAN using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 3 Select PARAMETERS using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 4 Select SECURITY using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 5 Choose WITH or WITHOUT and confirm by OK. If you choose WITH, enter a password: - In a 64 bit security configuration, the password must contain five characters exactly. - In a 128 bit security configuration, the password must contain 13 characters exactly. 6 Exit this menu by pressing the key. 􀀙 2828 - SETUP / WLAN / PARAMETERS / HOSTNAME In an AD-HOC network, the devices communicate directly with each other without passing through an access point. The speed of communication across the whole AD-HOC radio network is as fast as the weakest connection in the network. The speed of communication is also dependent on spatial distance between transmitter and receiver, as well as the number of barriers, such as walls or ceilings. You may also enter the password using the hexadecimal system, if this is the case: - For a 64 bit security configuration, the password must contain exactly 10 hexadecimal characters. - For a 128 bit security configuration, the password must contain exactly 26 hexadecimal characters. - 39 - 9 - WLAN network The machine name allows you to identify your machine on the network via a PC (for example with the name "PRINTNETWORK- 1"). 1 Type in 􀀙, select the menu SETUP using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 2 Select WLAN using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 3 Select PARAMETERS using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 4 Select HOSTNAME using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 5 Type in the desired name (15 characters maximum) and confirm with OK. 6 Exit this menu by pressing the key. Once your connection has been set up, you must install the network printer driver "Laser Pro LL Network" on your PC so that you can print your documents. Refer to the paragraph Network connection, page 48. An example of how an AD-HOC network may be set up An example of how to configure an Ad-hoc network without security protection using the following parameters: • network name: "house" • radio type: "ad-hoc" • channel: "1" • PC’s IP address: "169.254.0.1" • PC’s subnetwork mask: "255.255.0.0" • PC’s gateway: "0.0.0.0" • IP address of the multifunction machine: "169.254.0.2" • subnetwork mask of the multifunction machine: "255.255.0.0" • multifunction machine’s gateway: "0.0.0.0" Setting up a multifunction machine 1 Plug the WLAN USB key into the USB connector of the multifunction machine. 2 Type in 􀀙, select the menu SETUP using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 3 Select WLAN using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 4 Select CONFIG. ASS. using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 5 Select NEW NETWORK using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 6 SSID appears on the screen, enter "house" using the numerical keypad and confirm with OK. 7 Select the mode AD-HOC MODE and confirm with OK. 8 Enter "1" in the field CHANNEL and confirm with OK. 9 Select WITHOUT SECURITY and confirm with OK. 10 Select IP CONF.: MANU and confirm with OK. 11 Enter "169.254.0.2" in the field IP ADDRESS and confirm with OK. 12 Enter "255.255.0.0" in the field SUBNET MASK and confirm with OK. 13 Enter "0.0.0.0" in the field GATEWAY and confirm with OK. 14 At the end of this process, you return to the main menu of ASS. CONFIG. 15 Exit this menu by pressing the key. Once the network has been set up, the LED of the WLAN USB key should be on. You must now set up the PC. Setting up the PC For this section, refer to the instructions supplied by the manufacturer of the WLAN USB key to help you to find and join the "house" network. 1 You may need to install the software for the WLAN USB key on the PC, if this has not already been done. 2 Plug WLAN USB key into a USB port on the PC. 3 Use the software of the WLAN USB key to detect the network. 4 Join the network "house" once this has been detected. 5 Now set up the WLAN network connection of your PC. To do this, you must configure the element Protocol Internet (TCP/IP) for the WLAN connection that has been created. If this element is set up in such a way as to obtain an IP address automatically, you must change it to manual mode to set up the TCP/IP address ("169.254.0.1" in our example), the subnet mask ("255.255.0.0" in our example) and the default gateway ("0.0.0.0" in our example). 6 Enter OK. To guide you through this stage, refer to the paragraph “Setting the parameters for a connection” in the manufacturer’s instructions. - 40 - 10 - Message service (model network) Message service (model network) Your terminal lets you send and receive emails via your local network. To do so, you must connect your terminal to a local network. You must also configure the message service settings. Information required to set up message service Your network administrator must provide you the following elements: • message service identifier • message service password • email address • servers’identifiers (SMTP, POP, DNS1 and DNS2) Configuring initialisation parameters 􀀙91 - E-MAIL / SUPPLIER 1 Select the LOCAL NETWORK from the list and confirm with OK. 􀀙921 - E-MAIL / INIT ETHERNET / MESS. SERV 1 Enter Email Identifier, press OK. 2 Enter Email Password, press OK. 3 Enter E-mail Adr, press OK. Access to servers parameters 􀀙922 - E-MAIL / INIT ETHERNET / SERVERS 1 Enter Smtp, press OK. 2 Enter Pop3, press OK. 3 Enter Dns 1 (primary), press OK. 4 Enter Dns 2 (secondary), press OK. Access to SMTP authentification parameters 􀀙923- E-MAIL / INIT ETHERNET / SMTP AUTHENT. 1 In the ACTIVATION menu, select WITH to activate SMTP authentification then validate with OK key. 2 In the SETTINGS menu, select ID.MESS.SERV to keep the same identification parameters as in the messaging service or AUTHENT. SPEC. to define other identification parameters, then validate by pressing OK key. 3 When you select AUTHENT. SPEC, carry out the two following operations: 4 Enter the IDENTIFIER then validate with OK key. 5 Enter the PASSWORD then validate with OK key. Sending an E-Mail 1 Place the document to be copied in the automatic document feeder, face printed on the top. or Place the document to be copied face down on the glass, respecting the indications around the glass. 2 Enter the addressee’s E-mail address or choose your dialling mode. 3 Enter the address of who you want to receive a copy of the document (CC:), and press OK to confirm. 4 Enter the object for mail (80 characters max.) and press OK. 5 Enter the text with the alphabetical keypad (100 lines of 80 characters) and confirm with OK. To go to the next line, use key . 6 Press OK to confirm. 7 Select B&W SCAN to send a black and white document or COLOUR SCAN to send a color document, and validate with OK key (this setting can be changed at any time during the send procedure, using the colour key). 8 Enter the name of the attachment and validate with OK key. 9 If necessary, change the attachment format: PDF or IMAGE and validate with OK key. 10 If you have started to scan with the flat scanner, the unit will scan the other pages. Put your second page to scan, select NEXT and validate with OK. 11 Press OK to confirm. 12 Set contrast and resolution if necessary. The document is scanned and the mail sent to memory. It will be sent during the next connection to the local network. Sending an E-mail text You can send a typed message to an E-mail mailbox. Access through the menu. : 􀀙95 - E-MAIL /SEND EMAIL 1 Enter the addressee’s E-mail address or choose your dialling mode. 2 Enter the address of who you want to receive a copy of the document (CC:), and press OK to confirm. 3 Enter the object for mail (80 characters max.) and press OK. 4 Enter the text with the alphabetical keypad (100 lines of 80 characters) and confirm with OK. To go to the next line, use key . Choosing No Access disables access to local network functions. - 41 - 10 - Message service (model network) 5 Press OK to confirm. The mail is memorised and will be sent at the next connection to the local network. Scan to FTP The scan to FTP function enables you to put your TIFF, JPEG and PDF files in an FTP server, for example, for archiving. To connect to the FTP server, you must know the name of the FTP user and the PASSWORD. When sending files, the machine connects to the FTP server using the defined connection parameters. Simply put the file in an FTP server 1 Place the document to be copied in the automatic document feeder, face printed on the top. or Place the document to be copied face down on the glass, respecting the indications around the glass. 2 Press key SCAN. A choice screen is displayed. 3 Select Scan to FTP with keys 􀀘 or 􀀙 then press OK key OK. 4 Enter the FTP address of the server or select it from the directory by pressing the key. 5 Enter the name of the FTP user (operation prohibited when the address is in the directory). 6 Enter the password of the FTP user (operation not necessary when the address is selected in the directory). 7 Validate with OK key. 8 Select B&W SCAN to send a document in black and white or COLOUR SCAN to send a document in colour. Validate with OK key (this setting may be changed at any time during the send procedure with the colour key). 9 Enter the name of the attachment and validate with OK key. 10 If necessary, change the attachment format: PDF or IMAGE and validate with OK key. If you have started to scan with the flat scanner, the unit will scan the other pages. Put your second page to scan, select NEXT and validate with OK. Connection configuration The settings are divided into several categories: • the standard settings define the connection type and frequency to the local network as well as the transmission type for your documents, • the E-mail sorting defines treatment for all stored Email messages received. Standard settings Your machine has two types of settings that let you define: • The type and frequency of the connection to your ISP. • Type of transmission over the Internet. At any moment you may print the settings of your machine to know their status. Selecting the connection type 􀀙941 - E-MAIL / SETTINGS / CONNEC. TYPE 1 Select one of the connection options among Set Times, Periodic or On Demand and press OK to confirm. Selecting the transmission type 􀀙942 - E-MAIL / SETTINGS / SEND TYPE 1 Select one of the send options Immediate or During cnx then press OK to validate. Modifying the connection period (Periodic type) 􀀙943 - E-MAIL / SETTINGS / PERIOD 1 With the Periodic mode, enter the new connection period by means of the numerical keypad (between 00:01 am and 11:59 pm) and press OK to confirm. A local network connection will be established every three hours (default value). SET TIMES an Internet connection is established every day at 9:00 am, 12:30 am and 5:00 pma. a. To avoid Internet access saturation, the automatic connection will occur in reality 12 minutes, give or take, around the requested time. PERIODIC an Internet connection is established every 3 hours1 (default value). ON DEMAND an Internet connection is established at your request by IMMED. ACCESS. IMMEDIATE document transmission will occur immediately at each transmission request. DURING CONNECTIONS transmissions will only occur at programmed connections of SET TIMES or PERIODIC TYPE. - 42 - 10 - Message service (model network) Modifying the connection time(s) (Set Times type) 􀀙943 - E-MAIL / SETTINGS / TIME STTINGS 1 After selecting the Set Times mode, use the 􀀘 and 􀀙 keys to place the cursor under the figure to be modified. Enter the new connection time(s) by means of the numeric keypad (value between 00:01 and 23:59) and validate with the OK key. Selecting the print mode for the deposit notice 􀀙944 - E-MAIL / SETTINGS / DEPOSIT NOTICE 1 Select one of the deposit notice options With, Without, Always or On Error and press OK to confirm. Printing the Internet settings 􀀙946 - E-MAIL / SETTINGS / PRINT The Internet settings are printed. These settings may also be printed together with all the other settings of your machine (refer to paragraph Printing the logs, page 30). Mail sorting This function lets you choose the mode for all Internet documents stored in your mail box. You have three choices:. Vous avez le choix entre trois possibilités : • F@x only, lets you poll and print E-Mails in your machine. • PC only, lets you keep your E-Mails in you mailbox for later use with a computer (no E-Mail poll), • PC share lets you: - if your PC and fax have two different addresses, transfer all mails or only those with attachments to a PC, - if your PC and fax share the same address, use the fax as a printer for E-Mails for the PC. 􀀙 96 - E-MAIL / SORT MESSAGES F@X Only mode 1 Select option F@x only and press OK to confirm. All E-Mails are polled and printed. PC Only mode 1 Select option PC only and press OK to confirm. The E-mails are neither polled nor printed and they may be used with a computer. At each connection, the number of E-mails in your mailbox is displayed on the screen. PC share mode 1 Select option PC share and press OK to confirm. You may choose to transfer your E-mails to a PC or use the fax as an E-mail printer. To transfer the E-Mails to a PC: 2 Select option With PC Trans. and press OK to confirm. 3 Enter the E-Mail address of the computer you wish to transfer your E-Mail and press OK to confirm. 4 Select your option from the table below and press OK to confirm. To use the fax as an E-Mail printer: 1 Select option W/O PC Trans and press OK to confirm. 2 Select your option from the table below and validate with OK. At each connection, the number of E-mails still present in your mailbox are displayed on the screen. Menu Description SEND ALL MAILS All E-Mails are sent to the PC. UNUSABLE ATTAC The fax machine polls and prints the usable E-mails and transfers to the PC mailbox all the E-mails containing attachments it cannot use. Menu Description DELETE MAILS The E-mails opened and read by the fax (w/o attachment) are erased after the fax has printed. SAVE MAILS The E-mails opened and read by the fax are not erased. - 43 - 11 - USB memory key USB memory key You can connect a USB memory Key on the front side of your machine. The files stored in TXT, TIFF and JPEG formats will be analysed and you will be able to use the following actions: - print the stored files contained in your USB memory key1, - delete the files contained in your USB memory key, - run an analysis on the contents of the inserted USB memory key, - digitalise a document on your USB memory key, - fax archiving (see section Rerouting fax messages to a USB memory key, page 20). Use of the USB memory key Print your documents You can print the stored files or a list of the files located in the USB memory key. Print the list of files located in the key To print the list of files located in the key: 􀀙 01 - MEDIA / PRINT DOC. / LIST 1 Insert the USB memory key on the front side of the machine respecting theinsertion way. MEDIA ANALYSIS appears on the screen. 2 Select PRINT DOC. with the 􀀙 or 􀀘 buttons and confirm with OK. 3 Select LIST with the 􀀙 or 􀀘 buttons and confirm with OK. 4 The list is shown in a table with the following information: - the analyzed files are indexed in an incremental 1 by 1 order, - the files name with their extension, - the date of the files last save, - the files size in Kbytes. Print the files located in the key To print the files located in the key: 􀀙 01 - MEDIA / PRINT DOC. / FILE 1 Insert the USB memory key on the front side of the machine respecting the way of insertion. MEDIA ANALYSIS appears on the screen. 2 Select PRINT DOC. with the 􀀙 or 􀀘 buttons and confirm with OK. 3 Select FILE with the 􀀙 or 􀀘 buttons and confirm with OK. 4 You have three possibilities to print your files: - ALL, to print all the files located in the USB memory key. Select ALL with the 􀀙 or 􀀘 buttons and confirm with OK. The printing is started automatically. - SERIES, to print a series of files located in the USB memory key. Select SERIES with the 􀀙 or 􀀘 buttons and confirm with OK. FIRST FILE and the first indexed file appears on the screen. Select with the 􀀙 or 􀀘 buttons the first file of the series to print and confirm with OK. A star (􀃄) appears on the left side of the file. LAST FILE appears on the screen. Select with the 􀀙 or 􀀘 buttons the last file of the series to print and confirm with OK. Press the button. COPIES NUMBER appears on the screen, enter the desired number of copies with the digital keypad and confirm with OK. Select the printing format: A4 or 10x15 and confirm with OK. Select the printing format: THICK or NORMAL and confirm with OK to start printing. 1. It may be possible that some TIFF files of your USB memory key cannot be printed due to data format limitation. Always respect the insertion way when you connect a USB memory key to the machine. Do not disconnect your USB memory key while the machine is reading its contents or writing contents. The printing is not possible on A5 paper format. - 44 - 11 - USB memory key - SELECTION, to print one or several files located in the USB memory key. Select with the 􀀙 or 􀀘 buttons the file to print and confirm with OK. A star (􀃄) appears on the left side of the file. Repeat this step for each file you want to print. Press the button. COPIES NUMBER appears on the screen, enter the desired number of copies with the digital keypad and confirm with OK. Select the printing format: A4 or 10x15 and confirm with OK. Select the printing format: THICK or NORMAL and confirm with OK to start printing. 5 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Delete your files located in the key You can delete files located in your USB memory key. 􀀙 06 - MEDIA / DELETE / MANUAL 1 Insert your USB memory key on the front side of your machine respecting the way of insertion. MEDIA ANALYSIS appears on the screen. 2 Select DELETE with the 􀀙 or 􀀘 buttons and confirm with OK. 3 Select MANUAL with the 􀀙 or 􀀘 buttons and confirm with OK. 4 You have three possibilities to delete your files: - ALL, to delete all the files located in the USB memory key. Select ALL with the 􀀙 or 􀀘 buttons and confirm with OK. You come back to the previous menu. - SERIE, to delete a series of files located in the USB memory key. Select SERIE with the 􀀙 or 􀀘 buttons and confirm with OK. FIRST FILE and the first indexed file appears on the screen. Select with the 􀀙 or 􀀘 buttons the first file of the series to delete and confirm with OK. A star (􀃄) appears on the left of the file. LAST FILE appears on the screen, select with the 􀀙 or 􀀘 buttons the last file of teh series to delete and confirm with OK. A star (􀃄) appears on the left side of the file. Press the button. You come back to the previous menu. - SELECTION, to delete only one or several files located in the USB memory key. Select with the 􀀙 or 􀀘 buttons the file to delete and confirm with OK. A star (􀃄) appears on the left side of the file. Repeat this step for each file you want to delete. Press the button. You come back to the previous menu. 5 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Analyse the USB memory key content After a period of inactivity, your machine will return to the main menu. To view the USB memory key again please proceed as follows: 􀀙 07 - MEDIA / MEDIA ANALYSIS 1 Press on 􀀙, enter 07 with the keyboard. 2 The USB memory key analysis is started. 3 You can print or delete the detected files located in your USB memory key. Refer to the previous chapters. Save a document on a USB memory key This function allows you to digitise and save a document directly in the folder SCAN on a USB memory key. The folder SCAN is created by the application. 1 Place the document to be copied face down on the glass. 2 Insert the USB memory key in the USB connector of your multifunction device. The USB memory key analysis is started. When the analysis is finished, the MEDIA menu is displayed. 3 Select SCAN TO with the 􀀘 or 􀀙 buttons then confirm with the OK button. Before digitalising a document, make sure that your USB memory key has sufficient disk space. If not, you can: • delete manually the files, see section Delete your files located in the key, page 44, or • activate the option that deletes automatically the oldest files located in the SCAN folder, see section Activate/ deactivate file automatic deletion on a USB memory key, page 45. - 45 - 11 - USB memory key 4 Choose the COLOUR between BLACK&WHITE and COLOUR with the 􀀘 or 􀀙 buttons and the button OK. 5 With the alphanumeric keyboard, give a name to the scan file (up to 20 characters) and confirm with OK. 6 Choose the scan format between IMAGE and PDF, and confirm to start the scan and the recording of the document. IMAGE allows to have the same kind of file as a photo. PDF is a format for the digital documents creation. The beginning button immediately starts the scan and sends a file to the support with the parameters defined in the analysis format. Activate/deactivate file automatic deletion on a USB memory key This option, when activated, deletes automatically the oldest files in the folder SCAN on the USB memory key, in order to save a new digitalised document when the disk space is insufficient. To activate this option, proceed as follows : 􀀙 0621 - MEDIA / DELETE / AUTOMATIC/ SCAN MODE 1 Select WITH with the 􀀘 or 􀀙 buttons then confirm with the OK button. To deactivate this option, proceed as follows : 􀀙 0621 - MEDIA / DELETE / AUTOMATIC/ SCAN MODE 1 Select WITHOUT with the 􀀘 or 􀀙 buttons then confirm with the OK button. You can also access this function in two other ways: • by pressing the SCAN button of the machine deck then by selecting SCAN-TOMEDIA. • By pressing the 􀀙 button from the screen saver then by typing 03 on the digital keyboard. With the IMAGE format, if you have selected: • BLACK&WHITE, the picture will be saved in TIFF format. • COLOUR, the picture will be saved in JPEG format. You can choose the image resolution that will be digitized to the USB memory key; the default resolution is DRAFT. Press the button several times and select the resolution you require • Scanning in BLACK&WHITE : - Icon: text resolution. - Icon: photo resolution. - Icon: auto resolution. • Scanning in COLOUR : - Icon: text resolution. - Icon: auto resolution. This option is ineffective when the SCAN folder is empty and the USB memory key is full. You must then delete manually the files in order to free up disk space, see section Delete your files located in the key, page 44. - 46 - 11 - PC Features PC Features Introduction The Companion Suite Pro software allows the connection of a personal computer with a compatible multifunction machine. From the PC, you can: - manage the multifunction machine, allowing you to set it up according to your needs, - print your documents on the multifunction machine from your usual applications, - scan colour, grey scale or black and white documents and edit them on your PC, or process them into text using the character recognition software (OCR), Configuration requirements The minimum configuration requirements for your personal computer are: Supported operation systems: - Windows 98SE, - Windows Millennium, - Windows 2000 with at least Service Pack 3, - Windows XP (Home and Pro), - Windows Vista 32-bit. Processor: - 500 MHz for Windows 98SE, - 800 MHz for Windows Me or 2000, - 1 GHz for Windows XP (Home and Pro), - 1 GHz for Windows Vista 32-bit. A CD-ROM drive A free USB port 600 Mbytes of available disk space for the installation RAM memory: - 128 Mbytes minimum for Windows 98, Me, and 2000, - 192 Mbytes minimum for Windows XP (Home and Pro). - 1 GByte for Windows Vista 32-bit. Installation Install the software on your PC Turn your PC on. Open an ADMINISTRATOR account session unless working in 98SE and ME environments. 1 Open the CD-ROM drive, insert the installation CDROM and close the drive. 2 An installation procedure is automatically run (Auto run). 3 A screen titled COMPANION SUITE PRO LL appears. This screen allows you to install and uninstall the software, access the product's user guides or browse the CD-ROM contents. 4 Place your cursor on PRODUCT INSTALLATION and confirm with left-click of the mouse. 5 The Products Installation screen appears. Place your cursor on FULL and confirm by left-click with the mouse. The multifonction machine components only appear if your Windows Installer version is older than 2.0. The installation resumes, a progress bar appears. You can stop the program's installation by clicking on the STOP THE INSTALL button. After search and analysis of the PC components and the multifunction machine's components, you need to restart your PC for the modifications to take effect. Click on the OK button. The FULL installation copies on your hard disk the software required for the good execution of the Companion Suite Pro kit, which is: - Companion Suite Pro (machine management software, printer drivers, scanner, ...), - Adobe Acrobat Reader, - PaperPort (OS > Windows 2000). You may already be the owner of a version of the software available in the installation CDROM. In this case use the CUSTOM installation, select the software that you want to install on your hard drive and confirm your choice. - 47 - 11 - PC Features 6 After restart, the InstallShield Wizard screen shows the progress of the assistant preparation. You can stop the procedure at any time by clicking on the CANCEL button. 7 The welcome screen appears. 8 Click on the NEXT button to launch the installation of the COMPANION SUITE PRO kit on your PC. 9 To continue, you need to accept the proposed license agreement. 10 Click on the YES button. 11 Click on the NEXT button. 12 The final installation is ready to be executed. 13 Click on the INSTALL button. 14 A screen informs you of the installation progress. 15 The Companion Suite Pro software is installed on your PC. 16 Click on the CONTINUE button to copy the utilities and PaperPort SE software that come along with the kit. 17 At the end of the installation, you need to restart your PC to update the system files. - 48 - 11 - PC Features 18 Select your choice and click on the FINISH button. 19 Your "Companion Suite Pro" kit is successfully installed on your PC. You can start the multifunction machine's management software from the menu START > PROGRAMS > COMPANION SUITE > COMPANION SUITE PRO LL > MF DIRECTOR or by clicking on the icon MF DIRECTOR located on your desktop. Connections Make sure that your multifunction machine is powered off. USB Connection The connection between the PC and the machine requires a USB 2.0 shielded cable no more than 3 meters long. 1 Locate your USB cable connectors and connect as shown below on the picture. 2 Power on your multifunction machine. The ADD HARDWARE assistant window appears. 3 Click on the NEXT button to finish the installation. 4 Select FIND THE APPROPRIATE DRIVER FOR MY HARDWARE (RECOMMENDED). Click on the NEXT button. 5 Select the location where the system has to look for the driver. Only the CD-ROM DRIVES checkbox has to be ticked. Click on the NEXT button. The search takes a few moments. 6 A window informs you that the driver has been located. Click on the NEXT button. 7 A screen informs you that the XML interface software has been installed. Click on the FINISH button. The ADD HARDWARE assistant window appears. 8 Click on the NEXT button. 9 Select FIND THE APPROPRIATE DRIVER FOR MY HARDWARE (RECOMMENDED). Click on the NEXT button. 10 Select the location where the system shall look for the driver. Only the CD-ROM DRIVES checkbox has to be ticked. Click on the NEXT button. The search takes a few moments. 11 A window informs that the driver has been located. Click on the NEXT button. 12 A screen informs you that the COMPANION SUITE PRO F@X ACTIVITIES software has been installed. Click on the FINISH button. You can now use the multifunction machine to print or scan your documents. Network connection You may connect your multifunction terminal to an Ethernet or a wireless network (model network only). 1 Run the MF Director application by clicking on the icon located on your desktop or from the menu START > PROGRAMS > COMPANION SUITE > COMPANION SUITE PRO LL > ADD PRINTER. 2 Click on the NEXT button to run the installation procedure. It is possible to add LAN printers without installing the Companion Suite Pro software on Windows 2000, XP, and Vista. From the Windows menu Start > Parameters > Printers and faxes, select "Add Printer" and follow the instructions on screen. It is recommended to install the Companion Suite Pro software first and then to connect the USB cable to your machine. If you connect the USB cable before installing the Companion Suite Pro software the recognition system (plug and play) identifies automatically that new hardware has been added. To start your machine drivers installation, follow the instructions on screen. If a window asking about the location of the drivers pops up, then indicate the installation CD-ROM. 0 The Companion Suite Pro LL software shall be installed to perform this operation. - 49 - 11 - PC Features 3 The next screen shows the list of compatible hardware found on the network. You can make another search on the network by clicking on the REFRESH button. Remark: A hardware device may not appear in the list in which case click on the NOT IN THE LIST button. The next window appears. Type the IP address or the NetBIOS name of the hardware that you wish to add. You can test the connection between the PC and the hardware by clicking on the TEST button. Click on the OK button. 4 Select what you wish to add from the hardware list. Click on the NEXT button. 5 For the model network, with a LAN connection, you must choose one printer among the list. Nota: the PCL printer is more fast in the most case. 6 The next window lists the different features of the printer that are about to be installed. Click on the NEXT button. 7 The window indicating that the installation procedure was successful pops up. Click on the FINISH button. Uninstall the software from your PC Run the programs removal from the menu START > PROGRAMS > COMPANION SUITE > COMPANION SUITE PRO LL > UNINSTALL. 1 A preparation screen appears. 2 Select REMOVE and confirm your choice by clicking on the NEXT button. 3 A confirmation screen appears. Click on OK button to continue the COMPANION SUITE PRO LL program removal. 4 A preparation screen appears. You can cancel the removal by clicking on CANCEL. - 50 - 11 - PC Features 5 You need to restart your system at the end of the procedure. Close all open programs, select YES, I WANT TO RESTART MY COMPUTER NOW and click on the FINISH button. Multifunction Terminal's Supervision The software that you have installed contains two multifunction machine management applications, MF DIRECTOR and MF MONITOR, which allow you to: - check whether the multifunction machine is connected to your PC, - monitor the multifunction machine activitie, - monitor the status of the multifunction machine consumables from the PC, - quickly access the graphic editor applications, OCR etc. To manage the multifunction machine, run the MF Director application by clicking on the icon located on your desktop or from the menu START > PROGRAMS > COMPANION SUITE > COMPANION SUITE PRO LL > MF DIRECTOR. Checking the connection between the PC and the multifunction machine To check if the connection between the devices is good, run the MF MONITOR software from the icon located on the desktop and check that the same information is displayed on the multifunction machine (for instance the date). MF Director This graphical Interface allows you to run the utilities and the software to manage your multifunction machine. Graphical presentation Run the application by clicking on the MF Director icon located on your desktop or from the menu START > PROGRAMS > COMPANION SUITE > COMPANION SUITE PRO LL > MF DIRECTOR. By default, MF DIRECTOR is displayed with dark blue rounded shape. You can modify its shape and color by right-clicking with the mouse. Utilities and applications activation The COMPANION SUITE PRO graphical interface allows you to run the following utilities and software: - get HELP from the current documentation, - run the PaperPort software (Doc Manager). To run a software or utility contained in the COMPANION SUITE PRO kit, place the cursor on it and left-click with the mouse. - 51 - 11 - PC Features MF Monitor Graphical presentation Run the application by clicking on the MF Monitor icon located on your desktop or from the menu START > PROGRAMS > COMPANION SUITE > COMPANION SUITE PRO LL > COMPANION MONITOR. From this screen you can monitor the information or configure your multifunction machine from the tabs: - COMPANION: Presents the multifunction machine screen. - CONSUMABLES: Displays the consumables status. - SCAN TO: Scan Mode and Resolution parameters setup, these parameters will be taken into account when clicking on the SCAN button from the machine. Display the consumable status The following information will be available from the Consumables tab: - current consumables status, - number of printed pages, - number of scanned pages. Scan To The setup of this tab, becomes the default setup for the scanner. Remark: The function SCAN TO can only be used if the application is running. If this is not the case, activate it. 1 Select the Scan To tab. 2 Select one of the possible choices: - colour, - grayscale, - black and white. 3 Select the scanner resolution (72 dpi to 4800 dpi). 4 Confirm your choices by clicking on the OK button. Companion Suite Pro LL functionalities Document analysis The document analysis can be carried out in two ways: • either by the SCAN TO function (application accessible from the MF Director window or from the SCAN button from the machine), • or directly from a TWAIN standard compatible application. - 52 - 11 - PC Features Analysis with Scan To Run the application by clicking on the MF Director icon located on your desktop or from the menu START > PROGRAMS > COMPANION SUITE > COMPANION SUITE PRO LL > MF DIRECTOR. 1 Left-click with the mouse on the SCAN TO graphical image or click the SCAN button from your machine. 2 You can follow the ongoing digitisation on a screen. 3 At the end of the digitisation, the scanned picture appears in the PaperPort window. Analysis from a TWAIN compatible software 1 Run the picture editor application and then run the acquisition command. The document analysis window appears. 2 Setup the parameters (contrast, resolution, ...) before starting the digitisation. 3 Once the document is digitised, you can archive it or edit it. Character recognition software (OCR) The character recognition function allows to create a usable data file for desktop applications from a hardcopy document or from a picture. The character recognition only works for printed characters, such as printer outputs or typed text. Nevertheless you can request for a handwritten text block to be kept intact (a signature for instance) by outlining it. Given your machine environment and the character recognition from your machine, the OCR is done with a Drag&drop of a document from the PaperPort to the Notepad icon. Printing You have the possibility to print your documents via the USB connection or the Wifi connection. During the installation of the software, the LASER PRO LL printer driver will be installed automatically onto your pc. This will allow you to print your documents on the machine via the USB connection. The LASER PRO LL NETWORK printer driver allows to print via the wireless connection. This driver is installed when you add a network printer. Printing with the multifunction machine To print a document with the machine from your PC is like printing a document in Windows (use the PRINT command from the FILE menu of the currently open application on the screen). Select the LASER PRO LL printer to print via the USB connection or the LASER PRO LL NETWORK printer to print via the Wifi connection. If the PaperPort software is not installed on your hard drive, the scanned picture will appear on your desktop in TIFF format. For more details about the usage of this software, check the on-line help of the product. The LASER PRO LL printer becomes the default printer when the Companion Suite Pro software is installed. - 53 - 11 - PC Features Address book The address book enables you to store the numbers of the contacts you call the most frequently. The purpose of this function is to facilitate dialing your contact’s number when you want to send an SMS or fax. If you want, you can print the list of numbers stored in the Directory. You also have the possibility of creating groups of contacts from the Address book. Like this, you can group together all contacts from, for example, a given company or the same service, etc, to which you frequently send common documents. Add a contact to the terminal address book 1 Click on the link ADDRESS BOOK of the window MF DIRECTOR. The address book is displayed on the screen. 2 Select the terminal address book. 3 Click on NEW and select CONTACT in the displayed menu. The input window for the contact data is displayed.. 4 Enter the contact name as well as the fax or GSM telephone number, the fax transmission rate with this person, the associated quick dial key, the E-mail address and the default transmission format (Pdf or Image). Click on OK. The new contact is added to the list. Add a group to the terminal address book 1 Click the link ADDRESS BOOK of the window MF DIRECTOR. 2 Select the terminal address book. 3 Click NEW and select GROUP in the displayed menu. 4 Enter the name of the group. The group may consist of contacts from the address book or new contacts. 1st case: group members are from the address book. Click SELECT THE MEMBERS. The selection window is displayed. Select a contact or a group in the zone ADDRESS BOOK, click on (to add a contact to the group you can also double click on it). Click on OK. 2nd case: adding new contacts. Click on NEW then add the personal data of the new contact, as in the procedure for adding a contact. 5 As soon as the group is complete, click on OK. The new group is added to the list. - 54 - 11 - PC Features Manage the address book When you are working in the directory, you can perform different operations: - print a list of contacts in your address book, - delete a contact or a group in your address book, - search for a contact or a group of contacts in the address book using the first letters of the name, - check the datasheet of a contact or a group in order to modify it. Modify the information related to a contact 1 Select the contact whose data you want to modify, using the mouse. 2 Click on PROPERTIES. 3 Make the necessary changes in the window ADDRESS BOOK. 4 Click on OK. Modify a group 1 Select the group in the address book list. 2 Cllick on PROPERTIES. 3 Make the necessary changes. 4 Click on OK. Delete a contact or a group from the address book 1 Select the name of the contact or the name of the group you want to delete, using the mouse. 2 Click on DELETE. Print the address book 1 Click on PRINT. The list of the address book is printed on the terminal (if no contact is selected). Import or export a directory Import a directory Importing a directory makes it possible to exchange address book entries between two devices without having to enter contacts one by one manually. Directories can be imported from files in EAB format. EAB files are automatically generated during export. 1 Select IMPORT in the menu FILE of the window ADDRESS BOOK. 2 Select the file to import, click on OPEN. Save your address book This operation lets you save your address book to a file in EAB format. 1 Select EXPORT in the menu FILE of the window ADDRESS BOOK. 2 Enter the name of the file and select the destination directory, then click on SAVE. Fax communications The fax communication enables you to: - send documents as faxes from one of the scanners of your terminal, from the hard disk or from the screen of your PC, - to receive fax documents, - to monitor communications through various services: the inbox, the outbox, the sent items, the outbox log and the inbox log. Parameters are available to modify the way your terminal works with regard to fax communications. You can modify these parameters to adapt the fax communications to your requirements. For this procedure, refer to paragraph Fax parameters, page 57. Presentation of the Fax window When a contact is deleted from the directory, it is automatically deleted from any group in which it may be included. Item Action 1 Create a new fax to send. 2 Delete a fax using one of the fax manager directories. Except for directories SENT LOG and RECEPTION LOG for which the effect of this command is to delete the entire log 3 Print a fax from one of the Fax manager directories. 4 Display a fax with the Viewer. 5 Access to the address book. 123456789 - 55 - 11 - PC Features Send a fax Send a fax from the hard disk or the terminal 1 Click the icon of the window MF DIRECTOR. 2 Click NEW then click FAX. 3 Select no zone SOURCES, SCANNER if your document is in paper format or MEMORY if the document is a computer file located on your hard disk (this file must be in TIFF or FAX format). 4 To send your fax to a contact, enter his number in the field RECIPIENTS and click on or select a contact (or group) from one of the directories in the field ADDRESS BOOK and click on the button . Repeat this operation as many times as necessary (use the button to delete a contact from the list of contacts). 5 If necessary, adjust the advanced options (send later and resolution) in the tab ADVANCED OPTIONS. 6 To add a cover sheet, select the tab COVER PAGE then click the box WITH THE COVER PAGE. Select the cover sheet you want to add from the pop-down menu, or create a new one. For more information, refer to paragraph Cover sheet, page 58. 7 Click OK to send your fax to all contacts in your list of contacts. Your send request can then be checked, if necessary, in the outbox. Send a fax from application This method is used to directly send a document you have created using a desktop software without printing it beforehand. 1 From your desktop software, select FILE > PRINT. 2 Select the printer COMPANION SUITE FAX and click OK. The fax oubox window is displayed. 6 Stop sending a fax (only enabled for the outbox). 7 Display all faxes in the selected directory in the Fax manager. 8 Fax preview. 9 Fax manager directories. Item Action - 56 - 11 - PC Features 3 To send your fax to a contact, enter his number in the field RECIPIENTS and click the button or select a contact (or a group) from one of the directories in the field ADDRESS BOOK and click the button . Repeat this operation as many times as necessary (use the button Erase to delete a contact from the list of contacts). 4 If necessary, adjust the advanced options (send later and resolution) in the tab ADVANCED OPTIONS. 5 To add a cover sheet, select the tab COVER PAGE then click the box WITH THE COVER PAGE. Select the cover sheet you want to add from the pop-down menu, or create a new one. For more information, refer to paragraph Cover sheet, page 58. 6 Click OK to send your fax to all contacts in your list of contacts. 7 Your send request can then be checked, if necessary, in the outbox. Receive a fax The window MF Manager and MF Director show, using different messages, the reception of a fax. The icon is displayed at the bottom of the window MF Manager and the icon appears in the task bar. You can automatically print faxes on reception. To do this, you have to define this parameter, refer to paragraph Fax parameters, page 57. Follow-up of fax communications Follow-up of fax communications is by means of: - an outbox, - an inbox, - a sent item memory, - an outbox log, - an inbox log. These services enable you to always know exactly what communications are taking place on the terminal, whether sending or receiving. The outbox and inbox logs are automatically printed when their contents fill an A4 page. After automatic printout, the terminal creates a new log. The outbox In the fax outbox, there are the following: - the requests being sent, - the send later requests, - the requests for which one or more send attempts have already been made, and which will soon be redialed, - the rejected requests (calls not put through). The requests are classed in the order in which they are executed. The rejected requests are filed at the end of the list so that they are more accessible if you want to work with them (request a new send) or delete them. The send memory (items sent) The sent memory is used to keep all faxes you have sent. The information in the send memory is: - the recipient of the fax, - the date the fax was created, - the date the fax was sent, - the size of the fax. The outbox log The outbox log is used to keep a history of all fax communications (successful or rejected) that your Terminal processes. The log is printed automatically as soon as an A4 page is filled. The information held in the log is: - the recipient of the fax, - the date the fax was sent, - the status (sent, rejected ...). The button DELETE deletes the entire log, and not simply the selected message(s). - 57 - 11 - PC Features The inbox log The inbox log is used to keep a history of all faxes received by your Terminal. The log is printed automatically as soon as an A4 page is filled. The information held in the inbox log is: - the sender of the fax, - the date and reception of the fax, - the status. Fax parameters Access to fax parameters 1 Click on the icon of the window MF DIRECTOR. 2 Select TOOLS > OPTION > FAX. 3 Make the adjustments require, referring to the description of parameters below and click OK. Description of the tab LOG AND REPORT Description of the tab FAX PARAMETERS The button DELETE deletes the entire log, and not simply the selected message(s). Field Description Automatic printing of a received document The fax is automatically printed when received. Printing of a inbox report A report is printed out for each fax received. Printing of inbox log The log is automatically printed when it fills an A4 page. Automatic printing of a sent document The fax is automatically printed when it is sent. Printing of an outbox report An outbox report is printed after each fax is sent Printing of the outbox log The log is automatically printed when it fills an A4 page. Field Description Transmission speed Fax default transmission speed. Line number Number of the line where your terminal is connected. Dialling prefix This dialing prefix shall be automatically inserted in front of the number before sending on this line. Type of dialing Must be parametered according to the type of switchboard your terminal is connected to. Header Displays a Communication Identification Line (LIC) on the documents you send or on the documents you receive. ECM Corrects communication errors due to line disturbance. This option ensures that received documents are integral. On the other hand, communication times may be longer if the line is bad. Number of attempts Number of attempts the Terminal must make if send fails. Interval between attempts Duraton between two send attempts. - 58 - 11 - PC Features Cover sheet The cover sheet is part of a fax document automatically generated by your terminal, on which there is information concerning the sender, the recipient, the date, the time sent, comments, etc... This page may be sent alone or in front of a fax document, but always at the same time as the document. A document may be sent with a cover sheet from the multifunction terminal or from the central processing unit. In the latter case, some of the information in the cover sheet may be provided by yourself when making the send request. It is necessary to create model cover sheets before sending a document using them. On the other hand, once the cover sheet is created, a model cover sheet may be used for all documents sent. Your terminal offers the possibility of creating and customizing some model cover sheets which you can choose when sending a fax. Creating a cover sheet 1 From the tab COVER PAGE, click on the button NEW. 2 Select the model cover sheet you have created using the menu FILE. A window with the model cover sheet you have created is displayed: 3 Click on the icon to display the available fields. To add a field, proceed as follows: - Select the field you want to insert by clicking the field palette. A stamp replaces the cursor of your mouse. - Click the location where you want to put the field on the model. - You can move or enlarge the field as you like. 4 As soon as fields are inserted, save the cover sheet. This cover sheet can be selected in the tab COVER PAGE of the fax send window. It is necessary to create a model cover sheet before sending a fax with it. Adjust the size of your field so that the text is readable. - 59 - 11 - PC Features Description of the tab COVER PAGE Creating a cover page template Creating a cover page creates a template which fields (fax number, comment, subject and so on) will be automatically filled by the Fax Application depending on the information provided for each recipient of a document. To create this cover page template, there are two major steps: • First step : Create a background image with the logos and the layout that you wish. • Second step : Add the field that you want to be displayed in the cover page: fax number, comment, subject and so on. As mentioned before, these fields will be filled by Fax application at emission time. For the first step, there are two methods to create the background image. You can either • Option (A): Draw this background image in your preferred application (such as Word, Excel,...), OR • Option (B): Scan a sheet of paper containing the layout of the cover page. Details about Option A and B: • Option (A): Open the application that you want to use to edit the background (Word, Wordpad...). Draw the background image then print this document in the printer named "Companion Suite Fax". At that point the MFSendFax dialog is displayed: Add any recipient to the recipient list, click on the tab ADVANCED OPTIONS, select resolution FINE as shown below: Finally click on the button SAVE AS DRAFT in the lower right corner (this is the button with the floppy disk icon). The background image is created in the directory C:\Program Files\Companion Suite Pro LM\Documents\FAX\Temporary and has the file extension .fax Field Description Name of the cover sheet Either the name of the page selected by default or the page you have selected to use. Sender You can enter information concerning the sender. Destination: Name, Company, Department You can enter information concerning the recipient. If the word Auto is entered in one of the fields, the field is updated during sending if the recipient is listed in the directory, favorites, a group or a distribution list. Comments This is an editing window with all the basic functions of a text editor so that you can enter a text which will be sent in the cover sheet. Preview of the model The preview enables you to see the cover sheet you are going to send. - 60 - 11 - PC Features • Option (B): Launch MFMANAGER, select NEW FAX, select the scanner source as shown below : Add any recipient to the recipient list, click on the tab ADVANCED OPTIONS, select resolution FINE as shown below: Finally click on the button SAVE AS DRAFT in the lower right corner (this is the button with the floppy disk icon). The background image is created in the directory C:\Program Files\Companion Suite Pro LM\Documents\FAX\Temporary and has the file extension .fax. Whether you choose Option A or B, you end up with a background image with extension .fax, which is located in C:\Program Files\Companion Suite Pro LM\Documents\FAX\Temporary. You can now proceed to the second step right below. For the second step: Now that the background image is created in directory in C:\Program Files\Companion Suite Pro LM\Documents\FAX\Temporary, you can add the fields on top of the background image. Please follow the procedure below: (a)Launch MFMANAGER, select NEW FAX, click on the tab COVER PAGE, and check the check box named WITH THE COVER PAGE. (b)Click on the button NEW, this displays a new window with the title CREATION OF THE COVER PAGE. (c)Press the button OPEN in the toolbar, change the file filter to *.fax and browse to the directory C:\Program Files\Companion Suite Pro LM\Documents\FAX\Temporary that contains the background image that you have created in the First step. (d)Click on the button FIELDS in the toolbar, a window pops up allowing